Subscribe to the Bombay Chartered Accountant Journal Subscribe Now!

GAPs in GAAP

Accounting Standards

The implementation of IFRS required a well coordinated
approach among various regulators. Understanding this need, the Ministry of
Company Affairs (MCA) set up a high powered group comprising of various
stakeholders such as NACAS, SEBI, RBI, IRDA, ICAI, IBA and CFOs. The core group
was supported by two sub-groups. The sub-groups will have further meetings with
regard to the roadmap for banking and insurance companies which is still under
discussion.


The author completely supports the roadmap. This is a
historic event — one that would catapult India, its entities and finance
professionals to much greater heights.

Under the roadmap, there would be two separate sets of
Accounting Standards u/s 211(3C). The first set would comprise of standards that
are converged with IFRS and would apply to specified companies in phases. The
second set, comprising of existing Indian accounting standards, would apply to
all other companies, including SMEs.

Phase 1 companies will prepare their opening IFRS balance
sheets on 1 April, 2011. Phase 1 would apply to listed and non-listed companies
with a net worth of greater than Rs 1000 crores, and to companies whose
securities are listed on a foreign stock exchange. If one has a calendar year,
then the opening IFRS balance sheet will be prepared not on 1 April, 2011 but 1
January, 2012. The listing requirement will be with regard to securities and
will include a lot of listings in addition to shares, such as ADR, GDR, FCCB,
etc.

Phase 2 companies will prepare their opening IFRS balance
sheets on 1 April, 2013. Phase 2 would apply to listed and non listed companies
with a net worth of greater than Rs 500 crores.

Phase 3 companies will prepare their opening IFRS balance
sheets on 1 April, 2014. Phase 3 would apply to all other listed companies. IFRS
standards will not apply to non-listed companies with a net worth of less than
500 crores and to SMCs, though they can voluntarily apply to IFRS.

The draft of Companies (Amendment) Bill proposing changes to
the Companies Act is under preparation. The amendment is required to make the
Companies Act consistent with the requirements of IFRS. These changes include
section 391, 394, 78, 100, Schedule VI, Schedule XIV, etc. A new section will
also be introduced to make consolidation mandatory under the Companies Act, even
for non-listed companies.

IFRS standards will be notified by 30 April, 2010. The author
does not expect any carve-ins or carve-outs, and it would be possible for Indian
entities to provide a dual statement of compliance both under IFRS, as adopted
by India, and IFRS, as issued by IASB. However, one should be prepared for any
elimination of alternate accounting treatments provided under IFRS standards.
For example, in the case of long-term employee benefits, it is possible that
actuarial gains and losses may have to be recognized in the P&L account in full,
and the corridor approach or full recognition in ‘Reserves’, allowed under IFRS
of IASB, is not allowed under IFRS as adopted in India.

Net worth has not been defined, but probably it means what we
have always been used to: share capital and free reserves. It would include
securities premium but not fixed asset revaluation reserve. P&L debit balance
should be subtracted from share capital and reserves. Net worth would be based
on Indian GAAP stand-alone account of the entity.

To determine applicability, the net worth for which balance
sheet date should be considered? Theoretically, it could be 31 March 2009, 2010
or 2011 or all three. It is unlikely to be 31 March, 2011 for practical reasons.
Doing the net worth test based on the balance sheet date of 31 March, 2011, will
leave entities with little or no time to prepare for IFRS for the year 2011-12
(actually the first quarter of 2011-12 for listed entities). Therefore, in the
author’s view, the test should be done based on the balance sheet on 31 March,
2009. The MCA should confirm this by way of guidance.

Questions have been raised on whether IFRS comparative
numbers are required from 2010-11. Whilst this will be clarified in further
guidance, it would make enormous sense to prepare IFRS comparatives for the
following reasons:


1. IFRS comparatives (2010-11), instead of Indian GAAP
comparatives, would make 2011-12 IFRS financial statements meaningful to all
stakeholders

2. Preparing IFRS from 2010-11 will enable one to be ready
for robust IFRS reporting in the first quarter of 2011-12

3. The 2011-12 IFRS financial statements will be compliant
both with Indian law and IFRS, as issued by IASB. Hence dual statements of
compliance can be made by entities.

4. If 2010-11 IFRS comparatives are not prepared, then
effectively 2011-12 IFRS statements become comparatives for 2012-13 IFRS
statements. Under IFRS 1 framework, the comparative year’s accounting policy
should be consistent with the first IFRS financial statements. This may mean
that the already prepared and published numbers of 2011-12 IFRS financial
statements may undergo a change subsequently to make them consistent with the
2012-13 IFRS accounting policies.


Therefore, from practical considerations, the transition date
should be 1 April, 2010, instead of 1 April, 2011.

There may be good news for early preparers, but one that
needs endorsement by further guidance from the MCA. If an entity has already
prepared/published IFRS financial statements, then on 1 April, 2011 one does not have to reconvert again. In other words under IFRS,
an entity can be a first time adopter only once.

Another related question is whether entities not covered at all in any of the phases can adopt IFRS or those covered in later phases can apply IFRS in earlier phases. The roadmap is clear that a company which is not covered under any of the phases may adopt IFRS on a voluntary basis. The author believes that similarly, a company covered in later phases should be allowed to apply IFRS early. Since the issue is an important one, the MCA should provide guidance on the matter as soon as possible. Allowing voluntary adoption of IFRS will help a subsidiary, joint- venture or associate of a company covered under the roadmap to use their IFRS accounts prepared for group reporting and consolidation purposes, and for stand-alone statutory financial reporting also.

Changes in various other legislations would be required, e.g., SEBI will need to change the require-ments relating to interim financial statements to make them compliant with IAS 34. The RBI will need to look at its prudential norms, incorporate appropriate prudential filters, etc., as and when IFRS becomes mandatory for banks and so on.

A key concern has been the IFRS implications with regard to income-tax. Recently a committee has been set up by CBDT to look into the impact of IFRS on income tax computation and income tax legislation. The Indian tax authorities will certainly need some time to look into this whole aspect as well as to make appropriate changes to the Income Tax Act, if required. It is, therefore, likely that for some years Indian GAAP may continue as the base for determining taxable income. Besides, it is almost unlikely that some assessees in India will be taxed based on IFRS numbers and others on Indian GAAP numbers. In simple words, for some years to come, an entity’s ERP system should enable generation of both Indian GAAP and IFRS numbers: IFRS for statutory reporting and Indian GAAP for income -tax purposes. Similarly, there would be indirect tax issues. For example, under IFRS, revenue numbers would change and that may have impact on the license fees that telecom companies pay or VAT, etc.

The MCA should provide immediate guidance on these various issues. There will be many challenges, but they come with exciting opportunities. With IFRS, India can aspire to become the accounting hub of the world. Finally, a quote from Charles Darwin: “It is not the strongest of the species that survives, nor the most intelligent, but the most responsive to change”.

Gaps in GAAP

Accounting Standards

Can an entity be consolidated when the ‘parent’ has the
ability in practice, but not the legal right to exercise control over the
entity ?  e.g., Entity A owns 40% of the voting power in Entity B
and the remaining 60% of shares are widely dispersed, such that Entity A may
exercise de facto control.



‘Control’ is defined in IAS 27 as : “the power to govern
the financial and operating policies of an entity so as to obtain benefits from
its activities”. It follows from this definition that control involves : 
(a) decision-making ability that is not shared with others; and (b) the ability
to give directions with respect to the operating and financial policies of the
entity concerned, with which directions the entity’s directors are obliged to
comply. In order to meet the definition of control, an investor must govern the
financial and operating policies of an entity for the purpose of obtaining
benefits from the entity’s activities. A trustee or other fiduciary with
decision-making powers that are limited to directing the on-going activities of
an entity for the benefit of others does not meet the IAS 27 definition of
control.

In order to have the ability to govern the financial and
operating policies of an entity, an investor must be able to hold the management
of the entity accountable. It is therefore unlikely that de facto control
over an entity can exist unless the investor has the power to appoint and remove
a majority of its governing body (i.e., normally the board of directors
in the case of a company). This power is normally exercisable by holders of the
voting shares in general meeting.

Since the concept of control is defined in terms of
decision-making ability and not how power is actually exercised,
it is theoretically possible for control to be exercised passively as well as
actively. However, any determination of whether de facto control
exists will always have to be made based on the particular circumstances
and
it is unlikely to be sufficiently certain that de facto control exists
until actions have been taken that provide evidence of control, i.e.,
control must have been actively exercised
.

This will be evidenced by participation and voting at the
Annual General Meeting, where strategic decisions are put to the vote – e.g.,
director nominations. Evidence will be required that the entity was able to vote
in a director of their choice or make decisions that indicated an alignment with
their own business and purpose. In general, the more the legal or
contractually-based powers that are held in relation to an entity fall short of
50% of the total, the greater will be the need for evidence of actively
exercised de facto control.

In practice, de facto control is most likely to be
evidenced where a minority voting interest holder is able to (re) nominate its
nominee to an entity’s board of directors and its votes exceed 50% of the votes
typically cast in the entity’s election of directors. For example, if typically
only 70% of the eligible votes are cast on resolutions for the appointment of
directors, a minority holding of 40% might give de facto control,
provided that if the remaining shares are widely held (such that, for example,
no party has an interest of sufficient size either of itself or with a small
number of others to block decisions).


The October 2005 issue of IASB Update states, “an entity
holding a minority interest can control another entity in the absence of any
formal arrangements that would give it a majority of the voting rights.
For
example, control is achievable if the balance of holdings is dispersed and the
other shareholders have not organised their interests in such a way that
they exercise more votes than the minority holder.”

At this moment it appears that there is a mixed practice with
regards to consolidation based on de facto control under IFRS. This is
because the IASB has not come up with any detailed guidance on this issue. Until
such time as the IASB issues detailed guidance to assist preparers in exercising
the judgment required to apply the control concept, there will be differences in
how IAS 27 is applied.

In India, under Indian GAAP, the general practice is not to consolidate
entities based on de facto control. That may change once India adopts
IFRS.

levitra

GAPs in GAAP

Accounting Standards

Revenue Recognition for Telecommunication Operators


The Research Committee of the Institute of Chartered
Accountants of India has issued an Exposure Draft – “Technical Guide on Revenue
Recognition for Telecommunication Operators” for comment. In this article, we
take a look at some of the contentious issues, and inconsistencies with
International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS), particularly keeping in mind
that India will adopt IFRS from 2011-12 and onwards.

Whether revenue should be recognized on a gross basis or net
basis could be a very challenging issue for many telecom companies. For example,
a telecom operator may provide share price coverage via SMS as part of its
service offering. The stock exchange provides the data to the telecom operator.
Assuming revenue is Rs100 and payment to the stock exchange is Rs60, a question
arises as to whether the operator recognizes revenue of Rs100 and a cost of
Rs60, or merely recognizes Rs40 as its revenue. The answer to this question
depends on whether the operator acts as a principal or an agent in this
transaction. US GAAP provides guidance on this subject, which has been used in
the Technical Guide. As per the guidance, this decision is based on a cumulative
assessment of a number of factors such as: (a) whether the operator is the
primary obligor in the arrangement? (b) whether the operator has the ability to
control the selling price? (c) whether the operator changes the product or
performs part of the service? (d) who bears the credit risk? (e) whether the
product or service specification is determined by the operator?, etc. It may be
noted that the above criteria are not the same as those contained in IAS 18.
Hence, the answer arrived at based on the Technical Guide/US GAAP may not be the
same as the one arrived at under IFRS.

For most operators, interconnect charges represent the
largest single operating cost and second largest source of revenue. Mobile
operators enter into a number of interconnect agreements with other operators.
These agreements allow them to terminate a particular call or transit the
traffic on another operator’s network. This, essentially, uses network of
contracting parties to facilitate and provide the end-to-end connections
required by customers. The Technical Guide states that accounting of revenue on
gross basis may not be appropriate where net settlement and the legal right of
offset exists between operators. However, in the authors’ view, this is contrary
to industry practice. Industry practice is that interconnect revenues are booked
gross on the basis that the carriers are exposed to the gross risk of the
transaction. Interconnect agreements usually allow carriers to settle on a net
basis, which does not normally change the appropriateness of
recognizing transactions gross, even if periodic cash settlement may be made on
a net basis. For example, the operator may bear the gross credit risk for
non-payment and be obliged to make payments under interconnect arrangements,
irrespective of the level of reciprocal revenues due.

The term Indefeasible Rights of Use (IRU) is very common in
the telecom business. IRU means an exclusive, unrestricted, and indefeasible
right to use the relevant capacity (including equipment, fibres or capacity).
Under Indian GAAP, in many cases, these type of contracts may have been
accounted for as service contracts between the buyer and seller rather than
lease contracts. The technical guide requires evaluation of the IRU contract as
to whether it contains a lease arrangement based on AS-19. Unfortunately, AS-19
does not contain any guidance on the same. Under IFRS standards, this issue is
separately covered under IFRIC 4

Determining whether an
arrangement contains a lease
.
Therefore, in the authors’ view, the technical guide with regard to this matter
can be practically implemented, if and only if an IFRIC 4 interpretation is
issued under Indian GAAP. Also it would be inappropriate to apply the
requirements of IFRIC 4 selectively to telecom companies. It may be noted that
IFRIC 4 has a wider application – for example, it would have impact on
outsourcing contracts, power purchase agreements, etc.


Multiple element contracts are pretty common in the case of
telecom business. For example, in the case of mobile operators, the package may
include hand set, talk time, SMS, ring tones, etc. The technical guide basically
requires the allocation of the consideration to the various components based on
the relative fair values of the components. It may be noted that currently, IFRS
does not have any detailed guidance on accounting for multiple element
contracts. However, IASB has recently issued a discussion paper (DP) on the
proposed new standard on revenue recognition – “
Discussion
Paper – Preliminary views on Revenue Recognition in contract with customers
“.
As per this DP, customer consideration is allocated to the vendor’s contractual
performance obligations on a relative standalone selling price basis, and
revenue is recognized as each performance obligation is satisfied. Where the
standalone selling price is not observable, an entity would estimate them. As
per the DP, suitable estimation methods include (but not limited to) (a)
expected cost plus margin (b) adjusted market assessment approach. Consequently
the Technical Guide and the proposed IFRS standard may result in significant
difference in accounting for multiple element contracts. Telecom operators that
may be required to follow the Technical Guide for Indian GAAP purposes and
subsequently IFRS, will have to unnecessarily undergo change in revenue
recognition accounting twice. This clearly appears unwarranted.

The Technical Guide prohibits recognition of revenue on a
component if the same is contingent upon delivery of additional items. This is
explained using the following example in the Technical Guide.


Example:
A customer purchases an annual contract, offering a free handset and 1,000
minutes (fair value is Rs. 1,500 per month) and 150 free texts (fair value is Rs.
300 per month), for a monthly fee of Rs. 1,500. The handset could be purchased
separately for Rs. 15,000. The allocation of revenue for the entire contract
period should be as follows:

 

 

Cash

Total
FV

Relative
FV

FV restricted by contingent

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

consideration

 

Handset

15,000

7,377

 

Airtime
contract

18,000

 

 

 

 

 

Talk time

 

18,000

8,852

15,000

 

Text

 

3,600

1,771

3,000

 

Total

18,000

36,600

18,000

18,000

 


The relative fair value of the equipment is Rs. 7,377. However, the recognition of this amount should be limited to the amount which is not contingent upon the delivery of additional items (i.e. airtime contract). As a result, the relative fair value allocable to the equipment is reduced to Rs. nil, being the cash consideration, and the difference reallocated to the elements within the airtime contract. It may be noted that under IFRS, there is no such restriction and it is possible to recognize revenue on the handset.

In another example, the Technical Guide prohibits recognition of revenue on hand set in certain circumstances. For example, consider a customer enters into a 12 month tariff plan priced at Rs 2400/- and includes 200 minutes of talk time per month and   free hand set worth Rs 2000/-. The Technical Guide prohibits recognition of any revenue on the delivery of the handset, since it is provided free and requires recognition of revenue of Rs 200/-per month for the talk time. In this example, it is unclear from the Technical Guide as to how the accounting is done, if the company would have stated that Rs 2,400/- is received for both the talk time and the handset. Will the accounting change? Under IFRS, it would be possible to recognize revenue on handset, even if the company claims that the same is provided free of cost. This is because under IFRS, the entire consideration would be allocated to different components – in this example, it would be allocated to the handset and the talk time irrespective of the operators’ claim that some of the components are provided free of cost (basically there is no free lunch).

The Technical Guide is more based on US GAAP and may provide results that are different from those under existing or proposed IFRS standards.

Given that India is adopting IFRS, and US itself is looking at IFRS seriously, it does not make any sense to base the Technical Guide on US GAAP. It is recommended that standard setters start a dialogue with the IFRS standard setters and influence the IFRS exposure drafts, rather than rock the boat. It is also inappropriate to have any guidance that is inconsistent with IFRS, since that may require Indian entities to change revenue recognition accounting twice in a short span of time, ie, once to comply with Indian GAAP and in 2011-12 when adopting IFRS.

Treatment of Capital Expenditure on Assets Not Owned by the Company

fiogf49gjkf0d
Sometimes, circumstances force an entity to incur capital expenditure which is not represented by any specific or tangible assets. For example, an entity may agree with a local authority to pay the cost or part of the cost of roads to be built by the authority. In this case also, the roads will remain the property of the Municipal body. Whether such expenditure should be capitalised or not, is a matter of debate and the solution will depend on facts and circumstances of each case. Consider two scenario’s as given below. The discussion is based on Indian GAAP, but would be equally relevant for Ind-AS purposes as well.

Scenario 1
The Company had to incur expenditure on the construction/ development of certain assets, like electricity transmission lines, railway sidings, roads, culverts, bridges, etc. (hereinafter referred to as enabling assets) for setting up a new refinery. This was required in order to facilitate construction of project and subsequently to facilitate its operations. The ownership of these enabling assets does not vest with the company. The moot question is whether such expenditure can be capitalised or has to be charged to the profit and loss account immediately. This question was raised in 2011 with the Expert Advisory Committee (EAC), and its view and the basis of conclusion was as follows:

View of EAC along with the basis of conclusion [published in CA Journal January 2011]

The expenditure on enabling assets should be expensed by way of charge to the profit and loss account of the period in which the same is incurred. As per the Committee, an expenditure incurred by an enterprise can be recognised as an asset only if it is a resource controlled by an enterprise. For example, the entity having control of an asset can exchange it for other assets, employ it to produce goods or services, charge a price for others to use it, use it to settle liabilities, hold it, or distribute it to owners.

Further, an indicator of control of an item of fixed asset would be that the entity can restrict the access of others to the benefits derived from that asset. In the given case the entity does not have control over the enabling assets and should therefore charge the same as an expense in the profit and loss account.

Author’s comments

In the author’s view, there is sufficient justification in existing literature to support capitalisation of the enabling assets as part of the overall cost of the refinery. This is discussed below.

As per paragraph 9.1 of AS-10, “The cost of an item of fixed asset comprises its purchase price, including import duties and other non-refundable taxes or levies and any directly attributable cost of bringing the asset to its working condition for its intended use; any trade discounts and rebates are deducted in arriving at the purchase price. Examples of directly attributable costs are: (a) site preparation; (b) initial delivery and handling costs; (c) installation cost, such as special foundations for plant; and (d) professional fees, for example fees of architects and engineers. Further paragraph 10.1 states, “Included in the gross book value are costs of construction that relate directly to the specific asset and costs that are attributable to the construction activity in general and can be allocated to the specific asset.”

Paragraph 8 of AS-16 states, “The borrowing costs that are directly attributable to the acquisition, construction or production of a qualifying asset are those borrowing costs that would have been avoided if the expenditure on the qualifying asset had not been made. When an enterprise borrows funds specifically for the purpose of obtaining a particular qualifying asset, the borrowing costs that directly relate to that qualifying asset can be readily identified.” In the given case, the costs incurred on the enabling assets is directly related to the construction of the refinery. The expenses on the enabling assets are required solely for the purpose of bringing the refinery to its working condition for its intended use. For example, without the electricity transmission lines, the refinery will not be ready for its intended purpose.

Interestingly, the EAC [Volume 24 – Query no. 9] had dealt with a similar issue in 2004 with regards to the expenditure incurred on the catchment area of a hydroelectric power project. In the said matter, a dam was being constructed across a river for the purpose of creation of a reservoir so that water is stored and used for the purpose of generating electricity. The reservoir is dependent upon the catchment area for water. Continuous soil erosion results in sedimentation, and reduces the capacity of the reservoir and efficiency of the project (emphasised). Substantial expenditure was incurred towards extensive catchment area treatment measures. In the said matter, EAC opined that the expenditure on the catchment area treatment is capitalised with the cost of the dam. For determining which expenditure is directly attributable to bring the asset to its working condition for its intended use, factors such as whether the concerned expenditure directly benefits or is related to that asset may be considered. In other words, there has to be some nexus between the expenditure and the benefit/relationship with the asset.

The ‘unit of account’ (should not be confused with component accounting) concept is another interesting concept in accounting. Under this concept, it would be argued that what is being constructed is the refinery, and not the roads, culverts, etc. which are all required to construct the refinery. The enabling assets are required not for their own individual purposes but for the purposes of the refinery. The expenditure on the enabling assets is required as part of the cost of constructing the refinery. Therefore the entire project cost including those incurred on the enabling assets will be captured as cost of constructing the refinery. Once that is done, the refinery itself will be bifurcated into various components, so that component accounting can be applied.

In the EAC opinion it is argued that, the entity having control of an asset can exchange it for other assets, employ it to produce goods or services, charge a price for others to use it, use it to settle liabilities, hold it, or distribute it to owners. Further, an indicator of control of an item of fixed asset would be that the entity can restrict the access of others to the benefits derived from that asset. Unfortunately, the argument presupposes the refinery and enabling assets as separate unit of accounts (should not be confused with component accounting). In the author’s view, the unit of account or the asset under construction is the refinery (and not the enabling assets), and all the costs (including on the enabling assets) are related to constructing the refinery. The entity has control over the refinery and restrict the access of others to the benefits derived from the refinery. Thus by looking at the refinery as the unit of account, it is argued that all expenses directly related to constructing the refinery (including costs on enabling assets) should be capitalised.

The EAC opinion will have significant implications for a lot of companies that are in the process of constructing huge projects. In light of the various submissions above, the EAC may reconsider its position. The author is aware that this gap is likely to be plugged in the revised AS 10 under Indian GAAP.

Scenario 2
A mining company has to transport coal through road transport to the nearest railway siding which is around 40 k.m. away from the mines. The existing two lane road is also extensively used by local villagers causing inconvenience, traffic jams and accidents due to which blockage of roads and delay in delivery is a common phenomena. Hence, there was a business necessity and compulsion to widen this road to liquidate the coal stock and to maintain continuity of production. To find a solution to the management problem of transporting the coal, the company widened the two lane road to four lane. The road belongs to and is owned by the State Government. The question is whether expenses incurred for widening of two lanes road to four lanes which is not owned by the company can be recognised as intangible asset.

The appropriate standard would be AS 26 Intangible Assets. As per paragraph 14 of AS 26, an enterprise controls an asset if the enterprise has the power to obtain the future economic benefits flowing from the underlying resource and also can restrict the access of others to those benefits. From the facts of the case neither the land to be acquired for widening the road nor the road will be the property of the company. These will remain the property of the State Government. Further, it is noted that the nearby villagers will also be beneficiaries. From this, it appears that although the work of widening the road will facilitate unrestricted movement of coal for the company, the company does not enjoy control in terms of restriction of access of others to the benefits arising from the widened road facility. Therefore, one may argue that the ex penditure incurred on widening and construction of road on the land which is not owned by the company does not meet the definitions of the terms ‘asset’ and ‘intangible asset’. Accordingly, some may argue that such expenditure cannot be capitalised as an intangible asset.

However the author believes, similar to Scenario 1, the unit of account is not the road but the mine. Hence the above argument of control is not a valid argument. Nonetheless, this fact pattern is different from the one in Scenario 1. In Scenario 1, the expenditure was incurred for and incidental to the construction of an asset (the refinery). The company controls the refinery and hence the capital expenditure including the incidental expenditure incurred for construction should be capitalised as cost of refinery. In Scenario 2, no new asset is created and the expenditure incurred on widening the lane is with respect to an already functioning mine. Paragraph 60 of AS 26 is relevant here, which states “Subsequent expenditure on a recognised intangible asset is recognised as an expense if the expenditure is required to maintain the asset at its originally assessed standard of performance.” This is a matter of judgement. The company should carefully evaluate whether the expenditure incurred on widening the road has increased the originally assessed standard of performance of the mine. If for example, substantially more coal can be produced and transported, because transportation bottlenecks have been removed, one may argue that the originally assessed standard of performance of the mine is increased, and therefore the cost of widening the road will be capitalised as an intangible asset. One will have to make this assessment very carefully.

ACCOUNTING FOR COURT SCHEMES UNDER IND-AS & ON TRANSITION DATE

fiogf49gjkf0d
Accounting for business combinations under Indian GAAP is significantly different to that under Ind-AS. Retrospective application of Ind-AS 103 Business Combinations may be difficult and in certain cases impossible, for past business combinations. Against this background, the business combinations exemption in Ind-AS 101 First Time Adoption of Indian Accounting Standards is probably the most important exemption, as it provides a firsttime adopter of Ind-AS an exemption from restating business combinations prior to its date of transition to Ind-AS, subject to certain requirements.

A first-time adopter choosing to apply this exemption is not required to restate business combinations to comply with Ind-AS 103, if control was obtained before the transition date. A first-time adopter taking advantage of this exemption will not have to revisit past business combinations to establish fair values and amounts of goodwill under Ind-AS. However, the application of the exemption is complex, and certain adjustments to transactions under Indian GAAP may still be required.

A first-time adopter may also choose not to use the exemption and restate previous combinations in accordance with Ind-AS 103. If a first-time adopter restates any business combination prior to its date of transition to comply with Ind-AS 103, it must restate all business combinations under Ind-AS 103 which occur after the date of that combination. In simple words, a first time adopter may choose a date and restate all business combinations from that date. Business combinations before that date are not restated by using the exemption.

Using the exemption not to restate business combinations under Ind-AS 103, does not mean that the entire accounting under Indian GAAP is kosher. The exemption is only with respect to fair value accounting. Thus, if a proper asset or liability was not recognised or written off in Indian GAAP, then the same will have to be properly accounted at the transition date and on a go forward basis in the Ind AS financial statements.

On 16th February 2015, the Ministry of Corporate Affairs (MCA) notified the Companies (Indian Accounting Standards) Rules, 2015 laying down the roadmap for application of IFRS converged standards (Ind-AS). As per general instructions in the MCA notification, notified Ind AS’s are intended to be in conformity with the provisions of applicable laws. However, if due to subsequent amendments in the law, a particular Ind AS is found to be not in conformity with such law, the provisions of the said law will prevail and the financial statements will be prepared in conformity with such law. Therefore, as per the Framework, law shall override the provisions of Ind-AS, unless clarified otherwise.

With the above background, let us consider two simple scenarios, for an acquirer company that is in phase 1, and has a transition date of 1st April, 2015. Prior to this transition date, the acquirer has made three acquisitions of businesses. Only Acquisition 2 was under a court scheme, in which two accounting concessions were made by the court. Acquisition 2 happened in 2009; when SEBI requirement to comply with accounting standards in a court scheme was not yet legislated. Since those acquisitions were of business divisions, rather than acquisition of an investment, those were accounted in the separate financial statements of the acquirer. The two scenarios are as follows:

1. Acquirer does not wish to restate past business combinations.

2. Acquirer wants to restate business combinations starting from acquisition 1.

Commentary on Scenario 1: Acquirer does not wish to restate past business combinations There is no issue with Acquisition 1 & 3. However, the question is with respect to Acquisition 2. Can the accounting ordered by the court be retained as it is both at the transition date and on a go forward basis? View 1 Yes, the court order is supreme and therefore it will trump the requirements of Ind-AS 101 and Ind-AS 103. Thus indefinite life intangible assets will not be resurrected in Ind-AS financial statements and impairment losses will be adjusted against reserves under Ind-AS on transition date and on a go forward basis. The court order is applicable to all statutory financial statements prepared under Indian law; and would be applicable to both Indian GAAP and Ind-AS financial statements. View 2 The court scheme was applicable to Indian GAAP financial statements and hence is not relevant for the purposes of preparing Ind AS financial statements. Therefore, on transition date the company will have to recognize intangible assets under Ind AS. Further any future impairment losses will be adjusted to P&L a/c rather than directly to reserves.

Commentary on Scenario 2: Acquirer wants to restate business combinations starting from acquisition 1

View 1
The acquirer can restate Acquisitions 1, 2 & 3. Though acquisition 2 was under a court scheme it can be restated under Ind-AS. This is on basis that the court scheme applied to Indian GAAP financial statements and not Ind-AS financial statements. When Acquisition 2 is restated in accordance with Ind AS 103, the accounting concessions provided by the court will have to be disregarded.

View 2
The acquirer can restate Acquisitions 1 & 3. However, Acquisition 2 cannot be restated because it is under a court scheme, and the court mandated accounting cannot be changed. This is on the basis that the court scheme is applicable to all statutory financial statements, and it does not matter whether those are prepared under Indian GAAP or Ind-AS.

View 3
The acquirer cannot restate acquisition 2, because it is under a court scheme. As a result, restating of Scquisition 1 is also tainted. This is because under Ind AS 101, if a first-time adopter restates any business combination prior to its date of transition to comply with Ind-AS 103, it must restate all business combinations under Ind-AS 103 which occur after the date of that combination. Therefore the acquirer can only restate acquisition 3. Acquisition 1 & 2, along with the court concession on the accounting will have to be retained under Ind AS.

Conclusion
The author believes that the current drafting of Ind AS and the MCA circular, provides a flexibility in the views that can be taken. However, the ICAI along with MCA may provide a more clear guidance and way forward on this major dilemma.

Discounting of Retention money under Ind-AS

fiogf49gjkf0d
Query
A consulting company provides
project management and design services to customers on very large
projects that take significant time to complete. The company raises
monthly bills for work done, which are promptly paid by the customers.
However, the customers retain 10% as retention money, which is released
one year after the contract is satisfactorily completed. The 10%
retention money is a normal feature in the industry, and is more akin to
providing a security to the customer rather than a financing
transaction. Under Ind-AS, is the consulting company required to discount retention monies?

Response

Technical Literature

1.
Under Ind AS 18 Revenue is measured at the fair value of consideration
received or receivable. Further, Ind AS 18 states as below:

“In
most cases, the consideration is in the form of cash or cash equivalents
and the amount of revenue is the amount of cash or cash equivalents
received or receivable. However, when the inflow of cash or cash
equivalents is deferred, the fair value of the consideration may be less
than the nominal amount of cash received or receivable. For example, an
entity may provide interest-free credit to the buyer or accept a note
receivable bearing a below-market interest rate from the buyer as
consideration for the sale of goods. When the arrangement effectively
constitutes a financing transaction, the fair value of the consideration
is determined by discounting all future receipts using an imputed rate
of interest…………….The difference between the fair value and the nominal
amount of the consideration is recognised as interest revenue in
accordance with Ind AS 109.”

2. Further IAS 18 provides an example with respect to instalment sales when consideration is receivable in instalments.

“Revenue
attributable to the sales price, exclusive of interest, is recognised
at the date of sale. The sale price is the present value of the
consideration, determined by discounting the instalments receivable at
the imputed rate of interest. The interest element is recognised as
revenue as it is earned, using the effective interest method.”

3.
Ind AS 115 Revenue from Contracts with Customers prohibits discounting
of retention monies when the retention monies do not reflect a financing
arrangement. For example, the retention money provides the customer
with protection from the supplier failing to adequately complete some or
all of its obligations under the contract. Further even in arrangements
where there is significant financing component, practical expediency
not to discount was allowed, provided the financing was for a period
less than one year. Ind AS 109 Financial Instruments was aligned to Ind
AS 115, and did not require any discounting if the trade receivables did
not contain a significant financing component or when the practical
expediency was available.

4. On withdrawal of Ind AS 115, the alignment paragraph in Ind AS 109 discussed above was also removed.

Possible Views

View 1: No discounting is required

The
arrangement does not entail instalment payments nor is a financing
transaction under Ind AS 18, and hence discounting of retention money is
not required. Though Ind AS 18 does not provide further elaboration on
what constitutes a financing arrangement, guidance is available in Ind
AS 115. Based on this guidance, retention money is on normal terms and
common to the industry and represents a source of protection with
respect to contract performance rather than a source of financing.
Though Ind AS 115 is withdrawn, the guidance on what constitutes a
financing transaction, in the absence of any guidance in Ind AS 18, is
useful and may be applied.

Though Ind AS 109 requires discounting of retention money, one may argue that Ind AS 18 should be allowed to trump Ind AS 109.

View 2: Discounting is required

The
requirement in Ind AS 18 to determine revenue at the fair value of
consideration received or receivable would necessitate the discounting
of retention money. The provisions in IFRS 13 Fair Value, and Ind AS 109
Financial Instruments would also require discounting of retention
money. In essence, in any arrangement where money is not paid
instantly, there will be a time value of money, which needs to be
recognized.
The reason for which the payment is not made instantly or delayed is not relevant.

Author’s View

View
2 is the preferred view. However, View 1 should not be ruled out
because Ind AS 18 does not require discounting when the arrangement does
not effectively constitute a financing arrangement. View 1 can be ruled
out, only if Ind AS 18 is suitably amended to remove the reference to
financing arrangements. Suggest Institute should issue a clarification.

Presentation of Government Grant

fiogf49gjkf0d
Background
For sustained agricultural growth and to promote balanced nutrient application, it is imperative that fertilisers are made available to farmers at affordable prices. With this objective, urea being the only controlled fertiliser, is sold at statutory notified uniform sale price, and decontrolled Phosphatic and Potassic fertilisers are sold at indicative maximum retail prices (MRPs). The problems faced by the manufacturers in earning a reasonable return on their investment with reference to controlled prices, are mitigated by providing support under the New Pricing Scheme for Urea units and the concession Scheme for decontrolled Phosphatic and Potassic fertilisers. The statutorily notified sale price and indicative MRP is generally less than the cost of production of the irrespective manufacturing unit. The difference between the cost of production and the selling price/MRP is paid as subsidy/concession to manufacturers.

Query
Whether subsidy received by the manufacturers should be presented as ‘other income’ or as ‘revenue’?

Response
Theoretically, there could be two views.

View 1
Paragraph 29 of Ind AS 20 Accounting for Government Grants and Disclosure of Government Assistance states “Grants related to income are presented as part of profit or loss, either separately or under a general heading such as ‘Other income’; alternatively, they are deducted in reporting the related expense.” Since the subsidies are paid to the manufacturer, the same cannot be reflected as revenue of the manufacturer. It should be presented as ‘other income’. Further, since the subsidy is not related to providing relief on specific expenditure, the same cannot be deducted from expenses.

View 2
The benefit of the subsidy is meant for the farmers not for the manufacturer of fertilisers. This is a government grant to the farmers, not to the manufacturers. As far as the manufacturer company is concerned, it is receiving revenue at fair value from the farmers and the government. In other words, the government is paying the subsidy (part of sale proceeds) to the manufacturer on behalf of the farmer. Therefore, the government should be seen more as a customer, rather than as a provider of grant to the manufacturer.

Consider the following definitions under Ind AS 20:

Government assistance is action by government designed to provide an economic benefit specific to an entity or range of entities qualifying under certain criteria. Government assistance for the purpose of this Standard does not include benefits provided only indirectly through action affecting general trading conditions, such as the provision of infrastructure in development areas or the imposition of trading constraints on competitors.

Government grants are assistance by government in the form of transfers of resources to an entity in return for past or future compliance with certain conditions relating to the operating activities of the entity. They exclude those forms of government assistance which cannot reasonably have a value placed upon them and transactions with government which cannot be distinguished from the normal trading transactions of the entity.

Both the above definitions entail compliance with past and future onerous conditions by the manufacturer to become eligible for the subsidy. For example, this is clearly seen in the Capital Investment Subsidy Scheme, which requires the manufacturer to make investments in plant and machinery of a specified value in backward regions and also imposes other conditions, such as, with respect to setting up social infrastructure and employment generation.

In the fertiliser subsidy, the manufacturers do not have to comply with such onerous conditions, and hence it is not a government grant from the manufacturer perspective.

Conclusion
The author believes View 2 is more appropriate for reasons already mentioned above. A simple analogy is the subsidy on cooking gas cylinders. In the past, the subsidy was paid to the manufacturer on behalf of the consumers (who paid a subsidised price for the cylinder). Now the consumers have to pay full fair price to the manufacturers, and the Government directly credits the subsidy to the consumers. Similarly, with respect to fertilisers, it can be argued that the subsidy is to the farmer, and not to the fertiliser manufacturer.

Accounting by Real Estate Companies

fiogf49gjkf0d
Accounting for real estate construction under Indian GAAP was covered
under the Guidance Note on Accounting for Real Estate Transactions
(Revised 2012). Under Ind AS real estate construction accounting is
specifically scoped into Ind AS 11 Construction Contracts. In this
article, Dolphy D’Souza discusses the similarities and dissimilarities
of accounting between the Guidance Note and Ind AS 11.

Scoping – Ind AS 18 or Ind AS 11?

Under
IFRS, IFRIC Interpretation 15 Agreements for the Construction of Real
Estate deals with accounting of real estate contracts. Determining
whether an agreement for the construction of real estate is within the
scope of IAS 11 (Ind AS 11) Construction Contracts or IAS 18 (Ind AS 18)
Revenue depends on the terms of the agreement and all the surrounding
facts and circumstances. Such a determination requires judgement with
respect to each agreement.

IAS 11 applies when the agreement
meets the definition of a construction contract set out in paragraph 3
of IAS 11: ‘a contract specifically negotiated for the construction of
an asset or a combination of assets …’ An agreement for the construction
of real estate meets the definition of a construction contract when the
buyer is able to specify the major structural elements of the design of
the real estate before construction begins and/or specify major
structural changes once construction is in progress (whether or not it
exercises that ability). Thus, a customer may ask a real estate
contractor to construct a villa (a) on a land owned by the customer and
(b) as per design and specification approved by the customer. The
customer controls the work-in-progress on an ongoing basis, and can
generally sack the contractor (albeit by payment of penalty) and hire a
new contractor. In situations such as this, the contractor will have to
apply IAS 11.

In contrast, an agreement for the construction of
real estate in which buyers have only limited ability to influence the
design of the real estate, e.g. to select a design from a range of
options specified by the entity, or to specify only minor variations to
the basic design, is an agreement for the sale of goods within the scope
of IAS 18. The entity may transfer to the buyer control and the
significant risks and rewards of ownership of the work in progress in
its current state as construction progresses. In this case, if all the
criteria in paragraph 14 of IAS 18 are met continuously as construction
progresses, the entity shall recognise revenue by reference to the stage
of completion using the percentage of completion method. The
requirements of IAS 11 are generally applicable to the recognition of
revenue and the associated expenses for such a transaction. The entity
may transfer to the buyer control and the significant risks and rewards
of ownership of the real estate in its entirety at a single time (e.g.
at completion, upon or after delivery). In this case, the entity shall
recognise revenue only when all the criteria in paragraph 14 of IAS 18
are satisfied. Thus, consider a scenario where a real estate developer
own a piece of land in which it constructs a building with about 100
flats. In this scenario, the risk and rewards are transferred to the 100
customers, when the building construction is complete and the flats are
ultimately delivered to the customers. It is inconceivable that the
risk and rewards are transferred to the 100 customers on an ongoing
basis. If that was the case, each customer would own the work in
progress and have the ability to hire another contractor to construct
his/her individual flat. That is neither legally nor practically
possible, for example, it is not possible that 100 different contractors
representing 100 different customers could possibly complete the
construction of the building.

In the Indian situation,
considering the demand of the real estate developers the standard
setters decided to carve out IFRIC 15. Further, a real estate contract
was specifically scoped in Ind AS 11. In accordance with Ind AS 11
Construction Contracts, the standard would apply to accounting in the
financial statements of contractors including the financial statements
of real estate developers. The definition of construction contracts in
Ind AS 11 also includes agreement of real estate development to provide
services together with construction material in order to perform
contractual obligation to deliver the real estate to the buyer.

Thus,
real estate construction contracts would be accounted for in accordance
with Ind AS 11, like any other construction contract. Therefore, in the
above example, the sale of 100 flats would be treated like a
construction contract to be accounted for using the percentage of
completion method (POCM) rather than accounting for them as sale of
goods, wherein, revenue is recognised when the completed flat is
ultimately delivered to the customer.

The carve in to Ind AS 11
is somewhat nebulously drafted. As per this carve in, Ind AS 11 would
apply to accounting in the financial statements of contractors including
the financial statements of real estate developers. Does that mean Ind
AS 11 would apply to contractors other than real estate contractors
also? For example, it is not absolutely clear, whether Ind AS 11 or Ind
AS 18 would apply to construction of a standard equipment such as a ship
or aircraft or windmill. The author believes that Ind AS 18 should
apply to these items, since the buyer is unable to specify the major
structural elements of the design of the equipment before construction
begins and/ or specify major structural changes once construction is in
progress whether or not it exercises that ability. In other words, the
author believes that the above items should be treated like a sale of
goods. This can also be supported by the intention of the ICAI to allow
construction contract accounting to real estate development only.

Ind AS 11 vs Guidance Note on Accounting for Real Estate Transactions (Revised 2012)

On
account of the diverse practices under Indian GAAP, the ICAI felt it
necessary to issue a revised Guidance Note titled Guidance Note on
Accounting for Real Estate Transactions (Revised 2012) to harmonise the
accounting practices followed by real estate companies in India. Under
Ind AS 11, accounting for real estate development would be accounted for
as a construction contract in accordance with Ind AS 11. An interesting
point to note is that the requirements of Ind AS 11, may or may not be
the same as those contained in the Guidance Note. This section deals
with some critical areas of similarities and differences that exist
between Ind AS 11 and the Guidance Note. Under both Ind AS 11 and the
Guidance Note, completed contract method would be prohibited. However,
there are significant dissimilarities in the way POC method is applied.

Question 1: Is the scope of the Guidance Note and Ind AS 11 the same?

The
revised Guidance Note would apply to any enterprise dealing in real
estate as sellers or developers. The term ‘real estate’ refers to land
as well as buildings and rights in relation thereto. The Guidance Note
provides an illustrative list of transactions which are in scope. The
Guidance Note applies not only to development and sale of residential
and commercial units, row houses, independent houses, with or without an
undivided share in land, but to many other real estate transactions.
These are sale of plots of land with or without any development. The
development may be in the form of common facilities like laying of
roads, drainage lines, water pipelines, electrical lines, sewage tanks,
water storage tanks, club house, landscaping etc. The sale of plots of
land, include long term sale type leases. What is a long term sale type
lease is not defined. Typically a 99 year lease would generally fulfill
the definition of a sale type lease. However, whether a 50 year lease
would be a sale type lease is a matter of conjecture and judgment will
have to be applied. However, the principles that would be used to apply
the judgment are not contained in the Guidance Note. In the author’s
view, conditions that establish whether a lease is a finance lease or
operating lease may serve as a good basis for making that decision. For
example, in the case of a 99 year lease, if the present value of the
minimum lease payments is atleast 90% or higher of the fair value of the
land, it could be construed, subject to other requirements that the
lease in substance is a sale type lease. Another example, which may be
construed as a sale type lease is a 50 year lease of land, where the
ownership is transferred to the lessee at the end of the lease period.
Whether a lease is a sale type lease or not, will have a significant
impact on the accounting. In the case of a lease, the revenue is
recognised over the lease period; whereas in a sale type lease the
revenue is accounted for when the sale type lease is executed.

The
revised Guidance Note also scopes in the acquisition, utilisation and
transfer of development rights, redevelopment of existing buildings and
structures and joint development agreements for real estate activities.

Other
than scoping in joint development agreements, the revised Guidance Note
does not provide any guidance on how to account for such agreements.
Real estate transactions of the nature covered by Accounting Standard
(AS) 10, Accounting for Fixed Assets, Accounting Standard (AS) 12,
Accounting for Government Grants, Accounting Standard (AS) 19, Leases,
and Accounting Standard (AS) 26, Intangible Assets, are outside the
scope of the Guidance Note. For example if a real estate contract was
being constructed for own administrative use, AS-10 principles rather
than this Guidance Note would apply. Similarly short-term leasing of
real estate would be covered by AS-19; however, a long term sale type
lease would be covered under the Guidance Note.

Ind AS 11 would
apply to accounting in the financial statements of contractors including
the financial statements of real estate developers. Under Ind AS 11,
there is no definition of what constitutes a real estate developer or
real estate development. Generally, the guidance in the Guidance Note
with respect to scoping may be used for Ind AS 11 purposes.

Question 2: How are transactions which are in substance delivery of goods accounted for under Ind AS and the Guidance Note?

Requirement under the Guidance Note

In
respect of transactions of real estate which are in substance similar
to delivery of goods, principles enunciated in Accounting Standard (AS)
9, Revenue Recognition, are applied. For example, sale of plots of land
without any development would be covered by the principles of AS-9.
These transactions are treated similar to delivery of goods where the
revenues, costs and profits are recognised when the revenue process is
completed. For recognition of revenue in case of real estate sales, it
is necessary that the conditions specified in paragraph 10 and 11 of
AS-9 are satisfied. Those conditions are enumerated below.

10.
Revenue from sales or service transactions should be recognised when the
requirements as to performance set out in paragraphs 11 ……. are
satisfied, provided that at the time of performance it is not
unreasonable to expect ultimate collection. If at the time of raising of
any claim it is unreasonable to expect ultimate collection, revenue
recognition should be postponed.

11. In a transaction involving
the sale of goods, performance should be regarded as being achieved when
the following conditions have been fulfilled:

i. the seller of
goods has transferred to the buyer the property in the goods for a price
or all significant risks and rewards of ownership have been transferred
to the buyer and the seller retains no effective control of the goods
transferred to a degree usually associated with ownership; and

ii.
no significant uncertainty exists regarding the amount of the
consideration that will be derived from the sale of the goods.

In
accordance with the above, the point of time at which all significant
risks and rewards of ownership can be considered as transferred, is
required to be determined on the basis of the terms and conditions of
the agreement for sale. The completion of the revenue recognition
process is usually identified when the following conditions are
satisfied:

(a) The seller has transferred to the buyer all
significant risks and rewards of ownership and the seller retains no
effective control of the real estate to a degree usually associated with
ownership;

(b) The seller has effectively handed over possession of the real estate unit to the buyer forming part of the transaction;

(c) No significant uncertainty exists regarding the amount of consideration that will be derived from the real estate sales; and

(d) It is not unreasonable to expect ultimate collection of revenue from buyers.

Revenue
from sale of lands or plots without any development is recognised when
the above conditions are satisfied. In the case of sale of developed
plots, where the development activity is significant, these would be
treated as transactions which are in substance construction type
contracts and accounted for accordingly. The Guidance Note does not
elaborate further as to when development activity would be treated as
significant or insignificant. This may have a material impact on revenue
recognition in some cases. Consider an example, where at the end of
reporting period a company sells plots of land, which will entail start
and completion of development activity subsequent to the reporting
period. If the development activity is considered significant, entire
revenue will be recognised in the subsequent reporting period, because
the 25% threshold criterion in the Guidance Note for revenue recognition
under POCM will be met only in the subsequent reporting period. If the
development activity is considered insignificant, revenue on the plot
will be recognised in the current reporting period, and revenue on the
development (to be allocated on market value basis) will be recognised
in the following reporting period. Requirement under Ind AS 18/Ind AS 11
Revenue from sale of lands or plots without any development is
recognised like a sale of goods under Ind AS 18. This is similar to the
requirement in the Guidance Note. In the case of sale of developed
plots, where the development activity is significant, these may be
treated in accordance with the Guidance Note which is to treat them as
construction type contracts. However it is questionable whether the 25%
revenue recognition threshold criterion in the Guidance Note would apply
under Ind AS. The author believes that the 25% threshold in the
Guidance Note is not relevant under Ind AS and entities will have to
apply judgement to assess whether the general revenue recognition
criteria are fulfilled.

Question 3: What are in substance
construction type contracts and how are they accounted for under the
Guidance Note and Ind AS?

Requirement in the Guidance Note

In
the case of real estate transaction which has the same economic
substance as construction contracts, the Guidance Note draws upon the
principles enunciated in Accounting Standard (AS) 7, Construction
Contracts and Accounting Standard (AS) 9, Revenue Recognition. Some
indicators of construction type contracts are:

(a) The duration
of such projects is beyond 12 months and the project commencement date
and project completion date fall into different accounting periods.

(b)
Most features of the project are common to construction contracts,
viz., land development, structural engineering, architectural design,
construction, etc.

(c) While individual units of the project are
contracted to be delivered to different buyers these are interdependent
upon or interrelated to completion of a number of common activities
and/or provision of common amenities.

(d) The construction or development activities form a significant proportion of the project activity.

For
example, construction and sale of units in a residential complex would
be covered by the principles of AS-7 and AS-9. The
construction/development of commercial and residential units has all
features of a construction contract – land development, structural
engineering, architectural design and construction are all present. The
natures of these activities are such that often the date when the
activity is commenced and the date when the activity is completed
usually fall into different accounting periods.

In case of real
estate sales, which are in substance construction type contracts, a two
step approach is followed for accounting purposes. Firstly, it is
assessed whether significant risks and rewards are transferred to the
buyer. The seller usually enters into an agreement for sale with the
buyer at initial stages of construction. This agreement for sale is also
considered to have the effect of transferring all significant risks and
rewards of ownership to the buyer provided the agreement is legally
enforceable and subject to the satisfaction of conditions which signify
transferring of significant risks and rewards even though the legal
title is not transferred or the possession of the real estate is not
given to the buyer. After satisfaction of step one, the second step is
applied, which involves the application of the POCM method. Once the
seller has transferred all the significant risks and rewards to the
buyer, any acts on the real estate performed by the seller are, in
substance, performed on behalf of the buyer in the manner similar to a
contractor. Accordingly, revenue in such cases is recognized by applying
the POCM method on the basis of the broad methodology explained in AS
7, Construction Contracts and detailed in the Guidance Note.

Paragraph
3.3 of the 2012 Guidance Note states as follows: “The point of time at
which all significant risks and rewards of ownership can be considered
as transferred, is required to be determined on the basis of the terms
and conditions of the agreement for sale. In the case of real estate
sales, the seller usually enters into an agreement for sale with the
buyer at initial stages of construction. This agreement for sale is also
considered to have the effect of transferring all significant risks and
rewards of ownership to the buyer provided the agreement is legally
enforceable and subject to the satisfaction of conditions which signify
transferring of significant risks and rewards even though the legal
title is not transferred or the possession of the real estate is not
given to the buyer.”

The 2012 Guidance note contains an
anti-abuse clause to prevent companies from recognising revenue in
certain circumstances. Paragraph 3.4 of the Guidance Note states that
“The application of the methods described above requires a careful
analysis of the elements of the transaction, agreement, understanding
and conduct of the parties to the transaction to determine the economic
substance of the transaction. The economic substance of the transaction
is not influenced or affected by the structure and/or legal form of the
transaction or agreement.” Though this appears to be an anti-abuse
clause the full meaning of this paragraph is not clear and hence,
judgement would be required in many situations.

The anti-abuse
clause was more clearly spelt out in paragraph 9 of the 2006 Guidance
Note which required the nature and extent of continuing involvement of
the seller to be assessed to determine whether the seller retains
effective control. In some cases, real estate may be sold with a degree
of continuing involvement by the seller such that the risks and rewards
of ownership are not transferred; for example, this may happen in the
case of a sale and repurchase agreements which include put and call
options, and agreements whereby the seller guarantees occupancy of the
property for a specified period. The anti-abuse clause in the 2012
Guidance Note is more broadly drafted and some may argue that it
encompasses many other situations. For example, a real estate company
may be precluded from considering real estate sales made to related
parties that are not genuine for the purposes of determining whether it
has satisfied the various threshold limits prescribed in the Guidance
Note for recognising revenue.

Paragraph 4.3 of the 2012 Guidance
Note sets out a very interesting perspective on the linkage between the
transfer of a legal title and the transfer of risks and rewards of
ownership. Paragraph 4.3 states “Where transfer of legal title is a
condition precedent to the buyer taking on the significant risks and
rewards of ownership and accepting significant completion of the
seller’s obligation, revenue should not be recognised till such time
legal title is validly transferred to the buyer”. For example, a real
estate company may have entered into a sale contract with a customer, of
a flat in a building that would take two years to complete. The
customer prefers to register the contract and pay stamp duty after two
years at the time of receiving possession of the flat to postpone the
cash outflow and thereby save on interest. On the other hand, another
customer that is availing a bank loan may have to register the sale
deed, pay stamp duty and obtain legal title immediately on entering into
the contract. In the former case, just because the customer is
obtaining legal title only at the time of possession, should not
preclude revenue recognition in the books of the real estate company. In
many cases, legal title would be deemed to be transferred to the
customer on entering into an agreement for sale, and registration with
the local authority may be seen as a formality that could be completed
at a later date. What is important is the agreement for sale, has to be
legally enforceable. In addition to selling to end users, real estate
companies often sell units to investors. In such cases, real estate
companies should be able to recognise revenue as long as there is a
legally enforceable contract between the real estate company and the
investor and the real estate company has no obligation to buy back the
unit or provide any other form of guarantee.

Requirement under Ind AS 11

The
above guidance may be applied under Ind AS 11, as it may not be
inconsistent with the intention of the ICAI. The Guidance Note applies
to projects where the duration of such projects is beyond 12 months and
the project commencement date and project completion date fall into
different accounting periods. There is no such restriction under Ind AS
11, and even projects below 12 months duration may qualify for
“construction type contracts”.

Question 4: For applying POCM how is “project” defined under Ind AS 11 and the Guidance Note?

Requirement under the Guidance Note

Project
is the smallest group of units/plots/saleable spaces which are linked
with a common set of amenities in such a manner that unless the common
amenities are made available and functional, these units/plots /
saleable spaces cannot be put to their intended effective use. The
definition of a project is very critical under the Guidance Note,
because that determines when the threshold for recognising revenue is
achieved and also the manner in which the POCM is applied. In other
words, the manner in which the project is defined by a company may have a
significant impact on the revenue, cost and profit that is recognised.
If the entire township is considered as a project then it is likely that
the threshold limit for recognising revenue is achieved much later as
compared to when each building in the township is identified as a
project.

Consider an example where two buildings are being
constructed adjacent to each other. Both these buildings would have a
common underground water tank that will supply water to the two
buildings. As either of the building cannot be put to effective use
without the water tank, the project would be the two buildings together
(including the water tank). Consider another example, where each of
those two buildings have their own underground water tank and other
facilities and are not dependant on any common facilities. In this
example, the two buildings would be treated as two different projects.
Consider a third variation to the example, where each of those two
buildings has their own facilities, and the only common facility is a
swimming pool. In this example, judgment would be required, as to how
critical the swimming pool is, to make the buildings ready for their
intended use. If it is concluded that the swimming pool is not critical
to the occupancy of either of those two buildings, then each of those
two buildings would be separate projects. Where it is concluded that the
swimming pool is critical to put the two buildings to its intended
effective use, the two buildings together would constitute a project.

The
definition of the term ‘project’ in the Guidance Note is somewhat
nebulous. Firstly, it is defined as a smallest group of dependant units.
This is followed by the following sentence in the Guidance Note “A
larger venture can be split into smaller projects if the basic
conditions as set out above are fulfilled. For example, a project may
comprise a cluster of towers or each tower can also be designated as a
project. Similarly a complete township can be a project or it can be
broken down into smaller projects.” Once the term ‘project’ is defined
as the smallest group of dependant units, it is not clear why the word
‘can’ is used instead of ‘should’. Does it mean that there is a
limitation on how small a project can be, but no limitation on how big a
project could be? In the example, where two buildings are being
constructed adjacently, and each have their own independent facilities
and are not dependant on common facilities, there is a choice to cut
this as either a project comprising two buildings or two projects
comprising one building each. If this is indeed the case, the manner in
which this choice is exercised is not a matter of an accounting policy
choice but rather a choice that is exercised on a project by project
basis.

Requirement under Ind AS 11

The requirement under
Ind AS 11 with respect to combining or separating contracts for
accounting purposes is irrelevant in the context of accounting for real
estate. For example, under Ind AS 11, two contracts need to be combined
together for accounting purposes if they are negotiated as a single
package; the contracts are so closely interrelated that they are, in
effect, part of a single project with an overall profit margin; and the
contracts are performed concurrently or in a continuous sequence. This
guidance is inapplicable to real estate development as they involve
multiple customers. Therefore the definition of the term “project” under
the Guidance Note may well be applied under Ind AS 11.

Question 5: For applying POCM how is “project cost” defined under Ind AS 11 and the Guidance Note?

Requirement
under the Guidance Note Project cost includes cost of land,
construction costs and borrowing costs. Cost of land may include cost of
land itself or development rights and other related costs such as stamp
duty, registration and brokerage. It also includes rehabilitation
costs. For example, when land is acquired, companies have an obligation
towards rehabilitating the displaced people by providing alternative
property and/or incurring various other social obligations.

Construction
and development costs include costs that are related directly to a
specific project such as cost of designing, labour, material, equipment
hiring or depreciation costs, but would exclude depreciation of idle
plant and equipment. It would include site supervision and site
administration costs and cost of obtaining municipal sanction or
building permissions, but would exclude head office general
administration costs. Construction costs would include expected warranty
costs/provisions, that may be incurred during or post the completion of
the construction. It may be noted that real estate companies were
accounting for warranties in numerous ways. By treating warranties as
any other input cost, this Guidance Note will bring consistency in the
treatment of warranty costs. Costs that may be attributable to a project
activity in general and can be allocated are also included as
construction and development costs; for example, insurance, cost of the
technical, architecture or supervision department, construction or
development overheads, etc. Such costs are allocated using methods that
are systematic and rational and are applied consistently to all costs
having similar characteristics. Construction overheads include costs
such as the preparation and processing of construction personnel
payroll. The allocation is based on the normal level of project
activity, similar to overhead absorption in the case of inventories.
Therefore in periods of low activity, not all of the general
construction overheads would be absorbed on the fewer projects that may
be in progress.

Borrowing costs are capitalized in accordance
with AS-16 Borrowing Costs. The borrowing costs incurred towards
purchase of land forming part of construction of a commercial or
residential project are eligible for capitalisation since it does not
represent an asset in itself, but forms part of the project, which
requires substantial period of time to get ready for its intended use or
sale. However, borrowing costs incurred while land acquired for
building purposes is held without any associated development activity do
not qualify for capitalisation [Para 16 of AS 16]. Interest
capitalisation will be based on utilisation of funds, i.e., on the basis
of actual cash flow, and not on the accrual of liability. Thus,
warranty expenses that are included as project cost would be excluded
for the purposes of borrowing cost capitalisation, unless it involved an
actual cash flow. Sometimes real estate companies have to place
security deposits for the purposes of securing land or development
rights. EAC has opined that borrowing cost on the cash outflow on
security deposit cannot be capitalised, as the security deposit is not
part of the project cost.

Certain costs should not be considered
as part of the project cost, such as selling costs, costs of unconsumed
or uninstalled material delivered at site; and payment made to
sub-contractors in advance of work performed. Payment made to
sub-contractors for work performed will be considered as part of the
project cost. Further, accrual made for work done by sub-contractor will
also be considered as part of the project cost, but will be excluded
for the purposes of borrowing cost capitalisation, unless it results in
actual cash flows.

Requirement under Ind AS 11

The
above requirements of the Guidance Note would generally apply to Ind AS
11 as well. However, there is a significant difference. Under the
Guidance Note, the EAC had opined that borrowing cost on security
deposit paid for securing land cannot be capitalised. Under Ind AS,
security amount paid for land by the contractor is an advance
consideration for land. If the security amount was paid out of borrowed
funds, then borrowing cost should be capitalised provided the
construction on that land is taking place.

Question 6: How is Percentage of completion method (POCM) applied under Ind AS 11 and the Guidance Note?

Requirement under the Guidance Note

POCM
method is applied when the outcome of a real estate project can be
estimated reliably and when all the following conditions are satisfied:

(a) total project revenues can be estimated reliably;

(b) it is probable that the economic benefits associated with the project will flow to the enterprise;

(c)
the project costs to complete the project and the stage of project
completion at the reporting date can be measured reliably; and

(d)
the project costs attributable to the project can be clearly identified
and measured reliably so that actual project costs incurred can be
compared with prior estimates. Further to the above conditions, there is
a rebuttable presumption that the outcome of a real estate project can
be estimated reliably and that revenue should be recognized under the
POCM method only when the following events are completed:

  • All
    critical approvals necessary for commencement of the project have been
    obtained; for example, environmental and other clearances, approval of
    plans, designs, etc., title to land or other rights to development/
    construction and change in land use
  • When the stage
    of completion of the project reaches a reasonable level of development.
    A reasonable level of development is not achieved if the expenditure
    incurred on construction and development costs is less than 25 % of the
    construction and development costs. Such costs would exclude land cost
    but include borrowing costs.
  • Atleast 25% of the saleable project area is secured by contracts or agreements with buyers.
  • Atleast
    10 % of the total revenue as per the agreements of sale or any other
    legally enforceable documents are realised at the reporting date in
    respect of each of the contracts and it is reasonable to expect that the
    parties to such contracts will comply with the payment terms as defined
    in the contracts.

When POCM is applied, project revenue
and project costs associated with the real estate project should be
recognised as revenue and expenses by reference to the stage of
completion of the project activity at the reporting date. For
computation of revenue the stage of completion is arrived at with
reference to the entire project costs incurred including land costs,
borrowing costs and construction and development costs. Interestingly,
land cost is not included to determine whether the threshold for
recognizing revenue is reached. But once the threshold is reached land
cost is included for the purposes of determining the stage of completion
and is included in revenue and costs accordingly. As mentioned earlier,
costs incurred that relate to future activity on the project and
payments made to sub-contractors in advance of work performed under the
sub-contract are excluded and matched with revenues when the activity or
work is performed. The recognition of project revenue by reference to
the stage of completion of the project activity should not at any point
exceed the estimated total revenues from ‘eligible contracts’/other
legally enforceable agreements for sale. ‘Eligible contracts’ means
contracts/ agreements where at least 10% of the contracted amounts have
been realised and there are no outstanding defaults of the payment terms
in such contracts. To illustrate – if there are 10 Agreements of sale
and 10 % of gross amount is realised in case of 8 agreements, revenue
can be recognised with respect to these 8 agreements.

The
Guidance Note does not prohibit other methods of determination of stage
of completion, e.g., surveys of work done, technical estimation, etc.
However, computation of revenue with reference to other methods of
determination of stage of completion should not, in any case, exceed the
revenue computed with reference to the ‘project costs incurred’ method.
When it is probable that total project costs will exceed total eligible
project revenues, the expected loss should be recognised as an expense
immediately. The amount of such a loss is determined irrespective of
commencement of project work; or the stage of completion of project
activity.

The percentage of completion method is applied on a
cumulative basis in each reporting period to the current estimates of
project revenues and project costs. Therefore, the effect of a change in
the estimate of project costs, or the effect of a change in the
estimate of the outcome of a project, is accounted for as a change in
accounting estimate. The changed estimates are used in determination of
the amount of revenue and expenses recognised in the statement of profit
and loss in the period in which the change is made and in subsequent
periods. The changes to estimates include changes arising out of
cancellation of contracts and cases where the property or part thereof
is subsequently earmarked for own use or for rental purposes. In such
cases any revenues attributable to such contracts previously recognized
should be reversed and the costs in relation thereto shall be carried
forward and accounted in accordance with AS 10, Accounting for Fixed
Assets. A contract that was an eligible contract (10% of the contract
value is realised and there are no outstanding defaults) may become an
ineligible contract on subsequent default in payment by the customer.
The Guidance Note does not prescribe any requirements with respect to
the same. However, it appears logical that the guidance contained above
of treating the same as a change in accounting estimate is applied.
Thus, revenue recognized previously is reversed, and the associated
costs are transferred to inventory.

Requirement under Ind AS 11

When
the outcome of a construction contract can be estimated reliably,
contract revenue and contract costs associated with the construction
contract should be recognised as revenue and expenses respectively by
reference to the stage of completion of the contract activity at the
balance sheet date. An expected loss on the construction contract should
be recognised as an expense immediately. In the case of a fixed price
contract, the outcome of a construction contract can be estimated
reliably when all the following conditions are satisfied:

  • total contract revenue can be measured reliably;
  • it is probable that the economic benefits associated with the contract will flow to the enterprise;
  • both
    the contract costs to complete the contract and the stage of contract
    completion at the balance sheet date can be measured reliably; and
  • the
    contract costs attributable to the contract can be clearly identified
    and measured reliably so that actual contract costs incurred can be
    compared with prior estimates. In making a judgment about reliability of
    measurement, the following requirements under the Guidance Note may
    appear consistent with the overall Ind AS framework:
  • All
    critical approvals necessary for commencement of the project have been
    obtained; for example, environmental and other clearances, approval of
    plans, designs, etc., title to land or other rights to development/
    construction and change in land use. However the following requirement
    in the Guidance Note appears inconsistent with the overall Ind AS
    framework:
  • When the stage of completion of the project
    reaches a reasonable level of development. A reasonable level of
    development is not achieved if the expenditure incurred on construction
    and development costs is less than 25 % of the construction and
    development costs. Such costs would exclude land cost but include
    borrowing costs.

This requirement appears inconsistent
with Ind AS because a threshold of 25% for a real estate company that
routinely constructs real estate appears very arbitrary. Real estate
entities therefore should make their own judgment based on the
particular facts and circumstances.

In accordance with the
Guidance Note, a real estate developer will start recognising revenue
from constructiontype contracts only after it satisfies the prescribed
criteria, e.g., the project has reached a reasonable level of
development and minimum 25% of the estimated revenues are secured by
contracts. Apparently, Ind AS 11 does not allow deferral of revenue in
this manner. Rather, it requires a company to start recognising revenue
from a construction contract immediately. In cases where the outcome of
the contract cannot be estimated reliably, the recognition of revenue is
restricted to the extent of costs incurred, which are probable of
recovery.

An interesting question that is often asked is the
treatment of land in a real estate construction contract. Some may argue
that under Ind AS 11 the cost of land does not represent “contract
activity” or “work performed” and therefore is not to be considered in
determining the stage of completion. In addition, when the percentage of
completion is based on physical inspection, no activity will be
measured if land has been acquired but the actual construction has not
yet commenced. In the Guidance Note, land is included as an input cost
and in the application of the POCM method for recognizing revenue, costs
and profits. However, land cost is not included to determine if the 25%
threshold is reached to start applying the POCM method.

Question 7: How are multiple elements accounted for under the Guidance Note and Ind AS 11?

Requirement
under the Guidance Note An enterprise may contract with a buyer to
deliver goods or services in addition to the construction/development of
real estate [e.g. property management services, sale of decorative
fittings (excluding fittings which are an integral part of the unit to
be delivered), rental in lieu of unoccupied premises, etc]. In such
cases, the contract consideration should be split into separately
identifiable components including one for the construction and delivery
of real estate units. For example, a real estate company in addition to
the consideration on the flat, charges for property maintenance services
for a period of two years, after occupancy. Such revenue is accounted
for separately and over the two year period of providing the maintenance
services. The consideration received or receivable for the contract
should be allocated to each component on the basis of the fair market
value of each component. Such a split-up may or may not be available in
the agreements, and even when available may or may not be at fair value.
When the fair market value of all the components is greater than the
total consideration on the contract, the Guidance Note does not specify
how the discount is allocated to the various components. Under the
proposed revenue recognition standard Ind AS 115, the allocation is done
on a proportion of the relative market value.

Requirement under Ind AS 11

The above guidance is generally not inconsistent with the requirements of Ind AS.

Illustration : Guidance Note vs Ind AS

Example under Guidance Note Relevant Details of a project are as below:

Total saleable area 20,000 Square Feet
Land cost Rs. 300.00 lakh
Estimated construction costs Rs. 300.00 lakh
Estimated project costs Rs. 600.00 lakh
Work Completed till the reporting date (includes land cost of Rs. 300 lakh and construction cost of Rs. 60
lakh) – Scenario 1
Rs. 360.00 lakh
Work Completed till the reporting date (includes land cost of Rs. 300 lakh and construction cost of Rs. 90
lakh) – Scenario 2
Rs. 390.00 lakh
Total Area sold till reporting date. 5,000 Square Feet
Total sale consideration as per agreements of sale executed Rs. 200.00 lakh
Amount realised till the end of reporting period Rs. 50.00 lakh
Percentage of work completed
Scenario 1 60% of the total project cost
(including land cost or 20% of construction
cost)
Scenario 1 65% of the total project cost
(including land cost or 30% of construction
cost)
Application of requirements

Scenario 1

At
the end of the reporting period the enterprise will not be able to
recognise any revenue as reasonable level of construction, which is 25%
of the total construction cost, has not been achieved, though 10% of the
agreement amount has been realised. Scenario 2 Apparently, the company
meets all the criteria for revenue recognition from the project. It
therefore recognised revenue arising from the contract using the POCM.
However, revenue recognised should not exceed estimated total revenue
from legally binding contracts. The revenue recognition and profits will
be as under:

Revenue Recognised
(65% of Rs. 200 lakh as per the agreement
of sale)
Rs. 130.00 lakh
Proportionate cost of revenue
(5000 /20000 x 390)
Rs. 97.50 lakh
Income from the Project Rs. 32.50 lakh
Work in progress to be carried forward
(Rs. 390 lakh – Rs. 97.50 lakh)
Rs. 292.50 lakh
Example under Ind AS 11

Analysis of Scenario 1

  • It is questionable
    whether the 25% threshold under
    the Guidance Note for revenue recognition will apply under Ind AS. The
    real estate entity may conclude that the 20% threshold is reasonable and
    thereby start recognising revenue.
  • Even if the real estate
    entity believes that the threshold of revenue recognition has not been
    reached, revenue will have to be recognised. The recognition of revenue
    is restricted to the extent of costs incurred, which are probable of
    recovery. Analysis of Scenario 2
  • Some may argue that under
    Ind AS 11 the cost of land does not represent “contract activity” or
    “work performed” and therefore is not to be considered in determining
    the stage of completion. Therefore percentage completion is not 65% but
    is 30%.

Rs in lakhs
Revenue recognised 30% if Rs 200 lakh 60
Proportionate cost of revenue 30% of (5000/20000 x 600) 45
Profit to be recognised 15
Work in progress (390 – 45) 345

Overall Conclusion

The ICAI should address all the above issues and preferably
come out with a Revised Guidance Note to deal with
Real Estate Accounting under Ind AS.

Unabsorbed losses and depreciation – Difference in treatment

fiogf49gjkf0d
Difference between Accounting Standards (AS) and Ind–AS in regard to recognition of Deferred Asset (DTA ) in regard to unabsorbed losses and carry forward depreciation.

There is a difference in the virtual Certainty Principles in AS 22 and Ind AS 12 for recognition of DTA on unabsorbed losses and carry forward depreciation.

Accounting Standard – 22
AS 22 Accounting for Taxes on Income lays down the general criterion of “reasonable certainty” for the recognition of a deferred tax asset (DTA ). However, if an entity has unabsorbed depreciation or carry forward of tax losses, it needed to satisfy a much higher threshold of “virtual certainty supported by convincing evidence” to recognise DTA . Virtual certainty refers to the extent of certainty, which, for all practical purposes, can be considered certain. Virtual certainty cannot be based merely on forecasts of performance such as business plans. Virtual certainty is not a matter of perception and is to be supported by convincing evidence. Evidence is a matter of fact. To be convincing, the evidence should be available at the reporting date in a concrete form, for example, a profitable binding export order, cancellation of which will result in payment of heavy damages by the defaulting party. On the other hand, a projection of the future profits made by an enterprise based on the future capital expenditures or future restructuring etc., submitted even to an outside agency, e.g., to a credit agency for obtaining loans and accepted by that agency cannot, in isolation, be considered as convincing evidence. Even subsequent opinions from the Expert Advisory Committee have emphasised the need for profitable binding orders for recognition of DTA .

Apparently, the “virtual certainty” criteria laid down in AS 22 for the recognition of DTA was difficult to implement because it required the existence of profitable binding orders. In many industries, the requirement for orders does not exist, and hence, it was difficult to demonstrate virtual certainty in those cases, despite the existence of other convincing evidence.

Ind AS – 12
The requirement in Ind AS 12 is somewhat relaxed when compared to the requirements in AS 22. Under Ind AS 12, when an entity has a history of recent losses, the entity recognises a deferred tax asset arising from unused tax losses or tax credits only to the extent that the entity has sufficient taxable temporary differences or there is convincing other evidence that sufficient taxable profit will be available against which the unused tax losses or unused tax credits can be utilised by the entity. An entity considers the following criteria in assessing the probability that taxable profit will be available against which the unused tax losses or unused tax credits can be utilised:

a) whether the entity has sufficient taxable temporary differences relating to the same taxation authority and the same taxable entity, which will result in taxable amounts against which the unused tax losses or unused tax credits can be utilised before they expire;
b) whether it is probable that the entity will have taxable profits before the unused tax losses or unused tax credits expire;
c) whether the unused tax losses result from identifiable causes which are unlikely to recur; and
d) whether tax planning opportunities are available to the entity that will create taxable profit in the period in which the unused tax losses or unused tax credits can be utilised.

A deferred tax asset shall be recognised for the carryforward of unused tax losses and unused tax credits to the extent that it is probable that future taxable profit will be available against which the unused tax losses and unused tax credits can be utilised. To the extent that it is not probable that taxable profit will be available against which the unused tax losses or unused tax credits can be utilised, the deferred tax asset is not recognised.

Differences
Whilst the requirement in Ind AS 12 are somewhat relaxed; it does not necessarily mean that it has become absolutely easy to recognise DTA on unabsorbed losses and carry forward depreciation. Nonetheless, there could be many situations where a DTA can be recognised under Ind AS 12 but not under AS 22. For example, in the scenarios below, DTA is not recognised under AS 22, but may be recognised under Ind AS 12.

a) A newly set-up entity (New Co.) incurred significant losses in the first three years of operations due to reasons such as advertising and initial setup related costs, significant borrowing costs and lower level of activity in the first two years of operations. Over the years, there has been a significant increase in the operations of New Co. and its advertisement cost has stabilised to a normal level. Further, it has raised new capital during the year and repaid its major borrowing. The cumulative effect of all the events is that the New Co. has started earning profits from the fourth year. It is expected to make substantial profits in the next three years that may absorb the entire accumulated tax loss of the entity. However, the nature of the business is such that it does not have any binding orders.

b) A battery manufacturer (Battery Co.), who had incurred tax losses in the past, enters into an exclusive sales agreement with a car manufacturer (Car Co.). According to the agreement, all the cars manufactured by Car Co. will only use batteries manufactured by Battery Co. Though Car Co. has not guaranteed any minimum off-take, there is significant demand for its cars in the market.

c) An oil exploration company may have discovered proven oil reserves, whose extraction will result in significant profits based on current and forward prices of oil.

The virtual certainty principle has a fatal flaw; since nothing in this world is virtually certain. Even profitable binding orders could be cancelled without receiving any penalty or the buyer/seller could end up getting bankrupt. The principle of convincing evidence under Ind-AS12 is not only fair, but is also practical to apply, compared to the “virtual certainty” principle under AS 22. The standard setters should immediately revise AS 22 and bring it in line with Ind-AS 12.

levitra

Presentation of Excise Duty under Ind AS

fiogf49gjkf0d
Query
Paragraph 8 of IAS 18 “Revenue” states as follows:
“Revenue includes only the gross inflows of economic benefits received
and receivable by the entity on its own account. Amounts collected on
behalf of third parties such as sales taxes, goods and services taxes
and value added taxes are not economic benefits which flow to the entity
and do not result in increases in equity. Therefore, they are excluded
from revenue. Similarly, in an agency relationship, the gross inflows of
economic benefits include amounts collected on behalf of the principal
and which do not result in increases in equity for the entity. The
amounts collected on behalf of the principal are not revenue. Instead,
revenue is the amount of commission.”

Paragraph 47 of Ind AS 115
“Revenue from Contracts with Customers” states, “An entity shall
consider the terms of the contract and its customary business practices
to determine the transaction price. The transaction price is the amount
of consideration to which an entity expects to be entitled in exchange
for transferring promised goods or services to a customer, excluding
amounts collected on behalf of third parties (for example, some sales
taxes). The consideration promised in a contract with a customer may
include fixed amounts, variable amounts, or both.”

IAS 18 and
its replacement IFRS 15 (Ind AS 115) have established a principle that
is very broad and may not be conclusive in determining the presentation
of certain indirect taxes. For example, both the standards may result in
requiring sales tax to be presented as a tax collected from the
customer on behalf of the government; however, the presentation of
excise duty may not be abundantly clear.

The current Indian GAAP AS 9 ‘Revenue Recognition’ states as follows with respect to presentation of excise duty.

The
amount of revenue from sales transactions (turnover) should be
disclosed in the following manner on the face of the statement of profit
or loss:

Turnover (Gross) XX

Less: Excise Duty XX

Turnover (Net) XX

The
amount of excise duty to be deducted from the turnover should be the
total excise duty for the year except the excise duty related to the
difference between the closing stock and opening stock. The excise duty
related to the difference between the closing stock and opening stock
should be recognised separately in the statement of profit or loss, with
an explanatory note in the notes to accounts to explain the nature of
the two amounts of excise duty.

AS 9 is very prescriptive and
does not establish a clear principle for requiring a net presentation of
excise duty. Besides it contains a fatal flaw. On the one hand, it
requires a net presentation, which may mean that excise duty is
collected from the customer on behalf of the government. On the other
hand, it requires excise duty to be included in the cost of inventory,
which may mean that excise duty is paid by the manufacturer as part of
its cost of producing the inventory. Both these principles are
absolutely contradictory to each other. Therefore, AS 9 may not be very
helpful in determining the presentation of excise duty under Ind AS.

Arguments supporting a gross presentation of excise duty under Ind AS
Excise
duty is a duty on manufacture or production of excisable goods in
India. The law in India provides that a duty of excise on excisable
goods which are produced or manufactured in India shall be levied and collected at the time of removal of goods from factory premises or from approved place of storage. The taxable event is the manufacture or production of an excisable article and the duty is levied and collected at a later stage for administrative convenience. The levy of excise duty is not restricted only to excisable goods manufactured and intended for sale. It is also leviable on excisable goods manufactured or produced in a factory for internal consumption. Although the duty is usually paid only when the goods leave the warehouse, this is described as merely a practical expedient. The duty becomes payable once the goods are manufactured and is payable even if the goods are not sold (eg., are scrapped or utilised for own use). Further, scrapping of inventory post manufacture nullifies the whole transaction and any credit availed on inputs needs to be reversed. Thus the manufacturer is not acting as an agent for the tax authority.

The excise duty recovered should be included as part of revenues. The excise duty is a tax on manufacture and the risk of financial loss relating to non-recovery of this duty is with the manufacturer. This duty is similar to any other cost of production and is payable by the manufacturer irrespective of whether it ultimately recovers it from another party or even if it does not sell the goods ultimately. Therefore, the Company is not necessarily recovering these taxes on behalf of the government. In other words, the Company is not acting as an agent for the tax authority but is acting as principal for the whole amount.

Excise duty may be levied on different basis for different industries. These may be linked to the transaction value or Maximum Retail Price (MRP) or based on a specific valuation or a volume-based determination. In the case of sales tax or VAT , levy is on the basis of the sales price charged to customer. Therefore it appears that excise duty is more a cost of production rather than a levy on sales.

Arguments supporting a net presentation of excise duty under Ind AS

The excise duty should be reduced from revenues. From a manufacturer perspective, excise duty is a regulatory levy which is ultimately borne by the consumers. It does not add any value to the goods sold and hence, including it in revenue will not reflect the real revenue of the manufacturer.

IAS18.8 specifically states that amounts collected on behalf of third parties such as sales taxes, goods and services taxes and value added taxes are not economic benefits which flow to the entity and do not result in increases in equity. The excise duty collected from the customer (as evidenced in the excise invoice) is only a recovery of excise duty paid by the company and therefore does not result in an increase in equity. The excise duty is also similar to a value added tax and accordingly not to be included within revenues. In spirit, the excise duty mechanism is not substantially different from the way sales tax operates, and hence excise duty should be presented in the same manner as sales tax. In other words, revenue is presented net of excise duty.

Amount of excise duty forming part of the sale price of the goods is required to be indicated separately in all documents relating to assessment of duty, e.g., excise invoice used for clearance of excisable goods. It is, however, open to a manufacturer to recover excise duty separately or not to make a separate recovery but charge a consolidated sale price inclusive of excise duty. The incidence of excise duty is deemed to be passed on to the buyer, unless contrary is proved by the payer of excise duty. The buyer can subsequently claim a credit for the amount of excise duty paid (or deemed to be paid) as part of the purchase price. Further, the excise duty paid as a result of purchase of inputs for production/manufacture (as was included in the price of purchases), is available as a duty credit which is set off against the duty payable on production. As a result, effectively, there are no excise duty costs borne by the entities from purchase or production/sale of the goods and costs are borne by the ultimate consumers. In other words, the mechanism relating to excise duty is not materially different from sales tax, and hence the same principles should apply.

The excise duty rates are prescribed by the law and full amount paid is included in the invoice value to be recovered from customers. Further the obligation to make the payment arises only at the time of dispatch to customers. The duty is levied based on invoice value and is required to be separately stated on the invoice itself creating a constructive obligation to transfer the impact of any change in rates to the customers. The above analysis seems to indicate that while legally manufacturers/producers could have the primary obligation to pay the duty; the collection mechanism indicates that they are acting as collection agents.

In case a certain product is exempt from excise (not dutiable) at the time of manufacture, but subsequently is made dutiable on the date of removal for sale, such goods will continue to not be chargeable to excise – considering the status on date of manufacture. However, if a certain rate of duty is applicable at the time of manufacture (say 8%), but changes by the date of removal (say 12%), the rate prevailing at the time of removal (12%) will apply. This provides a mixed indicator of whether excise duty is a cost of manufacture or a duty on sales. Sales tax is usually calculated as a percentage of price charged to the customer. Therefore, if there is a change in the tax rate between manufacture and sale, the price charged to the customer (inclusive of tax) will need to be adjusted for the new tax rate.

In case of sales return, credit is allowed for the excise duty originally paid. Similarly excise duty is refunded if goods that left the factory are returned back to the factory. This operates similar to sales tax. For example, sales returns usually within a period of 6 months are considered for adjustment in sales tax liability.

-Assessment under US GAAP

In the absence of specific guidance under IAS 18/ other IFRS, reference has been made to other GAAP (US GAAP EITF Issue 99-19 Reporting Revenue Gross as a Principal versus Net as an Agent). Under the EITF 99- 19, the various indicators supporting the gross and net presentation are summarised below-

Whether an entity is acting as a principal or agent in collecting excise taxes on behalf of the authorities is a matter of judgment, and no one factor may support a
conclusion on its own, and the relative strength of each indicator may be considered

a. Whether the entity is exposed to financial risks in respect of the excise Duty.

i. General inventory risk

Gross presentation-Excise is levied once goods leave an entity’s warehouse (i.e. even where goods are used for internal consumption and irrespective whether they are sold or not). Thus, an entity would bear the risk of the excise duty where goods may not be sold.

Net presentation- Excise duty may be recovered in cases where goods are damaged, obsolete, or not sellable and thus in this case, the inventory risk for
excise duty would not lie with the entity.

ii. Credit risk
Gross presentation- An entity is required to pay excise on the goods, irrespective of whether they are sold or not. While the amounts can be recovered from the customers on sale, the credit risk will lie with the entity if receivables are not collected.

Net presentation- No matters to support.

b. Whether the entity has the discretion to determine the price of the goods charged to the customer (in respect of the excise duty)

Gross presentation- An entity is required to disclose the amount of excise duty forming part of the sale price of the goods is required to be indicated separately in all documents relating to assessment of duty, e.g., excise invoice used for clearance of excisable goods. It is, however, open to a manufacturer to recover excise duty

separately or not to make a separate recovery but charge a consolidated sale price inclusive of excise duty. Further, an entity would have the final authority in determining the final selling price of the product and may decide to recover a part or the whole excise duty from its customers.

Also, excise is determined as a percentage of the production cost rather than the sales cost.

Net presentation – If excise increases/decreases would mandate (by law) the price of the goods to increase/decrease, the discretion to determining price in respect of
excise may not lie with the entity.

-Guidance Note on Accounting Treatment for Excise Duty

The relevant extracts are given in the table below. Excise duty is a duty on manufacture or production of excisable goods in India. Section 3 of the Central Excise Act, 1944, deals with charge of Excise Duty. This Section provides that a duty of excise on excisable goods which are produced or manufactured in India shall be levied and collected in such manner as may be prescribed. This prescription is contained in the Central Excise Rules, 1944 which provide that excise duty shall be collected at the time of removal of goods from factory premises or from approved place of storage (Rule 49). Rate of duty and tariff valuation to be applied is the one in force on that date, i.e., the date of removal (Rule 9A) and not the date of manufacture. This difference in the point of time between taxable event, viz., manufacture and that of its collection has been examined and discussed in a number of judgements. For instance, the Supreme Court in the case of Wallace Flour Mills Co. Ltd. vs. CCE [1989 (44) ELT 598] summed up the legal position as under:

“It is well settled by the scheme of the Act as clarified by several decisions that even though the taxable event is the manufacture or production of an excisable article, the duty can be levied and collected at a later stage for administrative convenience. The Scheme of the said Act read with the relevant rules framed under the Act particularly Rule 9A of the said rules, reveals that the taxable event is the fact of manufacture of production of an excisable article, the payment of duty is related to the date of removal of such article from the factory.”

Supreme Court in another case, viz., CCE vs. Vazir Sultan Tobacco Co. [1996 (83) ELT 3] held as under:

“We are of the opinion that Section 3 cannot be read as shifting the levy from the stage of manufacture or production of goods to the stage of removal. The levy is and remains upon the manufacture or production alone. Only the collection part of it is shifted to the stage of removal.”

The levy of excise duty is not restricted only to excisable goods manufactured and intended for sale. It is also leviable on excisable goods manufactured or produced in a factory for internal consumption. Such intermediate products may be used in manufacture of final products or for repairs within the factory or for use as capital goods within the factory. Excisable goods so used for captive consumption may be eligible for exemption under specific notifications issued from time to time. Finished excisable goods cleared from the place of removal may also be eligible for whole or partial duty exemption in terms of notifications issued from time to time. Such exemption, subject to specified limits, if any, may relate to a manufacturer, e.g., a small scale industrial unit. Exemption may be goods specific, e.g., handicrafts are currently wholly exempt from duty. The exemption may also be end-use specific, e.g., goods for use by defence services. Excisable goods can be removed for export out of India either whoIly without payment of duty or under bond or on payment of duty under claim for rebate of duty paid.

Excisable goods, after completion of their manufacturing process, are required to be kept in a storeroom or other identified place of storage in a factory till the time of their clearance. Each such storeroom or storage place is required to be declared to the Excise Authorities and approved by them. Such storeroom or storage place is generally referred to as a Bonded Storeroom. Dutiable goods are also allowed, subject to approval of Excise Authorities, to be removed without payment of duty, to a Bonded Warehouse outside factory. In such cases, excise duty is collected at the time of clearance of goods from such Bonded Warehouses.

Amount of excise duty forming part of the sale price of the goods is required to be indicated separately in all documents relating to assessment of duty, e.g., excise invoice used for clearance of excisable goods (section 12A). It is, however, open to a manufacturer to recover excise duty separately or not to make a separate recovery but charge a consolidated sale price inclusive of excise  duty. The incidence of excise duty is deemed to be passed on to the buyer, unless contrary is proved by the payer of excise duty (section 12B).

In considering the appropriate treatment of excise duty for the purpose of determination of cost for inventory valuation, it is necessary to consider whether excise duty should be considered differently from other expenses. Admittedly, excise duty is an indirect tax but it cannot, for that reason alone, be treated differently from other expenses. Excise duty arises as a consequence of manufacture of excisable goods irrespective of the manner of use/disposal of goods thereafter, e.g., sale, destruction and captive consumption. It does not cease to be a levy merely because the same may be remitted by appropriate authority in case of destruction or exempted in case goods are used for further manufacture of excisable goods in the factory. Tax (other than a tax on income or sale) payable by a manufacturer is as much a cost of manufacture as any other expenditure incurred by him and it does not cease to be an expenditure merely because it is an exaction or a levy or because it is  avoidable. In fact, in a wider context, any expenditure is an imposition which a manufacturer would like to minimise.

Excise duty contributes to the value of the product. A”duty paid” product has a higher value than a product on which duty remains to be paid and no sale or further utilisation of excisable goods can take place unless the duty is paid. It is, therefore, a necessary expense which must be incurred if the goods are to be put in the location and condition in which they can be sold or further used in the manufacturing process.

Excise duty cannot, therefore, be treated differently from other expenses for the purpose of determination of cost for inventory valuation. To do so would be contrary to the basic objective of carrying forward the cost related to inventories until these are sold or consumed. As stated above, liability to excise duty arises even on excisable goods manufactured and used in further manufacturing process. In such a case, excise duty paid (if the same is not exempted) on the intermediary product becomes a manufacturing expense. Excise duty paid on such intermediary products must, therefore, be included in the valuation of work-in-process or finished goods manufactured by the subsequent processing of such products.

Since the point of time at which duty is collected is not necessarily the point of time at which the liability to pay the duty arises, situations will often arise when duty remains to be collected on goods which have been manufactured. The most common of these situations arises when the goods are stored under bond, i.e., in a bonded Store Room, and the duty is paid when the goods are removed from such bonded Store Room.

Divergent views exist as to whether provision should be made in the accounts for the liability in respect of goods which are not cleared or which are lying in bond at the balance sheet date.

The arguments in favour of the creation of liability are briefly summarised under:

a) The liability for excise duty arises at the point of time at which the manufacture is completed and it is only its collection which is deferred; and

b) failure to provide for the liability will result in the balance sheet not showing a true and fair view of the state of affairs of the enterprise. The arguments against the creation of the liability, briefly summarised, are as under:

a) Though the liability for excise duty arises at the point of time at which the manufacture is completed, it gets quantified only when goods are cleared from the factory or the bonded warehouse;

b) the actual liability for excise duty may get modified by the time the goods are cleared from the factory or bonded warehouse;
c) where goods are damaged or destroyed before clearance, excise duty may be waived by the competent authority and therefore the duty may never be paid; and

d) failure to provide for the liability does not affect the profits or losses.

Since the liability for excise duty arises when the manufacture of the goods is completed, it is necessary to create a provision for liability of unpaid excise duty on stocks lying in the factory or bonded warehouse. It is true that the recovery of the duty is deferred till the goods are removed from the factory or the bonded warehouse and the exact quantification will, therefore, be at the time of removal and that estimate of duty made on balance sheet date may change on account of subsequent events, e.g., change in the rate of duty and exports under bond. But, this is true of many other items also, e.g., provision for gratuity and this cannot be an argument for not making a provision for existing liability on estimated basis.

The estimate of such liability can be made at the rates in force on the balance sheet date. For this purpose, other factors affecting liability should also be  onsidered, e.g., exemptions being availed by the enterprise, pattern of sales — export, domestic etc. Thus, if a small scale undertaking is availing the benefit of exemption allowed in a particular financial year and declares that it wishes to avail such exemption during next financial year also, excise duty liability should be calculated after taking into consideration the availability of exemption under the relevant notification. Similarly, if an enterprise is captively consuming all its production of a specific product and has been availing of exemption from payment of duty on that product, no provision for excise duty may be required in respect of non-duty paid stock of that product lying in factory or bonded warehouse.

– Summary of Recommendations
a) Excise duty should be considered as a manufacturing expense and like other manufacturing expenses be considered as an element of cost for inventory valuation.
b) Where excise duty is paid on excisable goods and such goods are subsequently utilised in the manufacturing process, the duty paid on such goods, if the same is not recoverable from taxing authorities, becomes a manufacturing cost and must be included in the valuation of workin- progress or finished goods arising from the subsequent processing of such goods.
c) Where the liability for excise duty has been incurred but its collection is deferred, provision for the unpaid liability should be made.
d) Excise duty cannot be treated as a period cost. The Guidance Note requires excise duty to be treated as a cost of production. If a principal vs. agent analysis is done, the Guidance Note position would effectively translate into treating the manufacturer as the principal rather than an agent who pays excise duty on behalf of the customer. However, the Guidance Note deals with accounting of excise duty. It does not deal with presentation of excise duty in the financial statements. Asstated earlier, AS 9 requires a net presentation of excise duty. The net presentation of excise duty is contradictory to the principle under AS 9 and the Guidance Note to treat excise duty as the manufacturer’s cost.

Conclusion
Overall, it appears that there is an argument both for a gross presentation and a net presentation. Therefore at this stage, either gross presentation or net presentation under Ind AS would be acceptable. It may be more appropriate for the ICAI to come out with a clear guidance so that there can be consistency in the presentation of excise duty.

Tax Consequences of Interest Payments on Perpetual Debt

fiogf49gjkf0d
A debt which does not contain a contractual obligation to pay to the holder of the instrument both the principal and interest amount is known as perpetual debt. That does not mean that the issuer will not redeem the debt or pay interest on it. Generally, the instrument will contain an economic compulsion so that the issuer will be compelled to redeem the debt and pay interest, such as step up of interest rates on the instrument, liquidation of the issuer company, dividend blocker, etc. In accordance with Ind AS 32, such a debt is not a liability but is classified as an equity instrument. The interest paid on such a debt is treated as a distribution to equity holders.

Interestingly, from the Income-tax Act perspective, certain tax advisors argue that perpetual bonds are issued as bonds and hence result in a debtor-creditor relationship. Merely classifying them as ‘equity’ in the financial statements and showing interest payments in a manner similar to dividend to equity holders should not deprive the company of claiming these interest payments for tax deduction. This article assumes that interest payments on perpetual bonds are deductible under the Income-tax Act.

Query
Under Ind AS 12 Income Taxes, should the tax deduction on interest payments be recognised in profit or loss, or directly in equity of the issuer company?

View 1
Paragraph 35 of Ind AS 32 Financial Instruments: Presentation requires that distributions to holders of an equity instrument and transaction costs of equity transactions should be recognised directly in equity. Consequently, the interest payments on, and the costs of issuing, financial instruments themselves are recognised directly in equity. Paragraph 57 of Ind AS 12 requires that presentation of income tax consequences should be consistent with the presentation of the transactions and events themselves that give rise to those income tax consequences.

View 2
Paragraph 52B of Ind AS 12 provides more guidance on the presentation of the income tax consequences of dividends, which requires those income tax consequences to be recognised in profit or loss.

The following example deals with the measurement of current and deferred tax assets and liabilities for an entity in a jurisdiction where income taxes are payable at a higher rate on undistributed profits (50%) with an amount being refundable when profits are distributed. The tax rate on distributed profits is 35%. At the end of the reporting period, 31st December 20X1, the entity does not recognise a liability for dividends proposed or declared after the reporting period. As a result, no dividends are recognised in the year 20X1. Taxable income for 20X1 is Rs. 100,000. The net taxable temporary difference for the year 20X1 is Rs.40,000.

The entity recognises a current tax liability and a current income tax expense of Rs.50,000. No asset is recognised for the amount potentially recoverable as a result of future dividends. The entity also recognises a deferred tax liability and deferred tax expense of Rs.20,000 (Rs. 40,000 at 50%) representing the income taxes that the entity will pay when it recovers or settles the carrying amounts of its assets and liabilities based on the tax rate applicable to undistributed profits.

Subsequently, on 15th March 20X2, the entity recognises dividends of Rs.10,000 from previous operating profits as a liability. On 15th March 20X2, the entity recognises the recovery of income taxes of Rs.1,500 (15% of the dividends recognised as a liability) as a current tax asset and as a reduction of current income tax expense for 20X2.

Author’s View

View 1 is the preferred view. With respect to income tax consequences of interest payments on financial instruments that are classified as equity, it is important to understand whether those income tax consequences are linked to past transactions or events that were recognised in profit or loss. This is because, in accordance with paragraph 52B of Ind AS 12, the rationale for the accounting requirement in example above is because income tax consequences of dividends are more directly linked to past transactions or events than to distributions to owners.

Income tax consequences arising from interest payments on financial instruments that are classified as equity would not be linked to past transactions or events that were recognised in profit or loss, because:

(a) these interest payments that trigger a tax deduction could be made, irrespective of the existence of retained earnings; and
(b) income tax consequences arising from these interest payments cannot be associated with anything other than the interest payments themselves, because it is these interest payments that create a tax deduction.

Consequently, View 2 is not preferred. However, a plain technical reading of Ind AS 12 does allow the recognition of the tax credit in the P&L account. Without the amendment of Ind AS 12, View 2 should also be acceptable. The view selected should be applied consistently.

IND AS – TOO MANY UNANSWERED QUESTIONS

fiogf49gjkf0d
The first phase for Ind AS implementation will soon roll out with quarterly reporting from the first quarter of financial year 2016-17 along with comparative numbers for 2015-16. Despite being so close to the deadline, there are quite a few areas where there is lack of clarity or/and lack of legislation. This article discusses these issues at a very broad level.

Roadmap
One of the key issues with the roadmap is the alignment of implementation dates between NBFC companies and non-NBFC companies. This issue will apply to a consolidated group that has an NBFC company and a non-NBFC company. When a NBFC is below a non- NBFC company, there are several approaches on how the regulators may deal with the issue:

1. Allow the NBFC’s statutory accounts prepared under Indian GAAP to be consolidated without converting to Ind AS

2. The NBFC company prepares separate statutory financial statements under Indian GAAP, but will have to prepare Ind AS numbers for consolidation purposes

3. The NBFC is allowed early conversion to Ind AS, and hence for standalone statutory financial statements as well as consolidation purposes it applies Ind AS

4. The implementation dates for non-NBFC companies are postponed, to align them with the dates when NBFC have to apply Ind AS

When the NBFC is on the top of the structure, the problem is more serious. In this case, the non NBFC companies below the NBFC company may have prepared their financial statements as per Ind AS. For purposes of consolidation by the NBFC the non-NBFC companies beneath will have to continue preparing their accounts under Indian GAAP as well. This problem can be avoided if the NBFC company is exempted from preparing consolidated financial statements, till such time the NBFC is required to prepare Ind AS financial statements.

As can be seen each of the above approaches have their own merits/demerits. The regulators will have to take an appropriate decision after consultations with the affected groups.

The other major challenge with the roadmap is the mandatory application of Ind AS 115 Revenue from Contracts with Customers and Ind AS 109 Financial Instruments. Though the rest of the world will apply these standards much later, Indian companies will have to apply them immediately on Ind AS transition without any fall back to their predecessor standards.

A TRG (Transition Resource Group) has been set up by IASB and FASB to specifically deal with implementation and interpretation issues around IFRS 15 (Ind AS 115). Due to significant implementation issues, the IASB and FAS B are deferring the applicability of IFRS 15 by one year. India is probably the only country that applies Ind AS 115 mandatorily. It is unfortunate that India has to apply Ind AS 115 when the rest of world is still debating on several issues under Ind AS 115. In the authors opinion IAS 18 Revenue/IAS 11 Construction Contracts should apply with a choice to an early adoption Ind AS 115.

In a group that amongst other companies also has an NBFC and a foreign listing; the following situation may develop with respect to Ind AS 109:

1. The NBFC prepares its stand alone accounts under Indian GAAP

2. For India consolidation purposes the NBFC applies Ind AS 109

3. For its global listing purposes the NBFC does not use the option to early apply IFRS 9, but instead applies IAS 39.

NACAS and the ICAI will have to apply their minds on the subject and immediately come out with proper amendments after consulting the affected groups.

Minimum Alternate Tax
MAT is an unfinished legislation vis-a-vis Ind AS. Consider the following:

1. An infrastructure company has to recognise construction revenue upfront, as it is deemed to have exchanged its construction services for an intangible asset, viz., right to collect toll revenue from the public. This will result in recognition of margin and therefore will expose infrastructure companies to a potential MAT liability. This may further impair the ease of doing business in India for infrastructure companies.

2. There is no clarity on what line in the P&L, MAT will apply. This is important under Ind AS because the P&L comprises of two integral parts. The first part is the P&L before comprehensive income. The second part includes other comprehensive income, for example, gain on fair valuation of equity shares, when that option is used.

3. The first time adoption of Ind AS will result in a large number of adjustments which will be recognised in retained earnings. There is no clarity on whether and how MAT will apply to these items.

SEBI regulations
SEBI will have to provide appropriate format under clause 41 for reporting quarterly numbers under Ind AS. In the case of five year restatement for IPO purposes, it should be ideally reduced to three years and those numbers need not be restated to Ind AS, if the roadmap did not apply to the company for the earlier years.

Companies Act
Section 52 of the Companies Act prohibits a specified class of companies from using securities premium account for specified purposes, for example, applying the securities premium to adjust redemption premium on debentures or bonds. It was presumed that when Ind AS is rolled out, the specified class of companies will be notified to be companies that have applied Ind AS. There is no notification yet, from the Ministry of Corporate Affairs.

There is neither clarity nor a change in legislation with respect to distributable profits. Consider an Infrastructure company that recognises huge revenue and margins upfront, thought the cash is received in the form of toll revenue over the next several years. A prudent policy would be not to distribute the accounting profits that will realise over several future years. However, in the absence of legislation this may be difficult to enforce. It is not clear how the first time adoption changes and other comprehensive income (some of which are recycled and others are not recycled to the P&L), will impact distributable profits.

Conclusion
There is very little time, and the government and NACAS should act swiftly to provide the necessary clarifications and make appropriate changes to the legislations. This is imperative for the smooth implementation of Ind AS.

levitra

GUIDANCE NOTE ON ACCOUNTING FOR DERIVATIVE CONTRACTS

fiogf49gjkf0d
The recently issued ‘Guidance Note on Accounting for Derivative Contracts’ (GN) under Indian GAAP amongst other things will apply to forward contracts or derivatives that hedge a highly probable forecasted transaction or firm commitment. It will also apply to derivatives entered into for hedging both foreign currency and interest rate risk such as a cross currency interest rate swap which are outside the scope of AS-11.

The GN however does not cover items that are within the scope of other standards, for example, investments which are in the scope of AS-13 and forward exchange contracts to hedge existing items in the balance sheet which are in the scope of AS-11.

The GN is not meant to be exhaustive, for example, it does not cover accounting of embedded derivatives.

The GN contains the following broad requirements:

i. All derivative contracts should be recognised on the balance sheet and measured at fair value.

ii. If any entity decides not to use hedge accounting as described in this GN, it should account for its derivatives at fair value with changes in fair value being recognised in the statement of profit and loss.

iii. If an entity decides to apply hedge accounting as described in this GN, it should be able to clearly identify its risk management objective, the risk that it is hedging, how it will measure the derivative instrument if its risk management objective is being met and document this adequately at the inception of the hedge relationship and on an ongoing basis.

iv. An entity may decide to use hedge accounting for certain derivative contracts and for derivatives not included as part of Hedge Accounting, it will apply the principles at (i) and (ii) above.

v. Adequate disclosures of accounting policies, risk management objectives and hedging activities should be made in its financial statements.

In case a derivative contract is not classified as a hedging instrument because it does not meet the required criteria or an entity decides against such designation, it will be measured at fair value and changes in fair value will be recognised immediately in the statement of profit and loss.

Transitional provisions in the GN
The transitional provisions in the GN requires any cumulative impact (net of taxes) to be recognised in reserves as a transition adjustment and disclosed separately. The GN becomes applicable for accounting periods beginning on or after 1st April, 2016; its earlier application is encouraged.

Query
In March 2008, the ICAI issued an announcement that in case of derivatives, if an entity does not follow AS 30, keeping in view the principle of prudence as enunciated in Accounting Standard (AS) 1, Disclosure of Accounting Policies, the entity is required to provide for losses in respect of all outstanding derivative contracts at the balance sheet date by marking them to market.

Accordingly, Company Aggrieved Ltd. (CAL), accounting policy is to recognise mark to market losses on derivative, and ignore mark to market gains. As per its accounting policy this exercise is carried out on an itemised basis (and not on a portfolio basis).

Assume CAL is a private company with a low net worth and therefore is not covered under Ind AS, nor does it want to apply it voluntarily. On 1st April, 2016, CAL expects a huge unrecognised mark to market gain, which under the GN it is required to be recognised in reserves. CAL falls in the normal income tax bracket, and is not covered under MAT. For certain reasons, CAL wants to recognise the unrecognised mark to market profits at 31st March, 2016 in the P&L. It feels aggrieved that it is not allowed to do so under the GN.

Can CAL recognise in the year ended 31st March 2016 P&L, the unrecognised mark to market gains?

Author’s Response
Yes. The transitional provisions in the GN are conflicting with the requirement of notified accounting standard AS 5 Net Profit or Loss for the Period, Prior Period Items and Changes in Accounting Policies. As per AS 5, any changes in accounting policies, other than those that are caused on account of a new accounting standard is recognised in the P&L. The changes in accounting policies caused as a result of a new accounting standard are recognised as per the requirement contained in that new accounting standard. The new accounting standard may require the change in accounting policy to be recognised in the reserves.

In the instant case, the change in accounting policy is not caused as a result of a new accounting standard but due to a new Guidance Note. The changes in accounting policy due to the GN should therefore be necessarily recognised in the P&L. This will be the technically right thing to do. However, given that the GN has been issued under the authority of the ICAI, it appears that entities will have an option of either following the principle of AS 5 or to follow the requirements of the GN. In other words, the unrecognised mark to market gains can either be recognised in the 31st March 2016 P&L or alternatively is adjusted in the reserve at 1st April 2016.

levitra

Income Computation and Disclos URE Standards (ICDS) – No Tax Neutrality

fiogf49gjkf0d
Background
The Indian Accounting Standards (Ind AS), the
Indian version of International Financial Reporting Standards, will have
significant impact on financial statements for many entities. Ind AS’s
are meant to primarily serve the needs of investors and hence are not
suitable for the purposes of tax computation. A clear need was felt for
tax accounting standards that would guide the computation of taxable
income.

The Central Government (CG) constituted a Committee in
December 2010, to draft Income Computation and Disclosure Standards
(ICDS). Section 145 of the Indian Income tax Act bestows the power to
the CG to notify ICDS to be followed by specified class of taxpayers or
in respect of specified class of income.

In August 2012, the
Committee provided drafts of 14 standards which were released for public
comments by the CG. After revisions, the CG has notified 10 ICDS
effective from the current tax year itself (viz. tax year 2015- 16) for
compliance by all taxpayers following mercantile system of accounting
for the purposes of computation of income chargeable to income tax under
the head “Profits and gains of business or profession” or “Income from
other sources”.

Earlier, the CG had notified two standards in
1996 viz., (a.) Accounting Standard I, relating to disclosure of
accounting policies. (b.) Accounting Standard II, relating to disclosure
of prior period and extraordinary items and changes in accounting
policies. They now stand superseded. These standards were largely
comparable to the current AS corresponding to AS 1 & AS 5.

ICDS
are meant for the normal tax computation. Thus, as things stand now,
ICDS has no impact on minimum alternate tax (MAT ) for corporate
taxpayers which will continue to be based on “book profit” determined
under current AS or Ind AS, as the case may be.

ICDS shall apply
to all taxpayers, whether corporate or otherwise. Further, there is no
income or turnover criterion for applicability of ICDS. An entity need
not maintain books of accounts to compute income under ICDS. However, if
the differences between ICDS and Ind AS/current AS as the case may be,
are several, an entity may need to evolve a more sophisticated system of
tracking them as against doing it manually on an excel spreadsheet. It
is possible that the current tax audit requirements will be enhanced to
require auditors to report on the correctness of tax computation under
ICDS. Non-compliance of ICDS gives power to the Tax Authority to assess
income on “best judgement” basis and also levy penalty on additions to
returned income.

List of ICDS
Following is the list of 10 ICDS notified w.e.f. April 1,2015:
1. ICDS I relating to accounting policies
2. ICDS II relating to valuation of inventories
3. ICDS III relating to construction contracts
4. ICDS IV relating to revenue recognition
5. ICDS V relating to tangible fixed assets
6. ICDS VI relating to the effects of changes in foreign exchange rates
7. ICDS VII relating to government grants
8. ICDS VIII relating to securities
9. ICDS IX relating to borrowing costs
10. ICDS X relating to provisions, contingent liabilities and contingent assets

KEY differences between icds and current as A few key differences between ICDS and current AS are given below:

ICDS I prohibits recognition of expected losses or markto- market losses unless permitted by any other ICDS.

During
the early stages of a contract, where the outcome of the construction
contract cannot be estimated reliably, contract revenue is recognised
only to the extent of costs incurred. This requirement is contained both
in AS 7 and ICDS III. However, unlike AS 7, ICDS III states that the
early stage of a contract shall not extend beyond 25 % of the stage of
completion.

AS 7 requires a provision to be made for the
expected losses on onerous construction contract immediately on signing
the contract. Under ICDS III, losses incurred on a contract shall be
allowed only in proportion to the stage of completion. Future or
anticipated losses shall not be allowed, unless such losses are actually
incurred.

Under AS 9, revenue from service transactions is
recognised by following “percentage completion method” or “completed
contract method”. Under ICDS IV, only percentage of completion method is
permitted.

Under AS 11, all mark-to-market gains or losses on
forward exchange or similar contracts entered into for trading or
speculation contracts shall be recognised in P&L. In contrast, ICDS
VI requires gains or losses to be recognised in income computation only
on settlement.

Under AS 11, exchange differences on a
non-integral foreign operation are not recognised in the P&L, but
accumulated in a foreign currency translation reserve. Such a foreign
currency translation reserve is recycled to the P&L when the
non-integral operation is disposed. Under ICDS VI, exchange differences
on non-integral foreign operations shall also be included in the
computation of income.

Under AS 12, government grants in the
nature of promoter’s contribution are equated to capital and hence are
included in capital reserves in the balance sheet. Under ICDS VII,
government grants should either be treated as revenue receipt or should
be reduced from the cost of fixed assets based on the purpose for which
such grant or subsidy is given.

Under AS 12, recognition of
government grants shall be postponed even beyond the actual date of
receipt when it is probable that conditions attached to the grant may
not be fulfilled and the grant may have to be refunded to the
government. Under ICDS VII, recognition of Government grants shall not
be postponed beyond the date of actual receipt.

Under AS 16, in
the case of borrowings in foreign currency, borrowing costs include
exchange differences to the extent they are treated as an adjustment to
the interest cost. Under ICDS IX, borrowing cost will not include
exchange differences arising from foreign currency borrowings.

AS
16 requires the fulfilment of the criterion “substantial period of
time” for treating an asset as qualifying asset for the purposes of
capitalisation of borrowing costs. ICDS IX retains substantial period
condition (i.e. 12 months) only for qualifying assets in the nature of
inventory but not for fixed assets and intangible assets. Therefore,
ICDS requires capitalisation of borrowing costs for tangible and
intangible assets even when they are completed in a short period.

Under
ICDS IX, capitalisation of specific borrowing cost shall commence from
the date of borrowing. Under AS 16, borrowing cost is capitalised from
the date of borrowing provided the construction of the asset has
started.

Unlike AS 16, income on temporary investments of
borrowed funds cannot be reduced from borrowing costs eligible for
capitalisation in ICDS IX.

Unlike AS 16, requirement to suspend
capitalisation of borrowing costs during interruption of active
construction of asset is removed in ICDS IX.

Under ICDS X, a
contingent asset is recognized when the realisation of related income is
“reasonably certain”. Under AS 29, the criterion is “virtual
certainty”.

Impact of ICDS
The notification of ICDS was imperative to ensure smooth implementation
of Ind AS, and therefore should have maintained a tax neutral position.
Unfortunately, ICDS are not tax neutral vis-à-vis the current Indian
GAAP and tax practices currently followed and may give rise to
litigation. For example, based on AS 7 Construction Contracts, the
current practice is to recognise any expected loss on a construction
contract as expense immediately. In contrast, ICDS will require expected
losses to be provided for using the percentage of completion method.

ICDS
I lays out the “accrual concept” as a fundamental accounting
assumption. The prohibition on recognising expected or mark-to-market
losses appears to be inconsistent with the accrual concept. Though
mark-tomarket losses are not allowed to be recognised, there is no
express prohibition on recognising mark-to-market gains. The ICDS
therefore appears to be one-sided, determined to maximie tax collection,
rather than routed in sound accounting principles. Matters such as
these are likely to create litigious situations despite the Supreme
Court decision in the Woodword Governor case where the status of ICDS is
upheld.

The preamble of the ICDS states that where there is
conflict between the provisions of the Income-tax Act, 1961 and ICDS,
the provisions of the Act shall prevail to that extent. Consider that a
company has claimed markto- market losses on derivatives as deductible
expenditure u/s. 37(1) of the Income-tax Act. Can the company argue that
this is a deductible expenditure under the Incometax Act (though the
matter may be sub judice) and hence should prevail over ICDS, which
prohibits mark-to-market losses to be considered as deductible
expenditure?

Under ICDS, exchange differences arising on the
settlement or on conversion of monetary items shall be recognised as
income or as expense. Consider that a company uses foreign currency loan
for procuring fixed asset locally. Now under ICDS, the exchange
difference on the foreign currency loan will be recognised in the
P&L A/c. Now consider the following decision in Sutlej Cotton Mills
Ltd. vs. CIT (116 ITR 1) (SC) “The Law may, therefore, now be taken to
be well settled that where profit or loss arises to an assessee on
account of appreciation or depreciation in the value of foreign currency
held by it, on conversion into another currency, such profit or loss
would ordinarily be trading profit or loss if the foreign currency is
held by the assessee on revenue account or as a trading asset or as part
of circulating capital embarked in the business. But, if on the other
hand, the foreign currency is held as a capital asset or as fixed
capital, such profit or loss would be of capital nature”. As per this
decision the exchange difference in our fact pattern will be
capitalised. However, under ICDS it will be recognised in the P&L
A/c. It is not absolutely clear whether the court decision or ICDS will
prevail in the given instance.

All ICDS (except ICDS VIII
relating to Securities) contain transitional provisions. These
transitional provisions are designed to avoid double jeopardy. For
example, if foreseeable loss on a contract is already recognised on a
contract at 31st March 2015, those losses will not be allowed as a
deduction again on a go forward basis using the percentage of completion
method. On the other hand, if only a portion of the loss was
recognised, the remaining foreseeable loss can be recognised using the
percentage of completion method. The detailed mechanism of how this will
work is not clear from the ICDS.

The transitional provisions
are not always absolutely clear. In the case of non-integral foreign
operations, e.g. non-integral foreign branches, ICDS requires
recognition of gains and losses in the P&L (tax computation), rather
than accumulating them in a foreign currency translation reserve. It is
not absolutely clear from the transitional provision whether the
opening accumulated foreign currency translation reserve, which could be
a gain or loss, will be ignored or recognised in the first transition
year 2015-16. Since the amounts involved will be huge, particularly for
many banks, the interpretation of this transitional provision will have a
huge impact for those who have not already considered the same in their
tax computation in the past years.

Some of the transitional
provisions are also expected to have a material unanticipated effect.
For example, the ICDS requires contingent assets to be recognised based
on reasonable certainty as compared to the existing norm of virtual
certainty. Consider a company has filed several claims, where there is
reasonable certainty that it would be awarded compensation. However, it
has never recognised such claims as income, since it did not meet the
virtual certainty test under AS 29. Under the transitional provision, it
will recognise all such claims in the first transition year 2015-16. If
the amounts involved are material, the tax outflow will be material in
the year 2015- 16. This could negatively impact companies that have
these claims. The interpretation of “reasonable certainty” and “virtual
certainty” would also come under huge stress and debate. This may well
be another potential area of uncertainty and litigation.

Overall,
the CG through CBDT will have to play a highly pro-active role to
provide clarity and minimise the potential areas of litigation. An
amendment of the Incometax Act would have been more appropriate rather
than a notification of the ICDS because the impact is expected to be
very high and all pervasive.

Supplier’ Cred it – Whet her de bt or trade payable ?

fiogf49gjkf0d
Arrangements with respect to payment to suppliers
could vary substantially and may not always be straight-forward. To ease
working capital pressure, companies enter into structured transactions
that involve the supplier and bank/s. These are commonly referred to as
supply-chain finance, supplier finance, reverse factoring and structured
payable transactions. Broadly, the arrangement allows a company to pay
its supplier invoices when due (under the extended terms negotiated with
a supplier) and gives the supplier the option to accelerate collection
through a factoring arrangement. Under the factoring arrangement, the
supplier sells its receivables (i.e., invoices) from the company to the
bank at a discount. The company is then legally obligated to pay the
bank in full (i.e., the amount specified in the original invoice) since
the bank is now the legal owner of the receivables. Such an arrangement
may better enable a supplier to monetize the receivable that has
extended payment terms.

Can a company (buyer of goods and services) continue
to classify the liability related to the supplier’s invoice as a trade
payable or whether it must reclassify the liability as bank debt?

In
evaluating a structured payable arrangement, companies should determine
the classification based on the substance and individual facts and
circumstances, including the following:

What are the roles, responsibilities and relationships of each party (i.e., the company, bank and supplier)?

Is
the company relieved of its original obligation to the supplier and is
now obligated to the bank? However, being obligated to a bank instead of
the supplier does not necessarily mean that the liability is a debt.
One needs to further assess whether the liability to the bank entails a
financing element or it is merely a payment of the liability to the bank
instead of to the supplier.

Have any discounts or rebates been
received by the company that would not have otherwise been received
without the bank’s involvement?

Has the bank extended the date on which payment is due from the company beyond the invoice’s original due date?

The
terms of the structured payable arrangement must be carefully
considered to determine whether the arrangement changes the roles,
responsibilities and relationships of the parties. To continue
classifying the liability as a trade payable, the company must remain
liable to the supplier under the original terms of the invoice, and the
bank must have assumed only the rights to the receivable it purchased.
If the terms of the company’s obligation change as a result of the
structured payable arrangement, that may be an indication that the
economic substance of the liability is more akin to a financing
arrangement.

Under normal circumstances, a factoring arrangement
between a company’s supplier and a bank does not benefit the company.
That’s why it is important to understand whether the company receives
any benefit as a result of the structured payable arrangement. For
example, a bank may purchase a supplier’s receivables in a factoring
arrangement at 95% of its face amount. However, rather than collect the
full amount payable from the company, the bank may require the company
to pay only 98% of that amount. In this case, the company has received a
benefit that it would not have received without the bank’s involvement,
indicating that the liability may be more akin to a financing
arrangement.

If a structured payable arrangement with a bank
allows a company to remit payment to the bank on a date later than the
original due date of the invoice, that may also indicate that the
company has received a benefit that it would not have received without
the bank’s involvement, suggesting the liability may more be more akin
to a financing arrangement.

The analysis should focus on whether
the terms of the payable change as a result of the involvement of the
bank. If the payment terms do not change (i.e., the company must pay the
bank on the original terms of the invoice) the characteristics of the
payable may not have changed and would not reflect a financing. If the
terms of the payable have changed as a result of the bank’s involvement,
the characteristics of the liability have changed and it may no longer
be appropriate to classify the liability as a trade payable.

Other factors that may be considered include:

Is
the supplier’s participation in the structured payable arrangement
optional? If not, the company should evaluate whether the substance of
the transaction is more reflective of a financing.

Do the terms
of the structured payable arrangement preclude the company from
negotiating returns of damaged goods to the supplier?

Is the
company obligated to maintain cash balances or are there credit
facilities or other borrowing arrangements with the bank outside of the
structured payable arrangement that the bank can draw upon in the event
of noncollection of the invoice from the company?

Some
structured payable arrangements require that, as a condition for the
bank to accept an invoice from a supplier (i.e., the receivable) for
factoring, a company must separately promise the bank that it will pay
the invoice regardless of any disputes that might arise over goods that
are damaged or don’t conform with agreed-upon specifications. In the
event of a dispute, a company that agrees to such a condition would need
to seek recourse through other means, such as adjustments on future
purchases. This provision is typical among structured payable
arrangements since it provides greater certainty of payment to the bank.
However, this provision may indicate that the economic substance of the
trade payable has been altered to reflect that of a financing. It is important to consider the substance of any such condition in the context of the company’s normal practices.
For a company that buys enough from a supplier to routinely apply
credits for returns against payments on future invoices, this condition
might not be viewed as a significant change to existing practice.

In
some factoring arrangements, the bank may require that the company
maintain collateral or other credit facilities with the bank. These
requirements aren’t typical in factoring arrangements and may indicate
that the economic substance of the liability has changed to be more akin
to a financing arrangement. For the liability to be considered a trade
payable, the bank generally can collect the amount owed by the company
only through its rights as owner of the receivable it purchased from the
supplier. As can be seen from the above discussion, whether supplychain
finance should be presented as debts or trade payable is a matter of
significant judgement and would depend on the facts and circumstances of
each case.

Below are four simple examples, and the author’s opinion on whether those result in debt or trade payable classification.

1.
The company issues a promissory note to the supplier, agreeing in
writing to pay the supplier a fixed sum at a fixed future date or on
demand by the bank (discounting bank).

2. The company accepts a
bill of exchange and its banker simultaneously issues a bank guarantee
in favour of the supplier, making the bank liable to pay the supplier if
the company fails to honour its commitment on the due date. The bank
guarantee is not invoked at the reporting date. No interest is charged
to the company, and there is no impact on its credit limits.

3. The company buys goods from a supplier and needs to pay for them immediately.  as it does not have the cash, it arranges for a 90 day LC in favour of the supplier.  the supplier discounts the LC and receives payment immediately. the discounting charges/interest for 90 days is borne by the company. the credit limit of the company is utilised.

4. The company has entered into a separate credit limit with the bank wherein the bank will make payment to selected suppliers on company’s behalf.  as per the arrangement, the supplier will invoice the company with a credit period between 180 to 240 days. This is not a normal credit period which is also appropriately reflected    in    the    pricing    of    the    product.        The    bank    will    make    payment to the supplier after deducting discounting charges. At the due date, the company will make the full payment to the bank. The bank has no recourse against the supplier.

It may be noted that to take a proper view more detailed facts will be required, including the exact arrangement terms and the legal requirements/interpretations. on the basis of the limited information and above discussion it appears that the first     two     examples     represent     traditional     factoring     arrangement,    the    arrangement    would    result    in    the    classification    as    “trade    payables.”        In    the    last    two    examples,    the    classification would be more likely a “debt”.

GAPs in GAAP Contingent Consideration From Seller’s Perspective

fiogf49gjkf0d
Buyers and sellers of businesses in recent times are coming up with innovative deal structures that use contingent consideration and other instruments that allow the buyer and seller to share the economic risks for a period of time. When buyers and sellers cannot agree on the value of a business, contingent consideration arrangements are a common way to close the deal. In these arrangements, part of the purchase price is contingent on future events or conditions. Contingent consideration arrangements often depend on the acquiree meeting certain financial targets, such as revenues, Earnings Before Interest and Taxes (EBIT) or net income. It may also depend on other events, such as achieving a technical milestone (e.g., drug or patent approval).

Question

How does a seller of a business account for the contingent consideration?

Analysis
There is no direct guidance on accounting for contingent consideration under Indian GAAP from a seller’s perspective. Guidance is available under AS 14 Accounting for Amalgamations with respect to contingent consideration for the purposes of acquisition accounting. The provision relating to AS 14 Accounting for Amalgamations is set out below.

AS 14 Accounting for Amalgamations

15. Many amalgamations recognise that adjustments may have to be made to the consideration in the light of one or more future events. When the additional payment is probable and can reasonably be estimated at the date of amalgamation, it is included in the calculation of the consideration. In all other cases, the adjustment is recognised as soon as the amount is determinable.

It may also be worthwhile to consider guidance in AS 9 Revenue Recognition though AS 9 applies to goods and services and not to sale of a business.

AS 9 Revenue Recognition

9.1 Recognition of revenue requires that revenue is measurable and that at the time of sale or the rendering of the service it would not be unreasonable to expect ultimate collection.

9.4 An essential criterion for the recognition of revenue is that the consideration receivable for the sale of goods, the rendering of services or from the use by others of enterprise resources is reasonably determinable. When such consideration is not determinable within reasonable limits, the recognition of revenue is postponed.

11. In a transaction involving the sale of goods, performance should be regarded as being achieved when the following conditions have been fulfilled:

(i) the seller of goods has transferred to the buyer the property in the goods for a price or all significant risks and rewards of ownership have been transferred to the buyer and the seller retains no effective control of the goods transferred to a degree usually associated with ownership; and

(ii) no significant uncertainty exists regarding the amount of the consideration that will be derived from the sale of the goods.

The guidance in AS 29 Provisions, Contingent Liabilities and Contingent Assets can also be applied by analogy.

AS 29 Provisions, Contingent Liabilities and Contingent Assets
Definition of a contingent asset: A contingent asset is a possible asset that arises from past events the existence of which will be confirmed only by the occurrence or non-occurrence of one or more uncertain future events not wholly within the control of the enterprise.

32. Contingent assets are not recognised in financial statements since this may result in the recognition of income that may never be realised. However, when the realisation of income is virtually certain, then the related asset is not a contingent asset and its recognition is appropriate.

Author’s point of view

All the three standards viz., AS-9, AS-14 and AS-29 seem to uphold the concept of probability in recognition of revenue or gain. A careful analysis of AS-29 definition of contingent asset also indicates that if recovery is probable then it is an asset and not a contingent asset. Contingent asset is a possible asset and not a probable asset. Therefore recognition of contingent asset requires the use of virtual certainty principles.

Whether a seller of a business should recognise gain from contingent consideration will depend upon the nature of the contingent consideration itself. Where contingent consideration is based on normal revenue targets which are easily achievable, it may be highly probable that it would be received. In such circumstances contingent consideration should be recognised by the seller. If it appears that the set targets are unachievable, then it may not be appropriate to recognise contingent consideration. Rather they should be treated as contingent asset.

At other times, it may so happen that the contingent consideration is determined at each level of performance. As a result it is highly probable that a minimum amount of consideration is always received. Any excess of expected consideration over the minimum amount recognised is only possible and hence a contingent asset not to be recognised in the financial statements. For example, a seller will receive a contingent consideration of Rs. 1 million, if the following year performance is equal to previous year, and another half a million if the performance improves by 40%. In this case, the seller recognises one million consideration if it is probable that performance will be atleast as good as the previous year. However, the extra half a million will not be recognized if it is not probable (though possible) that it will be received. The said amount is a contingent asset and hence not to be recognised under AS 29. The standard also prohibits the disclosure of contingent assets.

levitra

NEGATIVE REVENUE

fiogf49gjkf0d
Many of the current business models are highly disruptive, and also throw up interesting accounting challenges from time to time. One of those challenges is with respect to accounting for consideration paid to a customer and the accounting of negative revenue.

Query
Pay Gate runs a website which provides a market place for vendors to sell their merchandise to different buyers. The buyers can open a wallet on Pay Gate by paying cash or using a debit/credit card and then use that wallet to buy goods through that website from vendors. Pay Gate earns a commission from the vendor for every sale made. Pay Gate is desperately seeking to expand in the market and hence provides a sizable cash back incentive to buyers. The commission earned from vendors is much lower than the cash back incentive to buyers. Consequently the overall revenue earned by Pay Gate is negative. How is such revenue presented?

Author’s Response
Many such interesting issues have emerged since the issuance of IFRS 15 Revenue from Contracts with Customers. These issues have gained urgency in India because it makes IFRS 15 (Ind AS 115) mandatory with immediate effect. These issues and the following discussions would be also relevant for Indian GAAP purposes. The Joint Transition Resource Group for Revenue Recognition (TRG) discussed a number of implementation issues on IFRS 15, including the one raised in the query above.

Under IFRS 15, an entity is required to determine if a consideration that it pays a customer is for a distinct good or service. Consider a manufacturer sells to its customer (eg Retailer) certain goods and earns revenue. It also pays the Retailer a fee for prominent display of those goods. Because the payment to the Retailer is not for a distinct good or service, the manufacturer will reduce the fee paid from the revenue it earns from the Retailer.

In the above example, if the Manufacturer paid to the Customer (who is also an advertiser) for carrying a huge advertisement on an advertising space it owns outside the retail outlet, this would be treated as a distinct service received from the customer. Consequently, revenue would be presented gross and the fee paid to the customer (advertiser) would be treated as an advertising expenditure. IFRS 15 also has another interesting concept, where the customer’s customer is also treated as the customer of the entity. Consider the manufacturer sells to its customer (the Retailer) certain goods, and those goods carry some cash coupons which the final buyer (Retailer’s customer) redeems with the manufacturer. Because under IFRS 15, a customer’s customer is the customer of the entity, revenue would be presented net of the cash coupon amount.

TRG members did not agree on whether the new standards are clear as to whether the requirements will also apply to all payments made to any customer of an entity’s customer outside the distribution chain. For example, in an arrangement with a principal, an agent and an end-customer, TRG members agreed it was not clear whether the agent’s fee would have to be reduced for any consideration that the agent may pay to the end-customer (i.e., its customer’s (the principle’s) customer). Some agents may also conclude that they have two customers –the principal and the endcustomer- in such arrangements. TRG members agreed that agent will need to evaluate their facts and circumstances to determine whether payments made to an end-customer will be treated as a reduction of revenue or a marketing expense. TRG member observed that there is currently diversity in practice on this issue and that it may continue under the new standards, absent further application guidance.

On negative revenue, TRG members felt that if negative revenue is determined on an overall customer relationship basis, one view is that entities should present negative revenue as performance obligations are satisfied. An alternative view is that entities should reduce cumulative customer revenue to zero and reclassified the remaining negative revenue as expenses in the period such determination is made.

If
negative revenue is determined based on a specific contract, potential
views are (a) entities should present negative revenue as performance
obligation are satisfied or (b) entities should reclassify negative
revenue as expenses in the period determined. The latter would not
result in negative revenue on a specific customer contract. If
determined on a specific contract basis, there would likely be far fewer
instance of negative revenue given payments to a customer won’t be
linked to a specific revenue contract in many, if not most, cases.

Overall,
in the query raised above, the author believes that multiple views are
possible at this juncture, absent further application guidance:

1.
Disclose revenue as a negative number, on the basis that consideration
received from a customer should be reduced by a payment made to a
customer or a customers’ customer for goods and services that is not
distinct.

2. Disclose revenue at the gross amount and the
consideration paid to the buyers in the fact pattern be treated as a
marketing expense incurred for acquiring eye balls.

3. Disclose
revenue at a zero sum, and present the excess of cash back incentive
paid to buyers over revenue as a marketing expense. This is done on the
basis that revenue is a reward and should not be a negative number.

The author recommends that the ICAI interact with the TRG group and ensure that an amicable view is reached.

levitra

Previous GAAP on first-time adoption of Ind AS

fiogf49gjkf0d
IFRS 1 First-time Adoption of International Financial Reporting Standards and its equivalent Ind AS 101 First-time Adoption of Indian Accounting Standards prescribe several exemptions and exceptions in preparing an opening balance sheet on transition from previous GAAP to IFRS and Ind AS respectively. Without these exemptions and exceptions it would be extremely difficult for companies to transition, as that would entail going back in eternity to prepare opening balance sheet/ financial statements as per IFRS or Ind AS.

Ind AS 101 is modelled on the same lines as IFRS 1; however, there are some critical differences. One of them is with respect to previous GAAP, from which one would transition to IFRS or Ind AS. IFRS 1defines the term “previous GAAP” as a basis of accounting that a first-time adopter used immediately before adopting IFRS. Thus, an entity preparing two complete sets of financial statements, which are publicly available, for example, one set of financial statements as per the Indian GAAP and another set as per the US GAAP, may be able to choose either GAAP as its “previous GAAP.”

Ind-AS 101 defines the term “previous GAAP” as the basis of accounting that a first-time adopter used immediately before adopting Ind-AS for its statutory reporting requirements in India. For instance, companies preparing their financial statements in accordance with section 133 of Companies Act, 2013, will consider those financial statements as previous GAAP financial statements.

The Securities and Exchange Board of India (SEBI) had on 9th November, 2009 issued a press release permitting listed entities having subsidiaries to voluntarily submit the consolidated financial statements as per IASB IFRS. Further, SEBI issued a circular, dated 5th April, 2010, wherein the Listing Agreement was modified to this effect from 31st March, 2010. Consequent to this, many companies voluntarily prepared and published audited consolidated IASB IFRS financial statements. However, Companies Act, 2013 requires all Indian companies to prepare consolidated financial statements under Indian GAAP, with a one year moratorium (see box below).

Companies (Accounts) Rules, 2014

Rule 6
Manner of consolidation of accounts.- The consolidation of financial statements of the company shall be made in accordance with the provisions of Schedule III of the Act and the applicable accounting standards:

Provided that in case of a company covered under subsection (3) of section 129 which is not required to prepare consolidated financial statements under the Accounting Standards, it shall be sufficient if the company complies with provisions on consolidated financial statements provided in Schedule III of the Act.

Companies (Accounts) Amendment Rules, 2015

In the Companies (Accounts) Rules, 2014,-

(ii) in rule 6, after the third proviso, the following proviso shall be inserted, namely:-

“Provided also that nothing in this rule shall apply in respect of consolidation of financial statement by a company having subsidiary or subsidiaries incorporated outside India only for the financial year commencing on or after 1st April, 2014.”

Consequently, before transiting to Ind AS, most Indian companies will have consolidated financial statements prepared under Indian GAAP. The only exception seem possible is where a company early adopts Ind AS from the financial year beginning 1st April 2015. Therefore, in most cases, both from a separate and consolidated financial statement Indian GAAP will be the previous GAAP for transition to Ind-AS.

The SEBI’s initiative to allow IASB IFRS financial statements was seen by many as a step in the right direction. The option to voluntarily prepare IASB IFRS consolidated financial statements was not only used by companies who were Foreign Private Issuers (FPI) but also other companies that did not have any global listing. Companies that published voluntarily consolidated IASB IFRS financial statements and their investors were able to compare the performance with the global peers. This put the best Indian companies on a very strong footing.

One had hoped that this option would be continued, and companies would be allowed voluntarily to use IASB IFRS for their financial statements instead of Ind AS (that has numerous carve outs from IASB IFRS). However, this option did not come through. Worse still, one hoped that there would be a provision to transition from IASB IFRS to Ind AS. However, that too did not come through. Consequently, all Indian companies will have to mandatorily transition from Indian GAAP (which is their previous GAAP for statutory reporting in India) to Ind AS.

Consider an example. A company transiting from Indian GAAP to Ind-AS, has as options, to retain the book value of fixed assets recorded under previous GAAP (Indian GAAP) or record them at fair value under Ind AS. If the option to use IASB IFRS financial statements as previous GAAP was allowed, companies could have used the book value recorded in IASB IFRS financial statements. This would have reduced the differences between their IASB IFRS financial statements and Ind AS financial statements. Probably these companies would have ended up in a situation where there would be no difference between IASB IFRS and Ind AS financial statements.

However, given that previous GAAP has to be Indian GAAP, these companies may have to deal with a permanent set of differences between Ind AS and IASB IFRS financial statements.

The idea behind having a uniform GAAP (Indian GAAP) for transitioning to Ind AS was probably rooted in the thinking of achieving consistency. However, this thinking is akin to missing the wood for the trees. By wanting to achieve local consistency, the standard setters are giving up on global consistency. Secondly, this is also putting a lot of companies to unnecessary hardship. Lastly, given the numerous options and exemptions within Ind AS on first time adoption, consistency can never be achieved.

Therefore, there is a strong argument to make appropriate amendments to the standards and allow companies to continue with IASB IFRS option or in the least to allow the IASB IFRS financial statements as previous GAAP financial statements.

levitra

To Consolidate or not to Consolidate

fiogf49gjkf0d
Introduction
Section 129(3) of the Companies Act, 2013, requires a company having one or more subsidiaries, to prepare consolidated financial statements (CFS), in addition to separate financial statements. The second proviso to this section states that the Central Government may provide for the consolidation of accounts of companies in such manner as may be prescribed.

Rule 6 in the Companies Accounts Rules deal with manner of consolidation of accounts. The rule states that “The consolidation of financial statements of the company shall be made in accordance with the provisions of Schedule III of the Act and the applicable accounting standards.”

The MCA has recently amended the Company Accounts Rules whereby a new proviso has been added in the Rule 6. The proviso states that “Provided also that nothing in this rule shall apply in respect of consolidation of financial statement by a company having subsidiary or subsidiaries incorporated outside India only for the financial year commencing on or after 1st April 2014.”

Question 1
Whether the above proviso exempts companies from preparing CFS or the exemption relates only to manner of preparing CFS?

Author’s View
The exemption relates only to the manner of preparing CFS and not the preparation of CFS itself. To support this view, the following two arguments can be made:

• The requirement to prepare CFS is arising from the Companies Act 2013. Rule 6 deals only with the manner of preparing CFS, i.e., preparation of CFS as per notified AS and Schedule III. Hence, the exemption relates only to the manner of preparation of CFS. Thus, a company covered under the above proviso can prepare CFS as per any acceptable framework, say, IFRS, instead of CFS as per notified accounting standards/Schedule III. A company covered under the proviso can also prepare CFS as per any other GAAP (other than Ind AS where the dates are those prescribed by the roadmap) say, US GAAP for filing with the Registrar of Companies (ROC). But if the company also needs to comply with the listing agreement requirements, they permit either Indian GAAP or IASB IFRS.

• Hence, for a listed company, in order to meet both ROC requirements and listing requirements, the option is either Indian GAAP or IASB IFRS (for one year). However, a company cannot avoid preparing CFS.

• Presently, there are few companies who are currently preparing IASB IFRS CFS as per the option given in the listing agreement. If these companies are required to prepare Indian GAAP CFS for year ended March 2015, they will have to transit from IASB IFRS to Indian GAAP for March 2015. In March 2016, these companies will move to Ind AS (i.e., IFRS converged standards) once Ind AS become voluntarily applicable for financial years beginning on or after 1st April 2015. It is understood that the MCA has added this proviso in the rules to avoid this flip flop.

Question 2
Whether the exemption discussed above is available for companies which have overseas subsidiaries only or a company having both Indian and foreign subsidiaries can also use this exemption?

Author’s View
The proviso is based on companies having one or more overseas subsidiaries. It does not matter whether a company has Indian subsidiary or not. In other words, this proviso can be used both by companies having (a) only foreign subsidiary/ies and (b) companies having both Indian and foreign subsidiary/ies.

Question 3
Whether the exemption is available only for one year or it will be available going forward also?

Author’s View
The proviso uses the words “only for the financial year commencing on or after 1st April 2014.” Hence, this exemption is available only for one year, for example financial year ending 31st March 2015 or 31st December 2015.

Question 4
Section 129(3) of the 2013 Act requires that a company having one or more subsidiaries will, in addition to separate financial statements (SFS), prepare CFS. Hence, all companies, including non-listed and private companies, having subsidiaries need to prepare CFS. Whether the comparative numbers need to be given in the first set of CFS presented by an existing group?

Author’s View
Schedule III states that except for the first financial statements prepared by a company after incorporation, presentation of comparative amounts is mandatory. In contrast, transitional provisions to AS 21 exempt presentation of comparative numbers in the first set of CFS prepared even by an existing group.

One view is that there is no conflict between transitional provisions of AS 21 and Schedule III. AS 21 gives one exemption that is not allowed under the Schedule III. Hence, presentation of comparative numbers is mandatory in the first set of CFS prepared by an existing company. This interpretation is taken on the basis that when there are two legislations; one of which imposes a more stringent requirement, the stringent requirement would apply.

The other view is that Schedule III is clear that in case of any conflict between Accounting Standards and Schedule III, Accounting Standards will prevail over the Schedule III. Hence, exemption given under AS 21 can be availed by an existing group which prepares CFS for the first time. In other words, an existing Group preparing CFS for the first time need not give comparative information in their first CFS prepared under AS 21.

Both the views appear acceptable.

Question 5
Consider that a non-listed company is preparing CFS in accordance with AS 21 for the first time. It has acquired one or more subsidiaries several years back. Is the company required to go back at the date of acquisition of investment for calculating goodwill/ capital reserve on acquisition?

Authors view
Goodwill/ capital reserve arising on acquisition of subsidiary should be calculated with reference to the date of acquisition of investment in subsidiary. Thus, determining goodwill for an acquisition that took place many years ago may be very challenging. The transitional provisions to AS 21 exempt a company, which is preparing CFS for the first time, from presenting comparative information. There is no exemption from the requirement to determine goodwill/ capital reserve. Hence, any goodwill/ capital reserve arising on acquisition should be determined at the acquisition date.

Let us assume that a company has acquired a subsidiary more than 10 years back, which should have resulted in goodwill arising on the acquisition. Under Indian GAAP, a company is allowed to amortise goodwill over its useful life, say, 5 to 10 years. Alternatively, the company may only test the goodwill for impairment. In this case, the company may argue that in the past, it has amortised goodwill over its useful life, say, 5 to 10 years. Consequent to amortisation, the net carrying value of goodwill on the date of first preparation of CFS is zero. The corresponding impact of goodwill amortisation has gone into profit or loss of the earlier periods and impacts the cumulative retained earnings at the date of first preparation of CFS. The application of this view obviates the need to go back in history for computing goodwill arising on acquisition. However, it impacts the amount of retained earnings and net worth on the transition date. If a company does not wish to have such impact and desires to disclose goodwill amount, it needs to go back in the history for calculating goodwill/ capital reserve arising on acquisition.

In the case of acquisitions made in recent history, say, in past 3-4 years, it may not be possible to take a view that the goodwill is fully amortised. In this case, the company will need to go back in history to determine goodwill arising on acquisition. The amount of goodwill reflected in the first CFS will depend on the company’s policy for goodwill amortisation with respect to past years.

To ensure that goodwill is not carried at amount higher than its recoverable amount, the company will have to test if goodwill is impaired at the transition date in accordance with AS 28 Impairment of Assets.

Audit materiality – a precision cast in stone or a subjective variable measure?

fiogf49gjkf0d
Material information means information that
matters, whether it is important or is essential. In accounting
parlance, it relates to information that should be recognised, measured
or disclosed in accordance with the requirements of a financial
reporting framework. In measuring or disclosing accounting information,
emphasis is on the needs of known or perceived users of the financial
statements.

In auditing, materiality refers to the largest
threshold of uncorrected errors, misstatements, or erroneous disclosures
or omissions that could exist in the financial statements and yet are
not misleading. Misstatements including omissions, are material if they,
individually or in aggregate, could reasonably be expected to influence
the economic decisions of users of the financial statements. The users
are considered as a group of users of the financial statements rather
than as individual users.

SA 320 – ‘Materiality in Planning and
Performing an Audit’ provides guiding principles to auditors on
consideration of materiality in audit of financial statements.

The
determination of materiality is a matter of professional judgment. In
determining the materiality of an item, the auditor considers not only
the item’s nature and amount relative to the financial statements, but
also the needs of the users of such financial statements. Materiality
has a pervasive effect in a financial statement audit. Materiality also
has significant implications for audit efficiency. In current times,
given the scale and volume of operations of enterprises, complexities in
business and supporting IT systems, plethora of regulatory compliances
etc., it is imperative for an auditor to be meticulous in determining
materiality for addressing the risk of material misstatements in an
effective and efficient manner.

Materiality is one of the most
important considerations in planning the audit approach-identifying
significant accounts/disclosures and determining the extent, nature and
timing of audit procedures. While determining materiality at the
planning stage, it may not be possible for the auditor to anticipate all
of the factors that will ultimately influence the materiality judgment
in the evaluation of audit results at the completion of the audit. These
factors must be considered as and when they arise, and therefore
materiality needs to be evaluated throughout the course of the audit and
revised if deemed appropriate.

In planning an audit, the
auditor would ordinarily assess materiality at the overall financial
statement level, because the auditor’s opinion extends to the financial
statements taken as a whole. However, in certain circumstances, for an
entity, it is possible that misstatement of a particular significant
account balance or disclosure could impact or influence the decisions of
the users of the financial statements for that entity. In such cases,
the auditor would need to determine materiality for that account or
disclosure at an amount which is less than the materiality for the
financial statements as a whole. For instance, in enterprises where
financial statements include large provisions with a high degree of
estimation uncertainty, the existence of such provisions may influence
user’s assessment of materiality for such provisions, for example
provisions for insurance claims in an insurance company, oil rig
decommissioning costs in the case of an oil company etc.

In
computing materiality for the financial statements as a whole, the
auditor needs to evaluate an appropriate benchmark to be used. The
benchmark could be profit (loss) before tax from continuing operations,
total assets, or total revenues. Materiality is determined based on the
amount of the benchmark selected. Some of the factors which need to be
considered while determining the amount/percentage of the benchmark are:

Debt arrangements – whether limited debt or publicly traded debt, existence of loan covenants sensitive to operating results.

Business
environment – whether entity operates in a stable or volatile business
environment, business operates in a regulated or non-regulated industry,
business sustainability, complexity of business operations/processes,
product portfolio, few or many external users of the entity’s financial
statements etc

As one can envisage, evaluation of the factors
stated above requires judgment and there can be no scientific formula to
arrive at the percentage to be applied to the benchmark to determine
materiality. SA 320 does not specify a range of percentages that could
be applied to the benchmark as this is left to the auditor’s judgment,
ideally the one selected by the auditor should be the benchmark that
most represents the needs of the users of the financial statements. The
commonly applied ranges are given below:

It
is pertinent to note that materiality is not a mere quantitative
measure. A misstatement that is quantitatively immaterial may be
qualitatively material. Qualitative factors often require subjective
judgment and evaluation in light of other information that may not be
readily available to the auditor.

While selecting account
balances for testing, one cannot assume on a generic basis that account
balances which fall below the materiality determined for the financial
statements as a whole should be scoped out from audit. The auditor
should be wary of the risk that accounts with seemingly immaterial
balances may contain understatements that when aggregated would exceed
the overall materiality, i.e., aggregation risk. To address the
aggregation risk, auditors usually discount (hair-cut) the overall
materiality by 25% or more. Such an adjustment is not a mere calculation
but is driven by factors such as:

Weak or strong Internal control environment at the entity.
Entity with a history of material weaknesses and/or a number of control deficiencies.
High turnover of senior management.
Entity with a history of large or numerous misstatements in previous audits.
Entity with more complex accounting issues and significant estimates.
Entity that operates in a number of locations etc.

Let
us consider some case studies to understand practical application of
the concept of audit materiality from a quantitative measurement
viewpoint.

Case study I – Size and nature

Background
XYZ
Ltd. is a company engaged in the business of dairy products with its
head office in Mumbai. The Company caters to customers in Pune, Mumbai,
Ahmedabad and Surat through its factories in Mumbai and Ahmedabad.

The
turnover and net profit after tax of the company for FY 20X0-X1 (April
20X0-March 20X1) was Rs. 1,456 million and Rs. 305 million respectively.
The net assets of the Company as at 31st March 20X1 aggregated Rs.
13,570 million.

During the financial year 20X0-X1,
1. ZED Ltd., a distributor for Surat region who owed the Company Rs. 0.6 million was declared bankrupt.

2.
HUD Products Ltd., a supplier to whom the Company had paid Rs. 45
million as an advance for future supplies as per the terms of
arrangement had been facing cash crunch and has discontinued its
operations from June 20X0. The Company has not received any supplies
since April 20X1.

3. T he company has decided to curtail its
operations in Ahmedabad which has traditionally been a major source of
revenue for the Company in the past however on account of increase in
competition the Company is unable to sustain its market share. The
Company already commenced the process of dismantling one of the plants
in the month of March 20X1.

As an auditor which of the above events will be material for the Company?

Analysis

As per SA 320, judgments about materiality are made in the light of surrounding circumstances, and are affected by the size or nature of a misstatement, or a combination of both.

In the above scenarios, the default of Rs. 0.6 million by ZED Ltd. is immaterial for a Company with a huge turnover of Rs. 1,456 million. Thus, based on the size of the Company. the auditor would consider the said transaction as not material to be reported.

On the contrary, amount of advance given to HUD Products Ltd. of Rs. 45 million, which is considered doubtful of recoverability would be material to the financial statements as omission of the same could influence the decisions of the users of financial statements. Also, delay in supplies would affect the production schedule of the Company which would also impact sales adversely. Therefore this event would be considered as material.

Similarly, the Company’s decision of curtailing its Ahmedabad’s operations should be disclosed in the financial statements as it is by its nature material to understanding the entity’s scope of operations in the future.

Case study II – Selection of benchmark

Background

TED Private Limited (TED) is in the business of providing courier services. TED is located in Mumbai. It has a subsidiary LED Private Limited (LED), located in Delhi. TED was established in 2001 and its subsidiary was established in 2012. TED is a well established company in the market and is profit making since the year 2005. However, LED being recently established has lower profits and in fact profit has been volatile in nature during the past three years. The financial position for TED and LED given below:

XET & Associates (‘XET’) were appointed as auditors for the year 2014 for TED and its subsidiary LED. Ram Bhave, Audit Manager at XET selected profit before tax as the benchmark for the purpose of calculating the materiality of TED. Since LED had earned higher profit in 2014 as compared to the previous year, Ram selected profit before tax as an appropriate benchmark for the subsidiary as well. In the light of SA 320, evaluate:

a) Whether Ram did the right selection of the benchmark for the purpose of determining audit materiality for both the entities?

b) Also evaluate whether the materiality for LED will be the same if LED was financed solely by debt rather than equity?

c) Would the situation be different in case LED received revenue from TED on a markup of 10% on its expenses?

Analysis (a)

According to SA 320, determining materiality involves the exercise of professional judgment. Factors that may affect the identification of an appropriate benchmark include the following:

  •     Whether there are items on which would be subject to specific focus by the users of the financial statements of the entity in question?

  •     The nature of the entity, the stage at which the entity is in its life cycle, and the industry and economic environment in which the entity operates.

  •     The entity’s ownership structure and the way it is financed.

  •     The relative volatility of the benchmark.

Profit before tax from continuing operations is often used for profit-oriented entity. However when profit before tax from continuing operations is volatile, other benchmarks may be more appropriate, such as total revenue or gross profit.

In the above case, based on financial position for past three years, it is evident that TED is a profit-oriented company and accordingly the profit before tax is an appropriate benchmark taken by the auditor for the purpose of calculating the materiality.

Analysis (b)

Ram selected profit before tax as benchmark for calculating materiality for LED however the company has yet to fully establish its operations and accordingly the profit before tax is volatile in nature. In such a case, based on the relative volatility, Ram must select gross measures like total revenue as the benchmark for calculating the materiality.

Analysis (c)

In case if LED is financed solely by debt, users may lay more emphasis on assets and claims (such as charges/ mortgages/encumbrances or like) on them rather than on the entity’s earnings. In this situation, Ram could consider either net assets or total assets as the benchmark for calculating the materiality.

Analysis (d)

If LED were to earn revenue from TED at a constant markup of 10% on its aggregate expenditure, it would not be appropriate to take profit before tax or revenue as the benchmark as revenue and profits would fluctuate every year in proportion to the expense and may not be considered as the right measure to reflect the financial performance of the entity. In such a scenario, Ram may choose to use total expenses or net assets or total assets as benchmark for purpose of determining materiality.

The above case studies elucidate the quantitative aspects of materiality. In the next article, we shall discuss case studies revolving around other aspects of SA 320 such as qualitative factors, normalisation, materiality at account balance and revision of materiality.

Closing remarks

Materiality is one of the factors that affects the auditor’s judgment about the sufficiency of audit evidence. One may generalise that lower the materiality level, the greater would be the quantum of evidence needed. At the same time, auditing standards do not establish an absolute level or a percentage or a mathematical formula which is universally applicable. The elements an auditor uses to determine the benchmark are based on his experience and on numerous other factors some of which were elucidated in this article. As a judgmental concept, however, materiality is susceptible to subjectivity.

Ind -AS Carve Out – Recognition of bargain purchase gain and common control transactions

Recognition of bargain purchase gain
IFRS
3 requires bargain purchase gain arising on business combination to be
recognised in profit or loss. However, a careful analysis is required to
determine whether a gain truly exists. Ind-AS 103 (draft) requires the
same to be recognised in other comprehensive income (OCI) and
accumulated in equity as capital reserve. However, if there is no clear
evidence for the underlying reason for classification of the business
combination as a bargain purchase, then the gain should be recognised
directly in the equity as capital reserve. Ind-AS’s are still in draft
stage and a final version may be available even before this article is
published.

Technical perspective
Arguments against this carve out are as follows:

(a)
An economic gain is inherent in a bargain purchase. At the acquisition
date, the acquirer is better off by the amount by which the fair value
of the acquired business exceeds the fair value of the consideration
paid. In concept, the acquirer should recognise this gain in its profit
or loss.

(b) We appreciate that appearance of a bargain
purchase, particularly, without any evidence of the underlying reasons,
will raise concerns about the existence of measurement errors. IFRS 3
have addressed these concerns by requiring the acquirer to review
procedures used to measure the amounts to be recognised at the
acquisition date. Moreover, concerns regarding measurement
errors/potential abuse may not be sufficient reason to reject
technically correct accounting treatment.

(c) The application of
Ind-AS carve-out implies that whilst an entity recognises bargain
purchase gain directly in OCI, it will recognise depreciation,
amortisation or impairment of assets acquired in profit or loss for the
subsequent periods based on the fair valuation of the assets taken over.
This creates a mismatch between items recognised in profit or loss and
those recognized in OCI. Also, it may adversely impact divided paying
capacity of companies.

To avoid such mismatches and to protect
their future profit or loss/distributable reserves, certain entities may
attempt to notionally reduce the fair value of the assets acquired and
avoid bargain purchase gain scenario. The ICAI has made this carve-out
to avoid potential abuse; however, it may actually end up doing the
reverse.

(d) Concerns about abuse resulting from gain
recognition may be exaggerated. Our experience and interactions with
financial analysts and other users suggest that they give little weight,
if any, to one-time or unusual gains, such as those resulting from a
bargain purchase transaction. In addition, we believe that entities
would have a disincentive to overstate assets acquired or understate
liabilities assumed in a business combination because that generally
results in higher post-combination expenses, i.e., when the assets are
used or become impaired or liabilities are re-measured or settled.

We
believe that Ind-AS 103 should require bargain purchase gain arising on
business combination to be recognised in profit or loss both for
acquisition of subsidiaries and associates. In any case, we do not
believe that this is a major issue, and making a carve-out for this
matter seems unwarranted.

Accounting for common control transactions
IFRS
3 excludes from its scope business combinations of entities under
common control and provides no further guidance on how common control
transactions are accounted for. Based on prevailing practices, an entity
may account for such combination by applying either the acquisition
method (in accordance with IFRS 3) or the pooling of interests method.
The selected accounting policy is applied consistently. However, where
an entity selects the acquisition method of accounting, the transaction
must have substance from the perspective of the reporting entity.

Ind-AS
103 requires business combinations under common control to be
mandatorily accounted using the pooling method. The application of this
method requires the following:

(i) The assets and liabilities of the combining entities are reflected at their carrying amounts.
(ii)
No adjustments are made to reflect fair values, or recognise any new
assets or liabilities. The only adjustments that are made are to
harmonize the accounting policies.
(iii) The financial information
in the financial statements in respect of prior periods have to be
restated as if the combination had occurred from the beginning of the
earliest period presented in the financial statements, irrespective of
the actual date of the combination.
(iv) Ind-AS 103 originally
hosted on the MCA website required that excess of the amount recorded as
share capital issued plus any additional consideration in form of cash
or other assets given by the transferee entity over the amount of share
capital of the transferor company is recognised as goodwill.

However,
an exposure draft of amendment to Ind-AS 103 proposes that any
difference between the consideration paid and share capital of the
transferor should be transferred to separate component of equity, viz.,
“Common Control Transaction Capital Reserve.” Ind-AS’s are still in
draft stage and a final version may be available even before this
article is published.

Though there is no IFRS standard that
deals with common control transactions, global practice is to account
them using the pooling method; and in case where the common control
transaction has substance acquisition accounting is permitted.

Technical perspective
IFRS
does not deal with the pooling method. However, it was dealt with in
the erstwhile IAS 22 Business Combinations. Both US and UK GAAP also
provide guidance on the pooling method. Interestingly, neither of these
standards nor AS 14 Accounting for Amalgamations under Indian GAAP allow
any new goodwill to be recognized in the pooling method. Any excess
consideration paid to the erstwhile shareholders of the transferee is a
transaction between the shareholders and reflected directly in the
equity. Thus, goodwill accounting required by original Ind- AS 103 was
contrary to the basic principle of the pooling method. Hence, we agree
that the change proposed in the ED reflects better application of the
pooling method. Despite the proposed correction, we have the following
concerns on accounting for common control business combination
prescribed in Ind-AS 103.

(a) I n our view, it is not
appropriate to mandate the pooling method for all common control
business combinations. In practice, many groups enter into these
transactions as part of their IPO plans. Post IPO, there will be
significant non-controlling interest in the combined entity. In such
cases, companies typically prefer applying the acquisition method to the
common control business combination. However, it may not be possible
under Ind-AS 103.

(b) T he pooling method as discussed in Ind-AS
103 is applicable only to accounting for common control business
combinations. It is not applicable to accounting for transfer between
common control entities of assets/ liabilities not constituting
business.

(c) Whilst Ind-AS 103 requires common control business
combinations to be accounted for using the pooling method, it is not
clear whether the same principles also apply to acquisition of an
associate/ joint venture from an entity under common control.

Our preferred view is that at this juncture, the ICAI should not address common control business combination accounting     in     Ind-AS    103.    Rather,     there     is     sufficient    global precedence to rely upon. however, this approach is not suitable for the long term.  it may be noted that the IASB is developing a separate  IFRS for common control transactions. the ICAI should work with the IASB on the     proposed     IFRS     to     address     India     specific     concerns.      Alternatively, the  ICAI should develop a temporary  
standard, but ensure that the same is in line with current global practice.

Accounting for cost of test runs

fiogf49gjkf0d
BACKGROUND
The accounting for cost of test runs raises some very interesting questions both under Indian GAAP and IFRS. Paragraph 16 of IAS 16 states that the cost of an item of plant and equipment includes any costs directly attributable to bringing the asset to the location and condition necessary for it to be capable of operating in the manner intended by management. Paragraph 17 enumerates examples of directly attributable cost and includes cost of testing whether the asset is functioning properly, after deducting the net proceeds from selling any items produced while bringing the asset to that location and condition; such as samples produced when testing equipment. However, it does not clearly state what the treatment should be when the net proceeds are greater than the cost of testing. Now consider the following two scenarios.

Scenario 1
The cost of test run is Rs. 100. The samples produced are sold at Rs. 80. Theoretically, two answers are possible. The first answer is to capitalise Rs. 100 and consider Rs. 80 as revenue (P&L). The second answer is to capitalise net, i.e., Rs 20. Nothing is taken to P&L.

Scenario 2
The cost of test run is Rs 100. The samples produced are sold at Rs. 130. Theoretically, the following three possibilities exist.

1. Capitalise Rs.100. Take Rs. 130 to revenue (P&L)
2. Capitalise a negative amount of Rs. 30. Nothing is taken to P&L.
3. Capitalise zero amount. Take Rs. 30 to revenue (P&L).

Interpretation under IFRS
This matter was discussed in the IFRS Interpretation committee. They felt that the way paragraph 17 is written, it is only the costs of testing that are permitted to be included in the cost of the plant and equipment. These costs are reduced by the net proceeds from selling items produced during testing. It is self-evident that if the net proceeds exceed the cost of testing, then those excess net proceeds cannot be included in the cost of the asset. Those excess net proceeds must therefore be included in the P&L.

IFRS Interpretation Committee also relied upon paragraph 21 of IAS 16, which indicates that proceeds and related costs arising from an operation, which is not necessary to bring the item to the location and condition necessary for it to be capable of operating in the manner intended by management, should be recognised in P&L and cannot be capitalised. Paragraph 21 is reproduced below.

“Some operations occur in connection with the construction or development of an item of property, plant and equipment, but are not necessary to bring the item to the location and condition necessary for it to be capable of operating in the manner intended by management. These incidental operations may occur before or during the construction or development activities. For example, income may be earned through using a building site as a car park until construction starts. Because incidental operations are not necessary to bring an item to the location and condition necessary for it to be capable of operating in the manner intended by management, the income and related expenses of incidental operations are recognised in profit or loss and included in their respective classifications of income and expense.”

Based on the above discussion, in Scenario 1, a net amount of Rs. 20 is capitalised. In Scenario 2, zero amount is capitalised, and Rs. 30 is taken to revenue (P&L).

Interpretation under Indian GAAP
The following guidance is available in Indian GAAP. It may be noted that the below mentioned Guidance Note on Treatment of Expenditure During Construction Period is withdrawn, but nonetheless relevant for our assessment, since it does not conflict with any accounting standard with respect to the principle that is being debated.

Paragraph 9.1 of AS 10 Accounting for Fixed Assets

The cost of an item of fixed asset comprises its purchase price, including import duties and other non-refundable taxes or levies and any directly attributable cost of bringing the asset to its working condition for its intended use; any trade discounts and rebates are deducted in arriving at the purchase price.

Paragraph 9.3 of AS 10 Accounting for Fixed Assets

The expenditure incurred on start-up and commissioning of the project, including the expenditure incurred on test runs and experimental production, is usually capitalised as an indirect element of the construction cost.

Paragraph 8.1 of Guidance Note on Treatment of Expenditure During Construction Period

It is possible that a new project may earn some income from miscellaneous sources during its construction or preproduction period. Such income may be earned by way of interest from the temporary investment of surplus funds prior to their utilisation for capital or other expenditure or from sale of products manufactured during the period of test runs and experimental production. Such items of income should be disclosed separately either in the profit and loss account, where this account is prepared during construction period, or in the account/statement prepared in lieu of the profit and loss account, i.e., Development Account/Incidental Expenditure During Construction Period Account/Statement on Incidental Expenditure During Construction. The treatment of such incomes for arriving at the amount of expenditure to be capitalised/deferred, has been dealt with in para 15.2.

Paragraph 11.4 of Guidance Note on Treatment of Expenditure During Construction Period

During the period of test runs and experimental production it is quite possible that some income will be earned through the sale of the merchandise produced or manufactured during this period. The sale revenue should be set off against the indirect expenditure incurred during the period of test runs as suggested in para 15.2.

Paragraph 15.2 of Guidance Note on Treatment of Expenditure During Construction Period

From the total of the aforesaid items of indirect expenditure (one of the aforesaid items included expenditure relating to expenditure on test runs) would be deducted the income, if any, earned during the period of construction, provided it can be identified with the project.

Paragraph 14.5 of Guidance Note on Treatment of Expenditure During Construction Period

Income during the construction or pre-production period should be shown separately in the financial statements (see paragraph 8.1 of this Note).

Conclusion
Based upon the above guidance, it is clear in Scenario 1, that a net amount of Rs. 20 is capitalised and nothing is taken to the P&L. However, in the case of Scenario 2, when the corresponding income is greater than the cost of trial run, neither the guidance note nor the standard are absolutely clear on what should be done. However, the author believes that based on similar arguments produced above in the context of IFRS interpretation, a net amount of zero is capitalised and Rs. 30 is taken to revenue (P&L).

levitra

Ind-AS Carve Outs

fiogf49gjkf0d
Synopsis
You may be aware that adoption of the converged Indian Accounting Standards (Ind-AS) has been prescribed under the Union Budget 2014-2015, voluntarily from the fiscal year 2015-16 and mandatorily from the year 2016-17. The Ind-AS are formed in alignment with the principles of IFRS as issued by the International Accounting Standards Board (IASB). In this article, the learned author points out an illustration of the Ind-AS 40 ‘Investment Property’, wherein some differences between Ind-AS and IFRS have been noted. The author explains therein, the necessity to keep the carve-outs to the bare minimum while finalising the Ind-AS, to ensure that there is global acceptability for financial statements that are prepared using these standards once thay are issued.

The Honourable Finance Minister during the Union Budget 2014-15 announced that Ind-AS would be applicable voluntarily from the year 2015-16 and mandatorily from the year 2016-17. To meet the roadmap, swift measures need to be taken. One key step is the notification of the final Ind-AS on a priority basis. This will help companies in timely preparation for Ind-AS adoption. The author is confident that the ASB and the ICAI will meet our expectations and ensure that the final Ind-AS are notified promptly.

A major part of the world is now reporting under the IFRS as issued by the International Accounting Standards Board (IASB). The last of the developed countries to adopt the IFRS was Japan. Earlier, China too has adopted the IFRS, but retained only one difference between Chinese GAAP and the IFRS. As of now, there are only two significant countries that do not use the IFRS. One is the USA. However, the USA allows the IFRS for foreign private filers. It is also being hoped that the US may ultimately allow US companies to voluntarily adopt the IFRS in future. Besides, for a long time, the US and the IASB have been working together on numerous standards, which has resulted in the US slowly inching towards the US GAAP that is closer to the IFRS. The other significant exception to the IFRS adoption is India.

The IASB is an independent standard setting body comprising of 14 full-time members from different parts of the world. The IASB is also responsible for approving interpretations of IFRS. IFRS’s are developed through an international consultation process, the “due process,” which involves interested individuals and organisations from around the world. The development of an the IFRS is carried out during the IASB meetings, when the IASB considers the comments received on the Exposure Draft. Finally, after the due process is completed, all outstanding issues are resolved, and the IASB members have balloted in favour of publication, the IFRS is issued. This is a very time consuming process, but results in technically solid IFRS’s being issued. It takes into consideration the needs and realities of different countries, and tries to balance them. At times, some of these needs and realities could be conflicting, and it would be impossible to keep all countries happy all the time. Nonetheless, the bottom line remains that the standards should be technically robust, one that would reflect the substance of the underlying business and transactions in a fair and transparent manner.

Most countries that have adopted the IFRS, have adopted them as they are, i.e., without indigenising them to their local GAAP. There were many reasons for taking this approach. Foremost, their local GAAP was developed to meet some regulatory and other objectives such as taxes or capital adequacy or protecting creditors. They did not often reflect the true and fair picture and hence were not typically driven towards meeting the needs of the investors. This had to change and investor needed to be given precedence if capital formation and growth objectives were important for that country.

Most countries that did adopt the IFRS as it is, did so because it enhanced the credibility of the financial statements which resulted in low cost of capital. As major groups have companies all over the world, using one accounting language helped them in preparing consolidated financial statements seamlessly. Using one accounting language across their different companies in the world also meant that their management information systems and IT was consistent across the globe. This made their lives much more predictable, consistent and easier. Today most stock exchanges in the developed world either


require or allow the IFRS. Also, investors around the globe understand the IFRS and are very comfortable with it. Any country that departs from the IFRS will not receive any of the above benefits. For example, in countries such as Singapore and Hong Kong, local standards are largely aligned to IFRS, but there are very few differences. This does not allow Singapore/Hong Kong entities to demonstrate compliance with IASB IFRS.

The Credit Lyonnais Securities Asia (CLSA) and the Asian Corporate Governance Association (AGCA) recently released their seventh joint report on corporate governance in Asia. Among other matters, the report ranks 11 Asian markets on macro Corporate Governance (CG) quality. A perusal of the report extracts indicate that amongst the 11 Asian countries, India has got the lowest rating on accounting and auditing matters as it has not implemented IFRS. Due to the same reason, India’s rating has also declined vis-à-vis previous periods. The chart given above depicts this.

The adoption of Ind-AS will resolve these issues and bring India at par with the world at large that has adopted IFRS. To achieve full benefit, it is imperative that Ind- AS’s are notified without any major difference from IASB IFRS. If India were to implement the IFRS with too many differences, it would be akin to moving from one Indian GAAP to another Indian GAAP. It would not be possible for Indian companies to state that they are compliant with the IFRS, and hence, those financial statements will be treated as local GAAP financial statements. More importantly if an Indian company wants to prepare IASB IFRS financial statements in the future, it will have to convert again from Ind-AS to IASB IFRS.

At the same time, it is appreciated that accounting is an art, and not a precise science. Primarily, financial statements should reflect and capture the underlying substance of transactions. The accounting standards are drafted to ensure that underlying transactions are properly accounted for and also aggregated and reflected transparently in the financial statements. But as already pointed out, this is not a precise science, and people may have different views on how to achieve this objective. Also at times, countries depart from the basic objective of true and fair display, to help companies in difficulty and pursue other unrelated objectives. Hence, a country may desire to have a few carve-outs in exceptional circumstances from IASB IFRS. To illustrate, it is believed that in the Indian scenario, classification of loan liability as current merely based on breach of minor debt covenant, say, few days delay in submission of monthly stock statement to bank, does not reflect the expected behaviour of the lender (who may ultimately condone the violation) and may create undue hardship for Indian corporates.

On the other hand, the proposed removal of the fair valuation option under Ind-AS 40 with respect to investment property, does not appear to be reasonable as can be seen from the arguments in the table below. This is not typically a carve-out, but certainly removes one option provided in the IFRS.

Ind-AS 40 Investment Property

Background

IAS 40 allows entities an option to apply either the cost model or the fair value model for subsequent measurement of its investment property. If the fair value model is used, all investment properties, including investment properties under construction, are measured at fair value and changes in the fair value are recognised in the profit or loss for the period in which it arises. Under the fair value model, the carrying amount is not required to be depreciated.

Ind-AS 40 hosted on the MCA website does not permit the use of fair value model for subsequent measurement of investment property. It however requires the fair value of the investment property to be disclosed in the notes to financial statements. It is understood that the ICAI may now be proposing to retain fair valuation model for subsequent measurement of investment property. However, all changes in the fair value will be recognised in the OCI, instead of profit or loss. It is expected that the proposed fair valuation model may be similar to revaluation model under Ind-AS 16 Property, Plant and Equipment.

Technical perspective

Before issuing the IAS 40, the IASB had specifically considered whether there was a need for issuing separate IFRS for investment property accounting or should it be covered under the IAS 16 Property, Plant and Equipment. After detailed evaluation and consultation with stakeholders, the IASB decided that characteristics of investment property differ sufficiently from those of the owner-occupied property. Hence, there is a need for a separate IFRS. In particular, the IASB was of the view that information about fair value of investment property, and about changes in its fair value, is highly relevant to the users of financial statements.

An investment property generates cash flows largely in-dependently of other assets held by an entity. The generation of independent cash flows through rental or capi-tal appreciation distinguishes investment property from owner-occupied property. This distinction makes a fair value model (as against revaluation model) more appropriate for investment property.

The ICAI proposal for allowing fair valuation for investment property is unclear. Particularly, it is unclear whether a company will need to depreciate investment property. Since a company is not recognising fair value gain/ loss in P&L and on the lines of revaluation model in Ind-AS 16, it appears that companies may need to charge depreciation on investment property in profit or loss for the period. This means that while a company will charge depreciation on investment property to profit or loss; it will recognise fair value change directly in OCI. This may give highly distorted results.

In case of investment property companies, investors and other stakeholders measure performance based on rental income plus changes in the fair value. Under the ICAI proposal, no single statement will reflect such performance of an investment property company. A major global accounting firm had conducted a survey in India “IFRS convergence: an investor’s perspective.” Among the survey participants, 67% were in favour of allowing fair value model for investment property as an option to the cost model.

The author would therefore strongly support retaining the fair valuation option under IAS 40. India is at the threshold of introducing new structures such as REIT to provide a boost to the infrastructure and real estate sector. Fair valuation would be the most appropriate basis for investors to enter or exit out of these funds. Hence, retaining the fair valuation model under IAS 40 is imperative.

IASB IFRS may not necessarily provide the best answers in all cases, and there may be a few instances where the standards could have been much better. Nonetheless, the author believes that the standard setters and regulators will have to consider the benefit of these carve outs with the benefits lost as a result of departing from IASB IFRS. Ultimately, it is not about one-upmanship but aligning with the world. In my view, full adoption of IASB IFRS is a goal worth pursuing. At the same time the standards setters and regulators should engage with the IASB in resolving the Indian specific pain points amicably. As an alternative approach, the author suggests that companies should be allowed an option to adopt IASB IFRS, instead of Ind-AS, if they wish to.

In the long-run, the standard setters and regulators should work closely with the IASB so that any differences that arise are resolved more promptly. A mutually respectable relationship can be built with the IASB, where the IASB and the world can gain from India’s participation in the standard setting process and simultaneously India can also benefit from the process in improving its financial reporting framework.

Gaps in GAAP— Component accounting under Schedule II

fiogf49gjkf0d
Schedule II to the Companies Act, 2013 is
applicable from 1 April 2014. Notes to Schedule II, among other matters,
state as below:

“Useful life specified in Part C of the
Schedule is for whole of the asset. Where cost of a part of the asset is
significant to total cost of the asset and useful life of that part is
different from the useful life of the remaining asset, useful life of
that significant part shall be determined separately.”

An illustrative example is given below.

Some key issues are discussed in this article.

How does a company go about conducting this exercise?
Schedule
II requires separate depreciation only for parts of an item of tangible
fixed asset having (i) significant cost, and (ii) different useful
lives from remaining parts of the asset. In many cases, such
determination may be straight forward. For example, an IT company, which
has only computers as fixed assets, may be able to determine with
little analysis that there are no significant components requiring
separate depreciation. Similarly, for an airline company, it may be
clear that engine has different useful life vis-à-vis remainder of the
aircraft. In many other cases, identification of components requiring
separate depreciation may involve complex analysis.

The company
first splits the fixed asset into various identifiable parts to the
extent possible. The identified parts are then grouped together if they
have the same or similar useful life. There is no need to identify and
depreciate insignificant parts as separate components; rather, they can
be combined together in the remainder of the asset or with the principal
asset.

Identification of significant parts is a matter of
judgment and decided on case-to-case basis. Identification of separate
parts of an asset and determination of their useful life is not merely
an accounting exercise; rather, it involves technical expertise. Hence,
it may be necessary to involve technical experts to determine the parts
of an asset.

How does one judge materiality in the context of identification of components?
A
company needs to identify only material/significant components
separately for depreciation. Materiality is a matter of management/audit
judgment and needs to be decided on the facts of each case. Normally, a
component having original cost equal to or less than 5% of the original
cost of complete asset may not be material. However, a component having
original cost equal to 25% of the original cost of complete asset may
be material. In addition, a company also needs to consider impact on
retained earnings, current year profit or loss and future profit or loss
(say, when part will be replaced) to decide materiality. If a component
may have material impact from either perspective, the said component
will be material and require separate identification.

In many
cases, identification of material components may involve complex
judgment, particularly, for assessing impact on future P&L. Also
what may not be material in a particular period could become material in
later years, and vice versa.

Auditors will have to modify
their audit opinion for a company that does not follow component
accounting, the impact of which is likely to be material in the context
of the overall results or financial position
of that company.
In the case of a company that has a manufacturing facility and is asset
intensive, component accounting is likely to be material, not only
because of depreciation impact, but also the way replacement costs are
accounted for.

How is depreciation computed for components vis-avis the requirements of Schedule II?

Each
significant component of the asset having useful life, which is
different from the useful life of the remaining asset, is depreciated
separately. Though component accounting is mandatory, its application should be restricted only to material items.
If the useful life of the component is lower than the useful life of
the principal asset as per Schedule II, such lower useful should be
used. On the other hand, if the useful life of the component is higher
than the useful life of the principal asset as per Schedule II, the
company has a choice of using either the higher or lower useful life.
However, higher useful life for a component can be used only when
management intends to use the component even after expiry of useful life
for the principal asset.

To illustrate, assume that the useful
life of an asset as envisaged under the Schedule II is 10 years. The
management has also estimated that the useful life of the principal
asset is 10 years. If a component of the asset has useful life of 8
years, AS 6 requires the company to depreciate the component using eight
year life only. However, if the component has 12 year life, the company
has an option to either depreciate the component using either 10 year
life as prescribed in the Schedule II or over its estimated useful life
of 12 years, with appropriate justification. However, in this case 12
years life for the component can be used only when management intends to
use the component even after expiry of useful life for the principal
asset.

How are replacement costs accounted for?
The
application of component accounting will cause significant change in
measurement of depreciation and accounting for replacement costs.
Currently, companies need to expense replacement costs in the year of
incurrence. Under component accounting, companies will capitalize these
costs as a separate component of the asset, with consequent expensing of
net carrying value of the replaced component. If it is not practicable
for a company to determine carrying amount of the replaced component, it
may use the cost of the replacement as an indication of what the cost
of the replaced part was at the time it was acquired or constructed.

Even
under the component accounting, a company does not recognise in the
carrying amount of an item of fixed asset the costs of the day-to-day
servicing of the item. These costs are expensed in the statement of
profit and loss as incurred.

How are major inspection/overhaul expenses accounted for when component accounting is applied?

Under
Indian GAAP, no specific guidance is available on component accounting,
particularly, major inspection/ overhaul accounting. In the absence of
guidance, the following two options are likely. A company can select
either of two options for accounting of major inspection/ overhaul. The
option selected should be applied consistently.

Option 1
Though
AS 10 Accounting for Fixed Assets or any other pronouncement under
Indian GAAP does not comprehensively deal with component accounting,
Ind-AS 16 Property, Plant and Equipment contains comprehensive guidance
on the matter. Under component accounting as envisaged in Ind-AS 16,
major inspection/overhaul is treated as a separate part of the asset,
regardless of whether any physical parts of the asset are replaced.
Hence, one option is to apply Ind-AS 16 guidance by analogy. The
application of this approach is explained below.

When a company
purchases a new asset, it is received after major inspected/ overhaul by
the manufacturer. Hence, major inspection/ overhaul is identified
separately even at the time of purchase of new asset. The cost of such
major inspection/ overhaul is depreciated separately over the period
till next major inspection/overhaul.

Upon next major inspection/overhaul, the costs of new major inspection/ overhaul are added to the asset’s cost and any amount remaining from the previous inspection/ overhaul is derecognized. There is no issue in application of this principle, if the company has identified major inspection/ overhaul at the time of original purchase. However, sometimes, it may so happen that the cost of the previous inspection/overhaul was not identified (and considered a separate part) when the asset was originally acquired or constructed (this may not necessarily be an error but a change in an estimate). This process of recognition and derecognition should take place even in such cases.

If   the   element   relating   to   the   inspection/overhaul had  previously  been  identified,  it  would  have  been depreciated between that time and the current overhaul. However, if it had not previously been identified, the recognition and derecognition principles still apply. In such a case, the company uses estimated cost of a future similar inspection/overhaul to be used as an indication of the cost of the existing inspection/overhaul component to be derecognized after considering the depreciation impact.

OPTION 2

It may be argued that under AS 10 approach, all repair expenditure (including major inspection/overhaul) need to be charged to P&L as incurred. Though schedule II mandates component accounting, it does not state that application of component accounting is based on Ind-AS 16 principles. Hence, AS 10 applies for repair expenditure (including major inspection/overhaul).

Under this option, the application of component accounting is restricted only to physical parts. Neither on initial recognition nor subsequently, the compa- ny identifies major inspection/overhaul as separate component. Rather, any expense on major inspection/ overhaul is charged to P&L as incurred.

What are the presentation/disclosure requirements when component accounting is followed?
Component accounting is relevant for purposes such as depreciation and accounting for replacement cost. Companies are not required to disclose components separate- ly in the financial statements or notes thereto. Rather, the company discloses the asset with all its components as one line item.

With regard to disclosure of useful life/depreciation rates, Schedule II has prescribed depreciation rates only for principal asset and no separate rates are prescribed for its components. Also, schedule II requires disclosure of justification if a company uses higher/lower life than what is prescribed in Schedule II. To comply with these require- ments, the following principles are used:

(i)    A company discloses useful life/depreciation rate used for the principal asset separately. If this life/rate is higher/ lower than life prescribed in schedule II, justification for the difference is disclosed in the financial statements.
(ii)    There is no need to disclose useful lives or depreciation rates used for each component (other than principal asset) separately. It will be sufficient compliance, if disclosure is given as a range by presenting the highest and lowest amount. It may not be sufficient to present the average of the useful lives or depreciation rates used in that class of components.

What are the transitional provisions with respect to componentisation?

Component accounting is applicable from 1st April, 2014. It is required to be applied to the entire block of assets existing as at that date. It cannot be restricted to only new assets acquired after 1st April, 2014. Since companies may not have previously identified components separately, they may use estimated cost of a future similar replacements/ inspection/ overhaul as an indication of to determine their current carrying amount.

AS 10 gives companies an option to follow component accounting; it does not mandate the same. In contrast, component accounting is mandatory under the Schedule
II.    Considering this, transitional provisions of Schedule II can be used to adjust the impact of component accounting. If a component has zero remaining useful life on   the date of Schedule II becoming effective, i.e., 1st April 2014, its carrying amount, after retaining any residual value, will be charged to the opening balance of retained earnings. The consequent impact with respect to deferred taxes should also be adjusted to retained earnings. The carrying amount of other components, i.e., components whose remaining useful life is not nil on 1st April 2014, is depreciated over their remaining useful life.

In the case of listed companies do companies have to comply with component accounting in the quarterly results provided under Clause 41?

Listed companies having 31st March year-end need to apply component accounting for quarter ended 30th June, 2014. It may be possible that certain companies have not completed the process of identifying components by due date for publishing its results for quarter ended 30th June, 2014. In such a case, the auditors should make materiality assessment particularly considering that there is no need to publish balance sheet on a quarterly basis. In many cases, it may be clear that application of component ac- counting may not have impacted results for the quarter materially. If so, the auditor should document its basis for materiality assessment in the work papers. As already indicated elsewhere in this article, for most asset intensive companies, the impact on current or future results or financial position will most likely be material because of depreciation and accounting for replacement costs.

Ind-AS Carve Outs – Straightlining of leases

fiogf49gjkf0d
The issue of straight-lining of leases is very important for many enterprises; particularly entities that obtain assets on long-term operating leases; for example, retail entities, multiplexes, telecom towers, etc. Thus, if a telecom tower was leased for nine years on a non-cancellable basis, paying rent of Rs.1,00,000 in the first year, with a 10% escalation each year, the charge in the P&L each year would be Rs.1,50,883 and not the contractual amount to be paid which is the rent for previous year plus 10% escalation. In determining the lease period for straight-lining the possibility of lease extension is also considered, and hence the impact could be much higher than one would normally anticipate.

In a recent discussion organised by an industry association on IFRS adoption, the author was surprised, when the presenter opined that operating leases should not be straight-lined under IFRS and hence a carve-out was required. The reason provided for the carve-out was that IFRS should be pain free. Interestingly, straight-lining is required under Indian GAAP (and is also clarified by an Expert Advisory Committee opinion). Thus, it was absolutely fine to give pain under the Indian GAAP but not under IFRS!

Financial statements should reflect a true and fair view, based on robust accounting standards. Whether the accounting gives pain or is pain free is not relevant. However, what is an appropriate technical approach can sometimes be very debatable. Straight-lining of leases is one such instance where there are strong arguments in favour of and against straight-lining of leases, which one should consider. Let us discuss what those arguments are.

Arguments for and against straight-lining of leases
The primary reason for straight-lining of leases is contained in paragraph 23 of AS-19 which states that “Lease payments under an operating lease should be recognised as an expense in the statement of profit and loss on a straight-line basis over the lease term unless another systematic basis is more representative of the time pattern of the user’s benefit.” In other words, in the above example of telecom towers, the benefit received from the telecom tower over the nine years is absolutely uniform and hence the charge in each of the nine years should be equal. The lessee is expected to derive the same benefit, in physical terms, from the leased asset over the lease term and, accordingly, the scheduled rent increases in the lease rental do not meet the criterion for recognising expense/ income on a basis other than straight-line basis over the lease term.

One view is that the increases in rent in the agreement may only be considered as an adjustment for inflation and hence leases should not be straight-lined. The counter argument is that inflation factor in the agreement may not be representative of the inflation index in the country. Thus, it may so happen that a 10% escalation is built in the rent agreement each year in anticipation of inflation, was not supported by the inflation index, which was expected to be 5%. In reality, it may so happen that in subsequent years rents may fall down drastically, instead of going up. In other words, the cost of operating would be cheaper in future years and hence the assumption that escalations represent future inflation may not be tenable. In India, it may be fair to state that one of the reasons for lease rentals to increase is the inflation factor. Now if the scale up on the rentals in the agreement was based on an inflation index rather than a fixed amount, the scale up would be treated as contingent rentals under AS-19 and accounted for as and when the contingent rentals become due (not on straight-line). However, if the rent increases does not represent an inflation index then straight-lining would be required. This appears to be a fair argument for straightlining leases.

It is understandable that in India people focus on contractual terms and therefore recognising any expense or income that does not represent those contractual terms makes them very uncomfortable. An interesting point would be to look at the standard on depreciation, which permits the straight-line, written down value method and other methods such as unit of production method. A lessee would depreciate an asset obtained on finance lease and capitalised by it using any of the above methods. In other words, the P&L charge would not be based on the contractual terms/payments. Thus, focusing on contractual terms/payments in the case of operating lease would also not be appropriate and would unnecessarily result in structuring possibilities.

Some argue that straight-lining results in recognising future costs. The standard ignores the fact that as time passes, costs go up (or may go down) and so does revenue. The cost of operating in 2007 would always be different from the cost of operating in 2008. The same can be said for the revenue rates; they may go up or down. To try and straight-line the cost (in the case of lessee’s) selectively for leases is a violation of sound accounting principles.

Paragraph 24 of AS-19 states that, “for operating leases, lease payments (excluding costs for services such as insurance and maintenance) are recognised as an expense in the statement of profit and loss on a straight-line basis unless another systematic basis is more representative of the time pattern of the user’s benefit, even if the payments are not on that basis.” This means that if services are provided by lessor to the lessee, for example, maintenance services with a 10% increase each year, those are not required to be straight-lined. Also when a purchaser makes an upfront commitment to purchase goods each year from a seller with a 10% increase over the previous year’s rate, one does not straight-line the cost of purchase over those years. Therefore the point is if straight-lining is not required as a principle in the framework or by other standards, then is it appropriate to apply it selectively in the case of leases?

A point to be noted is that the straight-lining under the standard is an anti-abuse measure arising out of rent-free periods. Thus, if a building is taken on operating lease for three years, with zero rent in the first two years and rent of Rs. 3 lakh for the third year, the standard would require Rs. 1 lakh to be charged each year. This is fair, because in substance there is no such thing as rent-free period. Therefore, some argue that to require straight-lining when there is no indication of deliberate ballooning is unfairly stretching the argument for straight-lining.

The straight-lining of lease rentals would result in a deferred equalisation which may be a liability or an asset. For example, if the operating lease is for two years with rental in year one, of Rs. 100 and rental in year two of Rs. 110; equalisation would result in a deferred liability of Rs. 5 in the first year (which will reverse in the following year). Now the problem with deferred equalisation is that it does not fulfill the definition of an asset or liability under “The Framework For The Preparation And Presentation Of Financial Statements” issued by the Institute of Chartered Accountants of India. Under the framework, asset and liability is defined as follows:

(a) An asset is a resource controlled by the enterprise as a result of past events from which future economic benefits are expected to flow to the enterprise.

(b) A liability is a present obligation of the enterprise arising from past events, the settlement of which is expected to result in an outflow from the enterprise of resources embodying economic benefits.

It begs the question therefore that if deferred equalisation is not an asset or liability as defined under the Framework, then what is it doing in the balance sheet?

Overall, there appears to be good arguments for and against straight-lining of leases. Ultimately, one has to take a decision.

Overall Conclusion
The adoption of Ind-AS will bring India at par with the world (more than 120 countries) at large that has adopted IFRS. To achieve full benefit, it is imperative that Ind-AS’s are notified without any major difference from IASb IFRS. If India were to implement IFRS with too many differences,  it  would  be  akin to moving from one Indian gAAP to another Indian gAAP. This would entail 100% efforts with zero benefits. Moving from Indian GAAP to IASB IFRS would entail 100% efforts but will provide 100% benefits. By adopting IASB IFRS it would become possible  for  Indian companies to state that they are compliant with IASB IFRS, and hence those financial statements can be used globally.

It is well appreciated that accounting is an art, and not   a precise science. Primarily, financial statements should reflect and capture the underlying substance of transactions. The accounting standards are drafted to ensure that underlying transactions are properly accounted for and also aggregated and reflected transparently in the financial statements. But as already pointed out, this is not a precise science, and people may have different views as is evident from the above debate on leases. Sometimes there are no right or wrong answers, and a decision needs to be taken and people need to move ahead.

IASB IFRS is not necessarily the best cut in all cases, and there may be a few instances where the standards could have been better, from another person’s perspective. Nonetheless, the author believes that the standard setters and regulators will have to consider the benefit of these carve outs with the benefits lost as a result of departing from IASB IFRS. ultimately, it is not about one-upmanship but aligning with the world. In my view, full adoption of IASb IFRS is a goal worth pursuing. At the same time the standards setters and regulators should engage with the IASB in resolving the Indian specific issues amicably. As an alternative approach, the author suggests that companies should be allowed an option to adopt IASb IFRS, instead of Ind-AS, if they wish to.

In the long-run, the Indian standard setters and regulators should work closely with the IASB so that any differences that arise are resolved more promptly. A mutually respectable relationship can be built with the IASB, where the IASB and the world can gain from India’s participation in the standard setting process and simultaneously India can also benefit from the process in improving its financial reporting framework.

IASB certainly has a global objective of having one set  of uniform IFRS standards across the world. Therefore, if IFRS are adopted in India without any carve-outs it would be a positive development for IASB. But adopting full IFRS or providing an option to do so, would be a far bigger positive development for India.

Contingent Pricing of Fixed Assets and Intangible Assets

fiogf49gjkf0d
In most cases, fixed assets and intangible assets are purchased at a certain price and the accounting is fairly straight forward. Purchase of an asset on credit gives rise to a financial liability when the asset is delivered. The buyer makes the payment to the seller and relinquishes the financial liability. However, more complex contracts are emerging, where the payments could be contingent upon one or more variables. This is generally referred to as contingent consideration.

Some payments are dependent on the purchasers future activity derived from the underlying asset. For example, a contract for the purchase of a licence may specify that payments are based on a specified percentage of sales derived from that licence. Some payments could depend upon the performance of the asset, for example whether the asset acquired complies with agreed-upon specifications at specific dates in future, such as standard production capacity or a standard performance. Other payments may be dependent on an index or a rate. For example, an operator in a service concession agreement agrees to pay an annual concession fee to the grantor, with the principal amount increasing at the end of each year based on the consumer price index.

The provisions relating to AS 10 Accounting for Fixed Assets, AS 6 Depreciation Accounting and AS 26 Intangible Assets are set out below.

AS 10 Accounting for Fixed Assets
9.1 The cost of an item of fixed asset comprises its purchase price, including import duties and other non-refundable taxes or levies and any directly attributable cost of bringing the asset to its working condition for its intended use; any trade discounts and rebates are deducted in arriving at the purchase price. Examples of directly attributable costs are:

i. site preparation;
ii. initial delivery and handling costs;
iii. installation cost, such as special foundations for plant; and
iv. professional fees, for example fees of architects and engineers.

The cost of a fixed asset may undergo changes subsequent to its acquisition or construction on account of exchange fluctuations, price adjustments, changes in duties or similar factors.

11.2 When a fixed asset is acquired in exchange for shares or other securities in the enterprise, it is usually recorded at its fair market value, or the fair market value of the securities issued, whichever is more clearly evident.

AS 26 Intangible Assets
25. The cost of an intangible asset comprises its purchase price, including any import duties and other taxes (other than those subsequently recoverable by the enterprise from the taxing authorities), and any directly attributable expenditure on making the asset ready for its intended use. Directly attributable expenditure includes, for example, professional fees for legal services. Any trade discounts and rebates are deducted in arriving at the cost.

26. If an intangible asset is acquired in exchange for shares or other securities of the reporting enterprise, the asset is recorded at its fair value, or the fair value of the securities issued, whichever is more clearly evident.

AS 6 Depreciation Accounting
6. Historical cost of a depreciable asset represents its money outlay or its equivalent in connection with its acquisition, installation and commissioning as well as for additions to or improvement thereof. The historical cost of a depreciable asset may undergo subsequent changes arising as a result of increase or decrease in long-term liability on account of exchange fluctuations, price adjustments, changes in duties or similar factors.

16. Where the historical cost of an asset has undergone a change due to circumstances specified in para 6 above, the depreciation on the revised unamortised depreciable amount is provided prospectively over the residual useful life of the asset.

Author’s point of view
Neither AS-10 Accounting for Fixed Assets nor AS 26 Intangible Assets provides any clear guidance on how to account for such contingent pricing arrangement for acquisition of fixed assets and intangible assets. Theoretically many views are possible.

View 1.1
The fixed asset and the liability can be measured at cost on date of acquisition. The cost would be the amount paid on the date of acquisition. In the case of fixed assets, based on paragraph 9.1 of AS-10, any subsequent change in the liability or consideration is capitalised to the cost of fixed asset. This can be used by analogy for intangible assets as well. AS 6 is also clear that any such changes to the fixed asset cost are depreciated prospectively. This is not clear in the case of intangible assets; however the same analogy may be used.

View 1.2
A variation of View 1.1 is that any change to the cost of the asset is not included in cost of the asset, but the impact is taken to P&L. This view is supportable as paragraph 9.1 of AS-10 includes price adjustments, which is not the same as contingent consideration. In other words paragraph 9.1 does not clearly deal with accounting for contingent consideration and hence it is arguable that the changes to the liability are included in the P&L.

View 2
On the date the fixed asset or intangible asset is purchased, the control is transferred to the buyer and consequently a debit to fixed asset or intangible asset and a credit to liabilities would arise equal to the fair value of the contingent payment. Paragraph 11.2 of AS 10 and paragraph 26 of AS 26 support this view, though those paragraphs apply to consideration by way of shares or securities.

The core issue would then be whether the remeasurement of the liability on account of changes in the consideration should be recognised in the profit or loss or included as an adjustment to the cost of the asset. This is a major issue that is not clear even under International Financial Reporting Standards and is a matter of significant debate in the International Financial Reporting Interpretations Committee (IFRIC).

Paragraph 9.1 requires subsequent changes in cost to be included as cost of fixed assets. However those costs do not include contingent consideration adjustment. Therefore there are supportable arguments that subsequent changes in the remeasurement of liability may be recognised in the profit or loss.

Conclusion
In this article, we have simplified the issue of contingent payments and not taken into consideration the various complex arrangements that may be involved and their impact on accounting. Take for example, the contingent payments based on a quoted index. Under IFRS typically one would make an assessment of whether there is an embedded derivative, and whether that embedded derivative needs to be valued and accounted for separately or not. Indian GAAP does not contain any guidance on this matter. The ICAI should participate in the current discussions of IFRIC on this subject and arrive at an amicable conclusion as this would also be relevant for the purposes of interpretation of Ind-AS.

levitra

Can email addresses constitute an Intangible Asset?

fiogf49gjkf0d
Synopsis
With the growth of E-commerce,
wherein Indian companies and start-ups have been investing heavily on
building their customer databases, the accounting treatment of
purchasing the said databases has gained importance with regards to
Indian GAAP. In this Article, the learned author has expressed and
justified the accounting treatment under different scenarios for
purchase of such database of E-mail ID’s based on facts of the cases put
forth in the following article, by referring to technical definitions
and relevant extracts of Accounting Standard-26 ‘Intangible Assets’.

BACKGROUND
Online
Limited (referred to as the company or Online) is specialised in the
online selling of a range of products. The company’s commercial strategy
relies on purchase of databases of email address containing lists of
people who may be interested in purchasing its products. The lists are
provided by the specialised vendors based on the specifications of
Online. These specifications include:
(i) M inimum amount of data, e.g., email address, first name and last name.
(ii)
Based on the potential to buy its products, Online has defined various
categories of data, e.g., income, employment, education, residential
location, past history, age, etc. The person should fall under one or
more of these prescribed categories.
(iii) D ata check against the
existing lists of Online – The purpose of this check is to avoid
duplication with existing email address lists.

The email addresses meeting these specifications are treated as valid email addresses.

Scenario 1
The
specialised vendors carry out search activities to identify valid email
addresses. The company makes payment to these vendors on cost plus
margin basis. Though the company will monitor the quality of work of the
vendor it would nonetheless have to make the payment, even if they have
not found any valid email address. Also, vendors do not guarantee any
exclusivity and they may provide the same email address lists to other
companies also.

Scenario 2
The specialised vendors
carry out search activities to identify valid email addresses. The
company makes payment to these vendors on performance basis. If vendors
do not provide any valid email address, they will not be entitled to any
payment from the company. Also, vendors need to guarantee exclusivity
and they cannot provide the same lists to the competitors of Online.

ISSUE
Can Online recognise the lists of email addresses as an intangible asset under AS 26 Intangible Assets?

TECHNICAL REFERENCES

1. AS 26 defines the terms intangible assets and assets as below:

“An
intangible asset is an identifiable non-monetary asset, without
physical substance, held for use in the production or supply of goods or
services, for rental to others, or for administrative purposes.

An asset is a resource:

(a) Controlled by an enterprise as a result of past events, and
(b) From which future economic benefits are expected to flow to the enterprise.”

2. A s per paragraph 20 of AS 26, an intangible asset should be recognised if, and only if:
(a) It is probable that the future economic benefits that are attributable to the asset will flow to the enterprise, and
(b) T he cost of the asset can be measured reliably.

3. Paragraphs 11 to 13 of AS 26 explain the requirement concerning “identifiability” as below:

“11.
The definition of an intangible asset requires that an intangible asset
be identifiable. To be identifiable, it is necessary that the
intangible asset is clearly distinguished from goodwill. …

12.
An intangible asset can be clearly distinguished from goodwill if the
asset is separable. An asset is separable if the enterprise could rent,
sell, exchange or distribute the specific future economic benefits
attributable to the asset without also disposing of future economic
benefits that flow from other assets used in the same revenue earning
activity.

13. Separability is not a necessary condition for
identifiability since an enterprise may be able to identify an asset in
some other way. For example, if an intangible asset is acquired with a
group of assets, the transaction may involve the transfer of legal
rights that enable an enterprise to identify the intangible asset. …”

4. Paragraphs 14 and 17 of AS 26 provide as under with regard to “control”:

“14.
A n enterprise controls an asset if the enterprise has the power to
obtain the future economic benefits flowing from the underlying resource
and also can restrict the access of others to those benefits. The
capacity of an enterprise to control the future economic benefits from
an intangible asset would normally stem from legal rights that are
enforceable in a court of law. In the absence of legal rights, it is
more difficult to demonstrate control. However, legal enforceability of a
right is not a necessary condition for control since an enterprise may
be able to control the future economic benefits in some other way.

17.
A n enterprise may have a portfolio of customers or a market share and
expect that, due to its efforts in building customer relationships and
loyalty, the customers will continue to trade with the enterprise.
However, in the absence of legal rights to protect, or other ways to
control, the relationships with customers or the loyalty of the
customers to the enterprise, the enterprise usually has insufficient
control over the economic benefits from customer relationships and
loyalty to consider that such items (portfolio of customers, market
shares, customer relationships, customer loyalty) meet the definition of
intangible assets.”

5. Paragraph 18 of AS 26 explains the requirement concerning “Future Economic Benefits”:

“18.
The future economic benefits flowing from an intangible asset may
include revenue from the sale of products or services, cost savings, or
other benefits resulting from the use of the asset by the enterprise.
For example, the use of intellectual property in a production process
may reduce future production costs rather than increase future
revenues.”

6. Paragraph 24 of AS 26 states that if an intangible
asset is acquired separately, the cost of the intangible asset can
usually be measured reliably.

7. Paragraphs 50 and 51 of AS 26 state as under:

“50.
I nternally generated brands, mastheads, publishing titles, customer
lists and items similar in substance should not be recognised as
intangible assets.

51. T his Standard takes the view that
expenditure on internally generated brands, mastheads, publishing
titles, customer lists and items similar in substance cannot be
distinguished from the cost of developing the business as a whole.
Therefore, such items are not recognised as intangible assets.”

DISCUSSION AND ALTERNA TIVE VIEWS
View 1 – The email address lists cannot be recognised as an intangible asset.

An item without physical substance should meet the following four criteria to be recognised as intangible asset under AS 26:
(a) Identifiability
(b) Future economic benefits
(c) Control
(d) R eliable measurement of cost

In
the present case, the email address lists are acquired separately and
the company has the ability to sell them to a third party. Thus, based
on guidance in paragraph 12 of AS 26, the lists satisfy identifiablity
criterion for recognition as intangible asset. Online will use the email
address lists to generate additional sales. Therefore, future economic
benefits are expected to derive from the use of these lists and the
second criterion is also met.

However, the third criterion, viz., control, for  recognition of intangible asset is not met. email addresses are public information and the company cannot effectively restrict their use by other companies. hence, in scenario 1, the control criterion for recognition of intangible asset is not met.

The following additional arguments can be made:

(a)    Purchase of email address lists can be analysed as  outsourcing.  these  lists  are  prepared  by  the suppliers based on the specifications of the com- pany, which is not different from the situation where the company would have built them in-house. hence, guidance in paragraph 50 and 51 of as 26 should apply which prohibit recognition of internally generated intangible assets of such nature.

(b)    These  lists  can  be  viewed  as  marketing  tool,  such as leaflets or catalogues; their purchase price being similar to a marketing expense. in accordance with paragraph 56(c) of as 26, expenditure on advertising and promotional activities cannot be recognised as an intangible asset.

View 2 – the email address lists can be recognised as an intangible asset.

Based on the analysis in view 1, the first two criteria for recognition of an intangible asset (identifiability and future economic benefits) are met.

Regarding the third criterion, viz., future economic benefits are controlled by the company; it may be argued that the company acquires the ownership of the email address lists prepared by the vendor as well as the exclusivity of their use. it is able to restrict the access of third parties to those benefits. Hence, in scenario 2, the third criterion is also met.

Online can reliably measure the cost of acquiring email address lists. indeed, in accordance with paragraph 24 of as 26, the cost of a separately acquired intangible item can usually be measured reliably, particularly when the consideration is in the form of cash.

The  author  believes  that  the  company,  which  sub-contracts the development of intangible assets to other parties (its vendors), must exercise judgment in determining whether it is acquiring an intangible asset or whether it is obtaining goods and services that are being used in the development of a customer relationship by the entity itself. in determining whether a vendor is providing services to develop an internally generated intangible asset, the terms of the supply agreement should be examined to see whether the supplier is bearing a significant proportion of the risks associated with a failure of the project. for example, if the supplier is always compensated irrespective of the project’s outcome, the company on whose behalf the development is undertaken should account for those activities as its own. however, if the vendor bears a significant proportion of the risks associated with a failure of the project, the company is acquiring developed intangible asset, and therefore the requirements relating to separate acquisition of intangible asset should apply.

Under this view, the company will amortise intangible asset over its estimated useful life. the author believes that due to the following key reasons, the asset may have relatively small useful life, say, not more than two years:

(a)    the  company  will  use  email  address  lists  to  generate future sales. once the conversion takes place,  the email address lists will lose their relevance for  the company and a new customer relationship asset comes into existence which is an internally generated asset.

(b)    for  email  addresses  which  do  not  convert  into  customers over the next 12 to 24 months, it may be reasonable to assume that they may not be interested in buying company products.

(c)    email addresses may be subject to frequent changes.

Concluding remarks
in scenario 1, the control criterion is not met. Besides the vendor is providing the company a service rather than selling an intangible asset. therefore the author believes that only view 1 should apply in scenario 1. in scenario 2, view 2 is justified. In scenario 2, the exclusivity criterion and consequently the control requirement is met. secondly, since the payment to the vendor is based on performance the company pays for an intangible asset, rather than for services. however, the amortisation period will generally be very short.

GapS in gaap ? Consolidated Financial Statements

fiogf49gjkf0d
Section 129(3) of the 2013 Act requires that a company having one or more subsidiaries will, in addition to Separate Financial Statements (SFS), prepare Consolidated Financial Statements (CFS). Hence, the 2013 Act requires all companies, including non-listed and private companies, having subsidiaries to prepare CFS.

The 2013 Act also provides the following:

(a) CFS will be prepared in the same form and manner as SFS of the parent company.

(b) The Central Government may provide for the consolidation of accounts of companies in such manner as may be prescribed.

(c) The requirements concerning preparation, adoption and audit of SFS will, mutatis mutandis, apply to CFS.

(d) An explanation to the section dealing with the preparation of CFS states that “for the purposes of this sub-section, the word subsidiary includes associate company and joint venture.”

While there is no change in section 129(3), Rule 6 under the Companies (Accounts) Rules, 2014 deals with the “Manner of consolidation of accounts.” It states that the consolidation of the financial statements of a company will be done in accordance with the provisions of Schedule III to the 2013 Act and the applicable accounting standards. The proviso to this rule states as below:

“Provided that in case of a company covered under s/s. (3) of section 129 which is not required to prepare consolidated financial statements under the Accounting Standards, it shall be sufficient if the company complies with provisions on consolidated financial statements provided in Schedule III of the Act.”

Given below is an overview of key requirements under the Schedule III concerning CFS:

(a) Where a company is required to prepare CFS, it will, mutatis mutandis, follow the requirements of this Schedule as applicable to a company in the preparation of the balance sheet and statement of profit and loss.

(b) In CFS, the following will be disclosed by way of additional information:

(i) In respect of each subsidiary, associate and joint venture, % of net assets as % of consolidated net assets.

(ii) In respect of each subsidiary, associate and joint venture, % share in profit or loss as % of consolidated profit or loss. Disclosures at (i) and (ii) are further sub-categorised into Indian and foreign subsidiaries, associates and joint ventures.

(iii) For minority interest in all subsidiaries, % of net assets and % share as in profit or loss as % of consolidated net assets and consolidated profit or loss, separately.

(c) All subsidiaries, associates and joint ventures (both Indian or foreign) will be covered under CFS.

(d) A company will disclose the list of subsidiaries, associates or joint ventures which have not been consolidated along with the reasons of nonconsolidation.

Practical issues and perspectives

AS 21 does not mandate a company to present CFS. Rather, it merely states that if a company presents CFS for complying with the requirements of any statute or otherwise, it should prepare and present CFS in accordance with AS 21. Keeping this in view and proviso to the Rule 6, can a company having subsidiary take a view that it need not prepare CFS?

This question is not relevant to listed companies, since the listing agreement requires listed companies with subsidiaries to prepare CFS. This question is therefore relevant from the perspective of a non-listed company.

Some argue that because neither AS 21 nor Schedule III mandates preparation of CFS, the rules have the effect of not requiring a CFS. Instead, a company should present a statement containing information, such as share in profit/ loss and net assets of each subsidiary, associate and joint ventures, as additional information in the Annual Report. In this view, the rules would override the 2013 Act. If it was indeed the intention not to require CFS, then it appears inconsistent with the requirement to present a statement containing information such as share in profit/loss and net assets of each of the component in the group.

Others argue that the requirement to prepare CFS is arising from the 2013 Act and the rules/ accounting standards cannot change that requirement. The proviso given in the rules is to deal with specific exemptions in AS 21 from consolidating certain subsidiaries which operate under severe long-term restrictions or are acquired and held exclusively with a view to its subsequent disposal in the near future. If this was indeed the intention, then the proviso appears to be poorly drafted, because the exemption should not have been for preparing CFS, but from excluding certain subsidiaries in the CFS.

In our view, this is an area where the MCA/ ICAI need to provide guidance/ clarification. Until such guidance/ clarifications are provided, the author’s preferred approach is to read the “proviso” mentioned above in a manner that rules do not override the 2013 Act. Hence, all companies having one or more subsidiary need to prepare CFS.

The subsequent issues are discussed on the assumption that the preferred view, i.e., all companies having one or more subsidiary need to prepare CFS, is finally accepted. If this is not the case, the views on subsequent issues may change.

IFRS exempts non-listed intermediate holding companies from preparing CFS if certain conditions are fulfilled. Is there any such exemption under the 2013 Act read with the rules?

Attention is invited to discussion on the previous issue regarding need to prepare CFS. As mentioned earlier, the preferred view is that all companies having one or more subsidiary need to prepare CFS. Under this view, there is no exemption for non-listed intermediate holding companies from preparing CFS. Hence, it requires all companies having one or more subsidiaries to prepare CFS.

Currently, the listing agreement permits companies to prepare and submit consolidated financial results/ financial statements in compliance with IFRS as issued by the IASB. For a company taking this option, there is no requirement to prepare CFS under Indian GAAP. Will this position continue under the 2013 Act?

Attention is invited to discussion on the earlier issue regarding the requirement to prepare CFS. As mentioned earlier, the preferred view is that CFS is required for all companies having one or more subsidiary. The rules are clear that consolidation of financial statements will be done in accordance with the provisions of Schedule III to the 2013 Act and the applicable accounting standards. Hence, the companies will have to mandatorily prepare Indian GAAP CFS, and may choose either to continue preparing IFRS CFS as additional information or discontinue preparing them.

An explanation to section 129(3) of the 2013 Act states that “for the purpose of this sub-section, the word subsidiary includes associate company and joint venture.” The meaning of this explanation is not clear. Does it mean that a company will need to prepare CFS even if it does not have any subsidiary but has an associate or joint venture?

The following two views seem possible on this matter:

(a) One view is that under the notified AS, the application of equity method/ proportionate consolidation to associate/joint ventures is required only when a company has subsidiaries and prepares CFS. Moreover, the rules clarify that CFS need to be prepared as per applicable accounting standards. Hence, the proponents of this view argue that that a company is not required to prepare CFS if it does not have a subsidiary but has an associate or joint venture.

b)The second view is that the above explanation requires associates/ joint ventures to be treated at par with subsidiary for deciding whether CFS needs to be prepared. Moreover, the 2013 Act decides the need to prepare CFS and the rules are relevant only for the manner of consolidating entities identified as subsidiaries, associates and joint ventures. Hence, CFS is prepared when the company has an associate or joint venture, even though it does not have any subsidiary. The associate and joint venture are accounted for using the equity/proportionate consolidation method in the CFS.

We understand that the MCA/ ICAI may provide an appropriate guidance on this issue in the due course. Until such guidance is provided from the author’s perspective, the second view appears to be more logical reading of the explanation. Hence, the preference is to apply the second view.

Section 129(4) read with Schedule III to the Act suggests that disclosure requirements of Schedule III,  mutatis mutandis, apply in the preparation of CFS. In contrast, explanation to paragraph 6 of AS 21 exempts disclosure of statutory information in the CFS. Will this exemption continue under the 2013 Act?

A company will need to give all disclosures required by Schedule III to the 2013 Act, including statutory information, in the CFS. To support this view, it may be argued that AS 21 (explanation to paragraph 6) had given exemption from disclosure of statutory information because the 1956 Companies Act did not require CFS. With the enactment of the 2013 Act, this position is likely to change. Also, the exemption in AS 21 is optional and therefore this should not be seen as a conflict between AS 21 and Schedule III. In other words, the statutory information required by Schedule III for SFS will also apply to CFS.

The disclosures given in the CFS will include information for parent, all subsidiaries (including foreign subsidiaries) and proportionate share for joint ventures. For associates accounted using equity method, disclosures will not apply. This ensures consistency with the manner in which investments in subsidiaries, joint ventures and associates are treated in CFS.

There would be some practical issues in implementing the above requirement. For example,
(a)  It is not clear as to how a company will give disclosures such as import, export, earnings and expenditure in foreign currency, for foreign subsidiaries and joint ventures. Let us assume that an Indian company has US subsidiary that buys and sells goods in USD. From CFS perspective, should the purchase/sale in US be treated as import/export of goods? Should such purchase/sale be presented as foreign currency earning/expenditure?

(b) How should a company deal with intra-group foreign currency denominated transactions which may get eliminated on consolidation? Let us assume that there are sale/purchase transactions between the Indian parent and its overseas subsidiaries, which get eliminated on consolidation. Will these transactions require disclosure as export/ import in the CFS?
    
The ICAI should provide appropriate guidance on these practical issues. Until such guidance is provided by the ICAI, differing views are possible on this this matter. To help resolving this issue, one may argue that the MCA has mandated these disclosures to be included in the financial statements to present information regarding imports/exports made and foreign currency earned/spent by Indian companies. In the absence of specific guidance, the preference is to use the said objective as a guiding principle to decide the disclosures required.
Assume that the 2013 Act requires even non-listed and private groups to prepare CFS. Under this assumption, the following two issues need to be considered:

(a) The date from which the requirement concerning preparation of CFS will apply. Particularly, is it mandatory for non-listed/ private groups to prepare CFS for the year-ended 31st March 2014?
(b) Whether the comparative numbers need to be given in the first set of CFS presented by an existing group?

(a)  Based on the General Circular No. 8/2014 dated 4th April 2014, non-listed/private groups need to prepare CFS only for financial year beginning on or after 1st April 2014.
(b) Regarding the second issue, Schedule III states that except for the first financial statements prepared by a company after incorporation, presentation of comparative amounts is mandatory. In contrast, transitional provisions to AS 21 exempt presentation of comparative numbers in the first set of CFS prepared even by an existing group.

  One may argue that there is no conflict between transitional provisions of AS and Schedule III. Rather, AS 21 gives an exemption which is not allowed under the Schedule III. Hence, presentation of comparative numbers will be mandatory in the first set of CFS prepared by an existing company.

Gaps in GAAP

fiogf49gjkf0d
Depreciation
Synopsis

In this article, the author has dismissed inconsistencies in the depreciation policy prevailing AS-6 on Depreciation Accounting and as per the Schedule II of the new Companies Act, 2013 with regard to the concepts of “Useful Life” and “Residual Value”. The author has addressed issues like Revenue-based amortisation, component accounting, revaluation of fixed assets, etc. along with the applicability of transitional provisions in different situations.

Background In the 1956 Act, Schedule XIV prescribed depreciation rates for various assets, both under the SLM method and WDV method. The purpose of prescribing minimum rates was to ensure that dividends are declared out of profits determined after providing for minimum depreciation. AS-6 on Depreciation Accounting laid out principles for depreciation for the purposes of financial statements. Under this standard, depreciation under Schedule XIV is counted as minimum. Higher depreciation was required to be provided for, if based on management’s assessment, the useful life of asset was lower than that laid out in Schedule XIV.

Initially, Schedule II of the 2013 Act laid out useful lives for assets, which were to be compulsorily used as minimum rates except by Ind-AS companies. Pursuant to an amendment to Schedule II this requirement was removed. Rather, the provision now reads as under:

“(i) The useful life of an asset shall not be longer than the useful life specified in Part ‘C’ and the residual value of an asset shall not be more than five per cent of the original cost of the asset:

Provided that where a company uses a useful life or residual value of the asset which is different from the above limits, justification for the difference shall be disclosed in its financial statement.”

From the use of word “different”, it seems clear that both higher and lower useful life and residual value are allowed. However, a company needs to disclose in the financial statements justification for using higher/lower life and/ or residual value.

Transitional provisions
With regard to the adjustment of impact arising on the first-time application, the transitional provisions to Schedule II state as below:

“From the date Schedule II comes into effect, the carrying amount of the asset as on that date:
(a) Will be depreciated over the remaining useful life of the asset as per this Schedule,
(b) A fter retaining the residual value, will be recognised in the opening balance of retained earnings where the remaining useful life of an asset is nil.”

Proviso to Schedule II states that if a company uses a useful life or residual value of the asset which is different from limit given in the Schedule II, justification for the difference is disclosed in its financial statements. How is this proviso applied if notified accounting standards, particularly, AS 6 is also to be complied with?

AS 6 states that depreciation rates prescribed under the statute are minimum. If management’s estimate of the useful life of an asset is shorter than that envisaged under the statute, depreciation is computed by applying the higher rate. The interaction of the above proviso and AS 6 is explained with simple examples:

(i) T he management has estimated the useful life of an asset to be 10 years. The life envisaged under the Schedule II is 12 years. In this case, AS 6 requires the company to depreciate the asset using 10 year life only. In addition, Schedule II requires disclosure of justification for using the lower life. The company cannot use 12 year life for depreciation.

(ii) T he management has estimated the useful life of an asset to be 12 years. The life envisaged under the Schedule II is 10 years. In this case, the company has an option to depreciate the asset using either 10 year life prescribed in the Schedule II or the estimated useful life, i.e., 12 years. If the company depreciates the asset over the 12 years, it needs to disclose the justification for using the higher life. The company should apply the option selected consistently.

Similar logic will apply for the residual value.

Whether revenue based amortisation under Schedule II can be applied to intangible assets other than toll roads?

Amended Schedule II reads as follows “For intangible assets, the provisions of the accounting standards applicable for the time being in force shall apply except in case of intangible assets (Toll roads) created under BOT, BOOT or any other form of public private partnership route in case of road projects.” The amendment clearly suggests that revenue-based amortisation applies to toll roads. The same method cannot be used for other intangible assets even if they are created under PPP schemes, such as airport infrastructure.

Is component accounting under Schedule II mandatory? Is it applied retrospectively or prospectively? How are transitional provisions applied in the case of component accounting?

Component accounting requires a company to identify and depreciate significant components with different useful lives separately. For example, in the case of a building, the base structure or elevators or chiller plant may be identified as separate components. The application of component accounting is likely to cause significant change in the measurement of depreciation and accounting for replacement costs. Currently, companies need to expense replacement costs in the year of incurrence. This was causing a volatility. Under component accounting, companies will capitalise these costs as a separate component of the asset, with consequent expensing of net carrying value of the replaced part. Component accounting would comparatively result in a more stable P&L account.

Schedule II clarifies that the useful life is given for whole of the asset. If the cost of a part of the asset is significant to the total cost of the asset and the useful life of that part is different from the useful life of the remaining asset, the useful life of that significant part will be determined separately. This implies that component accounting is mandatory under Schedule II. In contrast, AS 10 gives companies an option to follow the component accounting; it does not mandate the same.

Materiality in the context of component accounting is decided on an asset by asset basis, and how significant the cost of component is, compared to cost of the total asset. This will call for judgement to be exercised. Component accounting is required to be done for the entire block of assets as at 1st April, 2014. It cannot be restricted to only new assets acquired after 1st April 2014.

If a component has zero remaining useful life on the date of Schedule II becoming effective, i.e., 1st April 2014, its carrying amount, after retaining any residual value, will be charged to the opening balance of retained earnings. The carrying amount of other components, i.e., components whose remaining useful life is not nil on 1st April 2014, is depreciated over their remaining useful life.

In case of revaluation of fixed assets, companies are currently allowed to transfer an amount equivalent to the additional depreciation on account of the upward revaluation of fixed assets from the revaluation reserve to P&L. What is the position under Schedule II?

Under Schedule XIV, depreciation was to be provided on the original cost of an asset. Considering this, the ICAI Guidance Note on Treatment of Reserve Created on Revaluation of Fixed Assets allowed an amount equivalent to the additional depreciation on account of the upward revaluation of fixed assets to be transferred from the revaluation reserve to the P&L.

In contrast, schedule II to the 2013 Act requires depreciation to be provided on historical cost or the amount substituted for the historical cost. therefore, in case of revaluation, a company needs to charge depreciation based on the revalued amount. Consequently, the ICAI Guidance note, which allows an amount equivalent to the additional depreciation on account of upward revaluation to be recouped from the revaluation reserve, will not apply.

Schedule II to the 2013 Act is applicable from 1 April 2014. Section 123, which is effective from 1 April 2014, among other matters, states that a company cannot declare dividend for any financial year except out of (i) profit for the year arrived at after providing for depreciation in accordance with Schedule II, or
(ii)    … Given this background, is the applicability of Schedule II preponed to financial statements for even earlier periods if they are authorised for issuance post 1st April 2014?

As per MCA announcement, Schedule II is applicable from 1st april 2014.

Schedule II contains depreciation rates in the context of Section 123 dealing with “Declaration and payment of dividend” and companies use the same rate for the preparation of financial statements as well. Additional depreciation may be provided, based on assessment of useful life as per AS 6.

One view is that for declaring any dividend after 1st April 2014, a company needs to determine profit in accordance with Section 123. this is irrespective of the financial year-end of a company. Hence, a company uses Schedule ii principles and rates for charging depreciation in all financial statements finalised on or after 1st April 2014, even if these financial statements relate to earlier periods.

The second view is that based on the General Circular 8/2014, depreciation rates and principles prescribed in Schedule II are relevant only for the financial years commencing on or after 1st  april 2014. the language used in the General Circular 8/2014, including reference to depreciation rates in its first paragraph, seems to suggest that second view should be applied. For financial years beginning prior to 1st april 2014, depreciation rates prescribed under the Schedule XiV to the 1956 act will continue to be used.

In the author’s view, based on the clear intent of the regulator, second view is the preferred approach for charging depreciation in the financial statements.

How do the transitional provisions apply in different situations? In situation 1, earlier Schedule XIV and now Schedule II provide a useful life, which is much higher than AS 6 useful life. In situation 2, earlier Schedule XIV and now Schedule II provide a useful life, which is much shorter than AS 6 useful life.

In situation 1, the company follows aS 6 useful life under the 1956 as well as the 2013 Act. In other words, a status quo is maintained and there is no change in depreciation. hence, the transitional provisions become irrelevant. in situation 2, when the company changes from Schedule XiV to Schedule ii useful life, the transitional provisions would apply. for example, let’s assume the useful life of an asset under Schedule XiV, Schedule ii and as 6 is 12, 8 and 16 years respectively. the company changes the useful life from 12 to 8 years and the asset has already completed 8 years of useful life, i.e., its remaining useful life on the transition date is nil. in this case, the transitional provisions would apply and the company will adjust the carrying amount of the asset as on that date, after retaining residual value, in the opening balance of retained earnings. if, on the other hand, the company changes the useful life from 12 years to 16 years, the company will depreciate the carrying amount of the asset as on 1st April 2014 prospectively over the remaining useful life of the asset. this  treatment  is  required  both  under  the  transitional provisions to Schedule ii and AS 6.

How are tax effects accounted for adjustments made to retained earnings required by transitional provisions?

Attention is invited to the ICAI announcement titled, “Tax effect of expenses/income adjusted directly against the reserves  and/or  Securities  Premium  Account.”  the announcement, among other matters, states as below:

“… Any expense charged directly to reserves and/or Securities Premium Account should be net of tax benefits expected to arise from the admissibility of such expenses for tax purposes. Similarly, any income credited directly to a reserve account or a similar account should be net of its tax effect.”

Considering the above, it seems clear that the amount adjusted to reserves should be the net of tax benefit, if any.

Gaps in GaAp – Core Inventories

fiogf49gjkf0d
In a certain manufacturing or a distribution process a certain amount of core inventory is required to run the plant, transport the raw material or finished goods. Examples of core inventories are cushion gas in cavern storage facilities, crude oil used as line fill and minimum levels of some materials in non-ferrous metal refining. The essential features of core inventory are:

(a) Use: are necessary to permit a production facility to start operating and to maintain subsequent production;

(b) Physical form: not physically separable from other inventories and interchangeable with them;

(c) Removal: can be removed only when production facilities are abandoned, decommissioned or overhauled or at a considerable financial charge. Sometimes the quality of what can be removed may not be the same as the original inventory, for example, on decommissioning there could be a lot of sludge or waste material.

The issue could be material for some companies, such as in the case of an oil pipeline company where the pipeline runs into several kilometres. In such cases, the impact of the manner in accounting for the initial fill could be very significant.

Query
Whether core inventories should be classified as inventories or fixed assets? How are they subsequently measured?

View 1:
Classification under AS-2 Valuation of Inventories

Inventories are defined in AS-2 as (a) held for sale in the ordinary course of business; (b) in the process of production for such sale; or (c) in the form of materials or supplies to be consumed in the production process or in the rendering of services. Core inventories meet that definition of inventories. The rationale for classification as inventories is that core inventories are ordinarily interchangeable with other inventories, and thus, core inventories held at a particular reporting date will be either consumed or sold in the next period.

On the other hand, AS-10 Accounting for Fixed Assets, defines fixed assets as “Fixed asset is an asset held with the intention of being used for the purpose of producing or providing goods or services and is not held for sale in the normal course of business.” Core inventories do not meet this definition because they are held for sale in the normal course business. On the assumption that the unit of account is the smallest unit of the material concerned (ultimately individual atoms), core inventories are classified as inventories because they represent materials that are consumed in the production process

The two different views on subsequent measurement of core inventories are:

(a) Core inventories are measured collectively with other inventories using FIFO or a weightedaverage cost formula. These methods are supported in AS-2.

(b) Core inventories are measured separately from other inventories. The rationale for this accounting treatment is that the accounting transaction does not take place at the time of each inventory’s swap and therefore their value is not stepped up. Support for this may be found in paragraph 14 of AS-2 which states that “The cost of inventories of items that are not ordinarily interchangeable and goods or services produced and segregated for specific projects should be assigned by specific identification of their individual costs.” However, a more appropriate view may well be that measuring core inventory separately is similar to applying the base stock method which is prohibited in AS-2.

A matter of concern is that if core inventories are accounted for as inventories, an entity would in many cases, need to recognise an immediate loss on writing off to net realisable value, if the inventory is not expected to be fully recoverable when the plant is ultimately decommissioned. Either full quantity is not recovered or some recovery may be in the form of sludge. Also, the net realisable value would factor the cost incurred for recovering the inventory. At other times, such as the initial fill in the case of an oil pipeline company, the net realisable value on account of price changes could fluctuate significantly, and create volatility in the P&L A/c.

View 2: Classification under AS-10 Accounting for Fixed Assets

The rationale for classification as fixed asset is that core inventories are not held for sale or for consumption; instead, their intended use is to ensure that a production facility is operating. Even though core inventories are commingled with ordinary inventories, the characteristics and intended use of a particular part of the inventories remain the same at each individual reporting date. Thus these core inventories need to be accounted for separately.

Core inventories should be classified as fixed asset because they are necessary to bring a fixed asset to its required operating condition. Paragraph 9.1 of AS-10 states that “The cost of an item of fixed asset comprises its purchase price, including import duties and other non-refundable taxes or levies and any directly attributable cost of bringing the asset to its working condition for its intended use; any trade discounts and rebates are deducted in arriving at the purchase price. Examples of directly attributable costs are:

i. site preparation;
ii. initial delivery and handling costs;
iii. installation cost, such as special foundations for plant; and
iv. professional fees, for example fees of architects and engineers.”

If core inventories are carried as inventories, it would not properly reflect the fact that core inventories are necessary to operate another asset over more than one operating cycle. On the assumption that the unit of account is the minimum amount of material as a whole, core inventories are classified as fixed asset because they are neither held for sale nor consumed in the production process.

The classification of core inventories should be based on their intended primary use because:

(a) A part of inventories of the same quantity, characteristics and use for an entity is always in the production facility, whether this part is commingled with other inventories or not. Core inventories need to be accounted for separately from ordinary inventories.

(b) The classification based on the intended primary use, rather than on their physical form, would provide more relevant information for the users of financial statements.

The primary use of core inventories is to be held for use in the production or supply of goods or services (meets the definition of a fixed asset), rather than to be sold or consumed in the production process or in the rendering of services (does not meet the definition of inventories).

The loss of core inventories over-time should be recognised as an expense over the useful life of a fixed asset, based on the following:

(a) economic benefits associated with core inventories are consumed over the entire useful life of the fixed asset.

(b) in the case of a systematic allocation, the costs would match with the associated revenues.

Both the above would meet the spirit of the Conceptual Framework on the basis of which Indian accounting standards are drafted.

Some are of the view that only core inventories that could not be substantially recovered from the production facility form an element of fixed asset cost. Otherwise, they may be carried as inventories. The author believes that assets’ recoverability should not change their classification. The classification of core inventories should not be based on their recoverability, because this guidance is not explicitly stated in Indian GAAP. Instead, the depreciation mechanism described in AS 6 addresses accounting in such cases; i.e., core inventories that can be recovered would be depreciated to the extent of their residual value. However, due to price increases over time in core inventories, the residual value would go up significantly, leading to low or no depreciation.

The historical cost measurement is a common approach for non-current assets. However, if an entity believes that the current cost of core inventories would provide more relevant financial information to the users, a revaluation model in AS-10 may also be applied.
Overall Conclusion
The accounting practice prevalent globally on this matter is mixed. However, the predominant view, globally, is that core inventories are fixed assets.
The Expert Advisory Committee (EAC) of the Institute of Chartered Accountants of India, have opined that core inventories should be classified as Inventories under AS-2. However, the author believes that there are enough provisions within Indian GAAP, that lend core inventories to be either classified as fixed assets or inventories. This choice can be eliminated only through appropriate amendment of the scoping paragraphs in the standards rather than through an interpretation by the EAC.

Gap in GaAp – Accounting for Demerger

fiogf49gjkf0d
Synopsis

Following the rapid ushering in of the Companies Act, 2013, MCA has also started issuing draft rules. The author highlights the glaring lacunae in the Draft Rules for Accounting for Demerger, which require the accounting to be undertaken in accordance with the current provisions under Income Tax governing demergers, instead of acceptable accounting principles.

This article deals with the issues relating to accounting for demerger, as a result of the draft rules under the Companies Act 2013. The said rules are not yet final.

As per the draft rules, “demerger” in relation to companies means transfer, pursuant to scheme of arrangement by a ‘demerged company’ of its one or more undertakings to any ‘resulting company’ in such a manner as provided in section 2(19AA) of the Income Tax Act, 1961, subject to fulfilling the conditions stipulated in section 2(19AA) of the Income Tax Act and shares have been allotted by the ‘resulting company’ to the shareholders of the ‘demerged company’ against the transfer of assets and liabilities.

As per section 2 (19AA) of the Income-tax Act, “demerger” in relation to companies, means the transfer, pursuant to a scheme of arrangement under the Companies Act, 1956, by a demerged company of its one or more undertakings to any resulting company in such a manner that—

i. all the property of the undertaking, being transferred by the demerged company, immediately before the demerger, becomes the property of the resulting company by virtue of the demerger;

ii. all the liabilities relatable to the undertaking, being transferred by the demerged company, immediately before the demerger, become the liabilities of the resulting company by virtue of the demerger;

iii. the property and the liabilities of the undertaking or undertakings being transferred by the demerged company are transferred at values appearing in its books of account immediately before the demerger;

iv. the resulting company issues, in consideration of the demerger, its shares to the shareholders of the demerged company on a proportionate basis [except where the resulting company itself is a shareholder of the demerged company];

v. the shareholders holding not less than threefourths in value of the shares in the demerged company (other than shares already held therein immediately before the demerger, or by a nominee for, the resulting company or, its subsidiary) become share-holders of the resulting company or companies by virtue of the demerger, otherwise than as a result of the acquisition of the property or assets of the demerged company or any undertaking thereof by the resulting company;

vi. the transfer of the undertaking is on a going concern basis;

vii. the demerger is in accordance with the conditions, if any, notified u/s.s. (5) of section 72A by the Central Government in this behalf.

Explanation 1—For the purposes of this clause, “undertaking” shall include any part of an undertaking, or a unit or division of an undertaking or a business activity taken as a whole, but does not include individual assets or liabilities or any combination thereof not constituting a business activity.

Explanation 2—For the purposes of this clause, the liabilities referred to in sub-clause (ii), shall include—

(a) the liabilities which arise out of the activities or operations of the undertaking;
(b) the specific loans or borrowings (including debentures) raised, incurred and utilised solely for the activities or operations of the undertaking; and
(c) in cases, other than those referred to in clause (a) or clause (b), so much of the amounts of general or multipurpose borrowings, if any, of the demerged company as stand in the same proportion which the value of the assets transferred in a demerger bears to the total value of the assets of such demerged company immediately before the demerger.

Explanation 3—For determining the value of the property referred to in sub-clause (iii), any change in the value of assets consequent to their revaluation shall be ignored.

Explanation 4—For the purposes of this clause, the splitting up or the reconstruction of any authority or a body constituted or established under a Central, State or Provincial Act, or a local authority or a public sector company, into separate authorities or bodies or local authorities or companies, as the case may be, shall be deemed to be a demerger if such split up or reconstruction fulfils such conditions as may be notified in the Official Gazette, by the Central Government.

Accounting for demerger under the draft rules issued under Companies Act 2013

The draft rules recognise that accounting standards issued under the Companies Accounting Standard Rules do not contain any standard for demergers. Till such time an accounting standard is prescribed for the purpose of ‘demerger’, the accounting treatment shall be in accordance with the conditions stipulated in section 2(19AA) of the Income Tax Act, 1961 and

(i) in the books of the ‘demerged company’:-

(a) assets and liabilities shall be transferred at the same value appearing in the books, without considering any revaluation or writing off of assets carried out during the preceding two financial years; and

(b) the difference between the value of assets and liabilities shall be credited to capital reserve or debited to goodwill.

(ii) in the books of ‘resulting company’:-

(a) assets and liabilities of ‘demerged company’ transferred shall be recorded at the same value appearing in the books of the ‘demerged company’ without considering any revaluation or writing off of assets carried out during the preceding two financial years;

(b) shares issued shall be credited to the share capital account; and

(c) the excess or deficit, if any, remaining after recording the aforesaid entries shall be credited to capital reserve or debited to goodwill as the case may be.

Provided that a certificate from a chartered accountant is submitted to the Tribunal to the effect that both ‘demerged company’ and ‘resulting company’ have complied with conditions as above and accounting treatment prescribed in this rule.

Author’s Analysis

First, the draft rules are designed to ensure compliance with section 2(19AA). In the author’s view, accounting treatment should be governed by Indian GAAP, Ind-AS/IFRS or generally acceptable accounting practices; rather than, the provisions of the Income- tax Act. The requirement to record demergers at book values in accordance with section 2(19AA) may not gel well with the requirements of generally acceptable accounting practices. For example, under IFRS/Ind-AS, distribution to shareholders is recorded at fair value, whereas under the draft rules the same is recorded at book value. This anomaly should be rectified through a collaborative effort of the Institute of Chartered Accountants (ICAI), the Ministry of Corporate Affairs (MCA) and the Central Board of Direct Taxes (CBDT). However it appears that this may not be as easy as it appears. Many issues need to be first resolved, such as, the strategy with respect to, implementation of Ind-AS/ IFRS, continuation of Indian GAAP for some entities, implementation of Tax Accounting Standards, implementation of the IFRS SME standard, etc needs to be finalised. Right now, this whole area is a maelstrom and the Government and the ICAI should provide a clear roadmap, before complicating this space any further.

Second, the draft rules and section 2(19AA) of the Income-tax Act assumes a very simple scenario of demerger. In practice, demerger may involve many structuring complexities.  The draft rules therefore are very elementary.  They focus on the accounting that is required in a narrow situation where the demerger is in accordance with section 2(19AA) of the Income-tax Act.  

Third, the draft rules on accounting of demerger is applicable only when the demerger is in accordance with section 2(19AA) of the Income-tax Act.  These accounting rules are not applicable when the   demerger is not in accordance with section 2(19AA).  For example, a company demerging one of its undertaking may be doing so, to unlock value rather than obtaining tax benefits under section 2(19AA).  For such demerger, the prescribed draft accounting rules are not applicable. Thus, as an example, the resulting company could account for the assets and liabilities taken over at fair value rather than on the basis of book values as prescribed in the draft rules.Fourth, in the books of the demerged company when the transfer to a resulting company is a net liability, the draft rules require the corresponding credit to be given to capital reserves. This accounting seems appropriate, as it could be argued that the shareholders are taking over the net liability, and hence this is a contribution by the shareholders to the company. When the transfer to a resulting company is a net asset, the draft rules require the corresponding debit to be given to goodwill.  This seems completely ridiculous as distribution of net assets to shareholders cannot under any circumstances result in goodwill for the demerged   company.  Rather it is a distribution by the demerged company of the net assets to the shareholders, and hence the debit should be made to general reserves.  This mistake should be corrected in the final rules. Fifth, in the books of the resulting company, the net assets/liabilities taken over are recorded at book values. This is designed to comply with the requirements of section 2(19AA).  As already indicated, the accounting in statutory books should not be guided by the requirements of the Income-tax Act.  In practice, the resulting company may want to record the said transfer at fair value, to capture the business valuation. Whilst for tax computation purposes, he net assets may be recorded at book values; it is inappropriate for the Income-tax Act to suggest the accounting to be done in statutory books.Lastly, in the resulting company there is no requirement in respect of how share capital is valued.  Thus the securities premium, goodwill and capital reserves can be flexibly determined by ascribing a desired value to the share capital.  This is certainly not an appropriate approach from an accounting point of view.

In conclusion, the author believes that some immediate correction is required in the draft accounting rules as suggested in this article. In the long term, accounting should be driven by sound accounting practices and not by income-tax requirements.  In this regard, ICAI, CBDT and the MCA should collaborate and establish a clear roadmap for the future.

The Going Concern Conundrum – Should One Get Concerned About a Going Concern?

fiogf49gjkf0d
‘Nothing lasts forever’. However, in accounting parlance, one of the fundamental accounting assumptions used by the management for preparation and presentation of financial statements is ‘Going concern’ which assumes that an enterprise will continue to exist long enough to carry out its objectives and commitments and will not liquidate in the foreseeable future. Indeed, the assumption of a going concern is critical to the decision and usefulness of financial information under the accrual basis of accounting. Investors and creditors ordinarily invest in or transact with enterprises that they expect to continue its operations in future. It is also the justification for following historical cost basis for accounting its assets and liabilities.

SA 570 lays down the auditor’s responsibility with respect to the management’s use of going concern assumption in the preparation of financial statements.

General purpose financial statements are prepared on a going concern basis, unless the management either intends to liquidate the entity or to cease operations, or has no realistic alternative but to do so. When the use of the going concern assumption is appropriate, assets and liabilities are recorded on the basis that the entity will be able to realise its assets and discharge its liabilities in the normal course of business.

An enterprise may be required by either the reporting framework or by statute to specifically state that the financial statements have been drawn up on a ‘going concern basis’. Eg., in the Indian context, directors are required to specifically assert in the directors’ report that the financial statements of the company are prepared on going concern basis. Where reporting framework does not contain an explicit requirement to assess ‘going concern’, management’s responsibility for the preparation and presentation of the financial statements nevertheless includes such a responsibility. The minimum period over which such assessment is to be made is normally one year (12 months).

The auditor is required to obtain sufficient appropriate audit evidence about the appropriateness of management’s use of the going concern assumption.A Based on this evidence, the auditor should evaluate management’s assessment of the entity’s ability to continue as a going concern. SA 570 envisages two scenarios:

a. Use of going concern assumption is appropriate but a material uncertainty exists

b. Use of going concern assumption is inappropriate

Under scenario (a), the auditor would need to evaluate whether a material uncertainty exists relating to events or conditions that may cast significant doubt on the entity’s ability to continue as a going concern, including evaluating mitigating factors, if any. A material uncertainty exists when the magnitude of its potential impact and the likelihood of its occurrence is such that, in the auditor’s judgment, appropriate disclosure of the nature and the implications of the uncertainty is necessary for a fair presentation of the financial statements. The disclosure would also include a statement to the effect that the entity may be unable to realise its assets and discharge its liabilities in the normal course of business. Where adequate disclosures have been made, the auditor would need to express an unmodified opinion and include an Emphasis of Matter paragraph to highlight the material uncertainty which casts a doubt on the entity’s ability to continue as a going concern. In cases where adequate disclosures have not been made, the audit report would need to be qualified.

Under scenario (b), if the auditor concludes that going concern assumption is inappropriate, the accounts cannot be prepared on a going concern basis. If these are in any case prepared on agoing concern basis, the auditor would need to express an adverse opinion.

A tabular presentation of the approach is given below:

Material uncertainty arises from conditions which cast doubt about the going concern assumption and such conditions could be financial, operational or statutory in nature. We will try to understand some of these conditions with examples.

Financial condition resulting in material uncertainty

Case Study 1
ABC Limited (‘ABC’) is a company incorporated in India and is a wholly owned subsidiary of PQR Investment Ltd (‘PQR’), an investment company based in Mauritius. ABC Limited is engaged in the business of process research and development and analytical services. As at 31st March 20X0, ABC has accumulated losses aggregating to Rs. 600 lakh as against paid-up capital of Rs. 250 lakh. The accumulated losses have exceeded the net worth of the Company. The current assets of the company as at 31st March 20X0 stand at Rs. 120 crore, whereas the current liabilities due for payment over the next one year are Rs. 100 crore, i.e. ABC does not have a net current liability position. Management contends that it has no intentions of discontinuing business operations and believes that the Company will be able to continue to operate as a going concern and meet all its liabilities as they fall due for payment based on support from PQR. Management provided a confirmation to this effect letter from PQR Investment Limited to the auditors as evidence of support. The accounts of ABC were prepared on a going concern basis. Was this basis appropriate per requirements of SA 570?

Analysis
The existence of accumulated losses exceeding the net worth represents a financial condition of material uncertainty. In the instant case, PQR, the parent company provided a confirmation extending financial support to ABC to enable it to continue as a going concern. While SA 570 requires auditor to obtain written confirmation from the parent confirming the support, it also makes it incumbent upon auditors to evaluate the parent company’s ability to provide the requisite financial support. It is pertinent to note that PQR is an investment company. In such a case, the auditors would need to consider additional factors like whether PQR has the necessary wherewithal to provide financial support and if PQR was a mere investment vehicle then evaluating whether the shareholders of PQR have the ability to provide support and if yes, consider obtaining confirmation from the shareholders to that effect. Mere reliance on the confirmation would not suffice. Management would need to make detailed disclosures stating that the accounts have been prepared on going concern on the basis of financial support guaranteed by the parent company would be required to be made in the financial statements. The auditor would need to include in his audit report, a Matter of Emphasis highlighting this condition. Alternatively, where the auditor is satisfied with the appropriateness of the going concern assumption, he would not be required to include a Matter of Emphasis in his audit report.

Case Study 2
XYZ Winds Limited (‘XYZ”) is in the business of manufacturing windmills. XYZ has a paid up capital and reserves of Rs. 200 crore as at 31st March 20X5. XYZ has been incurring losses for the last three years however the Company has a positive net worth as at 31st March 20X5. XYZ had borrowed funds aggregating to Rs. 150 crore by way of foreign currency convertible bonds (FCCBs) on 1st April 20X0 which were due for repayment on 1st January 20X5. In view of continuing losses, XYZ was unable to repay the FCCBs on the due date. The Company also has overdue amounts payable to creditors and certain other lenders as at 31st March 2013. The current liabilities as at 31st March 20X5 amount to Rs. 800 crore whereas current assets stand at Rs. 550 crore. The Company is in negotiations with the FCCB holders and is working on various solutions with them to ensure settlement of their dues. The Company is also taking various steps to reduce costs and improve efficiencies to make its operations profitable. The final outcome of the negotiations is pending as on the date the financial  statements  are  approved  by  the  Board. Does  this
 situation  trigger  a
 material
 uncertainty
leading  to  the  going  concern
 assumption  being challenged?

 

Analysis
The fixed term borrowings are overdue for pay- ment. The given situation
also represents a net liability or net
current liability position. The Com- pany’s ability to continue as a going concern
is  in part dependent on the successful
outcome of the discussions with the FCCB holders as well its ability to
generate/source additional cash flows to
repay its liabilities in the short-term. An assess- ment covering qualitative
and judgmental aspects needs to
be
made, an illustrative
inventory
of which could include:

 

• Whether management has a history of success- fully refinancing or renewing the entity’s debt obligations as they come due
 

• Whether management has made sufficient progress in negotiating with planned funding source(s), if any and whether management has provided evidence to support its assertions rela- tive to progress

• Whether the uncommitted funding amount is significant or insignificant relative to the total funding need
 
• Ability and willingness of the owners to provide additional capital to fund the liquidity crisis.

If based on additional procedures performed, auditors are satisfied with the appropriateness of the going concern assumption, the auditor would need to include a matter of emphasis in their re- port highlighting the fact that the accounts have been prepared on a going concern basis despite the material uncertainty. Management would need to make enhanced disclosures about the material uncertainty as well as mitigating factors. Where the auditor is not satisfied with the appropriate- ness of the going concern assumption, he would need to issue an adverse opinion.

Case Study 3

Moon Metals Limited (MML) is in the business of manufacturing of hot rolled steel plates. The paid up  capital  of  MML  as  at  31st  March  20X0  is  Rs. 2,000  crore  as  against  accumulated  losses  of  Rs. 2,250 crore. Due to the sluggish market conditions in  the  steel  industry,  high  rates  of  interest  and short tenure of loans taken, MML was unable to repay  significant  portion  of  loans  from  financial institutions/banks as per the repayment schedule. The overdue amount of such loans including over- due  interest,  as  at  31st  March  20X0  aggregates to  Rs.  1,000  crore.  Further,  loans  aggregating  to Rs.  500  crore  are  due  for  repayment  within  one year from the Balance Sheet date. The aggregate loans outstanding as  at 31st March 20X0  amount to  Rs.  4,000  crore.

In  view  of  the  deterioration  in  the  steel  market conditions, the management of MML submitted a omprehensive Financial Restructuring Plan (CFRP) in April 20X0 to the Corporate Debt Restructuring Group (CDR) consisting of all the secured lenders of the company. The CFRP, inter alia, provides for conversion  of  promoter  loans  into  equity,  buy- back  of  certain  unsecured  loans  at  a  discount, additional equity infusion by promoters, enhanced cash flow projections through cost rationalisation, operational efficiencies, renegotiation of contracts and other cost control measures to improve Com- pany’s operating results; all these factors ultimately resulting in improvement of the company’s net worth. The CFRP is under consideration by the CDR as on the date of approval of the accounts,
i.e.  30th  June  20X0.

The  liabilities  due  for  repayment  amount  to  ap- proximately Rs. 2,500 crore, which is greater than the  currently  expected  cash  flows  from  business and any committed or contracted sources of funds of the Company.   The Company’s ability to repay its  loan  and  related  liabilities  falling  due  up  to 31st  March  20X1  is  dependent  on  the  Company being  able  to  successfully  implement  the  actions proposed  in  the  CFRP.  What  factors  need  to  be reckoned, if the accounts for the year ended 31st March  20X0  were  prepared  on  a  going  concern basis  in  the  above  case?

Analysis


In this case study, the Company has been admit- ted  to  CDR  whereby  management  has  provided commitments in lieu of the CDR restructuring the loans and waiving off existing events of defaults/ penal interest and provision of further finance. In addition  to  the  factors  explained  in  the  analysis to  Case  Study  2  above,  the  auditors  would  need to  evaluate  the  following  aspects:

• Analysing and determining the reliability of cash flow, sales, profit and other relevant forecasts prepared by the management, the auditor may consider consulting corporate finance experts to validate these assumptions.

• Considering historical evidence of growth and profitability of the entity as well as the industry in which the entity operates

• Considering apparent feasibility of plans to reduce overhead (e.g. existence of labor agree- ment restrictions) or administrative expendi- tures, to postpone maintenance or research and development projects, or to lease rather than purchase assets

• Whether the company’s financial health has de- teriorated significantly or its operations changed significantly since the reporting date

• Assessing the ability and intent of the promot- ers to fulfill the funding commitment, assess- ing whether the commitment is sufficient and enforceable The time horizon over which the evaluation of the mitigating factors in this case would transcend beyond one year.

Depending on the status of approval of the CRPF and consideration of the factors listed above, the auditor would need to perform additional proce- dures to evaluate management’s assessment of going concern. Where in the auditor’s evaluation, the going concern assumption is appropriate, he would need to include a matter of emphasis in the audit report and ensure that detailed disclosures are made in the financial statements. Where the auditor is not satisfied with the appropriateness of the going concern assumption, he would need to issue an adverse opinion.

Operational condition resulting in material uncertainty

An operational condition may arise where an en- terprise is formed for achieving a stated objective and the objective is either achieved or becomes infructuous. For e.g. a project office that was constituted to execute the contract for construc- tion of a power plant for a power generating company would get annulled on completion of the project or where the contract with the power company gets cancelled.

Legal condition resulting in material uncertainty

A going concern issue may also arise where the operation of an enterprise is subject to licensing by statutory authorities and such license is with- drawn or cancelled thereby entailing a cessation to the enterprise’s existence. In the Indian con- text, a recent example of the applicability of the legal condition resulting in material uncertainty of an enterprise to continue as a going concern  is the cancellation of telecom licenses of certain operators by the telecom regulatory authorities leading to termination of business operations for those operators.

It is easier to evaluate going concern for enterprises operating in a mature industry experiencing turbulent times. However, for enterprises that operate in nascent or niche environments, this evaluation could pose difficulties. Consider the case of a company which is engaged in drug discovery and whose net worth is completely eroded. For such cases, the auditors would need to apply heightened professional skepticism to conclude appropriateness of going concern assumption, as this would involve evaluating factors such as fu- ture cash flows from development of molecules, success in clinical trials, ability to sell the product at development stage or engage a partner for further development, outsourcing of development of molecules etc.

In the Indian context, companies operating in the aviation industry have been encountering going concern issues. The operating results of these companies continue to be materially affected mostly by extraneous factors such as high aircraft fuel costs, significant depreciation in the value of currency, declining passenger traffic and general economic slowdown. Some of these companies have continued to prepare the financial statements based on their ability to explore various options to raise finance to meet short-term and long-term obligations, promoter commitment to provide op- erational and financial support and amendments to FDI policy which may improve investor sentiment towards the aviation industry.

Concluding remarks

As the world deals with the cascading impacts of the financial crisis, which continue to this day, the global economy has had to find a course through uncharted waters. The growing complexi- ties in companies’ balance sheets due to the global economic crisis and foreign exchange volatility have triggered a debate over one of the basic premises of financial accounting — every company is a ‘going concern’ that will not go out of busi- ness or liquidate in the foreseeable future. Going concern issues have significant ramifications for companies such as market capitalisation, ability to raise resources, employee retention, protection of stakeholders interests, investor confidence and so on. The significance of the going concern concept is also evident in the valuation of the assets of the business as ‘going concern’ also forms one of the basis on which businesses are valued.

Where going concern assumption is no longer appropriate, the financial statements would need to be prepared under the liquidation basis of ac- counting whereby the carrying values of all assets (including fixed assets) are presented at their estimated realisable value and all liabilities are presented at their estimated settlement amounts.

In  fact,  a  going  concern  assumption  being  invali- dated  post  the  balance  sheet  date  is  considered to be an adjusting event.   Accounting Standard 4 requires  assets  and  liabilities  should  be  adjusted for events occurring after the balance sheet date that  indicate  that  the  fundamental  accounting assumption  of  going  concern  is  not  appropriate. The  Companies  (Auditor’s  Report)  Order,  2003 specifically requires the statutory auditor to report whether  disposal  of  a  substantial  part  of  the  as- sets has affected the going concern of a company. Similarly,  the  reporting  requirement  under  CARO 2003  with  respect  to  erosion  of  net  worth  and incurrence of cash losses is also aimed at assessing the  financial  health  and  as  a  corollary,  the  going concern  of  a  company.

In practice, evaluating the appropriateness of a going concern assumption can be highly judgmental and SA 570 provides adequate guidance for an auditor to make this assessment.

Gap in Gap-Accounting for Expenditure on Corporate Social Responsibility

fiogf49gjkf0d
In this article we discuss the accounting of CSR expenditure, particularly focusing on the issue relating to constructive and legal obligation under Indian GAAP.

Provisions relating to Companies Act, 2013 on CSR

1. The Companies Act requires that every company with net worth of Rs. 500 crore or more, or turnover of Rs. 1,000 crore or more or a net profit of Rs. 5 crore or more during any financial year will constitute a CSR committee.

2. The CSR committee will consist of three or more directors, out of which at least one director will be an independent director.

3. The CSR committee will:

(a) Formulate and recommend to the board, a CSR policy, which will indicate the activities to be undertaken by the company.

(b) Recommend the amount of expenditure to be incurred on the activities referred to in the CSR policy.

(c) Monitor CSR policy from time to time.

4. The board will ensure that company spends, in every financial year, at least 2% of its average net profits made during the three immediately preceding financial years. For this purpose, the average net profit will be calculated in accordance with the clause 198.

5. The company will give preference to local areas around where it operates, for spending the amount earmarked for CSR activities.

6. The board will approve the CSR policy and disclose its contents in the board report and place it on the company’s website.

7. If a company fails to spend such amount, the board will, in its report specify the reasons for not spending the amount.

8. Schedule VII of the Act sets out the activities, which may be included by companies in their CSR policies. These activities relate to (a) eradicating extreme hunger and poverty (b) promotion of education (c) promoting gender equality and empowering women (d) reducing child mortality and improving maternal health (e) combating HIV, AIDs, malaria and other diseases (f) ensuring environmental sustainability (g) employment enhancing vocational skills (h) social business projects (i) contribution to certain funds and other matters.

Naming and Shaming

The Companies Act does not prescribe any penal provision if a company fails to spend the amount prescribed on CSR activities. The board will need to explain reasons for non-compliance in its report. Thus many believe that there is no legal obligation to incur CSR expenditure. Creating a legal obligation under the Companies Act to incur CSR expenditure, would have created constitutional hurdles for the regulator. Hence the Government has chosen a path of applying moral pressure, by requiring disclosure of CSR expenditure. As there is no legal obligation to incur CSR expenditure, there would be no legal obligation to make good short spends of previous years or prohibition on taking credit in future years for excess amount spent on CSR.

The draft rules clarify that CSR is not charity or mere donations. CSR is the process by which an organisation thinks about and evolves its relationships with stakeholders for the common good, and demonstrates its commitment in this regard by adoption of appropriate business processes and strategies. CSR is a way of conducting business, by which corporate entities contribute to the social good. Socially responsible companies do not limit themselves to using resources to engage in activities that increase only their profits. They use CSR to integrate economic, environmental and social objectives with the company’s operations and growth.

From the draft rules, it is clear that CSR is based on shared values and should be a part of a company’s business strategy. It should not be seen as a discretionary expenditure. Certainly reputed companies can ill afford not to have CSR as part of their business strategy and spend the legislated amount on CSR. Hence, these companies would have, if not a legal obligation, atleast a constructive obligation to incur the CSR expenditure. The same cannot be said of companies that do not care about CSR or have cash flow problems and hence would not pursue CSR.

In a nutshell, as a result of the Companies Act 2013, for companies that meet the threshold, there may or may not be a constructive obligation. It is a company specific analysis that will have to be made.

Accounting of CSR expenditure

Assume, Company A meets one of the thresholds, and hence CSR is applicable to it. There are three scenarios with respect to CSR expenditure.

1. Company A spends 2% (determined in accordance with the Act) each year.

2. Company A spends nothing or less than 2% each year.

3. Company A spends more than 2% in one year, and may or may not take credit for the excess spend in future years

Scenario 1 is fairly straight-forward. Scenario 3 is not dealt with in this article. This article focusses on Scenario 2. How does Company A account for CSR expenditure in Scenario 2?

Author’s Response
To answer this question, one will have to answer three questions. Is there a legal obligation to spend on CSR? If there is no legal obligation, has the company created a constructive obligation for itself? How are constructive obligations accounted for under AS 29 – Provisions, Contingent Liabilities and Contingent Assets?

Based on discussions above, the author believes that there is no legal obligation to incur CSR expenditure. However, companies are advised to seek legal clarity on this matter. The answer to the second question, whether or not there is a constructive obligation, would depend on facts and circumstances of each case.

Paragraph 11 of AS 29 provides some insight on constructive obligation. It states “An obligation is a duty or responsibility to act or perform in a certain way. Obligations may be legally enforceable as a consequence of a binding contract or statutory requirement. Obligations also arise from normal business practice, custom and a desire to maintain good business relations or act in an equitable manner.”

Whether or not there is a constructive obligation, will be clear from facts and circumstances of each case. Infact the requirement of Companies Act 2013, could throw some light on whether constructive obligation exists in a given fact pattern. As per the Act, the CSR committee will: (a) Formulate and recommend to the board, a CSR policy, which will indicate the activities to be undertaken by the company (b) Recommend the amount of expenditure to be incurred on the activities referred to in the CSR policy (c) Monitor CSR policy from time to time. Further, the board will approve the CSR policy and disclose its contents in the board report and place it on the company’s website. The above disclosures should throw adequate light on whether or not there is constructive obligation in a given fact pattern.

Now the million dollar question. Assuming there is constructive obligation in a given fact pattern, would a company require to make provision for the short or nil spends, on the basis that the short or nil spends will be made good in the future years. The response of the standard setters on this issue has been very confusing.

Constructive obligations should be provided

The requirements in Indian GAAP, suggesting constructive obligations should be provided for are:

(a) AS 29 defines ‘obligating event’ as an event that creates an obligation that results in an enterprise having no realistic alternative in settling that obligation. This definition is capable of being interpreted as requiring a provision based on constructive obligation criteria rather than merely on legal criteria.

(b) Paragraph 11 of AS 29 describes obligation at a constructive level rather than on a legal basis. Paragraph 11 describes obligation as follows: “An obligation is a duty or responsibility to act or perform in a certain way. Obligations may be legally enforceable as a consequence of a binding contract or statutory requirement. Obligations also arise from normal business practice, custom and a desire to maintain good business relations or act in an equitable manner”.

(c) In the case of refund by retail stores, AS 29 requires a provision based on constructive obligation criteria and not on the basis of a legal obligation.  The example contained in AS 29 is reproduced below.

Illustration 4: Refunds Policy

A retail store has a policy of refunding purchases by dissatisfied customers, even though it is under no legal obligation to do so. Its policy of making refunds is generally known. Present obligation as a result of a past obligating event – The obligating event is the sale of the product, which gives rise to an obligation because obligations also arise from normal business practice, custom and a desire to maintain good business relations or act in an equitable manner. An outflow of resources embodying economic benefits in settlement – Probable, a proportion of goods are returned for refund (see paragraph 23).

Conclusion – A provision is recognised for the best estimate of the costs of refunds (see paragraphs 11, 14 and 23).

(d)Paragraph 3 of AS 15  Employee Benefits  states that “The employee benefits to which this Standard applies include those provided:……(c) by those informal practices that give rise to an obligation. Informal practices give rise to an obligation where the enterprise has no realistic alternative but to pay employee benefits. An example of such an obligation is where a change in the enterprise’s informal practices would cause unacceptable damage to its relationship with employees.”  In the Indian context, bonus, increments, etc. are provided for based on constructive obligation rather than on the basis of a legal obligation. This is in accordance with AS-15.  Thus the concept of constructive obligation is not an alien concept and is recognized not only in AS-29, but also other Indian standards such as AS-15. (e) AS 25 – ‘Interim Financial Reporting’, requires the constructive obligation criteria to be applied in making provision for bonus in interim periods. As per AS 25, “a bonus is anticipated for interim reporting purposes, if, and only if, (a) the bonus is a legal obligation or an obligation arising from past practice for which the enterprise has no realistic alternative but to make the payments, and (b) a reliable estimate can be made.”

Only legal obligations are provided, constructive obligations are not provided The requirements in Indian GAAP, suggesting constructive obligations should not be provided for are:

1. The view that constructive obligation should not be provided for is clearly confirmed in two EAC opinions.  In a recent opinion published in The Chartered Accountant of July 2013, the EAC opined “Since as per Department of Public Enterprises Guidelines, there is no such obligation on the enterprise, provision should not be recognised. Accordingly, the Committee is of the view that the requirement in the DPE Guidelines for creation of a CSR budget can be met through creation of a reserve as an appropriation of profits rather than creating a provision as per AS 29.  On the basis of the above, the Committee is of the view that in the extant case, it is not appropriate to recognise a provision in respect of unspent expenditure on CSR activities. However, a CSR reserve may be created as an appropriation of profits.”

    Another opinion is contained in Volume 28, Query no 26.  In this query EAC opined “A published environmental policy of the company by itself does not create a legal or contractual obligation. From the Facts of the Case and copies of documents furnished by the querist, it is not clear as to whether there is any legal or contractual bligation for afforestation, compensatory afforestation, soil conservation and reforestation towards forest land. In case there is any legal or contractual obligation, compensatory afforestation, felling of existing trees or even acquisition of land could be the obligating event depending on the provisions of law or the terms of the contract.”

2.  AS 29 has rejected the concept of constructive  obligation in regard to provision for restructuring costs (e.g. voluntary retirement cost), which is required to be provided for based on a legal obligation rather than when there is an announcement of a formal and detail plan of restructuring.

3. The draft Ind-AS ED corresponding to IAS 37 Provisions, Contingent Liabilities, and Contingent Assets, identifies constructive obligation as a difference between Ind-AS and AS-29.  
This is reproduced below.

   Major Differences between the Draft of AS 29 (Revised 20xx), Provisions, Contingent Liabilities and Contingent Assets, and Existing AS 29 (issued 2003)

    1. Unlike the existing AS 29, the Exposure Draft of AS 29(Revised 20XX) requires creation of provisions in respect of constructive obligations also. [However, the existing standard requires creation of provision arising out of normal business practices, custom and a desire to maintain good business relations or to act in an equitable manner]. This has resulted in some consequential changes also. For example, definition of provision and obligating event have been revised in the Exposure Draft of AS 29 (Revised 20XX), while the terms ‘legal obligation’ and ‘constructive obligation’ have been inserted and defined in the Exposure Draft of AS 29(Revised 20XX). Similarly, the portion of existing AS 29 pertaining to restructuring provisions has been revised in the Exposure Draft of AS 29 (Revised 20XX).

    Conclusion

     Apparently, there are internal inconsistencies in AS 29. While some requirements of AS 29 require creation of provision toward constructive obligation; other aspects may be read as if the same may not be required. Overall, it appears that the ICAI does not favour creation of a provision with respect to constructive obligation. This is particularly clear from the two EAC opinions. However, it is unclear, how the EAC opinions can override some of the requirement under AS-29 which require a provision to be created for constructive obligation. This creates a huge anomaly; one that can be resolved only by suitably amending AS-29 to bring it completely in line with the intentions of the standard setters.  The author does concede that at this stage, it may not be advisable to amend Indian GAAP. Rather it would be advisable to take swift steps to adopt IFRS/Ind-AS, and leave the past behind.

GAPS IN GAP — Acounting for eviction costs by lesors

fiogf49gjkf0d
Issue What is the accounting treatment, from a lessor’s perspective, for costs incurred by the lessor to evict tenants? Are these costs capitalised or expensed as incurred?

Scenario 1
A lessor makes compensation payments to evict the tenants in an investment property with the intention to refurbish/renovate the property.

Scenario 2
A lessor makes a compensation payment to evict a tenant in a multi-tenanted investment property with the intention to re-let the vacated space to a new tenant. The lessor has signed an agreement with the new tenant to occupy the space that the existing tenant is occupying. Under the agreement, the new tenant will pay a significantly higher rent than the existing tenant.

Scenario 3

The same fact pattern as Scenario 2, except that the lessor has not yet found a new tenant when it evicts the existing tenant.

Relevant literature

Under Indian GAAP the following accounting literature is relevant for concluding on this fact pattern.

Paragraph 20 & 21 of AS-10 Accounting for Fixed Assets

Paragraph 20 : The cost of a fixed asset should comprise its purchase price and any attributable cost of bringing the asset to its working condition for its intended use.

Paragraph 21 : The cost of a self-constructed fixed asset should comprise those costs that relate directly to the specific asset and those that are attributable to the construction activity in general and can be allocated to the specific asset.

Paragraph 31 & 42 of AS-19 Leases Paragraph 31 : Initial direct costs, such as commissions and legal fees, are often incurred by lessors in negotiating and arranging a lease. For finance leases, these initial direct costs are incurred to produce finance income and are either recognised immediately in the statement of profit and loss or allocated against the finance income over the lease term.

Paragraph 42 : Initial direct costs incurred specifically to earn revenues from an operating lease are either deferred and allocated to income over the lease term in proportion to the recognition of rent income, or are recognised as an expense in the statement of profit and loss in the period in which they are incurred.

Author’s view Scenario 1 View A — Expense the eviction costs as incurred

The eviction costs are costs of terminating the existing lease. Therefore, they should be expensed as incurred.

View B — Capitalise the eviction costs It is necessary for the lessor to make eviction payments to the existing tenants in order to refurbish the property. The eviction costs are directly attributable to the property and meet the definition of construction costs of the property and are costs required to bring the asset to “the condition necessary for it to be capable of operating in the manner intended by management”. Therefore, the costs should be capitalised.

Considering paragraph 20 & 21 of AS-10, the author believes that View B is more appropriate.

Scenario 2
View A — Expense the eviction cost as incurred

The eviction cost is a cost of terminating the existing lease, and does not represent a cost of the underlying investment property. Therefore, it should be expensed as incurred.

View B — Eviction costs are initial direct costs and hence can be either capitalised or expensed

Since the lessor has signed an agreement with a new tenant, it must evict the existing tenant in order to allow the new tenant to move into the property. The eviction cost is an initial direct cost incurred by the lessor to arrange the new lease.

For a lessor, paragraph 31 in the case of a finance lease and paragraph 42 in the case of an operating lease, allows either expensing or amortisation of the eviction cost. For finance leases, these eviction costs are incurred to produce finance income and are either recognised immediately in the statement of profit and loss or allocated against the finance income over the lease term. In case of operating lease, eviction costs are either deferred and allocated to income over the lease term in proportion to the recognition of rent income or expensed as incurred.

Hence, for scenario 2, the author believes that the eviction costs are initial direct costs and could be either expensed or capitalised (View B). Nonetheless, some may argue that initial direct costs include expenses such as legal fees and commission (as per paragraph 31) and not eviction costs. Hence they may favour View A, which requires compulsorily expensing as those costs are incurred.

Scenario 3
In the absence of a secured new lease contract the eviction of existing tenants and the costs incurred thereon would not constitute initial direct costs of entering into a new lease arrangement. Consequently, the author believes that such costs should not be capitalised. Nonetheless, some may still argue that under the Framework for the Preparation and Presentation of Financial Statements “An asset is a resource controlled by the enterprise as a result of past events from which future economic benefits are expected to flow to the enterprise.” Therefore, based on the asset definition in the framework, some may argue, it is possible to capitalise and amortise such eviction costs.

Considering that these issues are highly debatable the ICAI may consider providing guidance.

levitra

GAPS in GAAP — Accounting for an operating lease that containS contingent rentals

fiogf49gjkf0d
Issue
How does a lessee and a lessor account for a rent-free period in an operating lease with rental amounts that are entirely contingent (e.g., a percentage of sales)?

Fact pattern
A lessee enters into a new lease agreement for retail property with a lessor. The lease agreement has a term of 5 years with no renewal or purchase option. No rents are due for the first year (the ‘rent-free’ period). For years 2 through 5, the rent is set at 18% of the lessee’s annual sales, with no minimum rent payable. The rental rate will not be revised during the lease term, i.e., there are no market resets or other adjustments during the lease term. (The lease agreement actually states that rent is set at 18% of annual sales, and the lessor has agreed to forego the first year’s rent as an incentive to the lessee to enter into the lease.)

Analysis
Paragraph 3 of AS-19 defines contingent rent as that portion of the lease payments that is not fixed in amount but is based on a factor other than just the passage of time (e.g., percentage of sales, amount of usage, price indices, market rates of interest, etc.).

Contingent rents are not included in the definition of minimum lease payments, and hence do not determine whether a lease is a finance lease or operating lease. In the case of an operating lease, with regards to the lessee, paragraph 25(c) requires disclosure of lease payments recognised in the statement of profit or loss for the period, with separate amounts for minimum lease payments and contingent rents. Similarly, with regards to the lessor, paragraph 46(c) requires disclosure of total contingent rents recognised as income in the statement of profit and loss for the period. In other words, in the case of an operating lease, the disclosure requirements both for the lessor and the lessee seem to suggest that the accounting of contingent rent should be in the period to which they relate to.

Further, AS-19 requires straightlining of operating lease income/expense. The relevant paragraphs are reproduced below:

23. Lease payments under an operating lease should be recognised as an expense in the statement of profit and loss on a straightline basis over the lease term, unless another systematic basis is more representative of the time pattern of the user’s benefit.

40. Lease income from operating leases should be recognised in the statement of profit and loss on a straight-line basis over the lease term, unless another systematic basis is more representative of the time pattern in which benefit derived from the use of the leased asset is diminished.

View 1 — All payments under the lease are considered contingent rent

The lessee and lessor record the actual rent amounts as expenses and income when they are incurred. In the fact pattern above, the lessee does not record any rent expense in year 1. For years 2 through 5, the lessee recognises rent expense, calculated as 18% of its annual sales, as amounts are incurred (i.e., as sales occur). Consistent with the amounts of rent recorded by the lessee, the lessor does not record any rent income in year 1; for years 2 through 5, the lessor recognises rental income, calculated as 18% of the lessee’s annual sales, as earned.

Reasons for View 1
AS-19 is not explicit in the treatment of contingent elements of operating lease rentals, and whether straightlining would be required.

Paragraph 3 of AS-19 excludes contingent rents from the determination of minimum lease payments for ascertaining rental income in finance leases. Notwithstanding that AS-19 uses different terminology to describe the determination of rental income for finance leases (‘minimum lease payments’) and operating leases (‘lease income’), it is inappropriate to purport that contingent rents cannot be determined for ascertaining total finance lease revenue but that they could be determined for ascertaining total operating lease revenue. Accordingly, lease payments or receipts under operating leases exclude contingent amounts.

A similar issue was also discussed by IFRIC in the context of similar IFRS standard. In its May 2006 meeting, the IFRIC considered a request for clarification of the requirements of IAS 17 with respect to contingent rentals. In particular, the IFRIC was asked to consider whether an estimate of contingent rentals payable/receivable under an operating lease should be included in the total lease payments/lease income to be recognised on a straight-line basis over the lease term. The IFRIC noted that although the standard is unclear on this issue, a consistent application is being adopted; that is, current practice is to exclude contingent rentals from the amount to be recognised on a straight-line basis over the lease term. Accordingly, the IFRIC decided not to add the issue to its agenda.

In practice, contingent rent payments or receipts made in connection with operating leases are recognised in the period in which they are incurred. Since no rent is paid in year 1 of the lease, no expense/income is recorded in the first year. Importantly, no amount of rent is due or receivable based upon sales in year 1 and such rents only accrue upon the future sales after year 1 (i.e., sales in years 2 through 5). In years 2 through 5, the contingent amounts are recognised as expense/income when they are incurred.

View 2 — The rent-free period is taken into consideration to determine lease expense/income

The rent-free period is taken into consideration to determine the rent expense and income for each period. In the fact pattern above, the lessee amortises the rent-free benefit (determined either based on expected sales for year 1 or actual sales for year 1) over the term of the lease on a straight-line basis.

Assume that sales in the first year are approximately Rs.1,945,000. Using the contingent rental rate applicable for years 2 through 5, the incentive related to the rent-free period is calculated as Rs. 350,000 (Rs.1,945,000 x 18%). Since the term of the lease is 5 years, the annualised benefit for the lessee is Rs.70,000. The lessee accrues rent payable of Rs.280,000 (total incentive of Rs.350,000 less amortisation of year 1 benefit of Rs.70,000) in year 1 and recognises that amount as rent expense in year 1. The accrued amount is amortised as a reduction of rental expense (i.e., the amounts due based on the sales in each year) over the remaining years.

Similarly, the lessor recognises lease income and a receivable of Rs.280,000 in year 1 and amortises the accrued amount as a reduction of rental income (i.e., the amounts receivable based on the sales in each year) over the remaining years.

Reasons for View 2
Accounting for the rent-free period in the above manner is consistent with the requirement of paragraph 23 and 40 of AS-19. The rent-free period, is an integral part of the net consideration agreed for the property and it should be recognised on a systematic basis over the term of the lease, even though the rent receipts or payments in the lease are all contingent on performance.

Even though the IFRS Interpretations Committee concluded in its May 2006 meeting that current practice was to exclude contingent amounts from operating lease receipts or payments, it noted that IAS 17 is ‘unclear’ as to whether an estimate of contingent rent under an operating lease should be included in the total lease consideration to be recognised on a straight-line basis over the lease term.

Applying paragraphs 23 and 40 of AS -19, the view reflects the notion that if there was no rent-free period, the parties to the lease agreement would have revised the annual rent payable to be based on a lower percentage of a performance indicator (i.e., in the fact pattern above, less than 18% of sales). The recognition of the rent-free benefit or cost over the lease term results in a pattern of expense or income recognition that is similar to a lease that has no rent-free period.

Accordingly, the benefit of such an incentive should be quantified, and recognised over the lease term on a straight-line basis (unless another systematic basis is more appropriate).

Author’s view

The author favour’s View 1, because it is rather improbable that the intention of the standard was to require straightlining of lease rentals that were contingent in nature. Straightlining requires knowing in advance the rentals for all the years covered by the operating lease arrangement. In an arrangement that is fully contingent, and there are no fixed or minimum or guaranteed payments, straightlining may not be appropriate.

View 2 may be possible under Ind-AS and IFRS. For example, in IFRS for operating leases, paragraph 5 of SIC 15 Operating Leases — Incentives states that: “All incentives for the agreement of a new…. operating lease shall be recognised as an integral part of the net consideration for the use of the leased asset, irrespective of the incentive’s nature or form or the timing of payments.”

The incentives in the paragraph above include a rent-free period, as reflected in paragraph 1 of SIC 15: “In negotiating a new or renewed operating lease, a lessor may provide incentives for the lessee to enter into the agreement. Examples of such incentives are…..

Alternatively, initial periods of the lease term may be agreed to be rent-free or at a reduced rent.”

Under SIC 15, the lessee and the lessor recognise the aggregate benefits of incentives in the following manner: “The lessee shall recognise the aggregate benefit of incentives as a reduction of rental expense over the lease term, on a straight-line basis, unless another systematic basis is representative of the time pattern of the lessee’s benefit from the use of the leased asset.” (SIC 15.5).

“The lessor shall recognise the aggregate cost of incentives as a reduction of rental income over the lease term, on a straight-line basis, unless another systematic basis is representative of the time pattern over which the benefit of the leased asset is diminished.” (SIC 15.4).

It may be noted that Ind-AS also contains similar requirements.

ICAI may consider addressing this issue both under Indian GAAP and Ind-AS.

Gaps in GaAp – Presentation of Changes in Accounting Policies in Interim Periods

fiogf49gjkf0d
Synopsis

In this article, the author has touched upon a case of prevailing inconsistencies in the Indian GAAP and the listing agreement. The question raised here is whether changes in accounting policies should be disclosed by way of restatement of results of the earlier periods, while presenting quarterly financial results prepared as per the listing agreement requirements. This question has been analysed by taking into account AS-5, AS-25 and Clause 41 of the Listing Agreement. Read on for the analysis made by the author and a brief comparison with IFRS.

Question

How are changes in accounting policies (other than those required on adoption of new accounting standards) presented in the quarterly financial results prepared as per the listing agreement requirements? Is the impact of change in accounting policy on earlier periods disclosed as a one line item in the current interim period or reflected by restating the financial results of the prior interim periods? Response Let us first consider the requirements of various standards.

AS 5 – Net Profit or Loss for the Period, Prior Period Items and Changes in Accounting Policies

Paragraph 32

Any change in an accounting policy which has a material effect should be disclosed. The impact of, and the adjustments resulting from, such change, if material, should be shown in the financial statements of the period in which such change is made, to reflect the effect of such change.

Paragraph 33

A change in accounting policy consequent upon the adoption of an Accounting Standard should be accounted for in accordance with the specific transitional provisions, if any, contained in that Accounting Standard.

AS 25 Interim Financial Reporting

Paragraph 2

A statute governing an enterprise or a regulator may require an enterprise to prepare and present certain information at an interim date which may be different in form and/or content as required by this Standard. In such a case, the recognition and measurement principles as laid down in this Standard are applied in respect of such information, unless otherwise specified in the statute or by the regulator.

Paragraph 16

An enterprise should include the following information, as a minimum, in the notes to its interim financial statements, if material and if not disclosed elsewhere in the interim financial report:

(a) a statement that the same accounting policies are followed in the interim financial statements as those followed in the most recent annual financial statements or, if those policies have been changed, a description of the nature and effect of the change……..

Paragraph 42

A change in accounting policy, other than one for which the transition is specified by an Accounting Standard, should be reflected by restating the financial statements of prior interim periods of the current financial year.

Paragraph 43

One objective of the preceding principle is to ensure that a single accounting policy is applied to a particular class of transactions throughout an entire financial year. The effect of the principle in paragraph 42 is to require that within the current financial year any change in accounting policy be applied retrospectively to the beginning of the financial year.

Stock Exchange Listing Agreement Clause 41

Clause 41 IV (i)

Changes in accounting policies, if any, shall be disclosed in accordance with Accounting Standard 5 (AS 5 – Net Profit or Loss for the Period, Prior Period Items and Changes in Accounting Policies) issued by ICAI/Company (Accounting Standards) Rules, 2006, whichever is applicable.

Discussion Paper on “Revision of Clause – 41 of Equity Listing Agreement”

Paragraph 4.13

Disclosure of impact of change in accounting policy: If there are any changes in the accounting policies during the year, the impact of the same on the prior quarters of the year, included in the current quarter results, shall be disclosed separately by way of a note to the financial results of the current quarter, without restating the previously published figures.

IV h

Changes in accounting policies, if any, shall be disclosed in accordance with Accounting Standard 5 (AS 5 – Net Profit or Loss for the Period, Prior Period Items and Changes in Accounting Policies) notified under the Company (Accounting Standards) Rules, 2006 (as amended) / issued by the Institute of Chartered Accountants of India (ICAI), as applicable. If there are any changes in the accounting policies during the year, the impact of the same on the prior quarters of the year, included in the current quarter results, should be disclosed separately by way of a note to the financial results of the current quarter without restating the previously published figures. Where the impact is not quantifiable a statement to that effect shall be made.

Executive Summary

1. AS-5 requires the cumulative effect of changes in accounting policies to be disclosed in the current period. The current period could be a financial year or an interim period.

2. AS-25 requires changes in accounting policies to be reflected by restating the financial statements of prior interim periods of the current financial year. Interestingly, AS-25 allows restatement of only prior interim periods of the current financial year. In other words, interim periods of previous financial year are not restated. Therefore under AS-25 results are comparable only with respect to current financial year but not with respect to previous financial years.

3. The appropriate standard for quarterly accounts is AS-25 and not AS-5. However, AS-25 clearly states that regulations will have an overriding effect.

4. The listing agreement and the discussion paper on clause 41 clearly articulate that changes in accounting policies in interim periods are reflected in the current interim period. Comparative interim periods are not restated.

5. In the author’s opinion, clause 41, which is the regulation, will have to be followed. In other words, the cumulative effect of changes in accounting policies is reflected in current interim periods. Comparative interim periods are not restated.

Author’s suggestion

The International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS) require comparative interim periods to be restated when accounting policies are changed. However unlike AS-25, they require even previous financial year’s interim period to be restated. Even in annual financial statements, IFRS requires previous year results to be restated to give effect to change in accounting policy. This ensures complete comparability.

Restatement of previous period financial statements is a better presentation of changes in accounting policies as it provides comparable numbers based on the new accounting policy. In India, we need to align AS-5, AS-25 and the listing agreement to enforce this comparability in line with IFRS (IAS 8 Accounting Policies, Changes in Accounting Estimates and Errors & IAS 34 Interim Financial Reporting).

levitra

GAPs in GAAP Monetary v. Non-monetary Items

fiogf49gjkf0d
Issue raised in GAPS in GAAP — July 2007 Under revised AS-11 The Effects of Changes in Foreign Exchange Rates, the accounting treatment for monetary items and non-monetary items is different. Monetary items are revalued at each reporting date and the gain or loss is recognised in the income statement. Non-monetary items are reported at the exchange rate at the date of the transaction. They are not revalued at each reporting date and hence there is no exchange gain/loss. Thus the classification of an item as monetary or non-monetary is critical.

Monetary items have been defined as ‘are money held and assets and liabilities to be received or paid in fixed or determinable amounts of money’. Nonmonetary items are defined as ‘assets and liabilities other than monetary items.’ Paragraph 12 of the standard briefly elaborates what monetary and nonmonetary items are, as follows: “Cash, receivables and payables are examples of monetary items. Fixed assets, inventories, and investments in equity shares are examples of non-monetary items.”

The Expert Advisory Committee (EAC) of the ICAI has opined on the issue of monetary and non-monetary items (EAO-VOL-19-1.13). This opinion was given in the context of the pre-revised AS-11, but is relevant under revised AS-11 as well. The issue was whether foreign exchange advances received (and converted into Indian rupees) for export of a fixed quantity of goods, which are adjusted against future supplies, are monetary or non-monetary items.

The EAC noted the definition of ‘monetary items’ as ‘money held and assets and liabilities to be received or paid in fixed or determinable amounts of money’. The EAC was of the view that the words ‘received or paid’ do not necessarily envisage receipt or payment in cash. What is of essence in the definition of monetary items is that the value of the asset or liability should be fixed or determinable in monetary terms. In the present case, the EAC felt that the liability of the company in respect of the advance taken from the foreign customer is fixed in monetary terms, though it will be discharged through exports rather than through payment in cash. As such, the EAC was of the view that the advance received from the foreign customer is a monetary liability. Consequently monetary items denominated in a foreign currency should be revalued at each reporting date and exchange gain/ loss is recognised in the income statement.

Under IAS-21 The Effects of Changes in Foreign Exchange Rates, monetary items are defined as ‘Monetary items are units of currency held and assets and liabilities to be received or paid in a fixed or determinable number of units of currency.’ Paragraph 16, of IAS-21 provides further elaboration as follows.

Monetary items Paragraph 16 “The essential feature of a monetary item is a right to receive (or an obligation to deliver) a fixed or determinable number of units of currency. Examples include: pensions and other employee benefits to be paid in cash; provisions that are to be settled in cash; and cash dividends that are recognised as a liability. Similarly, a contract to receive (or deliver) a variable number of the entity’s own equity instruments or a variable amount of assets in which the fair value to be received (or delivered) equals a fixed or determinable number of units of currency is a monetary item. Conversely, the essential feature of a non-monetary item is the absence of a right to receive (or an obligation to deliver) a fixed or determinable number of units of currency. Examples include: amounts prepaid for goods and services (e.g. prepaid rent); goodwill; intangible assets; inventories; property, plant and equipment; and provisions that are to be settled by the delivery of a non-monetary asset.”

Therefore as can be seen from the above, though the definition of monetary items and non-monetary items is the same under IAS-21 and AS-11, they have been interpreted differently. The interpretation in paragraph 16 of IAS 21 and that contained in the EAC opinion take the exact opposite position. If one were to apply paragraph 16 above, one would conclude that advance received for future export of goods, is a non-monetary item. However, based on EAC opinion, this would be a monetary item.

Given that Indian GAAP is attempting to converge with IFRS, such interpretation differences would create unnecessary GAAP differences. In the given instance, intuitively, it appears that the right answer is not to revalue the advances received, which has been fully converted into Indian rupees. The advance has been received for future supply of fixed quantities of goods; has been fully converted into Indian rupees, and hence revaluing them at each reporting date and recognising exchange gain/loss is inappropriate. Such exchange gain/loss is merely a book entry that is reversed in the future (as sales in this example). If the recommendation of EAC were to be followed in this instance, it would give rise to a theoretical gain or loss in one period and an opposite effect when the transaction is concluded. This would substantially distort the profit and loss account between two periods.

A similar issue was raised (Query 37, Vol. XXVIII) much later with regards to treatment of advance paid in foreign currency for acquisition of fixed assets. This time the opinion of the EAC is in line with the interpretation in IAS-21. The Committee opined “the words received or paid in the definition of the term monetary items do not necessarily envisage receipt or payment in cash. What is of essence is that the value of the asset or liability should be fixed or determinable in monetary items. Accordingly, where the advance is related to a fixed price contract for the receipt of a specified quantity of goods, it will be a non-monetary asset, since it represents a claim to receive a specified quantity of goods and not a right to receive money.”

The change in the point of view by the EAC in this case, is a step in the right direction and will align the interpretation on this issue with global practice.

levitra

GAPs in GAAP — What is substantial period of time?

fiogf49gjkf0d
What is substantial period of time?

Borrowing costs are capitalised during the construction of a qualifying asset, which is an asset that necessarily takes a substantial period of time to get ready for its intended use or sale. The explanation to the definition of the term ‘qualifying asset’ in AS-16 ‘Borrowing Cost’, notified by the Central Government under the Companies (Accounting Standards) Rules, 2006, provides as follows:

Explanation

“What constitutes a substantial period of time primarily depends on the facts and circumstances of each case. However, ordinarily a period of twelve months is considered as substantial period of time unless a shorter or longer period can be justified on the basis of facts and circumstances of the case. In estimating the period, time which an asset takes, technologically and commercially, to get it ready for its intended use or sale is considered.”

Let us see how this explanation was interpreted in the context of the example below.

Example

Salon Ltd. provides health and beauty solutions through its various salons across the country. From the time of acquiring the premises to the development of the salon, a period of three to five months is required and a substantial cost including capital cost on leasehold improvement is incurred on creating the right aesthetic and ambience. The period of three to five months is representative of the time required for similar construction of assets. The amount to be capitalised (if permitted) is material.

Position prior to EAC opinion (which was finalised on 30-5-2008)

In light of the explanation in AS-16, a period of three to five months was considered far below the 12-month threshold level, and hence in many similar situations companies may not have capitalised the bor-rowing expenses to comply with the explanation.

Position after EAC opinion (which was finalised on 30-5-2008)

The above position has changed completely vide an EAC opinion that was finalised on 30-5-2008 but was only published and available recently in Compendium Volume XXVIII. Paragraph 14 of the opinion states: “The committee is of the view that ordinarily, three to five months cannot be considered as a substantial period of time. The company should itself evaluate what constitutes a substantial period of time considering the peculiarities of facts and circumstances of its case, such as nature of the asset being constructed, etc. In this regard, time which an asset takes, technologically and commercially to get it ready for its intended use should be considered. Accordingly, the assets concerned may be considered as qualifying asset as per the provisions of AS-16.”

EAC opined that the borrowing costs could be capitalised by Salon Ltd.

Author’s comments

It may be noted that IAS 23 Borrowing Costs contains similar principles of capitalisation on qualifying asset. Like AS-16, substantial period of time has not been defined but unlike AS-16, there is no 12-month threshold level in IAS 23. Under IAS 23 there is no consensus globally on what constitutes a substantial period of time, though literature suggests a period of six months or more, to be substantial. Under FAS 34 interest cost is capitalised for all assets that require a period of time (not necessarily substantial) to get them ready for their intended use. However, in many cases, the benefit in terms of information about enterprise resources and earnings may not justify the additional accounting and administrative cost involved in providing the information. The benefit may be less than the cost, because the effect of interest capitalisation and its subsequent amortisation or other disposition, compared with the effect of charging it to expense when incurred, would not be material. In that circumstance, FAS 34 does not require interest capitalisation.

The substantial period criteria ensures that enterprises do not spend a lot of time and effort capturing immaterial interest cost for purposes of capitalisation. This aspect is very clear under FAS 34. Therefore if the interest cost is very material the same may be capitalised even if the asset has taken less than 12 months to complete, provided other factors indicate capitalisation is appropriate.

The explanation to AS-16 requires assessing the time which an asset should take technologically and commercially to be ready for its intended use. In fact, under present circumstances where construction period has reduced drastically due to technical innovation, the 12-month period should at best be looked at as a general benchmark and not a conclusive yardstick. It may so happen that an asset under normal circumstances may take more than 12 months to complete. However an enterprise that constructs the asset in 10 months should not be penalised for its efficiency by denying it interest capitalisation and vice versa.

Seen from this perspective, and the mixed practice under IAS 23, the EAC opinion is a step in the right direction as it clarifies that the 12-month period should not be seen as a strict benchmark, and other facts and circumstances should be kept in mind. In that sense, it is more aligned to global practice.

However additional guidance is required with regards to the following issues:

1. The EAC opinion changes the existing thought and practice in this area. In similar situations, if a company had not capitalised borrowing cost in earlier years, would they have to apply the correct treatment retrospectively (from the date AS-16 came into force)?

2. Would retrospective adjustment constitute a change in accounting policy or a rectification of prior period error?

3. Can such change be applied prospectively, given that the EAC opinion establishes a new principle?

4. If it is applied on a prospective basis, should it from the date the EAC finalised the opinion or the date when such an opinion was made public?

More importantly, given that it is intended that India will converge to IFRS, it may be worthwhile for the Institute of Chartered Accountants of India to raise this issue with the International Accounting Standards Board.
levitra

GAPs in GAAP — Amortisation Method for Intangibles

fiogf49gjkf0d
In the case of BOT type contracts, which are covered by a service concession agreement (SCA), and which are accounted for as intangibles, a question arises as to what is the most appropriate method for amortisation. Though this article is set out in the context of a toll road, it would also be applicable in many other cases of intangible assets.

Paragraphs 72 & 73 of AS-26, Intangible Assets set out the requirements with respect to the amortisation method.

72. The amortisation method used should reflect the pattern in which the asset’s economic benefits are consumed by the enterprise. If that pattern cannot be determined reliably, the straight-line method should be used.

73. A variety of amortisation methods can be used to allocate the depreciable amount of an asset on a systematic basis over its useful life. These methods include the straight-line method, the diminishing balance method and the unit of production method. The method used for an asset is selected based on the expected pattern of consumption of economic benefits and is consistently applied from period to period, unless there is a change in the expected pattern of consumption of economic benefits to be derived from that asset. There will rarely, if ever, be persuasive evidence to support an amortisation method for intangible assets that results in a lower amount of accumulated amortisation than under the straight-line method.

View 1

A revenue-based amortisation method better reflects the economic reality of the underlying terms of the SCA. This is particularly welcome in the case of the SCA where the tariff is lower in initial years, but the future increases in tariff will effectively recover the capital invested.

View 2

A time-based amortisation method i.e., the SLM is most appropriate as it reflects the duration of the SCA.

View 3

An amortisation method that reflects the usage of the toll road, for example, let’s say, during the entire duration of the SCA, 10 million trucks and 20 million cars are likely to use the toll road. For simplicity’s sake, let’s also assume that one truck’s consumption of economic benefits (in terms of wear and tear of the toll road, etc.) is twice that of one car. In other words one truck is equal to two cars for the purposes of amortisation. The toll road cost Rs.40 million. In the first year 1 million trucks and 2 million cars use the toll road. If we equal one truck to two cars, the amortisation would be 1/10th (4 million units/40 million units) of Rs.40 million, which is equal to Rs.4 million. This is the unit of production method. Which view is acceptable would be based on how the phrase ‘the method used for an asset is selected based on the expected pattern of consumption of economic benefits’ is interpreted.

Proponents of View 1 interpret the concept of consumption of economic benefits inherent in the licence as the generation of economic benefits arising from the asset’s use. Consequently, the generation of future revenues, future profits are appropriate parameters that could be used to reflect the way the asset is consumed. The application of this method involves an amortisation formula which uses a ratio of actual revenue to estimated revenue as the amortisation basis. Revenue is derived from an interaction between quantity and price, consequently the application of this amortisation method is considered a ‘derived computation’ which involves the use of ‘units of production’ (e.g., traffic volumes in the case of toll-roads) and toll rates. This method also gives a more consistent profit margin.

Proponents of View 2 feel that the contractual agreement only gives the operator the right of use, therefore, the amortisation method for the SCA should be focussed on the use of the contractual right more than on the use of the underlying tangible asset (the toll-road). Consequently, the focus appears to be on the right itself to operate the infrastructure for a certain period and is ‘consumed’ through the passage of time and consequently, a straight-line method of amortisation is more appropriate.

Proponents of View 3 observe that the economic benefits of an asset in an SCA are its ability to be used to provide the public service. The operator does not control the underlying asset and recognises an intangible asset to the extent that it receives a right (licence) to charge users of the public service. In some cases, the operator must return the underlying asset to the grantor in a wearable/ useable condition. Consequently, the physical wearing out of the underlying asset is relevant to the operation of the SCA even if an intangible asset, rather than the physical asset, is recognised in the financial statement. A volume-based method reflects this wearing out better than a time-based method. Further, the wearing out of the underlying asset is not affected by the revenue generated by each unit produced/used. For example, each car on a toll road has the same impact on the wearing out of the road, though the toll fee would have increased over the years for the car. Consequently, proponents of this view would support a units of production method, because it better reflects the pattern of consumption of the economic benefits embodied in the intangible asset.

Overall the author feels that a unit of production method better reflects the use of the underlying asset of a concession arrangement than an approach based on the passage of time. The author believes that View 1 is not acceptable. Paragraph 72 & 73 of AS-26 are clear that the amortisation method should ‘reflect the pattern in which the asset’s future economic benefits are expected to be consumed by the entity’ and the focus should not be on the generation of economic benefits such as revenue. Revenue is not necessarily a feature of the intangible asset being amortised, because revenue is not necessarily a measure of the results of using an intangible asset in isolation but might incorporate the use of other assets, people and processes; and (b) revenue from the use of an asset does not necessarily reflect the pattern of consumption of the benefits inherent in the intangible asset itself. A revenue-based approach is used only in limited cases for assets that generate revenues directly and independently from other assets.

 This is the case for example of film rights that are amortised in the proportion that revenue in the year bears to the estimated ultimate revenue, after provision for any anticipated shortfall. In light of the discussions above, the author feels that View 3 is the preferred method, View 2 is acceptable and View 1 is unacceptable.

I would urge the Institute to issue a clarification as BOT type contracts are becoming the norm in such transactions and the clarification would also bring uniformity in accounting policy/practice and will encourage ‘comparability’ the avowed objective of accounting standard.

levitra

Gaps in GAAP Change In Terms Of An Operating Lease Agreement

fiogf49gjkf0d
Issue Consider the following example involving change in terms of an operating lease. Entity Z is the lessee in an operating lease. The lease term is 10 years. Annual rent is Rs.200, with a fixed escalation of 5% each year. This results in a straight-lined annual lease expense of Rs.252. At the end of year 5, Entity Z and the landlord agree to modify the lease terms. The fixed escalation of 5% is replaced with CPI-linked escalation. The base rent for this purpose is the escalated rent at year 5 under the original terms (Rs.243). At the end of year 5, Entity Z has accrued rent of Rs.153 in its balance sheet as a consequence of straight-lining (prior to any adjustment to reflect the new terms). Entity Z’s accounting policy for contingent rents on operating leases is to expense them in the period to which they relate. The CPI-based escalation clause is considered to be a closely-related embedded derivative and is therefore not separated from the host contract. How is the modification recognised?

Alternative views

AS-19 has no specific guidance on the measurement implications of amending the terms of a lease. Therefore several views are possible, each of which have their own advantages and disadvantages. Also see appendix for the calculations.

View 1: Cancellation and new lease

View 1 treats the modification to the lease contract as a cancellation of the existing lease along with a new lease. AS-19.10 states that “Lease classification is made at the inception of the lease. If at any time the lessee and the lessor agree to change the provisions of the lease, other than by renewing the lease, in a manner that would have resulted in a different classification of the lease under the criteria in paragraphs 5 to 9 had the changed terms been in effect at the inception of the lease, the revised agreement is considered as a new agreement over its revised term. Changes in estimates (for example, changes in estimates of the economic life or of the residual value of the leased asset) or changes in circumstances (for example, default by the lessee), however, do not give rise to a new classification of a lease for accounting purposes.” The wording of AS- 19.10 and its reference to a ‘new agreement’ might be viewed as providing support for this approach (albeit acknowledging that this paragraph addresses reassessment of lease classification and is therefore not directly on point).

As a consequence:

  •  the accrued rent of Rs.153 arising out of straight-lining is released to profit & loss in its entirety at the end of year 5

  •  a new minimum lease payment (MLP) is determined prospectively as Rs.243 per annum. This amount is straight-lined as the non-contingent portion of the annual lease expense in years 6-10

  •  the effect of the CPI adjustment is recognised in each annual period, being the cumulative effect of CPI from year 6 onwards.

One argument against this approach is that it is questionable that it results in a pattern of lease expense that reflects the time pattern of the lessee’s benefits in accordance with AS-19.23 which states that “Lease payments under an operating lease should be recognised as an expense in the statement of profit and loss on a straight line basis over the lease term unless another systematic basis is more representative of the time pattern of the user’s benefit.”

Moreover, it is also questionable that the revision to the lease terms is in substance a cancellation of an existing lease.

View 2: Continuation of lease — revise SLM expense based on adjusted MLPs

View 2 treats the revised lease terms in years 6-10 as a continuation of the original lease. However, the MLPs are now different and the straight-line calculation should reflect this. One method is to determine the new total MLPs for the entire lease (i.e., years 1-10) under the revised terms. A straightline expense is determined for the fixed portion based on that amount.

As a consequence:

  •  a revised straight-line (non-contingent) annual lease expense of Rs.232 per annum is determined based on the revised total MLPs

  •  the accrued rent at the end of year 5 is adjusted. The revised accrual is the difference between the cumulative expense based on Rs.232 and the actual payments up to year 5. This results in Rs.96 being released to P&L instead of the entire Rs.152 under view 1

  •  the effect of the annual CPI adjustment is recognised in each annual period as per view 1.

View 3: Continuation of lease — use original SLM and adjust for variation between original rent and revised rent each period

Like view 2, view 3 treats the revised lease terms in years 6-10 as a continuation of the original lease. However, under view 3 the contingent adjustment is characterised as the variation between the original payment each year and the revised payment. This might be argued to be a better representation of the substance of the revision, which swaps fixed escalation for index-based escalation.

As a consequence:

  •  the accrued rent at year 5 is not adjusted

  •  the original straight-lined annual lease expense of Rs.252 continues to be recognised as the non-contingent portion

  •  the contingent portion in years 6-10 is the difference between the original cash rent for that year based on 5% escalation and the revised cash rent based on CPI.

Conclusion

Each of the above views is essentially unsupported in the standard, and have their own merits and drawbacks. Nevertheless View 3 appears to be the most logical as it results in a better reflection of substance of the change in the operating lease arrangement and is a better representative of the time pattern of the user’s benefit. Appendix

Original Lease Term & Expense Profile

Year

MLP’s

SL

Accrual

Cumulative

 

 

expenses

 

accrued

 

 

 

 

 

1

200.00

251.56

-51.56

-51.56

 

 

 

 

 

2

210.00

251.56

-41.56

-93.12

 

 

 

 

 

3

220.50

251.56

-31.06

-124.17

 

 

 

 

 

4

231.53

251.56

-20.03

-144.21

 

 

 

 

 

5

243.10

251.56

-8.46

-152.66

 

 

 

 

 

6

255.26

251.56

3.70

-148.96

 

 

 

 

 

7

268.02

251.56

16.46

-132.50

 

 

 

 

 

8

281.42

251.56

29.86

-102.64

 

 

 

 

 

9

295.49

251.56

43.93

-58.71

 

 

 

 

 

10

310.27

251.56

58.71

0.00

 

 

 

 

 

Total

2515.58

2515.58

0.00

 

 

 

 

 

 

Revised Lease Term &
Expense Profile

Year

 

MLP’s

CPI

Cash

View
1

View
2

View
3

 

 

 

 

 

 

rent

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

1

 

200.00

 

200.00

251.56

251.56

251.56

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

2

 

210.00

 

210.00

251.56

251.56

251.56

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

3

 

220.50

 

220.50

251.56

251.56

251.56

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

4

 

231.53

 

231.53

251.56

251.56

251.56

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

5

 

243.10

 

243.10

98.89

154.08

251.56

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

6

 

243.10

1.05

255.26

255.26

244.22

251.56

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

7

 

243.10

1.06

270.57

270.57

259.53

254.11

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

8

 

243.10

1.07

289.51

289.51

278.47

259.65

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

9

 

243.10

1.06

306.88

306.88

295.84

262.95

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

10

 

243.10

1.05

322.23

322.23

311.19

263.52

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Total

2320.63

 

2549.57

2549.57

2549.57

2549.57

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

GAPS in GAAP — AS-16 Borrowing costs

fiogf49gjkf0d
The definition of borrowing costs under AS-16 is an inclusive definition and not an exclusive definition. However, they must meet the basic criterion in the standard, i.e., that they are costs that are directly attributable to the acquisition, construction or production of a qualifying asset. As per AS-16 borrowing costs may include:
(a) interest and commitment charges on bank borrowings and other short-term and long-term borrowings;

(b) amortisation of discounts or premiums relating to borrowings;

(c) amortisation of ancillary costs incurred in connection with the arrangement of borrowings;

(d) finance charges in respect of assets acquired under finance leases or under other similar arrangements; and because the definition of borrowing costs is an inclusive one, numerous interpretative issues arise. For example, would borrowing costs include hedging costs ? Let me explain my point with the help of a simple example using a commonly encountered floating to fixed interest rate swap (IRS).

Example:

Floating to fixed IRS

Company X is constructing a factory and expects it to take 18 months to complete. To finance the construction, on 1st January 2011 the entity takes an eighteen-month, Rs.10,000,000 variable-rated term loan due on 30th June 2012. Interest payment dates and interest rate reset dates occur on 1st January and 1st July until maturity. The principal is due at maturity. Also on 1st January 2011, the entity enters into an eighteen-month IRS with a notional amount of Rs.10,000,000 from which it will receive periodic payments at the floating rate and make periodic payments at a fixed rate of 10% per annum, with settlement and rate reset dates every 30th June and 31st December. The fair value of the swap is zero at inception. During the eighteen-month period, floating interest rates are as follows:

Under the IRS, Company X receives interest at the market floating rate as above and pays at 10% on the nominal amount of Rs.10,000,000 throughout the period.

At 31st December 2011 the swap has a fair value of Rs.40,000, reflecting the fact that it is now in the money as Company X is expected to receive a net cash inflow of this amount in the period until the instrument is terminated. There are no further changes in interest rates prior to the maturity of the swap. The fair value of the swap declines to zero at 30th June 2012. In this example for sake of simplicity we assume hedge is 100% effective, issue costs are nil and exclude the effect of discounting.

The cash flows incurred by the entity on its borrowing and IRS are as follows:

There are a number of different ways in which Company X could theoretically calculate the borrowing costs eligible for capitalisation, including the following:
(i) The IRS meets the conditions for, and Company X applies, hedge accounting. The finance costs eligible for capitalisation as borrowing costs will be Rs.1,000,000 in the year to 31st December 2011 and Rs.500,000 in the period ended 30th June 2012.
(ii) Company X applies hedge accounting, but chooses to ignore it for the purposes of treating them as borrowing costs. Thus it capitalises Rs.925,000 in the year to 31st December 2011 and Rs.540,000 in the period ended 30th June 2012.
(iii) Company X does not apply hedge accounting. Therefore, it will reflect the fair value of the swap in income in the year ended 31st December 2011, reducing the net finance costs by Rs.40,000 to Rs.960,000 and increasing the finance costs by an equivalent amount in 2012 to Rs.540,000.
(iv) Company X does not apply hedge accounting. However, it considers that it is inappropriate to reflect the fair value of the swap in borrowing costs eligible for capitalisation, so it capitalises costs based on the net cash cost on an accruals accounting basis. In this case this will give the same result as in (i) above.
(v) Company X does not apply hedge accounting and considers only the costs incurred on the borrowing, not the IRS, as eligible for capitalisation. The borrowing costs eligible for capitalisation would be Rs.925,000 in 2011 and Rs.540,000 in 2012.

All the above views have their own arguments for and against, although the preparer will need to consider what method is more appropriate in the circumstances. For example, the following points may be considered by the preparer:
1. The decision to hedge interest cost results in the fixation of interest cost at a fixed level and are directly attributable to the construction of the factory. Therefore, method (ii) may not carry much support.

2. To use method (iv) it is necessary to demonstrate that the derivative financial instrument is directly attributable to the construction of a qualifying asset. In making this assessment it is clearly necessary to consider the term of the derivative and this method may not be practicable if the derivative has a different term to the underlying directly attributable borrowing.

3. In this example, method (v) appears to be inconsistent with the underlying principles of AS-16 — which is that the costs eligible for capitalisation are those costs that could have been avoided if the expenditure on the qualifying asset had not been made — and is not therefore appropriate. However, it may not be possible to demonstrate that specific derivative financial instruments are directly attributable to particular qualifying assets, rather than being used by the entity to manage its interest rate exposure on a more general basis. In such a case, method (v) may be an acceptable treatment. Method (iii) may not be appropriate in any case. Whatever policy is chosen by the entity, it needs to be consistently applied in similar situations.

The bigger issue is: in the era of accounting standards — is this diversity warranted and/or desirable?

levitra

GAPs in GAAP — FAQs on Revised Schedule VI

fiogf49gjkf0d
The issuance of Revised Schedule VI to the Companies Act applicable from 1-4-2011 was a landmark event in financial reporting in India. As could be expected, there were numerous interpretation issues that arose. To address them the Institute of Chartered Accountants of India (ICAI) issued the Guidance Note on the Revised Schedule VI to the Companies Act, 1956 (GNRVI). Further, in May 2011 Frequently Asked Questions FAQ — Revised Schedule VI was posted on the ICAI website to provide further guidance. At the time of writing this article, none of the following was clear with respect to the FAQ’s — (a) the unit of ICAI that issued the FAQ’s (b) the review process — whether the Accounting Standard Board or the Technical Directorate of the ICAI reviewed the FAQ’s, and most importantly (c) the authority attached to the FAQ’s.

 In this article, we take a look at some of the contentious FAQ’s.

A company, having December year-end, will prepare its first revised Schedule VI financial statements for statutory purposes for the period 1 January to 31 December 2012. Whether such a company needs to prepare its tax financial statements for the period from 1 April 2011 to 31 March 2012 in accordance with revised Schedule VI or pre-revised Schedule VI?

Response in FAQ

It is only proper that accounts for tax filing purposes are also prepared in the Revised Schedule VI format for the year ended 31 March 2012.

Author’s view with respect to companies to which MAT is applicable

S.s (2) of section 115JB states as follows “Every assessee, being a company, shall, for the purposes of this section, prepare its profit and loss account for the relevant previous year in accordance with the provisions of Part II and III of Schedule VI to the Companies Act 1956 . . . . . . ” The Finance Act, 2012, enacted recently, has removed reference to part III from section 115JB of the Income-tax Act. This amendment is applicable for A.Y. 2013-14, i.e., for tax financial year 2012-13.

From the above amendment to section 115JB, it is clear that a company will use revised Schedule VI format for preparing its tax financial statements for the tax financial year 2012-13 (i.e., 1 April 2012 to 31 March 2013). For preparing tax financial statements for the tax financial year 2011-12 (i.e. 1 April 2011 to 31 March 2012), the fact that the Finance Act removes reference to part III of schedule VI only for previous year beginning 1 April 2012 suggests that the company may need to prepare its tax financial statements for the period 1 April 2011 to 31 March 2012 in accordance with pre-revised Schedule VI. This appears to be a straight forward interpretation of the amendment to the Income-tax Act.

Note: Generally in determining the tax liability, it should not matter whether the accounts are prepared in accordance with pre-revised Schedule VI or revised Schedule VI. However, in certain situations it may have a significant impact, for example, where the company has to pay MAT . The P&L account in pre-revised Schedule VI had the P&L appropriation account. Therefore typically certain adjustments to reserves (e.g., debenture redemption reserve) would appear in the P&L appropriation account, and the net balance would be added to the retained earnings in the balance sheet. In the revised Schedule VI, the P&L ends with PAT (profit after tax) and all the appropriations are carried out under the caption ‘Reserves’ in the balance sheet. For determining the book profits under 115JB, and consequently the MAT liability, one would achieve different results if one were to start with PAT (under revised Schedule VI) or start with the net appropriated P&L (under pre-revised Schedule VI) and treat debenture redemption reserve as an allowable expenditure (in accordance with certain favourable judicial precedents) for determining book profits for MAT purposes.

There is a breach of major debt covenant as on the balance sheet date relating to long-term borrowing. This allows the lender to demand immediate repayment of loan; however, the lender has not demanded repayment till the authorisation of financial statements for issue. Can the company continue to classify the loan as current? Will the classification be different if the lender has waived the breach before authorisation of financial statements for issue?

Response in FAQ

As per the Guidance Note on the Revised Schedule VI, a breach is considered to impact the noncurrent nature of the loan only if the loan has been irrevocably recalled. Hence, in the Indian context, long-term loans, which have a minor or major breach in terms, will be considered as current only if the loans have been irrevocably recalled before authorisation of the financial statements for issue.

Author’s view

In accordance with revised Schedule VI, a liability is classified as non-current if and only if the borrower has unconditional right to defer its payment for atleast 12 months at the reporting date. GNRVI clarifies that if a term loan becomes repayable on demand because of violation of a minor debt covenant (for e.g., submission of quarterly financial information), the company can continue to classify the same as non-current unless the lender has demanded repayment before approval of financial statements.

GNRVI does not clarify the classification where a company has violated a major debt covenant as on the reporting date. However, a reading of GNRVI suggests that the exemption is given only with regard to violation of minor debt covenants and not for violation of major covenants. Thus, if major debt covenant is violated, there can be three situations — (a) the banker has asked for repayment before approval of financial statements, (b) the banker has not asked for repayment and has not forgiven the violation before approval of financial statements, and (c) the banker has forgiven the violation before the approval of financial statements. In situations (a) and (b), the author believes that the loan should be classified as current liability. In situation (c), where the banker has actually forgiven the violation before approval of financial statements, one may argue that the intention of the ICAI is that a company should continue to classify the loan as non-current, if the possibility of loan being recalled is negligible. Subsequent waiver of breach confirms this aspect and therefore the company may continue to classify the loan as non-current.

Thus, there is a difference in view, with respect to situation (b). In the author’s view and based on the GNRVI, the same would be treated as current. However, as per the FAQ’s, the same would be treated as non-current.

How would rollover/refinance arrangement entered for a loan, which was otherwise required to be repaid in six months, impact current/non-current classification of the loan? Consider three scenarios: (a) rollover is with the same lender on the same terms, (b) rollover is with the same lender but on substantially different terms, and (c) rollover is with a different lender on similar/different terms? In all three cases, the rollover is for non-current period.

Response in FAQ

In general, the classification of the loan will be based on the tenure of the loan. Thus, in all the above cases, if the original term of the loan is short term, the loan would be treated as only current, irrespective of the rollover/refinance arrangement. However, in exceptional cases, there may be a need to apply significant judgment on substance over form. In such cases, categorisation could vary as appropriate.

Author’s view

If the rollover arrangements are with the same lender at the same or similar terms, the company will continue to classify the loan as non-current, provided that the rollover arrangement was in existence at the balance sheet date. If the rollover arrangement has been entered into with a different lender either on similar or different terms, the arrangement is more akin to extinguishment of the original loan and refinancing the same with a new loan. Hence, in such cases, the existing loan should be classified as current liability. If the rollover arrangement is entered into with the same lender but on substantially different terms, the position is not clear. We understand that the matter is under debate at the IASB level and mixed practices are being followed globally as well. Keeping this in view, one may argue that it can classify the loan as non-current, provided that the rollover arrangement was in existence at the balance sheet date.

The author believes that view taken in the ICAI FAQ is technically flawed, since rollover of loan with the same lender on the same terms for non-current period clearly results in non-current classification. This is because it is not due to be settled within the 12 months after the reporting date and the company has an unconditional right to defer settlement of the liability for atleast 12 months after the reporting date.

The company has received security deposit from its customers/dealers. Either the company or the dealer can terminate the agreement by giving 2 months’ notice. The deposits are refundable within one month of the termination. However, based on past experience, it is noted that deposits refunded in a year are not material, i.e., 1% to 2% of amount outstanding. The intention of the company is to continue long term relationship with their dealers. Can the company classify such security deposits as non-current liability?

Response in FAQ

As per Revised Schedule VI, a liability is classified as current if the company does not have an unconditional right to defer its settlement for at least 12 months after the reporting date. This will apply generally. However, in specific cases, based on the commercial practice, say for example electricity deposit collected by the department, though stated on paper to be payable on demand, the company’s records would show otherwise as these are generally not claimed in short term. Treating them as non-current may be appropriate and may have to be considered accordingly. A similar criterion will apply to other deposits received, for example, under cancellable leases.

Author’s view

As per revised Schedule VI, a liability is classified as current if the company does not have an unconditional right to defer its settlement for at least 12 months after the reporting date. In the given case, the company does not have such right since the customer/dealer can terminate the agreement by giving 2 months notice and deposit has to be refunded within 1 month of termination. Hence, the security deposit should be classified as current liability. The intention of the company to not terminate the agreement or past experience is not relevant.

In case of provision for gratuity and leave encashment, can current and non-current portions be bifurcated on the basis of actuarial valuation?

Response in FAQ

The actuary should be specifically requested to indicate the current and non-current portions, based on which the disclosure is to be made.

Author’s view

Paragraph 7.3(b) of GNRVI states as below:

“In case of accumulated leave outstanding as on the reporting date, the employees have already earned the right to avail the leave and they are normally entitled to avail the leave at any time during the year. To the extent, the employee has unconditional right to avail the leave, the same needs to be classified as ‘current’ even though the same is measured as ‘other long-term employee benefit’ as per AS-15. However, whether the right to defer the employee’s leave is available unconditionally with the company needs to be evaluated on a case to case basis — based on the terms of Employee Contract and Leave Policy, Employer’s right to postpone/ deny the leave, restriction to avail leave in the next year for a maximum number of days, etc. In case of such complexities the amount of Non-current and Current portions of leave obligation should normally be determined by a qualified Actuary.”

The author believes that ICAI FAQ needs to be read with GNRVI and it cannot override paragraph 7.3(b) of GNRVI. Hence, there is no question of any part of leave liability being classified as non-current liability, if a company does not have a right to postpone/ deny the leave for 12 months. In other words, if an actuary is appointed to do this classification, he or she should apply the principles set out in paragraph 7.3(b) of GNRVI.

Conclusion

In light of the above arguments, the author would request the ICAI to reconsider and reissue some of the FAQ’s.

GAPs in GAAP — Accounting for Rate Regulated Activities

fiogf49gjkf0d
Many governments establish regulatory mechanisms to govern pricing of essential services such as electricity, water, transportation, etc. Such mechanisms endeavour to maintain a balance between protecting the consumers from unreasonable prices and allowing the providers of the services to earn a fair return. These rate-regulation mechanisms result in significant accounting issues for service providers.

Company X, the owner of electricity transmission infrastructure and related assets, has been licensed for twenty years to operate a transmission system in a particular jurisdiction. Only one operator is authorised to manage and operate the transmission system. Company X charges its customers for access to the network at prices that must be approved by the regulator. Pricing structures are defined in the law and related guidelines, and are determined on a ‘cost plus’ basis that is based on budget estimates. Once approved, prices are published and apply to all customers. Prices are not negotiable with individual customers. Prices are set to allow Company X to achieve a fair return on its invested capital and to recover all reasonable costs incurred. At the end of each year, Company X reports to the regulator deviations between the actual and budgeted results. If the regulator approves the differences as ‘reasonable costs’, they are included in the determination of rates for future periods. The key question is that, can an entity recognise this difference which it would attempt to recover through rates for future periods as assets and liabilities?

To deal with this issue, the International Accounting Standards Board (IASB) was working on the proposed IFRS for Rate Regulated Activities. Though the IASB paused its project, the ICAI recently issued the Guidance Note on Accounting for Rate Regulated Activities (GN). It is stated that the GN will apply both under the Indian GAAP and IFRS-converged standards (Ind-AS). Since the GN is still to be cleared by the National Advisory Committee on Accounting Standards (NACAS), the ICAI has not announced its applicability date. The GN applies to those activities of an entity which meet both of the following criteria:

(i) The regulator establishes the price the entity must charge its customers for the goods or services the entity provides, and that price binds the customers.

(ii) The price established by regulation (the rate) is designed to recover the specific costs the entity incurs in providing the regulated goods or services and to earn a specified return (costof- service regulation). The specified return could be a minimum or range and need not be a fixed or guaranteed return. The GN defines the ‘costof- service’ regulation as ‘a form of regulation for setting up an entity’s prices (rates) in which there is a cause-and-effect relationship between the entity’s specific costs and its revenues.’ However, the GN does not deal with regulatory mechanisms which prescribe rates based on targeted or assumed costs, such as industry averages, rather than the entity’s specific costs.

GN acknowledges that the rate regulation of an entity’s business activities creates operational and accounting situations which would not have arisen in the absence of such regulation. With cost-ofservice regulation, there is a direct linkage between the costs that an entity is expected to incur and its expected revenue as the rates are set to allow the entity to recover its expected costs. However, there can be a significant time lag between incurrence of costs by the entity and their recovery through tariffs. Recovery of certain costs may be provided for by regulation either before or after the costs are incurred. Rate regulations are enforceable and, therefore, may create legal rights and obligations for the entity.

The GN requires an entity to recognise regulatory assets and regulatory liabilities. Regulatory assets represent an entity’s right to recover specific previously incurred costs and to earn a specified return, from an aggregate customer base. Regulatory liabilities represent an entity’s obligation to refund previously collected amount and to pay a specified return. The following paragraphs explain the reasons provided in the GN for recognition of rate regulated assets and liabilities.

 (1) The Framework, defines an ‘asset’ as follows: “An asset is a resource controlled by the enterprise as a result of past events from which future economic benefits are expected to flow to the enterprise.” In a cost-of-service regulation, the resource is the right conferred by the regulator whereby the costs incurred by the entity result in future cash flows. In such cases, incurrence of costs creates an enforceable right to set rates at a level that permits the entity to recover those costs, plus a specified return, from an aggregate customer base. For example, if the regulator has approved certain additions to be made by the entity in its assets base during the tariff period, which would be added to the asset base for tariff setting, the entity upon making such additions obtains the right to recover the costs and return as provided in the regulatory framework though the actual recovery through rates may take place in the future. While adjustment of future rates is the mechanism the regulator uses to implement its regulation, the right in itself is a resource arising as a result of past events and from which future cash inflows are expected.

(2) The cause-and-effect relationship between an entity’s costs and its rate-based revenue demonstrates that an asset exists. In this case, the entity’s right that arises as a result of regulation relates to identifiable future cash flows linked to costs it previously incurred, rather than a general expectation of future cash flows based on the existence of predictable demand. The binding regulations/orders of the regulator for recovery of incurred costs together with the actual incurrence of costs by the entity would satisfy the definition of asset as per the Framework since the entity’s right (to recover amounts through future rate adjustments) constitutes a resource arising as a result of past events (incurrence of costs permitted by the regulator for recovery from customers) from which future economic benefits are expected to flow (increased cash flows through rate adjustments).

(3) As regards the ‘control’ criterion in the definition of an asset as per the Framework, it may be argued that though the entity has a right to recover the costs incurred, it does not control the same since it cannot force individual customers to purchase goods or services in future. In this regard, it may be mentioned that the rate regulation governs the entity’s relationship with its customer base as a whole and therefore creates a present right to recover the costs incurred from an aggregate customer base. Although the individual members of that group may change over time, the relationship the regulator oversees is between the entity and the group. The regulator has the authority to permit the entity to set rates at a level that will ensure that the entity receives the expected cash flows from the customers’ base as a whole. Further, the Framework states that control over the future economic benefits is sufficient for an asset to exist, even in the absence of legal rights. The key notion is that the entity has access to a resource and can limit others’ access to that resource which is satisfied in case of the right provided by the regulator to recover incurred costs through future rate adjustments. Any issues regarding recoverability of the amounts should not affect the recognition of the right in the financial statements though they certainly merit consideration in its measurement.

    4. The Framework defines a liability as ‘a present obligation of the enterprise arising from past events, the settlement of which is expected to result in an outflow from the entity of resources embodying economic benefits.’ In cost-of-service regulation, an obligation arises because of a requirement to refund to customers excess amounts collected in previous periods. In such cases, collecting amounts in excess of costs and the allowed return creates an obligation to return the excess collection to the aggregate customer base. For example, if the tariffs initially set assume a certain level of costs towards energy purchased but the actual costs incurred by the entity are less than such assumed levels, the entity would be obliged to make a refund following the ‘truing up’ exercise by the regulator. Such obligation is a present obligation relating to amounts the entity has already collected from customers owed to the entity’s customer base as a whole, not to individual customers. It is not a possible future obligation because the regulator has the authority to ensure that future cash flows from the customer base as a whole would be reduced to refund amounts previously collected. The obligation exists even though its amount may be uncertain. An economic obligation is something that results in reduced cash inflows, directly or indirectly, as well as something that results in increased cash outflows. Obligations link the entity with what it has to do because obligations are enforceable against the entity by legal or equivalent means.

Potential inconsistency with Framework

The IASB has been working on proposed IFRS for Rate Regulated Activities, since 2008. It issued an exposure draft of proposed IFRS in July 2009; however, it has not been finalised till date and the project has been paused. One key reason for the delay arises from strong view that regulatory assets and regulatory liabilities do not meet the definition of an asset and liability under the IASB Framework for Preparation and Presentation of Financial Statements. The proponents of this view make the following arguments:

    1) One of the essential characteristics of a regulatory regime is that entities entering it get access to a large customer base in a market that requires a significant investment in infrastructure (i.e., natural ‘barriers to access’). In return, the entity agrees to accept the ‘economic burden’ of having to comply with operating conditions, one of which is the requirement to have the prices of the goods or services it delivers approved by the regulator. This ‘economic burden’ does not lead to a recognisable liability on day one, but may require the recognition of a liability if it leads to contracts becoming onerous as defined by AS-29 Provisions, Contingent Liabilities and Contingent Assets. Under Indian GAAP, any price paid to receive the right to operate in this regulated market will meet the definition of an intangible asset. However, if the regulator allows an entity to increase its future prices, this is not creating a separate asset, but granting the entity relief from the ‘economic burden’ of its operating conditions to put them partly in the same position as an entity in an unregulated market and allowing them to generate a normal return.

    2) A cause-and-effect relationship between a cost incurred and future rate increases may not be sufficient enough to justify the recognition of an asset, as this would apply to every entity reconsidering price setting for future periods based upon current year’s performance. For example, Widget Limited (the company) is
‘widget maker.’ It is not involved in rate regulated activity and does not have one-to-one contract with customers. The company is a dominant market participant having some monopolistic features. The company believes that it has incurred too many raw material costs in the current period. The company may make business decision to increase the price for transactions beginning the next year. The question is whether it is appropriate to recognise the incremental increase in sales price multiplied by the expected volume of sales for next year given that the link/reason the dominant market participant increased its price was because this year’s costs were too high (and therefore this year’s ‘reasonable profit’ expected by equity holders was not achieved).

    3) To support recognition of regulatory assets/ liabilities, the GN argues that the regulator negotiates rates on behalf of the whole customer base and a regulated entity therefore is comparable to an entity negotiating future prices with a specific customer, thereby binding both the entity and the customer. However, the contrary view is that rate regulation is a condition of the entity’s entry into the regulated market (i.e., a condition of the operating license) and does not create a separate asset. The entity has control over the right to operate in the regulated market, not over the future behaviour of its customers. Since the regulator did not guarantee the future recovery of any costs incurred, an asset controlled by the entity is not being created.

The Framework for Preparation and Presentation of Financial Statements
under Indian GAAP is similar to that under IFRS. Therefore, one may argue that the GN is not in accordance with the Indian Framework, which is the base document and serves as a guiding principle in drafting of standards.

Conclusion

Whilst the author does not believe that the existing asset and liability definitions are met, one can understand why the standard-setter considered the recognition of regulatory assets and regulatory liabilities for entities that meet certain conditions, to provide decision-useful information. The author believes that the only way this can be done under the existing Framework is to state that the proposals in the GN are a departure from the Framework, and to provide clear guidance on the scope of the standard and to prohibit analogising. While all entities have the right to increase or decrease future prices, regulated entities have the following characteristics to justify a departure from the Framework: (a) Their prices and operational decisions are restricted and governed by the law and require regulatory approval.

    The economic impact of the regulation is to ensure that the regulated entity earns a specified return. (c) As noted in the GN, the regulator does act on behalf of the aggregate customer base with respect to price. Most importantly, the author believes a departure from the Framework is justified because the requirements would result in financial information that presents the economic effects of the regulation — that the entity will achieve a specified return.

A perusal of publicly available Indian GAAP financial statements of few companies engaged in power distribution indicates that they have recognised regulatory assets/ regulatory liabilities. From an Indian GAAP perspective, the Guidance Note is not expected to have any significant impact on these companies and would not change anything (other than legitimising current accounting practice). Therefore the author believes that the standard-setters should not have issued the Guidance Note in the first place and should actively participate in the ongoing effort of the IASB in developing a global standard for rate regulation.   

GAPS in GAAP Accounting for BOT contracts

Background

Governments are always
starved of funds. To mitigate this problem, they enter into contracts
with private parties; particularly in the area of public service for the
development, financing, operation and maintenance of infrastructural
facilities such as, roads, bridges, ports, etc. An arrangement typically
involves a private sector entity (an operator) constructing the
infra-structural facilities used to provide the public service and
operating and maintaining those infrastructural facilities for a
specified period of time. The operator is paid for its services over the
period of the arrangement through user fees or the grantor pays
annuity. Such an arrangement is often described as a
‘build-operate-transfer’ (BOT) or a ‘public-to-private service
concession arrangement’. A feature of these service arrangements is:

1.  
 The grantor (generally the Government or a public sector company)
controls or regulates what services the operator must provide with the
infrastructural facilities, to whom it must provide them, and at what
price; and
2.    The grantor controls through ownership, beneficial
entitlement or otherwise any significant residual interest in the
infrastructural facilities if remaining at the end of the term of the
arrangement.

Typically under current Indian GAAP, practice is
that the grantor records the cost of constructing the infra-structure as
fixed assets or in some cases as intangible assets. No profit is
recognised on the construction, since it is not appropriate to recognise
any profit on constructing fixed assets/intangible assets for own use.

However,
if one were to look more deeply into the current Indian GAAP, a more
appropriate accounting interpretation of the arrangement would be as
follows:

1.    The infrastructure facilities should not be
recog-nised as property, plant and equipment of the operator, because
the contractual service arrangement does not convey the right to control
the use of the public service infrastructure facilities to the
operator. The operator has access to operate the infrastructure
facilities to provide the public service on behalf of the grantor in
accordance with the terms specified in the contract.

2.    Under
the terms of contractual arrangements, the operator acts as a service
provider. The operator constructs infrastructure facilities used to
provide a public service and operates and maintains those infrastructure
facilities (operation services) for a specified period of time.

3.  
 The operator should recognise and measure revenue in accordance with
Accounting Standard (AS) 7, Construction Contracts and Accounting
Standard (AS) 9, Revenue Recognition for the construction and operating
the services it performs.

If the operator performs more than one
service under a single contract or arrangement, consideration received
or receivable should be allocated by reference to the relative fair
values of the services delivered, when the amounts are separately
identifiable.

4.    Paragraph 34 of AS 26 Intangible Assets
states that “An intangible asset may be acquired in exchange or part
exchange for another asset. In such a case, the cost of the asset
acquired is determined in accordance with the principles laid down in
this regard in AS 10, Accounting for Fixed Assets.” Paragraph 11.1 of AS
10 states that “When a fixed asset is acquired in exchange for another
asset, its cost is usually determined by reference to the fair market
value of the consideration given. It may also be appropriate to consider
the fair market value of the asset acquired, if this is more clearly
evident.”

5.    If the operator provides construction services,
the consideration received or receivable by the operator should be
recognised at its fair value. The consideration may be, rights to a
financial asset (annuities are received from the government), or an
intangible asset (toll charges are collected from public).

6.    The operator should recognise a financial asset when it receives annuities from the grantor.

7.  
 The operator should recognise an intangible asset to the extent that
it receives a right (a licence) to charge users of the public service.

Let’s consider a simple example of how the intangible asset model would work.

Example

The
terms of the arrangement requires an operator to construct a road
within two years and maintain and operate the road to a specified
standard for eight years (i.e. years 3–10). At the end of year 10, the
arrangement will end and the road ownership will continue with the
government. The operator estimates that the costs it will incur to
fulfill its obligations will be as shown in Table 1.

Table 1 — Estimate of Costs


Assume
the operator collects Rs. 200 per year in years 3–10 from users of the
road. The user rates are fixed by the government. Fair value of
construction services is forecast cost plus 5%.

The operator
recognises contract revenue and costs in accordance with AS 7,
Construction Contracts and AS 9, Revenue Recognition. In year 1, for
example, construction costs of Rs. 500, construction revenue of Rs. 525
(cost plus 5 per cent), and hence construc-tion profit of Rs. 25 is
recognised in the statement of profit and loss. The operator provides
construction services to the grantor in exchange for an intangible
asset, i.e. a right to collect tolls from road users in years 3–10. In
accordance with AS 26, Intangible As-sets, the operator recognises the
intangible asset at cost, i.e. the fair value of consideration
transferred to acquire the asset, which is the fair value of the
consideration received or receivable for the construc-tion services
delivered. In accordance with AS 26, the intangible asset is amortised
over the period in which it is expected to be available for use by the
operator, i.e. years 3–10. The depreciable amount of the intangible
asset (Rs. 1,050) is allocated using a straight-line method. The annual
amortisation charge is therefore Rs. 1,050 divided by eight years, i.e.
Rs. 131 per year. The road users pay for the public services at the same
time as they receive them, i.e. when they use the road. The operator
therefore recognises toll revenue when it collects the tolls. The
statement of P&L for years 1-10 will appear as shown in Table 2.

The
above example has been kept simple and numerous other complications
have not been considered such as capitalisation of borrowing costs,
resurfacing obligation, negative grants, revenue sharing arrangements,
etc.

To sum up, it could be said that the current Indian GAAP is
not explicit as to how BOT contracts should be accounted for. 
Therefore, there appears to be two methods in which BOT contracts can be
accounted.

Method 1

A classic and conventional
method has been to recognise the construction cost of the infrastructure
as fixed asset and depreciate it over a period of time. The
corresponding revenue on user fees is recognised when user fees are
collected.

Challenges in applying method 2

Scope

Since
the accounting model involved in method 2 is so different from the
traditional ”fixed asset” model, it is critical to determine whether an
arrangement falls within its scope. This is not always straightforward
due to the complexity of the contracts setting out the key terms of the
concession arrangements. One challenge that may arise, is in
deter-mining whether the government body controls any significant
residual interest in the infrastructure asset at the end of the
concession arrangement. Another challenge that may arise in some
circumstances, is to determine whether the government in substance
controls the user price.

Intangible asset, financial asset, or both

The
next step is to determine which of the two ac-counting models
(intangible asset or financial asset) to apply. This decision will have a
significant impact on the revenues recognised from the contract. For
example, it is not uncommon for a contract accounted for by applying the
intangible model to give rise to double the revenues, compared to a
contract with nearly identical cash flows that is accounted for using
the financial asset model. Fortunately, the selection of the model to
apply is not an option. Rather, the model flows from whether the
operator has the right to charge for services (intangible model) or the
right to receive cash flows from the grantor (financial asset). This may
require careful analysis, since a contract that initially appears to
fall within the intangible model may have an element of guaranteed cash
flows. For example, if in the early years of the contract, the
government body guarantees a minimum level of revenues from the
operation of a new expressway to encourage private investment, there may
be both a financial asset and an intangible asset. Accounting for these
“combined model” concessions can become very complex, since costs and
revenues must be divided between the two components of the contract.
Dividing the total consideration into the two components may involve the
use of significant management judgment and estimation.

Estimates and fair values

Accounting
for concession arrangements typically involves an extensive use of
estimates and valuations, which are expected to have a significant
impact on the company’s financial statements. For example, revenues and
costs need to be recognised for the construction of the infrastructure
asset in accordance with AS-7. Since the contract is unlikely to specify
separately the revenue from construction, it is typically necessary to
impute construction revenues by applying an appropriate margin to the
construction costs, and to assign the balance of revenue to operations,
maintenance, etc. Companies may need to use either internal or external
benchmarking for similar construction contracts, since an assessment of
profitability on a service concession arrangement is normally made on an
overall IRR basis and not separately for the construction and operation
phases of the project.

Accounting for negative grants

Certain
arrangements include the provision for negative grants, wherein the
operator is required to make the payment to the grantor during the
duration of the arrangement. The negative grant may be either in the
form of fixed payment (upfront or annual throughout the service
concession arrangement) or in the form of a percentage of revenue earned
during the arrangement. The upfront fixed payment should be treated as
an intangible asset. In the case of annual fixed payment, intangible
assets should be recognised at the present value of the annual amounts.
However, there are mixed practices under Indian GAAP in these matters.
Where the negative grant is in the form of share in the percentage of
revenue earned during concession arrangement, the company should assess
whether the revenue is to be shown on a net or gross basis.

Other factors

Numerous
other issues need to be considered such as capitalisation of borrowing
costs, provision for maintenance obligation, etc. and the efforts
involved in applying method 2 should not be undermined.

Issue

Parent
Ltd is a listed entity. Parent Ltd has set up a special purpose vehicle
(SPV) which is its 100% subsidiary, for the purposes of entering into
an arrangement with NHAI. SPV has entered into BOT contract with NHAI.
As per the Agreement, NHAI has granted an exclusive right to the SPV to
construct, operate and maintain the road for a period of thirty years.
The SPV has sub-contracted the construction for 60% of the road contract
to Parent. In 2012-13, Parent has executed the work of above road
project and the profit margin is approximately 5%. Parent recognises the
margin earned in its stand-alone financial statements. Whether Parent
should eliminate the profit on revenue received from SPV from
construction services provided to the SPV, in its consolidated financial
statements (CFS)?

Response

The response to the
above question will depend on the method the Parent is following with
respect to the accounting of service concession arrangements.

Method 1

If
method 1 as described above is used, Parent should eliminate the profit
on revenue received from SPV from construction services provided to the
SPV, in its

CFS. This is primarily for two reasons. Firstly,
paragraph 10.1 of AS-10 Accounting for Fixed Assets states as follows
“In arriving at the gross book value of self-constructed fixed
assets…………

Any internal profits are eliminated in arriving at such costs.” Secondly, paragraph 16 of AS-21 Consolidated Financial

Statements
states as follows “Intragroup balances and intragroup transactions and
resulting unrealised profits should be eliminated in full.”

Method 2

If
method 2 is applied, Parent should not eliminate the profit on revenue
received from SPV from construction services provided to the SPV, in its
consolidated financial statements; provided method 2 is applied in its
entirety. Under this method, the company applies the principles of the
Guidance Note/IFRIC 12. The group is not controlling the infrastructure,
which in substance has been sold to the grantor in lieu of a right to
use (intangible asset). As the group has sold the infrastructure, an
appropriate profit should be recognised. In other words, the arrangement
is seen as providing construction services to the government, rather
than a construction service provided by the Parent to the SPV.

The
application of accounting treatment above should not be seen as a means
of applying the Indian GAAP principles (method 2) to selectively
recognise the profits that Parent has made on its billing to the SPV.
Rather, it is a holistic application of Indian GAAP principles to the
entire service concession arrangement. Therefore, in addition to the
cost incurred by the SPV on billings by Parent, there may be other cost
incurred in executing the contract. The Indian GAAP principles
enumerated above should be applied to the total construction cost
including those charged by Parent to the SPV. This would mean that in
addition to not eliminating the profit made by the Parent on its billing
to the SPV, Parent would also have to recognise an additional profit
representing the margin on other cost. Further, all service concession
arrangements that fulfils certain specific criteria (and explained in
this article), will have to be accounted for in this manner. In
ad-dition, other matters may need careful consideration such as
provision for maintenance and resurfacing obligation, negative grant,
sharing of revenue with grantor, capitalisation of borrowing cost, etc.

Thus
under method 2, the entire arrangement is recorded based on Guidance
Note/IFRIC 12 principles. There are numerous challenges in applying
method 2 and it is not a straight forward exercise. This may have the
effect of recognising the profit made on the construction services
including the billings of the Parent to the SPV; however, it has too
many other repercussions and accounting consequences (discussed in this
paper) which would need careful consideration.

Method 2

An
alternative method under current Indian GAAP is to recognise the
construction of the infrastructure as a construction service rendered to
the grantor in exchange of an acquisition of a right to use (an
in-tangible asset) or an unconditional right to annuities (a financial
asset). Those principles of current Indian GAAP are more clearly
articulated in the Exposure Draft Guidance Note on Accounting for
Service Concession Arrangements. International Financial Reporting
Standards IFRIC 12 Service Concession Arrangements also has similar
requirements. The working model with respect to this method has been
explained in this article, using a simple example where the construction
service is exchanged for an intangible asset (right to use). There are
numerous challenges in applying method 2, which are described below.
When method 2 is used, it should be applied to all contracts in the
group that meet the requirements set out in the Guidance Note ED/ IFRIC
12.

GAP in GAAP Accounting for Dividend Distribution Tax

fiogf49gjkf0d
Introduction to Dividend Distribution Tax (DDT)

Prior to 1st June 1997, companies used to pay dividend to their shareholders after withholding tax at prescribed rates. This was the “classic” withholding tax where shareholders were required to include dividend received as part of their income. They were allowed to use tax withheld by the company against tax payable on their own income. Collection of tax from individual shareholders in this manner was cumbersome and involved a lot of paper work. In case of levy of tax on individual shareholders, tax rate varied depending on class of shareholders. For example, corporate shareholders and shareholders in high income group paid tax at a higher rate, whereas shareholders in low income group paid tax at a lower rate or did not pay any tax at all. Also, certain shareholders may not comply with tax law in spirit, resulting in a loss of revenue to the government.

The government realised that it may be easier and faster to collect tax at a single point, i.e. from the company. It, therefore, introduced the concept of Dividend Distribution Tax (DDT). Under DDT, each company distributing dividend is required to pay DDT at the stated rate (currently 15% basic) to the government. Consequently, dividend income has been made tax free in the hands of the shareholders.

DDT paid by the company in this manner, is treated as the final payment of tax in respect of dividend and no further credit, therefore, can be claimed either by the company or by the recipient of the dividend. However, DDT is not required to be paid by the ultimate parent on distribution of profits arising from dividend income earned by it from its subsidiaries (section 115-O). Such exemption is not available for dividend income earned from investment in associates/joint ventures or other companies. Also, no exemption is available to a parent which is a subsidiary of another company.

DDT is applicable irrespective of whether dividend is paid out of retained earnings or from current income. DDT is payable even if no income-tax is payable on the total income; for example, a company that is exempt from tax in respect of its entire income still has to pay DDT, or a company pays DDT even if distribution was out of capital; though those instances may be rare.

Accounting for DDT under Indian GAAP in standalone financial statements

The accounting for DDT under Indian GAAP is prescribed by the “Guidance Note on Accounting for Corporate Dividend Tax”. As per this Guidance Note, DDT is presented separately in the P&L, below the line. This guidance was provided prior to revised Schedule VI. Under revised Schedule VI, DDT is adjusted directly in Reserves & Surplus, under the caption P&L Surplus. The guidance note justifies the presentation of DDT below the line as follows – “The liability in respect of DDT arises only if the profits are distributed as dividends, whereas the normal income-tax liability arises on the earnings of the taxable profits. Since DDT liability relates to distribution of profits as dividends which are disclosed below the line, it is appropriate that the liability in respect of DDT should also be disclosed below the line as a separate item. It is felt that such a disclosure would give a proper picture regarding payments involved with reference to dividends.”

Accounting for DDT under IFRS in stand alone financial statements

It is highly debatable under IFRS, whether DDT in the standalone financial statements is a below the line or above the line adjustment. In other words, is DDT an income tax charge to be debited to P&L or is it a transaction cost of distributing dividend to shareholders, and hence, is a P&L appropriation or Reserves & Surplus adjustment.

The argument supporting a P&L charge under IFRS is as follows:

1 Paragraph 52A and 52B of IAS 12 Income Taxes clearly treats DDT as an additional income tax to be charged to the P&L A/c.

52A – In some jurisdictions, income taxes are payable at a higher or lower rate, if part or all of the net profit or retained earnings is paid out as a dividend to shareholders of the entity. In some other jurisdictions, income taxes may be refundable or payable if part or all of the net profit or retained earnings is paid out as a dividend to shareholders of the entity. In these circumstances, current and deferred tax assets and liabilities are measured at the tax rate applicable to undistributed profits.

52B – In the circumstances described in paragraph 52A, the income tax consequences of dividends are recognised when a liability to pay the dividend is recognised. The income tax consequences of dividends are more directly linked to past transactions or events than to distributions to owners. Therefore, the income tax consequences of dividends are recognised in profit or loss for the period as required by paragraph 58, except to the extent that the income tax consequences of dividends arise from the circumstances described in paragraph 58(a) and (b).

2 Paragraph 65A of IAS 12 states as follows – “When an entity pays dividends to its shareholders, it may be required to pay a portion of the dividends to taxation authorities on behalf of shareholders. In many jurisdictions, this amount is referred to as a withholding tax. Such an amount paid or payable to taxation authorities is charged to equity as a part of the dividends.” Some may argue that DDT is not paid on behalf of the shareholders, because they do not get any credit for it. The shareholders do not get the credit for the tax paid by the entity on dividend distribution. The obligation to pay tax is on the entity and not on the recipient. Further, there is no principalagency relationship between the paying entity and the recipient. In other words, the tax is on the entity and on the profits made by the entity.

The arguments supporting a below the line adjustment (also referred to as equity or P&L appropriation adjustment) are as follows:

1 IFRIC at its May 2009 meeting, considered an issue relating to classification of tonnage taxes. The IFRIC was of the view that IAS 12 applies to income taxes, which are defined as taxes based on taxable profit. Taking a cue from the IFRIC conclusion, it can be argued that DDT is not an income tax scoped in IAS 12. Firstly, a company may not have taxable profit or it may have incurred tax losses. If such a company declares dividend, it needs to pay DDT on dividend declared. This indicates DDT has nothing to do with the existence of taxable profits. Secondly, DDT was introduced in India, without a corresponding reduction in the applicable corporate tax rate. Thus, DDT has no interaction with other tax affairs of the company. Lastly, the government’s objective for introduction of DDT was not to levy differential tax on profits distributed by a company. Rather, its intention is to make tax collection process on dividends more efficient. DDT is payable only if dividends are distributed to shareholders and its introduction was coupled with abolition of tax payable on dividend. Thus, DDT is not in the nature of an income tax expense under IAS 12.

2 As per The Conceptual Framework for Financial Reporting, “expenses” do not include decreases in equity relating to distributions to equity participants. DDT liability arises only on distribution of dividend to shareholders. Thus it is in the nature of transaction cost directly related to transactions with shareholders in their capacity as shareholders and should be charged directly to equity.

3    Support for treating DDT as an equity adjustment can also be found in paragraph 109 of IAS 1 reproduced here – “Changes in an entity’s equity between the beginning and the end of the reporting period reflect the increase or decrease in its net assets during the period. Except for changes resulting from transactions with owners in their capacity as owners (such as equity contributions, reacquisitions of the entity’s own equity instruments and dividends) and transaction costs directly related to such transactions, the overall change in equity during a period represents the total amount of income and expense, including gains and losses, generated by the entity’s activities during that period.”

4    Support for treating DDT as an equity adjustment can also be found in paragraph 35 of IAS 32 reproduced here – “Interest, dividends, losses and gains relating to a financial instrument or a component that is a financial liability, shall be recognised as income or expense in profit or loss. Distributions to holders of an equity instrument shall be debited by the entity directly to equity, net of any related income tax benefit. Transaction costs of an equity transaction shall be accounted for as a deduction from equity, net of any related income tax benefit.” It may be noted that this paragraph has now been amended to remove the reference to income-tax; and consequently to bring income-tax purely in the scope of IAS 12 only.

Although DDT is paid by the company, the economic substance is similar to the company withholding the tax and paying it on behalf of the shareholders. The shareholder has the entire dividend income exempt from tax, to reduce the administrative effort to track the flow from the company to the shareholder. In other words, DDT in substance is a type of with-holding tax borne by the shareholder that should be accounted as a deduction from equity.

Almost all companies in India that prepare IFRS financial statements treat DDT as an equity adjustment rather than as an income-tax charge.

Accounting for DDT in the consolidated financial statements (CFS) under IFRS & Indian GAAP

There is an interesting but very significant difference when it comes to presentation of DDT at the CFS level under IFRS. Consider an example, where a group comprises of a parent, a 100% subsidiary and the parents investment in a joint venture. The joint venture pays dividend to the parent and the corresponding DDT is paid to the government.

In the CFS, the group would account for its proportionate share of the DDT (paid by the joint venture) as an income -tax charge in the P&L account (and not as a P&L appropriation or equity adjustment). The reason for this treatment is that it is a cost of moving cash from one entity to another in a group. In the standalone accounts of the joint venture, when the dividends are paid to the ultimate shareholder (the parent company in this case) from the perspective of the joint venture, the DDT is reflected as an equity adjustment, and one of the arguments for doing so was that in substance, it is tax paid on behalf of shareholders. In the CFS, even if the DDT paid by the joint venture was on behalf of the parent, the parent does not get any tax credit for the same. In other words, at the group (CFS) level, there is ultimately a tax outflow, for which no tax credit is available. Hence, the same is charged to the P&L account as an income tax charge. In India, almost all companies preparing IFRS CFS, adopt this approach. However, strangely, this approach is not followed by most companies in the CFS prepared under Indian GAAP. This is perhaps done erroneously and due to lack of understanding of the standards, which needs to be rectified by appropriate intervention from the Institute of Chartered Accountants of India.

GAPS in GAAP — Account ing for Government Grant

fiogf49gjkf0d
Government Grants are common in India and therefore accounting for Government Grant could have a significant impact on financial statements. Firstly, whether there is a grant or not; and if there is a grant whether the same is a fixed asset-related grant, revenue grant or promoters contribution will have to be decided. If the grant is a revenue grant, then its immediate impact is recorded in the P&L account, if the grant is a fixed asset grant, the grant income is released systematically to the P&L account in proportion to the depreciation on the related fixed asset. Alternatively, the grant is reduced from the amount of fixed asset capitalised, which will have the same P&L effect. Government grant in the nature of promoter’s contribution is treated as equivalent of shareholders fund and credited to the capital reserve. Needless, to say, the accounting will not only have a significant impact on the financial statements, but will also have a significant incometax impact, including MAT computation. Therefore the manner in which the government grant is accounted for becomes critical.

 In this article the author discusses an EAC opinion on the issue of whether a sales tax exemption under a scheme of the government is a grant or not. This article does not discuss the issue on the nature of the grant, whether fixed asset-related or revenue grant or promoters contribution. The issue of whether sales tax exemption scheme is a grant came to the Expert Advisory Committee (EAC) of the ICAI for an opinion (EAO-VOL-20-05). In the said fact pattern, the company was entitled to sales tax exemption over a period of three years, subject to an upper monetary limit. The upper limit was computed based on the additional investment in plant, machinery and building required for expansion. The EAC considered the definition of government grant in AS-12 Accounting for Government Grants.

As per paragraph 3.2 ‘government grant’ is defined as “Government grants are assistance by government in cash or kind to an enterprise for past or future compliance with certain conditions. They exclude those forms of government assistance which cannot reasonably have a value placed upon them and transactions with government, which cannot be distinguished from the normal trading transactions of the enterprise”. The EAC felt that sales tax exemption is not assistance in cash or kind and is therefore not a government grant within the meaning of this term under AS-12.

 As such AS-12 is not applicable to sales tax exemption. However, there was no further elaboration on this point. The EAC further noted the definition of Revenue in AS-9 Revenue Recognition and was of the view that the entire sales proceed of the company constitutes revenue. It is immaterial whether the sale proceeds result from sales at normal prices or at higher than normal prices that the unit is able to charge due to sales tax exemption.

 In the author’s view, sales tax exemption is a government grant for the following reasons:

(1) It is a sacrifice by the government for achieving a particular social objective (e.g., dispersion of industry). The upper limit on the grant is clearly quantified. It may not be possible to quantify the sales tax exemption for the entire period of grant upfront; nonetheless, it is possible to quantify the amount of exemption included in each sales transaction. The grant is provided subject to fulfilment of certain conditions.

(2) The manner in which a grant is received does not affect the accounting method to be adopted in regard to the grant. Thus a grant is accounted for in the same manner, whether it is received in cash or as a reduction of a liability to the government.

(3) Government grants exclude assistance provided by the government which cannot reasonably have a value placed upon them and transactions with government which cannot be distinguished from the normal trading transactions of the entity. Examples of these assistance are free technical or marketing advice and the provision of guarantees, etc. Sales tax exemption is a scheme granted by the government, subject to fulfilment of conditions relating to investment and operation in underdeveloped areas. Sales tax foregone by the government is in substance a transfer of resources by the government to the company.

In accordance with the EAC opinion, the grant will be included in the revenue amount. Going by the author’s view, the grant would be included in other income if it is concluded that it is a revenue-related grant. If the grant is concluded to be a fixed assetrelated grant it would be presented as deferred income and released over time in proportion to the depreciation of the relevant asset. Alternatively it would be reduced from the fixed asset, which would have the same impact.

As can be seen the accounting and presentation of the grant will not only have a significant impact on the financial statements, but also on the tax and MAT computation. This is therefore an issue, the ICAI would need to reconsider.

levitra

GAPs in GAP — Foreign Exchange Differences — Capitalisation/Amortisation

fiogf49gjkf0d
The Central Government has notified two amendments dated 29 December 2011 to AS-11 The Effects of Changes in Foreign Exchange Rates. Given below is a brief overview of these two amendments, practical issues arising thereon and the author’s perspective.

Overview of the first amendment The first amendment extends the sunset date for the use of option given in paragraph 46 of AS-11 whereby a company can opt to capitalise/amortise exchange difference arising on longterm foreign currency monetary items. It substitutes the words ‘in respect of accounting period commencing on or after 7 December 2006 and ending on or before 31 March 2012,’ in paragraph 46, by the words ‘in respect of accounting periods commencing on or after 7 December 2006 and ending on or before 31 March 2020.’

Overview of the second amendment The second Notification inserts a new paragraph, viz., paragraph 46A, in AS-11. This paragraph deals with accounting for both companies which had exercised option given in paragraph 46 of AS-11 as well as any other company which had not exercised that option. According to this paragraph, a company may choose to adopt the following treatment in respect of accounting periods commencing on or after 1 April 2011:

(i) Foreign exchange differences arising on longterm foreign currency monetary items related to acquisition of a fixed asset are capitalised and depreciated over the remaining useful life of the asset.

(ii) Foreign exchange differences arising on other long-term foreign currency monetary items are accumulated in the ‘Foreign Currency Monetary Item Translation Difference Account’ and amortised over the remaining life of the concerned monetary item.

The option once elected is irrevocable. Like paragraph 46, paragraph 46A also does not apply to exchange differences arising on long-term foreign currency monetary items that in substance form part of a company’s net investment in non-integral foreign operation.

Main issues There are numerous questions on the interplay of these two amendments and the manner in which they would work in consonance with each other. Lets us understand what is clear and what is confusing.

What is clear?
(1) Those companies that were hitherto amortising/ capitalising exchange differences can continue to do so till 2020.

(2) Those companies that were hitherto not amortising/capitalising exchange differences can avail of the new option in paragraph 46A. Such an option is available on a prospective basis for the remaining life of the loan and is not restricted to 2020.

What is confusing?
(1) Those companies that were hitherto amortising/capitalising exchange differences can continue to do so till 2020 under paragraph 46. The amortisation was done restricting the amortisation period to 2012. If the company wishes to continue with paragraph 46, the amortisation period is extended because of the extension from 2012 to 2020. It is not clear whether the amortisation on the loan is calculated on a retrospective basis or on a prospective basis over the balance amortisation period.

(2) Can a company, which had earlier exercised the option given in paragraph 46, now opt out of that exemption on the grounds that it chose the option because it was restricted to 31-3-2011 and not 31- 3-2020? Hence, can it start recognising exchange differences on foreign currency monetary items, including long-term items, immediately in profit or loss?

(3) It is not clear if companies that were amortising/ capitalising exchange differences under paragraph 46 can switch over to paragraph 46A. How the two paragraphs (46 & 46A) will work in consonance with each other? Let us assume that a company has taken a foreign currency loan, not related to acquisition of fixed asset, whose term extends till 31 March 2025. Will the company amortise exchange differences arising on such loan till 31 March 2020 or till 31 March 2025? The manner in which paragraph 46A is drafted appears to allow both existing option users and new option users to capitalise/amortise exchange differences on a prospective basis. If that is true, what is the relevance of paragraph 46?

(4) In paragraph 46, the sunset date has been used at two places: one for the date range during which the option given can be used and the second to specify the period up to which the balance in the ‘Foreign Currency Monetary Item Translation Difference Account’ needs to be amortised. The Notification dated 29 December 2011 has extended the sunset date to 31 March 2020 at the first place. However, a similar change has not been made with regard to the second date. The strict legal and technical interpretation of the paragraph suggests that a company can continue using the option given in paragraph 46 till accounting periods ending on or before 31 March 2020. However, there cannot be any balance in the ‘Foreign Currency Monetary Item Translation Difference Account’, created for exchange differences arising on long-term monetary items not related to acquisition of a depreciable capital asset, post 31 March 2011. In practical terms, this means that after 31 March 2011, a company will be able to use the option given in paragraph 46 only for capitalisation of exchange differences arising on long-term monetary item related to acquisition of a depreciable asset. Other exchange differences will be immediately recognised in the P&L Account. Whilst this may be the strict legal interpretation of the paragraph, certain companies may question whether it really reflects the intention of the regulator. They may also argue that the amendment intends to extend the option given in its entirety. Hence, they can also amortise any balance in the ‘Foreign Currency Monetary Item Translation Difference Account’ till 31 March 2020. Many companies are taking this approach.

The MCA or the Institute of Chartered Accountants of India, will need to clarify the above issues.

levitra

Y. H. Malegam Report on MFI Sector — A summary

fiogf49gjkf0d
Microfinance has been always seen as an economic development tool for the downtrodden and poorest section of society. In its social objective, it is one of the most useful tools to battle poverty and give an equal chance to those who can contribute to the economy, but need help. In its simplest sense, it helps a financially backward person with no or little collateral to set up his own business by providing finance at convenient rates and repayment tenure. Over time it had moved on to many more services for financial inclusion and literacy.

For this reason, the Microfinance sector was in high regard. The Microfinance sector has seen an upheaval in recent times. However, since the advent of new Micro Finance Institutions (MFIs) with a more profit-linked and lesser social incentive, the sector has seen changes. The sector which was in limelight for its rapid growth and success in financial inclusion was suddenly seen in a bad light because of its alleged coercive practices. These practices got highlighted with suicides by certain borrowers in Andhra Pradesh, the state that has the largest chunk of MFIs. Andhra Pradesh passed an Ordinance bill and followed it up with a State Act to regulate the working of these MFIs. The Reserve Bank of India also set up a Committee under the chairmanship of Mr. Y. H. Malegam to study the issues and concerns in the Micro-finance sector. This Committee tabled its report on the 19th January 2011. This article summarises the main points coming out from this Report.

Introduction: The Committee has come out with a detailed report on the Microfinance sector — the reasons for the current crisis and possible redressal provisions. The Committee had the following objectives:

(i) To review the definition of ‘micro-finance’ and ‘MFIs’;
(ii) To examine the alleged malpractices conducted by these MFIs especially with respect to interest rates and means of recovery;
(iii) To specify the scope of regulation by RBI of these MFIs and suggest a proper regulatory framework;
(iv) To examine the prevalent money-lending legislation at the state level and other relevant laws;
(v) To analyse what role the associations and bodies of MFIs can play in enhancing transparency of MFIs;
(vi) To suggest a redressal machinery;
(vii) To examine the conditions for allowing priority- sector lending to MFIs.

The sub-Committee had confined itself to only the lending aspect of MFIs and not the other services like insurance, money transfers, etc. Further, the report commented on the unique characteristics of loans given by this sector, namely, that the borrowers are low-income groups, amounts are small, there is no collateral, the tenure is short and repayments are frequent.

The main players in the Microfinance sector are the Self-Help Groups (SHG) linked with the banks and Joint Liability Groups (JLG) linked with NBFCs. Both these types of groups are created by individuals who create savings, act as supporters as well as put peer pressure on each other in the group for effective utilisation of loans given by banks.

The need for regulation: Most of the NBFCs were non-profit organisations which had started the work with a purely social objective. However, over time some of these turned into for profit NBFCs. This attracted purely business-oriented entities to enter into the sector as they saw that there was a profit to be made from these activities. Such NBFCs also attracted a lot of private equity.

The Committee brings out the fact that though these NBFCs were handling a large amount of loan portfolio, no specific regulations were present. The Committee in its report has therefore stressed on the need for regulation of such NBFCs as a separate category of NBFCs operating in the MFI sector. The main reasons for this suggestion were that the borrowers were a particularly vulnerable section of society; the NBFCs compete against both the established SHG-Bank linkage programme and other NBFCs; credit to the MFI sector is important for financial inclusion; and banks have a significant exposure to loans given to such NBFCs.

For all the above reasons, the Committee has suggested a creation of a separate category for such NBFCs to be designated as ‘NBFC-MFI’ with a specific definition:

“A company (other than a company licensed u/s.25 of the Companies Act, 1956) which provides financial services predominantly to low-income borrowers with loans of small amounts, for short terms, on unsecured basis, mainly for income-generating activities, with repayment schedules which are more frequent than those normally stipulated by commercial banks and which further conforms to the regulations specified in that behalf.”

Conditions to be met: The Committee has also specified quite a few conditions which an NBFC has to meet for it to be classified as a ‘NBFC-MFI’. These conditions have been put in place after the Committee went through certain statistics and ground realities prevalent in this sector. The conditions are:

(i) 90% of the assets of an NBFC-MFI should be in the form of loans to the Microfinance sector.
(ii) These loans are to be given to a borrower whose annual household income does not exceed Rs.50,000.
(iii) The amount of loan and total outstanding of the borrower should not exceed Rs.25,000.
(iv) The tenure of the loan should be more than 12 months in case of loans lesser than Rs.15,000 and more than 24 months other cases.
(v) There should be no penalty on the borrower for pre-payment of these loans.
(vi) The loan is to be without collateral.
(vii) The total amount of loans given for non-income generating activities should not exceed 25%.
(viii) The repayment schedule would be at the choice of the borrower.
(ix) Other services provided by the MFIs should be regulated.
However, fulfilling all these conditions would mean a change in the existing business model of the MFIs. Therefore, these conditions are the main bone of contention for existing MFIs, who find them to be quite draconian.

Alleviation of other main concerns: The above conditions would essentially regulate the kind of loans given by such MFIs and the types of incomes earned by them. However, the main areas of concern with respect to MFIs are not yet addressed. Therefore the Committee has listed down each of these areas and suggested redressal provisions:

Pricing of interest: The very high rates of interest charged by certain MFIs were the main reason for the current upheaval. Therefore, the Committee has noted that interest rates should tread a fine balance between affordability of the clients and sustainability for the MFIs. Looking at the vulnerability of the borrowers, the Committee felt it necessary to put down a controlling rate of interest to be charged by such MFIs. However, instead of a fixed rate, the Committee has suggested for a margin cap which would regulate the difference in the cost of funds for the MFI and the rate of interest charged to the borrower. For deciding the cap, the Committee has gone into the financials of certain large and small MFIs and analysed several parameters and costs. It has suggested a margin cap of 10% for MFIs with a loan portfolio exceeding Rs.100 crores and 12% for those within. This cap would be applicable at an aggregate level and not for individual loans. The MFI would be free to decide the individual loan rate within an overall limit of 24%.

Transparency:


The Committee noticed that MFIs, apart from a base interest charge, also levy a variety of other charges in the form of an upfront registration or enrolment fee, loan protection fee, etc. The Committee has suggested that MFIs should only charge an insurance premium and an upfront fee not exceeding 1% of the gross loan amount apart from the base interest.
Further, it has suggested that for effective transparency, every borrower should be presented with a loan card which shows the effective rate of interest and other terms to the loan. The effective rate of interest should also be prominently displayed in all the offices, literature and website of the MFI. It has also denied charging of any upfront security deposit and standardised loan agreements.

Ghost borrowers:

Because of competition amongst MFIs, a deluge of loans are available to the borrower. This results in multiple lending and over-borrowing. This is exacerbated by the fact that loans disbursed have inadequate moratorium period before re-payment starts. Therefore, the repayment would start before the income is generated. This would prompt the borrower to either go in for additional borrowing, or repay from the loan amount itself. Further, MFIs use existing SHGs to reduce transaction costs. Thus the borrowers are tempted to take additional loans.

To alleviate these concerns the Committee has proposed that MFIs should only lend to group members; the borrower must not be a member of another group; not more than two MFIs should lend to the same borrower; and there must be a minimum period of moratorium. Where loans are borrowed in violation of these conditions, recovery of the loan should be deferred till all existing loans are repaid.

To reduce the problem of ghost borrowers, the Committee further recommends that all sanctioning and disbursement of loans should be done only at a central location under close supervision.

Another important tool necessary in the prevention of multiple lending is the availability of information of outstanding loans of an existing borrower. Therefore, a database to capture all outstanding loans as also the composition of existing SHGs and JLGs is recommended.

Coercive recovery practices:

The Committee has noticed the reports made of coercive methods exercised by the MFIs, their agents or employees for recovery of loans. It maintains that the main reasons for use of such coercive methods are linked with the issues of multiple lending, uncontrollable growth and employment of recovery agents.

The Committee has proposed several measures to resolve this issue:

   i.  Primary responsibility that coercive methods are not used should rest with the MFI. In case of default, the MFI should be charged with severe penalties.

    ii. The regulator must monitor whether the MFIs have a proper code of conduct and system for training of field staff. The MFI should have a proper Grievance Redressal Procedure.

   iii. Filed staff should be allowed to make recoveries only at a group level at a central place to be designated.

    iv. An appropriate mechanism to introduce independent Ombudsmen should be examined by RBI.

Apart from the above, the Committee has recommended that the regulator should publish a Client Protection Code for MFIs and mandate its acceptance and observance not only by the MFIs themselves, but also by the credit providing banks and financial institutions. This Code should incor-porate the relevant provisions of the Fair Practices Guidelines prescribed by the RBI for NBFCs.

Improving efficiency:

The Committee has gone beyond recommending measures to alleviate only the main concerns of the MFI sector. It has also suggested some steps for improving the overall efficiency of the MFIs.

The key areas highlighted to improvement in efficiency are operating systems, documentation and procedures, training and corporate governance.

To this end, it has called for increased investment by MFIs in information technology to achieve bet-ter control, simplify procedures and reduce costs. Further, it has suggested inculcation of profes-sional inputs in the formation of SHGs and JLGs, imparting of skill development and training, and in handholding of the group after it is formed.

To decrease transaction costs by achieving better economies of scale and to improve control it was felt by the Committee that MFIs should obtain optimal size of operation. For this if consolidation in the sector may be inevitable.

On the basis of a capital adequacy ratio of 15% on a basic investment portfolio of Rs. 100 crores, the Committee has suggested for a minimum net worth of Rs.15 crores.

The Committee has underscored the importance of alleviation of the poor along with reasonable profits to investors in the MFI sector. These twin objectives call for a fine balance and therefore all MFIs should have a good system of corporate governance.

The Committee has recommended inclusion of independent board members; monitoring by the board of organisational level policies; and relevant disclosures in the financial statements.

The Committee has also recognised the fact that MFIs have a very large exposure to the banking system. More than 75% of their funds are sourced from banks. Therefore, adequate safeguards must be in place to maintain solvency.

The Committee has recommended appropriate prudential norms which should be different from other NBFCs looking at the unique nature of loans disbursed by MFIs. The Committee has suggested specific rates for provisioning of outstanding loans. Further, it has recommended maintenance of a higher capital adequacy ratio of 15% as compared to the existing 12% considering the high-gearing and high rate of growth.

It has been appreciated that interest rates can be lowered only if greater competition both from within the MFIs and without from other agencies should be encouraged. To this end, the Committee has recommended that bank lending to this sector should be significantly increased.

Currently all loans to MFIs are considered as prior-ity sector lending. As there is no control on end use and there is significant diversion of funds, it had been suggested to the Committee that MFIs should not enjoy the priority sector status.

However, the Committee has pointed out in its report that removal of this status may not be required if other recommendations made by it are implemented. In fact, competition within banks for meeting targets for lending to priority sector could reduce interest rates. But, those MFIs which do not comply with the proposed regulations should be denied the priority sector lending status.

The Committee has noted that in addition to direct borrowing the MFIs had assigned or securitised sig-nificant portions of the loan portfolio with banks, mutual funds and others. It has asked for full disclosure of such assignments and securitisations to be made in the financial statements of MFIs. Further, for the calculation of capital adequacy, wherever the assignment or securitisation is with recourse, full value should be considered as risk-based assets; and where the same are without re-course, value of credit enhancement given should be deducted from the net-owned funds. Banks should also ensure, before acquiring assigned or securitised loans, that loans have been made by the MFIs in accordance with the regulations.

The Committee mentions that a widening of the funding base for MFIs is needed. This is because there is a huge demand for MFIs. However, non-profit entities could not meet this demand. When for profit entities emerged, venture capital funds were not allowed to invest in MFIs and private equity rushed in. This has resulted in demand for higher profits with consequent higher interest rates and other areas of concern.

Therefore, the Committee has recommended establishment of a ‘Domestic Social Capital Fund’ targeted towards social investors who are willing to earn lesser returns of around 10 to 12%. This fund would invest in MFIs satisfying the social performance norms laid down by the fund.

For all the above measures towards alleviation of the areas of concern and improving efficiency, the Committee has noted that success would depend on the extent of compliance. To this end, it has suggested monitoring of compliance with the regulations will have to be borne by four agencies.

The primary responsibility would rest with the MFI itself and the management should be penalised in the event of non-compliance. The next level of monitoring would be by the industry associations which would prescribe penalties for non-compliance with their Code of Conduct. Banks can also play part with surveillance through their branches. The Committee has called on the RBI for considerably enhancing its existing supervisory organisation dealing with such NBFCs. It should also have the power to remove from office the CEO and/or director in the event of persistent violation of the regulations.

The Committee has also provided for certain suggested reliefs for MFIs.

Several states have money-lending Acts which are several decades old. These Acts do not specifically exempt NBFCs unlike banks and cooperatives. These NBFCs are already regulated by the RBI. The Committee has therefore recommended for exemption of these MFIs from the provisions of the money-lending acts.

The Central Government has drafted a ‘Micro Finance (Development and Regulation) Bill, 2010’ which will apply to all microfinance organisations except for banks, co- operatives, etc. The Committee has suggested some changes in the bill for exemption of smaller entities, functioning of NABARD as a regulator and market player, and disallowance of business of providing thrift services by MFIs.

As mentioned in the beginning, the Andhra Pradesh Government has enacted a specific legislation to regulate the MFIs operating with the state. The Committee has expressed that as most of the conditions set by this Act are already recommended by the Committee, a separate Act may not be needed.

Finally, the Committee has recommended that 1st April 2011 should be kept as the cut-off date for implementation of their recommendations. They have insisted that the recommendation as to the rate of interest should in any case be made effective to all loans given by MFIs after 31st March 2011. Certain relaxation as to other arrangements can be given by RBI, especially where MFIs may have to form separate entities confined to only microfinance activities.

Conclusion:

As can be seen, the Committee has gone in-depth on the issues faced by the Microfinance sector and has called for far-reaching changes. These changes, if accepted by the RBI, would materially alter the operation of MFIs in India. As would be expected, MFIs have strongly criticised the provisions suggested by the Committee. The specification of maximum interest rates that can be charged has irked the MFIs in particular. Mr. Malegam has mentioned in interviews that a limit is necessary. What this limit should be, can be decided by the RBI. The decision on these recommendations now lies with the RBI. As per news reports, the RBI is expected to give its view on the report by end of April 2011.

Has Indian GAAP Outlived its Utility?

fiogf49gjkf0d
With no sight of International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS) being implemented in India, we are back to looking at whether Indian GAAP fulfills investors and other stakeholder expectations of providing reliable financial information.

Bad standards result in bad accounting
Consider an arrangement where there is an agreement between two parties to jointly share control. The board of directors has equal representation of directors from both parties. Both parties own 50% shares each. Under Indian GAAP, joint control would result in proportionate consolidation. However, it is possible for both parties to achieve full consolidation. One party can do this by adding one more director on the board as its nominee, and the other party can do this by buying one additional share, but with no change in the joint sharing of the control. Therefore, though the arrangement effectively is unchanged; a small structuring can provide a vastly different accounting result.

Bad standards also prevent good accounting
A company takes a US$ loan from a bank which is to be repaid in thirty six equal installments in the next three years. The company does not stand exposed to exchange rate volatility, as the loan installments will be paid out of highly probable and matching future $ revenues. Typically, the hedging standard would allow the company to use hedge accounting for natural hedges and thereby avoid volatility in the income statement because of exchange rate swings. Unfortunately, under Indian GAAP, hedge accounting is not permitted when they contradict a standard that is notified under the Companies Act. Under Indian GAAP, such exchange gains and losses are recognised in the income statement creating an unnecessary volatility in the income statement, though the company has a 100% natural hedge.

Too many cooks spoil the broth
Consider this – a listed parent entity grants stock option to the employees of its subsidiary. Accounting for stock options is covered under both SEBI’s Guidelines and ICAI’s Guidance Note. ICAI’s guidance note requires the subsidiary company to recognise the expense on share based options irrespective of whether the subsidiary has any settlement obligation towards the parent. As per SEBI Guidelines applicable to listed entities, the parent records the compensation cost. These conflicting requirements create confusion and provide arbitrage to entities, and results in inconsistent application of the principles.

A duck will quack even if you call it a cat
Yes, a duck is a duck. Consider this. Many loans with a defined term and a guaranteed interest rate are structured as preference capital issued under the Companies Act, so that they are classified as share capital under the Indian GAAP. This vitiates the true debt equity ratio of the company. Further, the interest payments are treated as dividends to be appropriated from the P&L account rather than a charge to the P&L account. This is possible because Indian GAAP takes a view that when preparing financial statements, the Companies Act requirements will override accounting requirement of ‘substance over form’. The author believes that accounting should reflect the substance of a transaction. This should not be seen as overriding the legislation, which has been drafted for a different purpose and objective.

Remember the world is changing rapidly
Though the world has changed and is changing rapidly, Indian GAAP remains in the medieval ages. Consider this. Though financial instruments are rampant, the accounting standards relating to financial instruments are not yet notified under the Companies Act. As a result, there has been a lot of confusion, inconsistency and misuse of accounting principles. Under Indian GAAP, a company can structure a loan received from a bank on the pledge of the shares of its subsidiary as a sale of shares, with a right to buy back the same in the future at an agreed price. Typically, this is a financing transaction, but under Indian GAAP one could recognise the sale of the investment and recognise the buy back of the investment in the future. This practice could lead to recognising profit on sale of the investments, not recognising the loan and the corresponding interest expense on the books and obtaining deconsolidation and consolidation at convenience.

Fitting a square peg in a round hole
Financial statements have many uses, but the real objective of any general purpose framework is to provide investors and capital providers with information that is useful for taking decisions. An investor in an investment property company wants to know the fair value of the investment property portfolio, for decision making. The tax authorities are not concerned with the fair values, as they would typically tax rentals or realised capital gains. Standard setters should draft standards for capital providers. Drafting standards that will meet requirements of both capital providers and tax authorities, is like fitting a square peg in a round hole.

There are many travesties under Indian GAAP. The role of robust accounting standards should not be underestimated, in creating a climate of trust for investment. Only when nations create trust, they can raise capital locally and globally. It’s key to providing energy, food, water, education, employment, health and alleviating poverty. Having a variety of accounting standards across the world creates confusion, encourages errors and facilitates frauds. Having a single set of high standards, like IFRS, creates clarity, enhances confidence in financial statements and results in reduced costs of capital.

levitra

Accounting standards – GAPS in GAP

fiogf49gjkf0d
The pre-revised Schedule VI specifically required proposed dividend to be disclosed under the head ‘Provisions.’ The revised Schedule VI requires separate disclosure of the amount of dividends proposed to be distributed to equity and preference shareholders for the period and the related amount per share. It also requires separate disclosure of the arrears of fixed cumulative dividends on preference shares. Thus, under the revised Schedule VI, dividend proposed needs to be disclosed in the notes. Hence, a question that arises is whether this means that proposed dividend is not required to be provided for when applying the revised Schedule VI?

There are two views on this matter.

View 1 View 1 is based on paragraph 8.8.7.7 of the ‘Guidance Note on the Revised Schedule VI to the Companies Act, 1956’ and paragraph 14 of AS-4 (see below). It states that AS-4 ‘Contingencies and Events Occurring After the Balance Sheet Date’ require that dividends stated to be in respect of the period covered by the Financial Statements, which are proposed or declared by the enterprise after the balance sheet date but before approval of the financial statements, should be adjusted. Keeping this in view and the fact that the Accounting Standards override the revised Schedule VI, companies will have to continue to create a provision for dividends in respect of the period covered by the financial statements and disclose the same as a provision in the balance sheet, unless AS-4 is revised.

Thus as per the Guidance Note a provision for proposed dividend is required, though there is no present obligation at the balance sheet to pay dividends. This is because of the specific requirement of paragraph 14 of AS-4.

View 2 The following two paragraphs deal with proposed dividends under AS-4.

8.5 There are events which, although they take place after the balance sheet date, are sometimes reflected in the financial statements because of statutory requirements or because of their special nature. Such items include the amount of dividend proposed or declared by the enterprise after the balance sheet date in respect of the period covered by the financial statements.

14. Dividends stated to be in respect of the period covered by the financial statements, which are proposed or declared by the enterprise after the balance sheet date but before approval of the financial statements, should be adjusted.

The requirement to provide for proposed dividend established in paragraph 14 should be read along with paragraph 8.5. When read together, some argue that the requirement to provide for proposed dividend exists in AS-4 only because of a statutory requirement (pre-revised Schedule VI). Hence, proposed dividends not required to be provided for under revised Schedule VI, should not be provided for even if paragraph 14 of AS-4 is not withdrawn or amended.

Author’s view The author believes that the requirement to provide for proposed dividend is expressly required under paragraph 14 of AS-4 and hence proposed dividend should be provided for. Nonetheless, view 2 has some merits and reflects the intention of the standard-setters. Thus view 2 may be an acceptable view, subject to clarification by the ICAI. In any case, the ICAI should take immediate steps to amend paragraph 14, to state that proposed dividends are not required to be provided for at the balance sheet date. This will also bring us in line with International Financial Reporting Standards.

levitra

GAPS in GAAP – Borrowing costs – PAra 4(e) of as 16

fiogf49gjkf0d
The Genesis
Paragraph 4(e) of AS-16 Borrowing Costs has caused a lot of agony to Indian entities and is a highly debated and contentious issue, as exchange volatility shows no sign of cooling in India. In this article, we will try and understand the genesis of the problem, the theory of Interest Rate Parity (IRP), global interpretation on 4(e), linkage with paragraph 46 and 46A and analyse issues and provide author’s view on those issues. This article deliberately avoids the issue of derivatives which are used as hedges against the foreign currency (FC) borrowings, because it would have made the article unduly long and complex.

AS 16 requires borrowing costs incurred on construction of qualifying assets to be capitalised. Paragraph 4 of AS 16 contains an inclusive list of what borrowing costs may include. Sub-clause (e) of Paragraph 4 states: “exchange differences arising from foreign currency borrowings to the extent that they are regarded as an adjustment to interest costs”. This requirement is explained in the Standard with the help of an illustration which is also reproduced below.

Illustration in AS-16 on exchange differences that are regarded as an adjustment to interest cost

XYZ Ltd. has taken a loan of $ 10,000 on 1st April, 20X3, for a specific project at an interest rate of 5% p.a., payable annually. On 1st April, 20X3, the exchange rate between the currencies was Rs. 45 per $. The exchange rate, as at 31st March, 20X4, is Rs 48 per $. The corresponding amount could have been borrowed by XYZ Ltd. in local currency at an interest rate of 11 % per annum as on 1st April, 20X3.

The following computation would be made, to determine the amount of borrowing costs for the purposes of paragraph 4(e) of AS 16:

i. Interest for the period = $ 10,000 × 5% × Rs. 48 $= Rs. 24,000.
ii. Increase in the liability towards the principal amount = $ 10,000 × (48-45) = Rs. 30,000.
iii. Interest that would have resulted if the loan was taken in Indian currency = $ 10000 × 45 × 11% = Rs. 49,500
iv. Difference between interest on local currency borrowing and foreign currency borrowing = Rs. 49,500 – Rs. 24,000 = Rs. 25,500

Therefore, out of Rs. 30,000 increase in the liability towards principal amount, only Rs. 25,500 will be considered as the borrowing cost. Thus, total borrowing cost would be Rs. 49,500 being the aggregate of interest of Rs. 24,000 on foreign currency borrowings [covered by paragraph 4(a) of AS 16] plus the exchange difference to the extent of difference between interest on local currency borrowing and interest on foreign currency borrowing of Rs. 25,500. Thus, Rs.49,500 would be considered as the borrowing cost to be accounted for as per AS 16 and the remaining Rs. 4,500 would be considered as the exchange difference to be accounted for as per Accounting Standard (AS) 11, The Effects of Changes in Foreign Exchange Rates.

In the above example, if the interest rate on local currency borrowings is assumed to be 13% instead of 11%, the entire exchange difference of Rs. 30,000 would be considered as borrowing costs, since in that case the difference between the interest on local currency borrowings and foreign currency borrowings [i.e., Rs. 34,500 (Rs. 58,500 – Rs. 24,000)] is more than the exchange difference of Rs. 30,000. Therefore, in such a case, the total borrowing cost would be Rs. 54,000 (Rs. 24,000 + Rs. 30,000) which would be accounted for under AS 16 and there would be no exchange difference to be accounted for under AS 11.

Author’s Note: As can be seen, the illustration is oversimplified and does not provide adequate guidance; for example, there is no guidance with respect to:

1. Whether an entity has a choice to assess the interest rate differential when the loan is drawn or at each reporting date? From the illustration, it appears that the interest rate differential is based on the date when the loan is drawn and not at each reporting date.
2. How is interest rate differential determined in the case of a floating rate loan?
3. Are exchange gains required to be considered as an adjustment to borrowing costs?
4. How to deal with exchange gains that follow a period of exchange losses? In such cases, should the exchange gains be treated as an adjustment to exchange losses or should it be fully recognised in the P&L?
5. Consider an example, where the interest rate differential at inception of borrowing is Rs. 1,000 and at the end of the reporting period there is exchange gain of Rs. 5,000. In this scenario, the author believes that it would be appropriate to conclude that there is no interest rate differential; rather than considering borrowing cost of Rs. 1,000 and notionally increasing the exchange gain by Rs. 1,000 to Rs. 6,000.

Why is para 4(e) a problem?
The idea of including paragraph 4(e) in AS-16 was a simple one. Indian companies borrowing in $ borrow at a much lower interest rate than borrowing in Indian Rupee. However, correspondingly because of the exchange rate movement, the $ loan liability increases, and results in the savings on account of low $ interest rates, being eroded. In a very simple world, and if IRP theory worked perfectly, then there would be a 100% offset. In other words, it is logical to see the exchange difference, as an interest cost to borrow the funds. Such 4(e) interest costs are allowed to be capitalised if they were incurred on the construction of a qualifying asset. 4(e) interest costs that are not incurred for the purposes of constructing a qualifying asset are to be charged off to the P&L account.

Companies that were constructing a qualifying asset and had borrowed in foreign currency are required to determine the 4(e) component, so that the same can be capitalised in accordance with AS 16 (4(e) component is capitalised only during the period of construction of a qualifying asset). Computing 4(e) was a problem, but was limited to situations where a qualifying asset was being constructed for which a foreign currency borrowing was used. 4(e) is now a much bigger problem, for two additional reasons.

1. AS-11 was amended to include paragraph 46 and 46A, which allowed an option of not charging foreign exchange differences on long term borrowings to the P&L a/c. The exchange differences could be amortised over the loan period, and if related to a loan for acquiring a capital asset, then the same should be capitalised as cost of the capital asset, even after the asset was put to use. The Institute of Chartered Accountants of India issued “Frequently Asked Questions on AS 11 notification – Companies (Accounting Standards) Amendment Rules, 2009 (G.S.R. 225 (E) dt. 31.3.09) issued by Ministry of Corporate Affairs”. In the said guidance, it was clarified that 4(e) interest should not be treated as foreign exchange difference. Consequently, 4(e) component is to be (a) capitalised only during the period of construction of a qualifying asset in accordance with AS-16 (b) charged to the P&L in all other cases.

2. The Ministry of Corporate Affairs issued circular no 25/2012 dated 9th August, 2012 clarifying that paragraph 4(e) of AS-16 shall not apply to a company which is applying paragraph 46A of AS-11. The circular has withdrawn 4(e) with respect to paragraph 46A, but not with respect to paragraph 46 of AS-11. There are a number of questions with respect to the circular. For example, does it have a prospective or retrospective application? Is it a clarification or a substantive amendment? Will 4(e) continue to apply to companies that were in paragraph 46?

3. Revised Schedule VI requires 4(e) component to the extent not capitalised to be separately disclosed in the P&L a/c as part of borrowing costs.

IRP Theory

The IRP theory states that interest rate differentials between two different currencies will be reflected in the premium or discount for the forward exchange rate on the foreign currency if there is no arbitrage. The theory further that states the size of the forward premium or discount on a foreign currency should be equal to the interest rate differentials between the countries in comparison. This is explained with the help of an illustration below.

How well does IRP predict Exchange Rate Movements in India?

Not so well, is the short answer. Menzie Chinn says, “Uncovered interest parity (UIP) has been almost universally rejected in studies of exchange rate movements.” Paul Krugman says, “Like stock prices, exchange rates respond strongly to ‘news’, that is to unexpected economic and political events, and like stock prices, they therefore are very difficult to forecast.”

As per the IRP theory, in countries which have higher interest rates, their currencies should depreciate. If this does not happen, there will be cases for arbitrage for foreign investors till the arbitrage opportunity disappears from the market. The reality is sometimes exactly the opposite; as higher interest rates could actually bring in higher capital inflows further appreciating the currency. In such a scenario, foreign investors earn both higher interest rates and also gain on the appreciating currency.

In reality, predicting currency movement is crystal gazing as it is affected by numerous variables, other than interest rate differential. These variables are discussed below.

Balance of Payments (BOP): BOP play’s a critical role in determining the movement of the currency. It is the aggregate of current account and capital account of a country like an external account of a country with other countries. Current account surplus means exports are more than imports and current account deficit means imports are more than exports. Eventually, import/export prices find equilibrium. Hence, the currency of a current account surplus country should appreciate. Likewise for current account deficit countries, the currency should depreciate. Growing Indian economy has led to widening of current account deficit, as imports of both oil and non-oil have risen. Gold imports have also added to the problem in India. Capital flows also play a crucial role in the BOP situation of India. Currency appreciates when there are huge capital inflows and depreciates when the capital inflows dry up and the current account deficit is also high. During the Lehman crisis, capital flows shrunk sharply from a high of $106.6 billion in 2007-8 to just $6.8 billion in 2008-09 and led to sharp depreciation of the rupee from around Rs. 39.9 per $ to Rs. 51.9 per $.

Inflation: Higher inflation leads to central banks keeping interest rates high, which invites foreign capital on account of interest rate arbitrages. This could lead to further appreciation of the currency. However, one needs to make a distinction between high inflation over a short term versus a long term. If inflation is short-term, foreign investors see inflation as a temporary problem and continue to invest in that economy. If inflation is sticky, it leads to overall worsening of the economy, capital flows and exchange rate. For almost two years now, inflation in India has been very high and persistent, resulting in a highly depreciating rupee. The present situation is different from the situation in 2007-08 when despite high inflation and high interest rates, capital inflows were abundant. This was because markets believed that inflation was not a structural problem.

Fiscal Deficit: Fiscal deficits play a key role in the determination of exchange rates. Higher deficits imply that government might resort to using foreign exchange reserves to fund its deficit. This leads to lowering of the reserves followed by speculation on the currency. If the government does not have adequate reserves, fall in the currency is imminent. In India, higher fiscal deficits have also played a role in shaping expectations over the currency rate. When the fiscal deficits are high, investors become nervous, reducing the capital inflows into the country.

Global economic conditions: In times of high uncertainty as seen lately, most currencies usually depreciate against US Dollar as it is seen as a safe haven currency. The South East Asian crisis and the recent Euro crisis stand evidence to that. Currently, the markets believe that the dollar is safer than the euro, given the economic problems of the euro zone. Global economic conditions have significantly impacted exchange rates in India.

Lack of reforms: This has further made investors negative over the Indian economy and coupled with global uncertainty, has put pressure on the Indian Rupee.

Speculation: There has been a fall of 22.7 % (in value of rupee against dollar) in four months – from Rs. 44.35 in end July 2011 to Rs. 54.4 on 31st December, 2011. Importers, having been lulled into complacency by the rupee’s appreciation earlier, rush to cover their exposures, thus driving up dollar demand. Exporters hold on to their earnings in foreign currency in the hope of a further fall in the rupee.

Measures by RBI : They have also made marginal impact in terms of arresting a downslide on the rupee. However, this is a short term measure.

Hence, even over a longer term, multiple factors determine an exchange rate with each one playing an important role over time. In a calm and stable world, IRP theory may work. Unfortunately, this is never the case. Exchanges rates behave erratically, and are caused by numerous factors other than interest rate differentials. Consequentially, exchange losses may represent more or less matching interest rate differential in a few cases only. In India, experience is that, exchange losses may be far more than the interest rate differential when rupee is sliding down and in other cases, there may be a huge exchange gain in which case, the interest rate differential would have had little or no impact on the exchange rate. Much would depend on when the borrowings took place and the exchange rate movement from thereon till redemption of the loan.

Author Sarbapriya Ray in the paper “Testing the Validity of Uncovered IRP in India” concludes as follows – “One vital potential issue determining the exchange rate is the uncovered interest rate parity (UIP). Uncovered interest parity (UIP) is a typical subject of international finance, a critical building block of most theoretical models, and a miserable empirical failure. Uncovered interest rate parity (UIP) states that the nominal interest rate differential between two countries must be equal to expected change in the exchange rate. In other words, if UIP condition holds, then high yield currencies should be expected to depreciate. The article attempts to test the validity of uncovered interest rate parity based on a theoretical formulation in line with economic theory. Although KPSS test suggests that excess return series are in stationary process, excess return curve shows erratic behaviour during some months of our study period (showing negative trend) which automatically excludes the possibility for the UIP to hold. The UIP regression estimate indicates that there is no statistically significant evidence that suggests the uncovered interest rate parity to hold during January, 2006 –July, 2010 for domestic interest rate (weighted average call money rate).This indicates that interest rate spread is a very poor predictor of exchange rate yields. Thus, the UIP hypothesis fails in India.”

Position on para 4(e) under IFRS taken by global firms

Under IFRS, paragraph 6(e) of IAS 23 Borrowing Costs, has the same requirement as 4(e) of AS-16. However, the illustration contained in 4(e) and reproduced in this article is not contained in IAS 23. The global big accounting firms have different interpretation on 6(e). Interestingly, the IASB is seized of this matter but has decided not to provide guidance. The International Financial Reporting Interpretation Committee (IFRIC) acknowledges that judgment will be required in its application.

Ernst & Young1

Borrowings in one currency may have been used to finance a development the costs of which are incurred primarily in another currency, e.g. a US dollar loan financing a Russian rouble development. This may have been done on the basis that, over the period of the development, the cost, after allowing for exchange differences, was expected to be less than the interest cost of an equivalent rouble loan.

We, however, consider that, as exchange rate movements are largely a function of differential interest rates, in most circumstances, the foreign exchange differences on directly attributable borrowings will be an adjustment to interest costs that can meet the definition of borrowing costs. Care will have to be taken if there is a sudden fluctuation in exchange rates that cannot be attributed to changes in interest rates. In such cases we believe that a practical approach is to cap the exchange differences taken as borrowing costs at the amount of borrowing costs on functional currency equivalent borrowings.

In theory, foreign exchange rates and interest rates are related and, as such, it is fair to assume that any changes in foreign exchange rates reflect changes in the interest rate. On this basis, all of the foreign exchange gain or loss on foreign currency borrowings would be considered as part of the borrowing costs on the borrowing. But recently, this argument has not been holding true, with many other factors impacting the relationship between foreign exchange rates and interest rates. Accordingly, it is not necessarily safe to assume that all of the foreign exchange gains or losses on foreign currency borrowings are an adjustment to income. Take the following two examples Entity A’s functional currency is euro, and it borrows £1,000 on 1st January 2009 for one year at a fixed interest rate of 5% to fund the construction of an asset. The spot exchange rate at this date is € 1.5:£1. At 31st December 2009, the exchange rate is €1.1:£1. The entity has incurred a foreign currency gain of €400, while interest costs (assuming they were paid throughout the year at the then spot rate) amount to €65. How much of the foreign exchange gain is included in the borrowing costs eligible for capitalisation?

Entity B’s functional currency is euro, and it borrows US$1,000 on 1st January 2009 for one year at a fixed interest rate of 3% to fund the construction of an asset. The spot exchange rate at this date is €1: US£1. On 31st December 2009, the exchange rate is €1.4: US$1. The entity has incurred a foreign currency loss of €400, while interest costs (assuming they were paid throughout the year at the then spot rate) amount to €36. How much of the foreign exchange loss is included in the borrowing costs eligible for capitalisation?

A number of possible approaches exist:

1.    Determine, at the date of entering into the loan, the equivalent interest rate on a local currency borrowing and use this as the borrowing cost to be capitalised. Let’s assume that, for both of the above examples, the interest rate on a €1,500 borrowing on 1st January 2009 is 7% (entity A), and the interest rate on a € 1,000 borrowing on 1st January 2009 is 4% (entity B). The amount of borrowing costs eligible to be capitalised by entity A would be €105, regardless of the movement in the foreign exchange rate. Entity B would be eligible to capitalise € 40 as borrowing costs. However, this ignores the reason for entities borrowing in a foreign currency i.e., that they expect it to be less expensive. In this case, the movement in the exchange rates has effectively generated an additional gain for entity A, which is also counter-intuitive.

2.    Establish a ‘cap and floor’ for the amount of foreign exchange gains or losses to be included in borrowing costs. The floor may be up to the amount that reduces the borrowing cost to nil. We do not believe that a net gain can be capitalised. In the above example, entity A would include €65 of foreign currency gains as an element of borrowing costs, resulting in a net nil borrowing cost. The cap may be the interest on a local currency borrowing at inception, as this reflects the relationship between foreign currency and interest at that time. In the above example, entity B would therefore include € 4 of the foreign currency losses as borrowing costs, resulting in a net borrowing cost of € 40.

3.    Determine a forward foreign exchange rate at the date of entering into the borrowing and use this to determine the amount of foreign exchange gains or losses that are eligible for capitalisation. Let’s assume in the above examples, the one year forward foreign exchange rates as on 1st January 2009 are €1.4:£1 and €1.1:US$1. The amount of foreign currency gains on the borrowing that entity A includes as borrowing costs is €10, regardless of the movement in the foreign exchange rate. Entity B includes €10 of foreign currency losses on the borrowings as borrowing costs. While this approach provides a consistent assessment of the relationship between foreign exchange rates and interest rates, it is by no means a perfect approach. There are many factors affecting the relationship between foreign exchanges rates and interest rates that cannot be adequately measured.

Management will need to carefully consider which approach they apply, to best reflect the relationship between foreign exchange rates and interest rates. However, the approach selected needs to be applied consistently and disclosed within the financial statements. Each approach also requires an appropriate information system to be in place to collect the relevant information.

PWC2

16.96 Capitalisation of borrowing costs includes capitalising foreign exchange differences relating to borrowings to the extent, that they are regarded as an adjustment to interest costs. The gains and losses that are an adjustment to interest costs include the interest rate differential between borrowing costs that would be incurred if the entity borrowed funds in its functional currency, and borrowing costs actually incurred on foreign currency borrowings. Other differences that are not adjustments to interest cost may include, for example, changes in foreign currency rates as a result of changes in other economic indicators, such as employment or productivity, or a change in government.

16.97 IAS 23 does not prescribe which method should be used to estimate the amount of foreign exchange differences that may be included in borrowing costs. IFRIC has considered this issue, but has not issued any guidance. There were two methods considered by the IFRIC:

  •     The portion of the foreign exchange movement may be estimated based on forward currency rates at the inception of the loan.

  •     The portion of the foreign exchange movement may be estimated based on interest rates on similar borrowings in the entity’s functional currency.

Other methods might be possible. Management has to use judgment to assess which foreign exchange differences can be capitalised. The method used to determine the amount that is an adjustment to borrowings costs is an accounting policy choice. The method should be applied consistently to foreign exchange differences whether they are gains or losses.

Deloitte3

2.1    Exchange differences to be included in borrowing costs.

IAS 23 includes no further clarification as to what is meant by the inclusion of exchange differences ‘to the extent that they are regarded as an adjustment to interest costs’.

It is clear that, not all exchange differences arising from foreign currency borrowings can be regarded as an adjustment to interest costs; otherwise, there would be no requirement for the qualifying terminology used in IAS 23:6(e). The extent to which exchange differences can be so considered depends on the terms and conditions of the foreign currency borrowing.

Qualifying interest costs denominated in the foreign currency, translated at the actual exchange rate on the date on which the expense is incurred, should be classified as borrowing costs. Although exchange rate fluctuations may mean that this amount is substantially higher or lower than the interest costs contemplated when the original financing decision was made, the full amount is appropriately treated as borrowing costs.

Some exchange differences relating to the principal may be regarded as an adjustment to interest costs (and, therefore, taken into account in determining the amount of borrowing costs capitalised) but only to the extent that the adjustment does not decrease or increase the interest costs to an amount below or above a notional borrowing cost, based on commercial interest rates prevailing in the functional currency at the date of initial recognition of the borrowing. In other words, the amount of borrowing costs that may be capitalised should lie between the following two amounts:

(1)    actual interest costs denominated in the foreign currency, translated at the actual exchange rate on the date on which the expense is incurred; and

(2)    notional borrowing costs based on commercial interest rates prevailing in the functional currency at the date of initial recognition of the borrowing.

Whether any adjustments for exchange differences are made to the amount determined under (1) above is an accounting policy choice and should be applied consistently.

KPMG4

4.6.420 Foreign exchange difference.

4.6.420.10 Borrowing costs may include foreign exchange differences to the extent that these differences are regarded as an adjustment to interest costs. There is no further guidance on the conditions under which foreign exchange difference may be capitalised and in practice, there are different views about what is acceptable.

4.6.420.20 In our view, foreign exchange differences on borrowings can be regarded as an adjustment to interest costs only in very limited circumstances. Exchange differences should not be capitalised, if a borrowing in a foreign currency is entered into to offset another currency exposure. Interest determined in a foreign currency already reflects the exposure to that currency. Therefore, the foreign exchange differences to be capitalised should be limited to the difference between interest accrued at the contractual rate and the interest that would apply to borrowing with identical terms in the entity’s functional currency. Any foreign exchange differences arising from the notional amount of the loan should be recognised in profit or loss.

4.6.420.30 When exchange differences qualify for capitalisation, in our view both exchange gains and losses should be considered in determining the amount to capitalise.

GT5

Exchange differences.
If an entity has foreign currency borrowings, to what extent are foreign exchange gains and losses eligible for capitalisation?

IAS 23.6(e) states that borrowing costs may include exchange differences arising from foreign currency borrowings to the extent that they are regarded as an adjustment to interest costs. The standard offers no detailed guidance on how to interpret this. Accordingly, entities should develop their own detailed policy. As with any other accounting policy, the chosen method should be applied consistently and disclosed if significant.

Is it appropriate to treat all exchange differences on foreign currency borrowings as an adjustment to interest costs?

No. In our view, not all such exchange differences are adjustments to interest costs. Exchange rate movements depend in part on current and expected differences in local currency and foreign currency interest rates (the interest rate differential). However, other factors also contribute to exchange rate changes: a currency will tend to lose value relative to other currencies if a country’s level of inflation is higher, or if the country’s level of output is expected to decline or if a country is troubled by political uncertainty (for example).

Moreover, although exchange gains and losses relate to an entity’s foreign currency borrowings, such gains and losses are different in character to interest costs on those borrowings. In particular, it is difficult to argue that exchange gains and losses on the principal amount of a loan is an adjustment to interest costs. Exchange gains and losses on the accrued interest portion of the loan’s carrying value may more readily be considered an adjustment to interest costs (see below).

What is an appropriate accounting policy for exchange differences?

One acceptable and straightforward approach is not to include any exchange differences as adjustments to interest costs. IAS 23.6(e) states that borrowing costs may include exchange differences to the extent they are regarded as an adjustment to interest costs – it does not therefore require such an adjustment. Applying this approach, interest costs on foreign currency borrowings include only the foreign currency interest expense converted into the entity’s functional currency in accordance with IAS 21 The Effects of Changes in Foreign Currency Exchange Rates.

Should an entity wish to take account of exchange differences, the challenge is to identify the portion of overall exchange differences that are adjustments to interest costs. A reasonable and practical approach is to treat only exchange differences arising on current period accrued interest as an adjustment to interest costs. This approach considers the adjustment to interest costs as the difference between:

  •     the amount of interest cost initially recognised in the entity’s functional currency using the spot exchange rate at the date of the transaction; and

  •     the amount the entity has to pay on settlement translated into the entity’s functional currency using the spot exchange rate at the date of payment.

Using this approach, exchange differences on the principal amount of the loan are not included in the calculation of borrowing costs to capitalise.

Are any other methods available?
Yes, an entity might develop other models and techniques to determine the exchange differences to include in the calculation of borrowing costs to capitalise. However, in our view any such method should:

•    be consistent with the objective of IAS 23 to include borrowing costs that are directly attributable to a qualifying asset. Borrowing costs are considered to be directly attributable, if they would have been avoided had the expenditure on the qualifying asset not been made (IAS 23.10);

•    not result in negative interest costs; and

•    be consistently applied.

In our view it is not acceptable to:

•    include exchange gains in excess of the interest expenses incurred (i.e. to capitalise a negative amount); or

•    Capitalise only exchange losses, but credit all exchange gains to the income statement.

One alternative approach is to determine a notional borrowing cost based on the interest cost that would have been incurred, had the entity borrowed an equivalent amount in its functional currency. In effect, this approach treats a foreign currency loan as a functional currency loan with an embedded foreign currency exchange contract. The IAS 23 calculation is based on the notional functional currency loan.

Applicability of para 4(e) in different scenarios under AS 16

It would be fair to comment that the global practices being followed with respect to 4(e) are disparate. Even the guidance provided by the large firms is not consistent. A few of the large firms have debunked the theory of IRP, but most others show sympathy towards the determination of 4(e) component. Though sometimes the same terminology used by the large firms such as a “cap” and “floor”, have been used in different contexts and can be confusing. Fortunately or unfortunately, a large part of the debate in the large firms may be purely academic under AS-16, since unlike IAS-23 an illustration is included in AS-16. This resolves a lot of issues. Nonetheless, the illustration in paragraph 4(e) of AS 16 deals with computation of 4(e) adjustment in a scenario where the company takes foreign currency (FC) loan at a lower interest rate and incurs exchange loss on the FC borrowing. However, it does not deal with many other scenarios which the author has described in the foot note under the illustration.

Consider the following example. The company takes a FC loan at a lower interest rate and has exchange gain on restatement on FC loan. In this scenario, theoretically there should have been an exchange loss, but because the IRP theory does not work because of unusual factors, there is an exchange gain in certain periods. The question is whether one would notionally increase exchange gain so that a 4(e) component can be artificially determined. In this situation, the author believes that it may not be appropriate to further increase the exchange gain to consider a notional 4(e) charge. This is explained in the illustration below.

Entity A’s reporting currency is rupees, and it borrows US$100 million on 16th December 2011 for one year at a fixed interest rate of 2% to fund the construction of an asset. The spot exchange rate at this date is $1: Rs. 53.65. On 31st March 2012, the exchange rate is $1: Rs. 50.87. The entity has incurred a foreign currency gain of Rs. 278 million, while interest costs (translated using the average rate) amount to Rs. 30.48 million (Rs. 100 million

*    2% * 52.26 * 3.5/ 12). How much of the foreign exchange gain is included in the borrowing costs eligible for capitalisation?

A number of possible approaches exist:
1.    Determine, at the date of entering into the loan, the equivalent interest rate on a local currency borrowing and use this as the borrowing cost to be capitalised, regardless of the movement in the foreign exchange rate. Let’s assume that, the interest rate on a Rs. 5,365 million borrowing on 16th December 2011 is 9%. Hence, the amount of borrowing costs eligible to be capitalised by entity A would be Rs. 140.83 million (Rs. 5,365 million * 9% * 3.5/ 12). In this approach, the movement in the exchange rates has effectively generated an additional exchange gain of Rs. 110.35 million (i.e., interest capitalised of Rs. 140.83 million minus actual interest of Rs. 30.48 million) for entity A, which is counter-intuitive.

2.    To recognise interest cost of Rs. 30.48 million and FC gain of Rs. 278 million. The FC gain is not notionally increased by Rs. 110.35 million to determine the 4(e) component.

3.    Establish a ‘cap and floor’ for the amount of foreign exchange gains or losses to be included in borrowing costs. The floor may be up to the amount that reduces the borrowing cost to nil because borrowing costs cannot be negative. It may not be appropriate to capitalise a net gain. In the above example, entity A would include Rs. 30.48 million of foreign currency gains as an element of borrowing costs, resulting in a net nil borrowing cost. The FC gain would be Rs. 247.52 million (Rs. 278 million – Rs. 30.48 million).

4.    There are other acceptable methods which are not discussed here.

The conclusion on the above illustration can be summarised as below.

 

 

 

Rs million

 

 

 

 

Method

Actual

4(e)

Exchange

Interest

component

gain

 

 

 

 

 

1

30.48

110.35

388.35

 

 

 

 

2

30.48

278.00

 

 

 

 

3

247.52

 

 

 

 


Discrete vs. Cumulative Approach

Paragraph 4(e) of AS 16 and explanation thereto explains computation of 4(e) adjustment for one year. However, it does not deal with a scenario where FC loan extends for more than one year and there is loss/gain in one accounting period and gain/ loss in the subsequent periods. Two methods seem possible for dealing with this issue.

Method A – The discrete period approach

4(e) adjustment is determined for each period separately. FC gains/losses that did not meet the criteria for treatment as borrowing cost in the previous year cannot be treated as 4(e) adjustment in the subsequent years and vice versa.

Method B – The cumulative approach
4(e) adjustment are assessed/identified on a cumulative basis, after considering the cumulative amount of interest expense that is likely to have been incurred, had the company borrowed in local currency. The amount of 4(e) adjustment cannot exceed the amount of FC losses incurred on a cumulative basis at the end of the reporting period. The cumulative approach looks at the project as a whole as the unit of account, ignoring the occurrence of reporting dates. Consequently, the amount of the FC differences eligible for identification as 4(e) adjustment in the period is an estimate, which can change as the exchange rates changes over periods.

Example
An illustrative calculation of the amount of FC differences that may be regarded as borrowing cost under method A and method B is set out below.

Particulars

Year
1

Year
2

Total

 

 

 

 

Interest expense in FC (A)

25,000

25,000

50,000

 

 

 

 

Hypothetical interest in

30,000

30,000

60,000

LC (B)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

FC loss (C)

6,000

3,000

9,000

 

 

 

 

Method
A – Discrete Approach

Particulars

Year
1

Year
2

Total

 

 

 

 

4(e) adjustment – lower

5,000

3,000

8,000

of C and (B minus A)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

FC loss (net)

1,000

Nil

1,000

 

 

 

 

FC loss (C)

6,000

3,000

9,000

 

 

 

 


Method
B – Cumulative Approach

Particulars

Year 1

Year
2

Total

 

 

 

 

4(e) adjustment

5,0006

4,0007

9,000

 

 

 

 

Foreign exchange loss

1,000

(1,000)

Nil

(net)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

If a company is also preparing quarterly financial information, a related issue will arise regarding the approach that should be adopted while preparing quarterly financial statements.

Ind-AS 23 provides additional guidance on this subject as follows.

“6A. With regard to exchange difference required to be treated as borrowing costs in accordance with paragraph 6(e), the manner of arriving at the adjustments stated therein shall be as follows:

(i)    the adjustment should be of an amount which is equivalent to the extent to which the exchange loss does not exceed the difference between the cost of borrowing in functional currency when compared to the cost of borrowing in a foreign currency.

(ii)    where there is an unrealised exchange loss which is treated as an adjustment to interest and subsequently there is a realised or unrealised gain in respect of the settlement or translation of the same borrowing, the gain to the extent of the loss previously recognised as an adjustment should also be recognised as an adjustment to interest.”

Ind-AS seems to be taking a cumulative approach when exchange gain follows exchange loss that were treated as an adjustment to interest cost. However, Ind-AS provides no guidance when there is a reverse situation, ie exchange gains precede exchange losses. In the latter situation, it is possible to recognise the exchange gain in the P&L account and the exchange loss could be split into a 4(e) component; the remaining being accounted as a pure exchange loss. It may be noted that, Ind-AS cannot be applied mandatorily with respect to interpreting Indian GAAP, though in the author’s view it could be applied voluntarily.

To cut the long story short

•    The present AS-16 standard includes a clear illustration of how the interest rate differential will be determined. Therefore, entities will need to follow the same. However, as discussed in this article, the illustration does not deal with numerous situations, which are causing the problem.

•    Consider an example, where the interest rate differential at inception of borrowing is Rs. 1,000 and the exchange loss in scenario 1 is Rs. 5,000 and in scenario 2 is Rs. 800. There should not be a debate that interest rate differential in scenario 1 is Rs. 1,000 and in scenario 2 is Rs. 800. Given that 4(e) is clearly explained in the standard by way of an illustration, it seems highly inappropriate not to consider Rs. 1,000 in scenario 1 and Rs. 800 in scenario 2 as interest rate differential (4(e) component).

•    Consider a third scenario where at the first year end after taking the FC loan there is exchange gain of Rs. 5,000 (but the interest rate differential at inception of borrowing is Rs. 1,000). In this scenario, the author believes that it would be appropriate to conclude that there is no interest rate differential; rather than considering an interest rate differential of Rs. 1,000 and notionally increasing the exchange gain by Rs. 1,000 to Rs. 6,000.

•    In the reporting period after the first reporting period, there seems to be a choice of either using the discrete approach or the cumulative approach. For example, the exchange loss in one period is followed by exchange gain in the following period. In the absence of any guidance under AS-16, either the discrete or cumulative approach is valid. Ind-AS seems to be suggesting a cumulative approach in some situations. That guidance is not mandatory with respect to interpretation of 4(e), but could be applied voluntarily.

•    All companies should disclose in the financial statements the policy followed to determine the 4(e) component, and this policy should be applied consistently.

Should para 4(e) under Indian GAAP be withdrawn because IRP theory does not hold good?

•    Para 4(e) is an issue of significance to India because of large volume of FC borrowings and high exchange rate volatility.

•    It is quite clear from the many research papers that the uncovered IRP theory does not hold good.

•    The global guidance and practices followed are inconsistent and disparate and many have debunked the IRP theory. IFRIC has refused to provide any guidance, citing that it is a judgmental matter.

•    Capitalisation of borrowing cost on qualifying asset itself is not a good idea, because it is a consequence of how the asset is funded (whether from equity or borrowing?) and therefore provides an unnecessary arbitrage.
By adding 4(e) component to the definition of borrowing cost, is like adding one disputed theory on top of another disputed theory. That makes matters worse.

•    Paragraph 46 and 46A of AS-11 were founded on the belief that exchange rates will either revert back to the original or will, in the medium to long term, reflect interest rate differential (stable forward points reflecting interest differences between two countries). By allowing amortisation of exchange differences, what is achieved is a smoothing of the exchange differences that would be similar to recognising interest rate differentials over the period of the FC loan.

•    On account of various arguments made in this paper, the author believes that 4(e) should be withdrawn. Along with 4(e); paragraph 46 & 46A of AS-11 should also be withdrawn, as they are founded on similar belief. The belief that exchange rates will either revert back to the original or will reflect the interest rate differential for the medium to long term, is a preposterous assumption and unproven by empirical evidence. If one were to do a backward testing, the assumption may hold good in a few cases, as a matter of co-incidence, rather than on the basis of a proven theory. The world nor India, is or ever will be calm and stable. If we agree to this then we should withdraw 4(e) and paragraph 46 and 46A of AS-11.

•    The Ministry of Corporate Affairs has issued has Circular No 25/2012 dated 9th August 2012 with-drawing 4(e) with respect to paragraph 46A, but not with respect to paragraph 46. The author’s suggestion is that 4(e) should be fully withdrawn along with paragraph 46 and 46A of AS-11.

GAPs in GAAP — Presentation of Comparatives under Ind-AS

fiogf49gjkf0d
The Institute of Chartered Accountants of India (ICAI) recently submitted a set of near-final Indian IFRS standards (known as ‘Ind-AS’) to the National Advisory Committee on Accounting Standards (NACAS). Subsequently, the Ministry of Corporate Affairs (MCA) notified the Ind-AS standards. These notified standards contain many changes from the IFRS as issued by the International Accounting Standard Board (IASB). Some of the changes are resulting in internal inconsistencies or may give rise to practical challenges (generally referred to as ‘GAP in GAAP’ by the author). This article highlights one such key issue. Whilst all the previous articles have focussed on Indian GAAP, henceforth this series will also additionally bring out the GAP in GAAP on the new Ind-AS’s.

IFRS 1 First-time adoption requires a company to transit from a previous GAAP (say, Indian GAAP) to IFRS at the beginning of the comparative period. Therefore an Indian company that has to prepare IFRS accounts for 2011-12 financial year, will transit to IFRS on 1st April 2010 (transition date or start date). This approach results in the company having both the current year (2011-12) and the comparable year (2010-11) prepared under IFRS with one transition date. By providing comparable numbers under the same IFRS framework, investors and analysts will have a better understanding of those financial statements.

A somewhat different approach is followed in Ind- AS 101 First-time Adoption of Ind-AS. Under this standard there is no mandatory requirement to prepare comparable numbers under the same Ind-AS framework. So typically an Indian company would have current year numbers under Ind-AS 101 prepared with the transition date of 1st April 2011 and comparable numbers as per Indian GAAP. Under this approach, the investors and analysts may face difficulties in understanding the financial statements that do not contain comparable numbers prepared under the same reporting framework.

There is another alternative approach that is allowed under Ind-AS 101, so that companies can provide comparative information under Ind-AS. Ind-AS 101 defines the ‘transition date’ as the beginning of the current period, i.e., 1st April 2011. Thus, a company cannot adopt Ind-AS from the beginning of the comparative period. If it desires to give comparative information as per Ind-AS in its first Ind-AS financial statements, it can do so on memorandum basis only. For the purposes of preparing comparative information on a memorandum basis, the company will have a deemed transition date, i.e., 1st April 2010. This gives rise to the following issue.

If a company decides to give Ind-AS comparatives in the first year of adoption, it will use two transition dates : actual transition date and memoranda/ deemed transition date. For example, if a company covered in phase 1 of the IFRS conversion roadmap and having 31st March year decides to give one year comparative, its actual transition date will be 1st April 2011. In addition, it will use 1st April 2010 as memoranda/deemed transition date to prepare memoranda comparatives. It may be noted that the memorandum balance sheet prepared at the end of 31st March 2011, will not be carried forward and a new balance sheet will be prepared at 1st April 2011, by applying Ind-AS 101 all over again. Though the intention is to provide comparability between two years under Ind-AS, the approach in Ind-AS 101 will end up doing exactly the opposite. Given below are few examples that explain the point.

(a) A company acquires a new business whose acquisition date falls within the memoranda comparable period (2010-11 in the above example). In preparing its memoranda information as at and for the year ended 31st March 2011, the company will apply acquisition accounting as per Ind-AS 103 Business Combinations. However, in preparing Ind-AS opening balance sheet at 1st April 2011, it can still use Ind-AS 101 exemption and continue with previous GAAP accounting under Indian GAAP, after making certain specific adjustments. The 2010-11 numbers will have the impact of acquisition accounting, but the 2011-12 numbers will be based on Indian GAAP accounting.

(b) A company decides to use fair value as deemed cost exemption for property, plant and equipment (PPE). For its memoranda transition, it will determine the fair value as at 1st April 2010. For actual transition, fair valuation as at 1st April 2011 will be needed. Other than having to do fair valuation for two transition dates, the value of the PPE and the resultant depreciation for the two years will not be comparable.

Paragraph 21(b)(ii) of Ind-AS 101 actually acknowledges this fact and states that “For example, the first-time adopter for whom the first reporting period is financial statements for the year ending 31st March, 2012 would apply the exceptions and exceptions as at 1st April, 2010 and 1st April, 2011; accordingly the balance sheet as at end of 31st March, 2011 may not be equivalent to the opening balance sheet as at 1st April, 2011.”

Requiring IFRS conversion on two transition dates (i.e., 1st April 2010 and 1st April 2011), so as to enable a company to prepare comparative numbers under Ind-AS seems rather unique, unnecessary cost and burden and self-defeating. The approach results in nonmatching of the balance sheets and in many cases may actually distort comparability. It is therefore likely that many companies may provide comparable numbers only under Indian GAAP rather than under Ind-AS.

For the standards-setters a better strategy would have been to accept IFRS 1, as it is. This standard would require transitioning to IFRS on 1st April 2010 as a starting point. Comparable and current year numbers would be prepared on that basis and the issue of noncomparability or non-matching balance sheets would not arise. Moreover investors would have found it easy to understand and useful for decision-making purposes. Global investors too would have preferred it, as being compliant with IASB IFRS.

It may be noted that this article assumes that the transition date is as suggested in the original roadmap issued by the MCA. However, MCA has clarified on the notified standards that the implementation date will be intimated later. Therefore it cannot be said with any certainty whether the dates mentioned in the roadmap will be met.

levitra

Gap in GaAp – Accounting for Demerger

fiogf49gjkf0d
Synopsis

Following the rapid ushering in of the Companies Act, 2013, MCA has also started issuing draft rules. The author highlights the glaring lacunae in the Draft Rules for Accounting for Demerger, which require the accounting to be undertaken in accordance with the current provisions under Income Tax governing demergers, instead of acceptable accounting principles.

This article deals with the issues relating to accounting for demerger, as a result of the draft rules under the Companies Act 2013. The said rules are not yet final.

As per the draft rules, “demerger” in relation to companies means transfer, pursuant to scheme of arrangement by a ‘demerged company’ of its one or more undertakings to any ‘resulting company’ in such a manner as provided in section 2(19AA) of the Income Tax Act, 1961, subject to fulfilling the conditions stipulated in section 2(19AA) of the Income Tax Act and shares have been allotted by the ‘resulting company’ to the shareholders of the ‘demerged company’ against the transfer of assets and liabilities.

As per section 2 (19AA) of the Income-tax Act, “demerger” in relation to companies, means the transfer, pursuant to a scheme of arrangement under the Companies Act, 1956, by a demerged company of its one or more undertakings to any resulting company in such a manner that—

i. all the property of the undertaking, being transferred by the demerged company, immediately before the demerger, becomes the property of the resulting company by virtue of the demerger;

ii. all the liabilities relatable to the undertaking, being transferred by the demerged company, immediately before the demerger, become the liabilities of the resulting company by virtue of the demerger;

iii. the property and the liabilities of the undertaking or undertakings being transferred by the demerged company are transferred at values appearing in its books of account immediately before the demerger;

iv. the resulting company issues, in consideration of the demerger, its shares to the shareholders of the demerged company on a proportionate basis [except where the resulting company itself is a shareholder of the demerged company];

v. the shareholders holding not less than threefourths in value of the shares in the demerged company (other than shares already held therein immediately before the demerger, or by a nominee for, the resulting company or, its subsidiary) become share-holders of the resulting company or companies by virtue of the demerger, otherwise than as a result of the acquisition of the property or assets of the demerged company or any undertaking thereof by the resulting company;

vi. the transfer of the undertaking is on a going concern basis;

vii. the demerger is in accordance with the conditions, if any, notified u/s.s. (5) of section 72A by the Central Government in this behalf.

Explanation 1—For the purposes of this clause, “undertaking” shall include any part of an undertaking, or a unit or division of an undertaking or a business activity taken as a whole, but does not include individual assets or liabilities or any combination thereof not constituting a business activity.

Explanation 2—For the purposes of this clause, the liabilities referred to in sub-clause (ii), shall include—

(a) the liabilities which arise out of the activities or operations of the undertaking;
(b) the specific loans or borrowings (including debentures) raised, incurred and utilised solely for the activities or operations of the undertaking; and
(c) in cases, other than those referred to in clause (a) or clause (b), so much of the amounts of general or multipurpose borrowings, if any, of the demerged company as stand in the same proportion which the value of the assets transferred in a demerger bears to the total value of the assets of such demerged company immediately before the demerger.

Explanation 3—For determining the value of the property referred to in sub-clause (iii), any change in the value of assets consequent to their revaluation shall be ignored.

Explanation 4—For the purposes of this clause, the splitting up or the reconstruction of any authority or a body constituted or established under a Central, State or Provincial Act, or a local authority or a public sector company, into separate authorities or bodies or local authorities or companies, as the case may be, shall be deemed to be a demerger if such split up or reconstruction fulfils such conditions as may be notified in the Official Gazette, by the Central Government.

Accounting for demerger under the draft rules issued under Companies Act 2013

The draft rules recognise that accounting standards issued under the Companies Accounting Standard Rules do not contain any standard for demergers. Till such time an accounting standard is prescribed for the purpose of ‘demerger’, the accounting treatment shall be in accordance with the conditions stipulated in section 2(19AA) of the Income Tax Act, 1961 and

(i) in the books of the ‘demerged company’:-

(a) assets and liabilities shall be transferred at the same value appearing in the books, without considering any revaluation or writing off of assets carried out during the preceding two financial years; and

(b) the difference between the value of assets and liabilities shall be credited to capital reserve or debited to goodwill.

(ii) in the books of ‘resulting company’:-

(a) assets and liabilities of ‘demerged company’ transferred shall be recorded at the same value appearing in the books of the ‘demerged company’ without considering any revaluation or writing off of assets carried out during the preceding two financial years;

(b) shares issued shall be credited to the share capital account; and

(c) the excess or deficit, if any, remaining after recording the aforesaid entries shall be credited to capital reserve or debited to goodwill as the case may be.

Provided that a certificate from a chartered accountant is submitted to the Tribunal to the effect that both ‘demerged company’ and ‘resulting company’ have complied with conditions as above and accounting treatment prescribed in this rule.

Author’s Analysis

First, the draft rules are designed to ensure compliance with section 2(19AA). In the author’s view, accounting treatment should be governed by Indian GAAP, Ind-AS/IFRS or generally acceptable accounting practices; rather than, the provisions of the Income- tax Act. The requirement to record demergers at book values in accordance with section 2(19AA) may not gel well with the requirements of generally acceptable accounting practices. For example, under IFRS/Ind-AS, distribution to shareholders is recorded at fair value, whereas under the draft rules the same is recorded at book value. This anomaly should be rectified through a collaborative effort of the Institute of Chartered Accountants (ICAI), the Ministry of Corporate Affairs (MCA) and the Central Board of Direct Taxes (CBDT). However it appears that this may not be as easy as it appears. Many issues need to be first resolved, such as, the strategy with respect to, implementation of Ind-AS/ IFRS, continuation of Indian GAAP for some entities, implementation of Tax Accounting Standards, implementation of the IFRS SME standard, etc needs to be finalised. Right now, this whole area is a maelstrom and the Government and the ICAI should provide a clear roadmap, before complicating this space any further.

Second, the draft rules and section 2(19AA) of the Income-tax Act assumes a very simple scenario of demerger. In practice, demerger may involve many structuring complexities.  The draft rules therefore are very elementary.  They focus on the accounting that is required in a narrow situation where the demerger is in accordance with section 2(19AA) of the Income-tax Act.  

Third, the draft rules on accounting of demerger is applicable only when the demerger is in accordance with section 2(19AA) of the Income-tax Act.  These accounting rules are not applicable when the   demerger is not in accordance with section 2(19AA).  For example, a company demerging one of its undertaking may be doing so, to unlock value rather than obtaining tax benefits under section 2(19AA).  For such demerger, the prescribed draft accounting rules are not applicable. Thus, as an example, the resulting company could account for the assets and liabilities taken over at fair value rather than on the basis of book values as prescribed in the draft rules.Fourth, in the books of the demerged company when the transfer to a resulting company is a net liability, the draft rules require the corresponding credit to be given to capital reserves. This accounting seems appropriate, as it could be argued that the shareholders are taking over the net liability, and hence this is a contribution by the shareholders to the company. When the transfer to a resulting company is a net asset, the draft rules require the corresponding debit to be given to goodwill.  This seems completely ridiculous as distribution of net assets to shareholders cannot under any circumstances result in goodwill for the demerged   company.  Rather it is a distribution by the demerged company of the net assets to the shareholders, and hence the debit should be made to general reserves.  This mistake should be corrected in the final rules. Fifth, in the books of the resulting company, the net assets/liabilities taken over are recorded at book values. This is designed to comply with the requirements of section 2(19AA).  As already indicated, the accounting in statutory books should not be guided by the requirements of the Income-tax Act.  In practice, the resulting company may want to record the said transfer at fair value, to capture the business valuation. Whilst for tax computation purposes, he net assets may be recorded at book values; it is inappropriate for the Income-tax Act to suggest the accounting to be done in statutory books.Lastly, in the resulting company there is no requirement in respect of how share capital is valued.  Thus the securities premium, goodwill and capital reserves can be flexibly determined by ascribing a desired value to the share capital.  This is certainly not an appropriate approach from an accounting point of view.

In conclusion, the author believes that some immediate correction is required in the draft accounting rules as suggested in this article. In the long term, accounting should be driven by sound accounting practices and not by income-tax requirements.  In this regard, ICAI, CBDT and the MCA should collaborate and establish a clear roadmap for the future.

Can email addresses constitute an Intangible Asset?

fiogf49gjkf0d
Synopsis
With the growth of E-commerce,
wherein Indian companies and start-ups have been investing heavily on
building their customer databases, the accounting treatment of
purchasing the said databases has gained importance with regards to
Indian GAAP. In this Article, the learned author has expressed and
justified the accounting treatment under different scenarios for
purchase of such database of E-mail ID’s based on facts of the cases put
forth in the following article, by referring to technical definitions
and relevant extracts of Accounting Standard-26 ‘Intangible Assets’.

BACKGROUND
Online
Limited (referred to as the company or Online) is specialised in the
online selling of a range of products. The company’s commercial strategy
relies on purchase of databases of email address containing lists of
people who may be interested in purchasing its products. The lists are
provided by the specialised vendors based on the specifications of
Online. These specifications include:
(i) M inimum amount of data, e.g., email address, first name and last name.
(ii)
Based on the potential to buy its products, Online has defined various
categories of data, e.g., income, employment, education, residential
location, past history, age, etc. The person should fall under one or
more of these prescribed categories.
(iii) D ata check against the
existing lists of Online – The purpose of this check is to avoid
duplication with existing email address lists.

The email addresses meeting these specifications are treated as valid email addresses.

Scenario 1
The
specialised vendors carry out search activities to identify valid email
addresses. The company makes payment to these vendors on cost plus
margin basis. Though the company will monitor the quality of work of the
vendor it would nonetheless have to make the payment, even if they have
not found any valid email address. Also, vendors do not guarantee any
exclusivity and they may provide the same email address lists to other
companies also.

Scenario 2
The specialised vendors
carry out search activities to identify valid email addresses. The
company makes payment to these vendors on performance basis. If vendors
do not provide any valid email address, they will not be entitled to any
payment from the company. Also, vendors need to guarantee exclusivity
and they cannot provide the same lists to the competitors of Online.

ISSUE
Can Online recognise the lists of email addresses as an intangible asset under AS 26 Intangible Assets?

TECHNICAL REFERENCES

1. AS 26 defines the terms intangible assets and assets as below:

“An
intangible asset is an identifiable non-monetary asset, without
physical substance, held for use in the production or supply of goods or
services, for rental to others, or for administrative purposes.

An asset is a resource:

(a) Controlled by an enterprise as a result of past events, and
(b) From which future economic benefits are expected to flow to the enterprise.”

2. A s per paragraph 20 of AS 26, an intangible asset should be recognised if, and only if:
(a) It is probable that the future economic benefits that are attributable to the asset will flow to the enterprise, and
(b) T he cost of the asset can be measured reliably.

3. Paragraphs 11 to 13 of AS 26 explain the requirement concerning “identifiability” as below:

“11.
The definition of an intangible asset requires that an intangible asset
be identifiable. To be identifiable, it is necessary that the
intangible asset is clearly distinguished from goodwill. …

12.
An intangible asset can be clearly distinguished from goodwill if the
asset is separable. An asset is separable if the enterprise could rent,
sell, exchange or distribute the specific future economic benefits
attributable to the asset without also disposing of future economic
benefits that flow from other assets used in the same revenue earning
activity.

13. Separability is not a necessary condition for
identifiability since an enterprise may be able to identify an asset in
some other way. For example, if an intangible asset is acquired with a
group of assets, the transaction may involve the transfer of legal
rights that enable an enterprise to identify the intangible asset. …”

4. Paragraphs 14 and 17 of AS 26 provide as under with regard to “control”:

“14.
A n enterprise controls an asset if the enterprise has the power to
obtain the future economic benefits flowing from the underlying resource
and also can restrict the access of others to those benefits. The
capacity of an enterprise to control the future economic benefits from
an intangible asset would normally stem from legal rights that are
enforceable in a court of law. In the absence of legal rights, it is
more difficult to demonstrate control. However, legal enforceability of a
right is not a necessary condition for control since an enterprise may
be able to control the future economic benefits in some other way.

17.
A n enterprise may have a portfolio of customers or a market share and
expect that, due to its efforts in building customer relationships and
loyalty, the customers will continue to trade with the enterprise.
However, in the absence of legal rights to protect, or other ways to
control, the relationships with customers or the loyalty of the
customers to the enterprise, the enterprise usually has insufficient
control over the economic benefits from customer relationships and
loyalty to consider that such items (portfolio of customers, market
shares, customer relationships, customer loyalty) meet the definition of
intangible assets.”

5. Paragraph 18 of AS 26 explains the requirement concerning “Future Economic Benefits”:

“18.
The future economic benefits flowing from an intangible asset may
include revenue from the sale of products or services, cost savings, or
other benefits resulting from the use of the asset by the enterprise.
For example, the use of intellectual property in a production process
may reduce future production costs rather than increase future
revenues.”

6. Paragraph 24 of AS 26 states that if an intangible
asset is acquired separately, the cost of the intangible asset can
usually be measured reliably.

7. Paragraphs 50 and 51 of AS 26 state as under:

“50.
I nternally generated brands, mastheads, publishing titles, customer
lists and items similar in substance should not be recognised as
intangible assets.

51. T his Standard takes the view that
expenditure on internally generated brands, mastheads, publishing
titles, customer lists and items similar in substance cannot be
distinguished from the cost of developing the business as a whole.
Therefore, such items are not recognised as intangible assets.”

DISCUSSION AND ALTERNA TIVE VIEWS
View 1 – The email address lists cannot be recognised as an intangible asset.

An item without physical substance should meet the following four criteria to be recognised as intangible asset under AS 26:
(a) Identifiability
(b) Future economic benefits
(c) Control
(d) R eliable measurement of cost

In
the present case, the email address lists are acquired separately and
the company has the ability to sell them to a third party. Thus, based
on guidance in paragraph 12 of AS 26, the lists satisfy identifiablity
criterion for recognition as intangible asset. Online will use the email
address lists to generate additional sales. Therefore, future economic
benefits are expected to derive from the use of these lists and the
second criterion is also met.

However, the third criterion, viz., control, for  recognition of intangible asset is not met. email addresses are public information and the company cannot effectively restrict their use by other companies. hence, in scenario 1, the control criterion for recognition of intangible asset is not met.

The following additional arguments can be made:

(a)    Purchase of email address lists can be analysed as  outsourcing.  these  lists  are  prepared  by  the suppliers based on the specifications of the com- pany, which is not different from the situation where the company would have built them in-house. hence, guidance in paragraph 50 and 51 of as 26 should apply which prohibit recognition of internally generated intangible assets of such nature.

(b)    These  lists  can  be  viewed  as  marketing  tool,  such as leaflets or catalogues; their purchase price being similar to a marketing expense. in accordance with paragraph 56(c) of as 26, expenditure on advertising and promotional activities cannot be recognised as an intangible asset.

View 2 – the email address lists can be recognised as an intangible asset.

Based on the analysis in view 1, the first two criteria for recognition of an intangible asset (identifiability and future economic benefits) are met.

Regarding the third criterion, viz., future economic benefits are controlled by the company; it may be argued that the company acquires the ownership of the email address lists prepared by the vendor as well as the exclusivity of their use. it is able to restrict the access of third parties to those benefits. Hence, in scenario 2, the third criterion is also met.

Online can reliably measure the cost of acquiring email address lists. indeed, in accordance with paragraph 24 of as 26, the cost of a separately acquired intangible item can usually be measured reliably, particularly when the consideration is in the form of cash.

The  author  believes  that  the  company,  which  sub-contracts the development of intangible assets to other parties (its vendors), must exercise judgment in determining whether it is acquiring an intangible asset or whether it is obtaining goods and services that are being used in the development of a customer relationship by the entity itself. in determining whether a vendor is providing services to develop an internally generated intangible asset, the terms of the supply agreement should be examined to see whether the supplier is bearing a significant proportion of the risks associated with a failure of the project. for example, if the supplier is always compensated irrespective of the project’s outcome, the company on whose behalf the development is undertaken should account for those activities as its own. however, if the vendor bears a significant proportion of the risks associated with a failure of the project, the company is acquiring developed intangible asset, and therefore the requirements relating to separate acquisition of intangible asset should apply.

Under this view, the company will amortise intangible asset over its estimated useful life. the author believes that due to the following key reasons, the asset may have relatively small useful life, say, not more than two years:

(a)    the  company  will  use  email  address  lists  to  generate future sales. once the conversion takes place,  the email address lists will lose their relevance for  the company and a new customer relationship asset comes into existence which is an internally generated asset.

(b)    for  email  addresses  which  do  not  convert  into  customers over the next 12 to 24 months, it may be reasonable to assume that they may not be interested in buying company products.

(c)    email addresses may be subject to frequent changes.

Concluding remarks
in scenario 1, the control criterion is not met. Besides the vendor is providing the company a service rather than selling an intangible asset. therefore the author believes that only view 1 should apply in scenario 1. in scenario 2, view 2 is justified. In scenario 2, the exclusivity criterion and consequently the control requirement is met. secondly, since the payment to the vendor is based on performance the company pays for an intangible asset, rather than for services. however, the amortisation period will generally be very short.

GAP in GAAP? Virtual Certainty vs. Convincing Evidence

fiogf49gjkf0d
The principles of virtual certainty continue to remain challenging for many Indian enterprises. Paragraph 17 of AS-22 Accounting for Taxes on Income states as follows: “Where an enterprise has unabsorbed depreciation or carry forward of losses under tax laws, deferred tax assets should be recognised only to the extent that there is virtual certainty supported by convincing evidence that sufficient future taxable income will be available against which such deferred tax assets can be realised.”

Explanation to paragraph 17 states as follows: Determination of virtual certainty that sufficient future taxable income will be available is a matter of judgment based on convincing evidence and will have to be evaluated on a case to case basis. Virtual certainty refers to the extent of certainty, which, for all practical purposes, can be considered certain. Virtual certainty cannot be based merely on forecasts of performance such as business plans. Virtual certainty is not a matter of perception and is to be supported by convincing evidence. Evidence is a matter of fact. To be convincing, the evidence should be available at the reporting date in a concrete form, for example, a profitable binding export order, cancellation of which will result in payment of heavy damages by the defaulting party. On the other hand, a projection of the future profits made by an enterprise based on the future capital expenditures or future restructuring etc., submitted even to an outside agency, e.g., to a credit agency for obtaining loans and accepted by that agency cannot, in isolation, be considered as convincing evidence.

Author’s analysis of virtual certainty

Let us analyse the above requirements of virtual certainty.

1. Virtual certainty has to be supported by convincing evidence of future taxable income. The evidence has to be very strong, such as a non cancellable order, the cancellation of which will result in heavy penalty. The explanation provides non cancellable order as an example. There could be many other examples, which do not entail a non cancellable order, but nonetheless provide virtual certainty. For example, an oil well with proven oil reserves, or FDA approval of a blockbuster drug or a toll road between two very busy cities, for which there is no alternate commute (monopoly situation).

2. Virtual certainty is not a matter of perception, but judgment needs to be exercised. Judgment is based on detailed analysis of facts and circumstances; whereas perception is not based on a detailed analysis or evidence.

3. Mere projections will not suffice. There has to be virtual certainty of future taxable income. Projections would certainly be required to determine future taxable income. However, those projections would have to be supported by virtual certainty of future profits. The virtual certainty could come from non cancellable confirmed orders or other factors.

The Expert Advisory Committee (EAC) has also opined on several occasions on the concept of virtual certainty. Some of the key views of the EAC in addition to those already described above are set out below.

1. An unlimited period of carry forward in respect of unabsorbed depreciation is not a basis for recognising DTA and on its own does not demonstrate virtual certainty.

2. The fact that the company has made book profits (DTA is with respect to tax losses) does not on its own demonstrate virtual certainty.

3. Orders secured by the company, may be considered while creating deferred tax asset, provided these are binding on the other party and it can be demonstrated that they will result in future taxable income. However, mere projections made by the company indicating the earning of profits from future orders, or financial restructuring proposal under consideration or the fact that the books of account of the company are prepared on going concern, or the upward trend in the business or economy, may not be considered as convincing evidence of virtual certainty.

Apparently, the “virtual certainty” criteria laid down in AS 22 for the recognition of DTA is difficult to implement. Given below are the author’s perspectives on some of the key challenges:

(i) The explanation to paragraph 17 gives an example of a profitable binding order for the recognition of DTA and disallows recognition of DTA on the basis of mere projections of future profits based on capital expenditure/restructuring plans.

In practice, there will be many situations that fall between the two scenarios. Let us consider the following scenarios:

(a) A newly set-up entity (New Co) incurred significant losses in the first three years of operations due to reasons such as advertising and initial set-up related costs, significant borrowing costs and lower level of activity in the first two years of operations. Over the years, there has been a significant increase in the operations of New Co and its advertisement cost has stabilized to a normal level. Further, it has raised new capital during the year and repaid its major borrowing. The cumulative effect of all the events is that the New Co has started earning profits from the fourth year. It is expected to make substantial profits in the next three years that will absorb the entire accumulated tax loss of the entity.

(b) A battery manufacturer (Battery Co), which had incurred tax losses in the past, enters into an exclusive sales agreement with a car manufacturer (Car Co). According to the agreement, all the cars manufactured by Car Co will only use batteries manufactured by Battery Co. Though Car Co has not guaranteed any minimum off-take, there is significant demand for its cars in the market.

A perusal of both the aforementioned scenarios indicates that entities have significant additional evidence than mere projections of future profitability to support the recognition of DTA. However, since they do not have any binding orders in hand, or other concrete evidence, it may lead to the conclusion that the virtual certainty criterion laid down in AS 22 for recognition of DTA is not met.

(ii) There are certain sectors such as retail or building material, which generally do not have any binding sale orders. This indicates that these sectors, unless they are monopolies, cannot recognise DTA if they have unabsorbed depreciation and/or carry forward of tax losses. This may not be fair, as the principle of virtual certainty is tilted in favour of entities that work on binding orders such as construction, IT or engineering companies.

(iii) If the intention is that profits are to be virtually certain for the recognition of DTA in case of carry forward losses/unabsorbed depreciation, then it is not clear why the virtual certainty principles are applied only for revenue and not for input costs or availability of inputs.

The virtual certainty principle has a fatal flaw; nothing in this world is virtually certain. Even profitable binding orders could be cancelled without receiving any penalty as the buyer/seller could end up getting bankrupt. Interestingly, both Ind-AS 12 (Ind-AS are notified in the Companies Act, but are not yet applicable) and IAS 12 on Income Taxes lay down the criteria of “probability” to recognise DTA, including on unabsorbed depreciation and/or carry forward of tax losses. However, when an entity has a history of recent losses, it should recognise DTA only to the extent it has convincing evidence that sufficient taxable profit will be available. The principle of convincing evidence under Ind-AS and IAS is not only fair, but is also practical to apply, compared to the “virtual certainty” principle under AS 22. In the two examples referred to in this article, the principles of convincing evidence (under Ind-AS and IFRS) would probably result in recognition of DTA, but under Indian GAAP principles of virtual certainty, no DTA can be recognised.

The ICAI should look into the matter and align the requirement of Indian GAAP with Ind-AS.

Consolidated Financial Statements vs. Companies Bill

Currently, listing agreement mandates listed companies to prepare Consolidated Financial Statements (CFS). Neither the existing Companies Act nor AS 21 requires companies to prepare CFS. Under the Companies Bill, 2012 (Bill) all companies, including unlisted companies and private companies that have a subsidiary will need to prepare CFS.
Unlike IAS 27, the Bill does not exempt an intermediate unlisted parent company from preparing CFS. Under IAS 27 an unlisted intermediate parent is exempt from preparing CFS if and only if:
a)the parent is itself a wholly-owned subsidiary, or is a partially-owned subsidiary of another entity and its other owners, including those not otherwise entitled to vote, have been informed about, and do not object to, the parent not presenting CFS;

b)the parent’s debt or equity instruments are not traded in a public market (a domestic or foreign stock exchange or an over-the-counter market, including local and regional markets);

c)the parent did not file, nor is it in the process of filing, its financial statements with a securities commission or other regulatory organisation for the purpose of issuing any class of instruments in a public market; and
d)the ultimate or any intermediate parent of the parent produces CFS available for public use that comply with International Financial Reporting Standards.
Preparation of CFS at each intermediate parent level is likely to increase compliance cost. The Ministry of Corporate Affairs may look into the matter, and provide an exemption on the above similar lines. The said exemption may be incorporated in the rules.
For all companies, CFS should comply with notified Accounting Standards (AS) . Notified AS currently means the Indian GAAP. In the future, it may include Ind-AS for specified entities. This will impact companies that are currently preparing CFS according to IFRS, based on option given in the listing agreement. These companies will have to mandatorily prepare Indian GAAP CFS (Ind-AS in the future), and may choose to continue preparing IFRS CFS on a voluntary basis or stop preparing the same. The Ministry of Corporate Affairs may look into the matter and allow companies to continue preparing CFS using IASB IFRS instead of Indian GAAP or Ind-AS.

There seems to be some confusion with respect to associates and joint ventures. The explanation, to the section 129 of the Bill states that “the word subsidiary includes associate company and joint venture.” Apparently, the following two views seem possible:

(i)a company needs to consolidate associates and joint ventures in accordance with the notified AS using equity/proportionate consolidation method. In other words, CFS is prepared only when the group has at least one subsidiary para

(ii)a company needs to apply equity method/ proportionate consolidation to its associates and joint ventures even if it does not have any subsidiary. In other words, CFS will be prepared when the company has an associate or joint venture, even though it does not have any subsidiary.
The first view seems more aligned to the requirements of notified AS and the current practice. The second view can be supported if the intention of the lawmaker was to require a company to apply equity method/proportionate consolidation method to its associates and joint ventures even if it does not have any subsidiary. ICAI and MCA should provide clarification on this issue. It would be appropriate if the clarification maintains status quo with current requirement, which is essentially view (i).

The definition of control, subsidiary and significant influence as provided in the Bill and the accounting standards are quite different. If the companies to be consolidated under the Bill and the accounting standards are different, because of the differences in the definition, it would create a lot of confusion and difficulty. A comparison of the definitions is given in the Table.

Apparently, the definition of “control” given in the Bill is broader than the notion of “control” envisaged in the definition of the term “subsidiary.” In accordance with definition of “subsidiary,” only board control and control over share capital is considered. However, the definition of the “control”, suggests that a company may control other company through other mechanism also, say, management rights or voting agreements. Further, the definition of “subsidiary”, refers to control over more than one-half of the total share capital, without differ-entiating between voting and non -voting shares. This could lead to a situation where a company is a subsidiary under AS-21, but on which the parent has no control as defined in the Bill. Consider a simple example of a company, which has a share capital of Rs. 100, comprising 40% equity with voting rights held by A and 60% preference shares with no voting rights, held by B. In accordance with AS, A would consolidate the company but in accordance with the Bill, B would consolidate the company. The Bill seems to provide an unacceptable response, where the lender rather than the equity holder would consolidate the company.
There seems to be similar confusion with respect to associates. In accordance with the explanation in the Bill, the term “significant influence” means control over 20% of business decisions. Control over business decisions is an indicator of subsidiary, rather than associate. It appears that the definition in the Bill “controls 20% of business decisions” is wrongly described. The right way to describe it would have been “has significant influence over all critical business decisions”, and “significant influence is evidenced by 20% voting power, representation on the board, or through other means.” The other issue is that the 20% under the standard works as an indicative threshold. In other words, even a lesser percentage may give significant influence and a higher percentage need not necessarily give significant influence. However, under the Bill the 20% requirement works like a rule, rather than a rebuttable presumption.

To resolve all these anomalies, the MCA may clarify that the definitions in the Bill are relevant for legal/ regulatory purposes. For accounting purposes including preparation of CFS, definitions according to the notified AS should be used.

GAPs IN GAAP — Amortisation of Leasehold Improvements

fiogf49gjkf0d
Over what period does a lessee depreciate leasehold improvements that it makes to a property under an operating lease that contains an option for the lessee to extend the lease?

Fact pattern
A lessee enters into an operating lease for an office property. The lease has a term of 5 years, and contains an option for the lessee to extend the lease for a further 5 years. The rentals for the period under the extension option (i.e., years 6-10) are at market rates. Upon commencement of the lease term, the lessee incurs CU100,000 constructing immoveable leasehold improvements specific to the property. The economic life of the leasehold improvements is 7 years. At commencement of the lease, the lessee expects to exercise the extension option, but is not reasonably certain it will do so.

Conclusion View 1: The useful life of the leasehold improvements is the shorter of the lease term or the assets’ economic life.

The lessee depreciates the leasehold improvements over the lease term of 5 years.

Reasons for View 1

AS-19.3 states:
“The lease term is the non-cancellable period for which the lessee has agreed to take on lease the asset together with any further periods for which the lessee has the option to continue the lease of the asset, with or without further payment, which at the inception of the lease it is reasonably certain that the lessee will exercise.”

In this fact pattern, at the inception of the lease, the lessee is not ‘reasonably certain’ that it will exercise the lease option, although renewal may be expected. For the purpose of AS-19, the lease term is thus 5 years. AS-6.20 requires “the depreciable amount of a depreciable asset shall be allocated on a systematic basis to each accounting period during the useful life of the asset”.

AS-6.3.3 defines ‘useful life’ as either: “
(a) The period over which a depreciable asset is expected to be used by the enterprise; or
(b) The number of production or similar units expected to be obtained from the use of the asset by the enterprise.”

In addition, AS-6.7 states that:

“The useful life of a depreciable asset is shorter than its physical life and is:

(i) Predetermined by legal or contractual limits, such as the expiry dates of related leases.
(ii) ……………. ” In the fact pattern, one of the factors in determining the useful life of the leasehold improvements is the expiry date of the related lease. The expected utility of the leasehold improvements should be consistent with the reasonably certain lease term as defined in AS-19. Therefore, the useful life of the leasehold improvements is 5 years.

View 2: The expected economic life of the leasehold improvements is used as the useful life.

In the fact pattern, the lessee depreciates the leasehold improvements over 7 years, since it expects to extend the lease to 10 years and utilise the leasehold improvements for 7 years.

Reasons for view 2

AS-6.20 requires “the depreciable amount of an asset shall be allocated on a systematic basis over its useful life”.

AS-6.3.3 defines ‘useful life’ as either:

(a) The period over which a depreciable asset is expected to be used by the enterprise; or

In addition, AS-6.7 states that:

“The useful life of a depreciable asset is shorter than its physical life and is:

(i) Predetermined by legal or contractual limits, such as the expiry dates of related leases.”

The useful life of the leasehold improvements is based on the ‘expected utility’ (AS-6.3.3). To determine the expected utility, the lessee would consider ‘all the factors’ in AS-6.7. While 6.7 should be considered, the factor regarding ‘expected usage of the asset’ in AS-6.3.3 is equally relevant in determining the useful life. The condition contained in AS-6.7 reflects the necessity to consider the existence of legal or other externally imposed limitations on an asset’s useful life. However, in the fact pattern, the ability to extend the lease term is within the control of the lessee and is at market rates so there are no significant costs or impediments to renewal.

The lease term as defined in AS-19 does not include the extension period because the lessee is not ‘reasonably certain’ of extending the lease. However, a different threshold is used in AS-6 for the determination of the useful life, which is the period over which the lessee expects to use the leasehold improvements. The term ‘expected usage of the asset’ for the determination of useful life of an asset indicates a lower threshold than the ‘reasonably certain’ of extending the lease threshold for including the extension period in the lease term for accounting purposes. As a result, although the accounting lease term is 5 years, the leasehold improvements is depreciated over the period over which the lessee expects to use the assets (as it expects to extend the lease to 10 years), which is 7 years.

In accordance with AS-6.23, if the assessment of useful life changes as a result of the lessee not expecting to exercise the lease renewal option, the unamortised depreciable amount should be charged over the revised remaining useful life.

The author believes that view 1 is conservative and fits into the concept of prudence enshrined in Indian GAAP framework. On the other hand view 2 is also justified on the basis of AS-6.

levitra

GAP in GAAP ESOP issued by parent to the employees of unlisted subsidiary

fiogf49gjkf0d
The accounting for employee share-based payments is determined by two authoritative pronouncements, namely, SEBI’s Employee Stock Option Scheme and Employee Stock Purchase Scheme Guidelines, 1999, and ICAI’s guidance note on Employee Share-based Payments. Clause 3 of the SEBI’s guidelines states as follows: “these Guidelines shall apply to any company whose shares are listed on any recognised stock exchange in India.” Unlike SEBI guidelines, ICAI’s guidance note applies to all reporting entities whether listed or unlisted.

Consider a scenario, where a parent company issues ESOP’s to employees of its subsidiary. The question is who records the ESOP cost; the parent, the subsidiary or no one. As per the SEBI guidelines (which are applicable to all listed entities) the parent recognises the ESOP compensation cost because under the SEBI guidelines, an employee of a subsidiary is treated as an employee of the parent company for this purpose. Thus, if the parent of a listed subsidiary issues ESOPs to the subsidiaries employees, the listed subsidiary should not recognise the ESOP expense. As per the SEBI guidelines, the parent company is required to record the compensation cost. Typically, the requirement with respect to the parent recognising the ESOP compensation cost can be enforced only when the parent itself is a listed entity in India within the jurisdiction of SEBI. However, it cannot be enforced when the parent is in a foreign jurisdiction or is in India but is an unlisted entity.

In contrast to the SEBI guidelines, the ICAI guidance note provides as follows:

“10. An enterprise should recognise as an expense (except where service received qualifies to be included as a part of the cost of an asset) the services received in an equity-settled employee share-based payment plan when it receives the services, with a corresponding credit to an appropriate equity account, say, ‘ Stock Options Outstanding Account’. This account is transitional in nature as it gets ultimately transferred to another equity account such as share capital, securities premium account and/or general reserve as recommended in the subsequent paragraphs of this Guidance Note.

The underlying principle of the ICAI guidance note is that the ESOP related compensation costs should be accounted for as expense in the books of the enterprise whose employees receive the ESOP’s.

Further, paragraph 4 of the ICAI’s guidance note states as below:

“For the purposes of this Guidance Note, a transfer of shares or stock options of an enterprise by its shareholders to its employees is also an employee share-based payment, unless the transfer is clearly for a purpose other than payment for services rendered to the enterprise. This also applies to transfers of shares or stock options of the parent of the enterprise, or shares or stock options of another enterprise in the same group as the enterprise, to the employees of the enterprise”.

It can be inferred from the basic principle discussed in paragraphs above, that the ICAI guidance note requires a subsidiary company to recognise share based options granted by the parent company to its employees, even if the subsidiary does not have to settle the cost by making a payment to the parent. This position is consistent with the requirements of International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS). Under IFRS,the recipient of services will record the cost of those services or benefits.

What is the issue?

In India, legislation prevails over the requirements of the accounting standards and other accounting promulgations such as the guidance notes issued by ICAI. Thus, SEBI guidelines would prevail over the ICAI guidance notes. Therefore, a listed subsidiary will not record ESOP costs, if the ESOPs were issued by the parent company to the employees of the subsidiary company.

Now, in the above example, what happens if the subsidiary is not a listed company in India. In such a case, SEBI guidelines are not applicable to unlisted companies but ICAI guidance note would certainly apply. When the ESOPs are issued by the parent company to the employees of the subsidiary, is it fair to require expensing of ESOP compensation cost in the case of an unlisted subsidiary, but not in the case of a listed subsidiary?

Under the circumstances, the author’s view is that “what is good for the goose, should be good for the gander”. In other words, the author does not support different accounting consequences purely on the basis of the listing status of the reporting entity. Thus, the author believes that the unlisted subsidiary company may not record ESOP compensation cost. This view can also be supported by the fact that the unlisted subsidiary company does not have any settlement obligation with the parent company.

In practice, there is diversity and it is noticed that there are some unlisted subsidiary companies which have recognised the ESOP compensation costs whilst other unlisted subsidiary companies have not. One challenge faced by the subsidiary companies when they record the ESOP compensation cost is with respect to the utilisation of capital reserves. Since the shares issued under the ESOP are of the parent company, in the absence of a re-charge by the parent to the subsidiary, the corresponding credit will be given to the capital reserve (akin to an investment made by the parent company in the subsidiary). This reserve will accumulate over the years. However, the utilisation or remittance of this reserve back to its parent company in the future, would not be easy in the light of restrictions under Companies Act, 1956, the Income Tax Act, 1961, FEMA, etc.

Conclusion

At this juncture, there is an accounting arbitrage available to unlisted subsidiary companies because of different accounting rules under the SEBI guidelines and the ICAI guidance note. For the future, SEBI should withdraw its guidelines, so that the arbitrage is removed and the ICAI guidance note which is based on true and fair view principles and aligned to IFRS (in this case) should be given preference.

levitra

GAP in GAAP— Deferred Tax Liability (DTL) on Special Reserves

fiogf49gjkf0d
Under section 36 (1)(viii) of the Income-tax Act, certain specified entities such as a banking company or a housing finance corporation carrying on the business of providing long term finance for industrial or agricultural development or development of infrastructure or housing in India are allowed a special deduction. The deduction shall not exceed 20% of the profits, computed under the head “Profits and gains of business or profession”. For claiming the deduction, an equivalent amount is transferred from the profits to special reserves. Where the aggregate of the amounts carried to such reserve account exceeds twice the amount of the paid up share capital and of the general reserves of the entity, no allowance will be available in respect of such excess.

Any amount subsequently withdrawn from the special reserves (mentioned above) created to claim deduction u/s. 36(1)(viii), shall be deemed to be the profits and gains of business or profession and chargeable to income-tax as the income of the previous year in which such amount is withdrawn.

The accounting debate is whether DTL needs to be created in respect of the special reserves created u/s. 36(1)(viii). This question has been asked frequently to the Expert Advisory Committee and the Institute of Chartered Accountants of India.

It may be noted that under AS 22 Accounting for Taxes on Income, “Timing differences are the differences between taxable income and accounting income for a period that originate in one period and are capable of reversal in one or more subsequent periods.”

The Expert Advisory Committee (EAC) has always held the view that creation of a special reserve creates difference between accounting income and taxable income in the period in which special reserve is created. Further, this difference is capable of reversal in the period in which the special reserve is utilised or withdrawn, since the amount utilised/ withdrawn would be treated as taxable income in that year under the Income-tax Act. In support of its position, the EAC states in its opinion that deferred taxes are measured either under full provision method or partial provision method. Under the full provision method, deferred taxes are recognised and measured for all timing differences without considering assumptions regarding future probability, future capital expenditure, etc, with the exception of applying the prudence principles for recognising deferred tax assets. Under the partial provision method, the tax effect of timing differences which will not reverse for some considerable period ahead are excluded. However, this involves considerable subjective judgment and therefore AS-22, has been worded based on the full provision method. In other words, the EAC feels that DTL should be created on the special reserves, as deferred taxes are required for all timing differences (subject to application of prudence in case of deferred tax assets) which are capable of reversal. Whether those timing differences actually reverse or not in the subsequent periods is not relevant for this assessment.

Most of the querists believe that creation of DTL on special reserves will not reflect a true and fair picture of the entity’s financial statements, as experience over many years is clearly indicative that the special reserves have not been utilised by most entities as there was no need and in view of the tax impact. In other words, the querists believe that creation of DTL on special reserves is merely a theoretical construct, and distorts the true and fair picture of the entity’s financial statements by putting in the financial statements a fictitious liability.

This is an impasse between the preparers of financial statements and the ICAI/regulators that has carried on for several years. The author has a different take on the subject, which is to look at the requirements of Ind-AS/IFRS on this issue, since those are the applicable standards in the near future. This may probably end the impasse.

First let’s look at Para 52A and 52B of Ind-AS. 52A:

In some jurisdictions, income taxes are payable at a higher or lower rate if part or all of the net profit or retained earnings is paid out as a dividend to shareholders of the entity. In some other jurisdictions, income taxes may be refundable or payable if part or all of the net profit or retained earnings is paid out as a dividend to shareholders of the entity.
In these circumstances, current and deferred tax assets and liabilities are measured at the tax rate applicable to undistributed profits.

52B: In the circumstances described in paragraph 52A, the income tax consequences of dividends are recognised when a liability to pay the dividend is recognised. The income tax consequences of dividends are more directly linked to past transactions or events than to distributions to owners.
Example illustrating paragraphs 52A and 52B
The following example deals with the measurement of current and deferred tax assets and liabilities for an entity in a jurisdiction where income taxes are payable at a higher rate on undistributed profits (50%) with an amount being refundable when profits are distributed. The tax rate on distributed profits is 35%. At the end of the reporting period, 31st December 20X1, the entity does not recognise a liability for dividends proposed or declared after the reporting period. As a result, no dividends are recognised in the year 20X1. Taxable income for 20X1 is Rs. 100,000. The net taxable temporary difference for the year 20X1 is Rs. 40,000.

The entity recognises a current tax liability and a current income tax expense of Rs. 50,000. No asset is recognised for the amount potentially recoverable as a result of future dividends. The entity also recognises a deferred tax liability and deferred tax expense of Rs. 20,000 (Rs. 40,000 at 50%) representing the income taxes that the entity will pay when it recovers or settles the carrying amounts of its assets and liabilities based on the tax rate applicable to undistributed profits.

Subsequently, on 15th March 20X2 the entity recognises dividends of Rs. 10,000 from previous operating profits as a liability. On 15th March 20X2, the entity recognises the recovery of income taxes of Rs. 1,500 (15% of the dividends recognised as a liability) as a current tax asset and as a reduction of current income tax expense for 20X2.

Let’s convert the above example to the tax regime prevailing in India, where a company pays higher tax rate on distributed profits. The company has a 31st March year end. Assume that the tax rate for distributed profits is higher than that for undistributed profits; say 40% and 30% respectively. A dividend of Rs. 500 was declared in April 20X4, payable in May 20X4. Under Ind-AS, no liability will be recognised for the dividend at 31st March 20X4. The PBT is Rs. 3,000. The tax rate applicable to undistributed profits should be applied, because the tax rate for distributed profit is used only where the obligation to pay dividends has been recognised. So the current income tax expense for year end 31st March 20X4 is Rs. 900 (3,000 x 30%). For year 20X4- 20X5, a liability of Rs. 500 will be recognized for dividends payable. An additional tax liability of Rs. 50 (500 x 10%) is also recognised as a current tax liability.

The above examples are equally applicable in the case of distribution of special reserves created u/s. 36(1)(viii). In simple words, current tax liability is recognised for special reserves when they are distributed/ withdrawn, and no DTL is recognised when the special reserve is created.

In light of the above requirements of Ind -AS, the author believes that the issue of creating DTL on special reserves under AS-22 may be kept at abeyance. Rather the focus should be on understanding the right interpretation under Ind-AS 12. Even under Indian GAAP, the author believes that no DTL should be created on special reserves, in as much, no tax liability is provided under existing Indian GAAP, on general reserves or profit and loss surplus, that are subsequently distributed and on which dividend distribution tax is paid.

GAP in GAAP— Acquisition of a Company with a Negative Net Worth

fiogf49gjkf0d
Consider Company X with assets of Rs. 120 and liabilities of Rs. 220, and consequently a negative net worth of Rs. 100, which comprises of accumulated losses of Rs. 120 and share capital of Rs. 20. Company Y acquires 51% shares of Company X, directly from promoters, for a consideration of Rs. 25. Accordingly, Company Y would recognize in the consolidated financial statements (CFS) a net liability of Rs100, goodwill of Rs. 76 and a negative minority interest (MI) of Rs. 49. The question is how does Company Y account for the negative MI of Rs. 49?

View 1: The negative MI of Rs. 49 is reduced againstthe parent’s reserves in the CFS.
The author believes that it may not be appropriate to record the unabsorbed losses on MI at the date of acquisition in the parent’s reserves in CFS. Recording unabsorbed minority losses in the parent’s reserves in CFS would carry a presumption that the parent always owned the entity. This presumption is obviously not correct and hence this view is not tenable.

View 2: The negative MI of Rs. 49 is included in goodwill on acquisition
In accordance with paragraph 13 of AS 21, goodwill is determined as follows

(a) the cost to the parent of its investment in each subsidiary and the parent’s portion of equity of each subsidiary, at the date on which investment in each subsidiary is made, should be eliminated;

(b) any excess of the cost to the parent of its investment in a subsidiary over the parent’s portion of equity of the subsidiary, at the date on which investment in the subsidiary is made, should be described as goodwill to be recognised as an asset in the consolidated financial statements;

The parent’s portion of the equity at the date of acquisition should also include the MI losses (since the minority does not absorb it the parent will have to absorb it). Thus on the basis of the above MI losses should also be included in goodwill. The total goodwill should therefore be Rs. 125. This view seems an acceptable alternative.

View 3: The negative MI of Rs. 49 is included in MI
Paragraph 26 of AS 21 Consolidated Financial Statements states: “The losses applicable to the minority in a consolidated subsidiary may exceed the minority interest in the equity of the subsidiary. The excess, and any further losses applicable to the minority, are adjusted against the majority interest except to the extent that the minority has a binding obligation to, and is able to, make good the losses. If the subsidiary subsequently reports profits, all such profits are allocated to the majority interest until the minority’s share of losses previously absorbed by the majority has been recovered.” Paragraph 13(e) states: Minority interests in the net assets consist of: (i) the amount of equity attributable to minorities at the date on which investment in a subsidiary is made; and (ii) the minorities’ share of movements in equity since the date the parent subsidiary relationship came in existence.

Paragraph 26, prohibits the recognition of negative MI, unless there is a binding obligation by the minority to make good the losses. Thus no negative MI can be recognised in the CFS. However a careful reading of paragraph 13(e) suggests that losses at the date of acquisition relating to minority are attributable to minority.

Thus a negative MI can be recorded at the date of acquisition. However, losses subsequent to the acquisition should not be attributed to the MI.

View 4: The negative MI of Rs. 49 is ignored
It is not possible to ignore the negative MI, as the balance sheet would not tally. Hence this view is ruled out.

The author’s opinion is that View 2 & View 3 are appropriate under the circumstances.

levitra

GAPS in GAAP — Guidance Note on Accounting for Real Estate Transactions (Revised 2012) is in no-man’s land

Introduction

On account of the diverse practices, the ICAI felt it necessary to issue a revised Guidance Note titled Guidance Note on Accounting for Real Estate Transactions (Revised 2012) to harmonise the accounting practices followed by real estate companies in India. The revised Guidance Note should be applied to all projects in real estate which are commenced on or after April 1, 2012 and also to projects which have already commenced but where revenue is being recognised for the first time on or after April 1, 2012. An enterprise may choose to apply the revised Guidance Note from an earlier date, provided it applies it to all transactions which commenced or were entered into on or after such earlier date. The revised Guidance Note (2012) supersedes the Guidance Note on Recognition of Revenue by Real Estate Developers, issued by the ICAI in 2006, when this Guidance Note is applied as above. Though apparently the Guidance Note on accounting for real estate transactions is drafted in a simple and lucid manner, but when implemented, can throw a lot of implementation issues. Particularly, there are several requirements in the Guidance Note, which some may argue conflict with the accounting standards notified under the Companies (Accounting Standards) Rules.

 Scope of the Guidance Note

One of the big challenges is with respect to scope of the Guidance Note, which is not very clear on several aspects. The Guidance Note scopes in development and sale of residential and commercial units. Would that mean that if a customer were to hire a real estate developer to construct a villa on the land owned by the customer and in accordance with the customer’s specification, that transaction would be covered under the Guidance Note? In the author’s view, this seems like a typical construction contract, to which AS-7 and not the Guidance Note would apply. The Guidance Note applies to construction-type contracts, for example, construction of a multi-unit apartment to be sold to many buyers. It is pertinent to note that though percentage of completion is applied under AS-7 and the Guidance Note, there are other significant differences which would give different accounting results. Consider another example. A real estate developer sells villas to customers. It enters into two agreements with each buyer: one for sale of land and other for construction of building. Can the company treat these two agreements separately and recognise revenue accordingly?

In a practical scenario, three possibilities may exist with regard to construction of villa. These possibilities and likely views are:

(1) Customer owns land and it hires real estate developer to do the construction according to its specifications. In this case, the arrangement seems like a typical construction contract to which AS-7 and not the Guidance Note will apply.

(2) Real estate developer sells land and constructed villa together as part of one arrangement in a manner that customer cannot get one without the other. In this case, it seems appropriate that the developer will apply Guidance Note to land and building together.

(3) Real estate developer sells land. The buyer has an option of getting construction done either from the developer or any other third party. Both the land sale and construction element are quoted/ sold at their independent fair values.

The Guidance Note does not specifically deal with this scenario. However, the author believes that the more appropriate view will be to treat the sale of land and construction of building as two separate contracts and apply revenue recognition principles accordingly. The Guidance Note applies to redevelopment of existing buildings and structures. This scope is very confusing. For example, very often existing housing societies may ask a developer to reconstruct a property, with detailed specification on structure and design and the right to change that specification before or during the construction. The developer (who is hired like any other contractor) in return is remunerated by a fixed amount or a part of the constructed property or land. The author’s view is that in these circumstances, AS-7 should apply, rather than the Guidance Note. This is because the said contract is a construction contract which is covered under AS-7 and not a construction-type contract which is covered under the Guidance Note. But consider another example of a SRA project in Mumbai. The real estate developer evacuates existing tenants, constructs a huge property to be sold to customers, and adjacently constructs a small building that will house the existing tenants. All through the builder acts as a principal. In such a scenario the Guidance Note will apply.

Can the Guidance Note be applied by analogy to construction and sale of elevators or windmills, etc.? Therefore, applying the guidance note by analogy, can entities manufacturing elevators or windmills, which are of a standardised nature, use the percentage of completion method? The scope of the Guidance Note is very narrow.

The Guidance Note should not be applied by analogy to any other activity other than real estate development. Depending on the facts and circumstances, either AS-7 or AS-9 should apply to construction and sale of elevators, aircraft, windmills or huge engineering equipments. The Guidance Note scopes in joint development agreements, but provides no further guidance on how joint development agreements are accounted for. Joint development agreements may take various forms. The accounting for joint development agreement will be driven by facts and circumstances. They could be joint venture agreements or they could represent the typical scenario where land development rights are transferred to the real estate developer by the land owner, and the legal transfers take place much later, for reasons of stamp duty or indirect taxes. Transfer of development rights on land is like effectively transferring the land itself. Where development rights are transferred, the author has seen mixed accounting practices. Some developers treat the transaction as a barter transaction and record the development rights acquired as land purchased with the corresponding obligation to pay the landowner at a future date. The payment to the landowner could either be in a fixed amount or a fixed percentage of revenue or a portion of the constructed property. Many developers do not account for the barter transaction.

A third option is to record the acquisition of the development rights at the cost of constructed property to be provided to the land owner. This option can be justified on the basis that the Guidance Note requires TDRs to be recorded at lower of net book value or fair value. Though there is no impact on the net profit on the overall contract, whichever method is followed, it would impact the grossing up of revenue and costs. It will also result in the grossing up of the balance sheet. Further though the overall profit is the same over the project construction period, due to the manner of computing POCM, year-to-year profit may vary under the three options. For better clarity the three options are enumerated below. (Figures in all tables are in CU=Currency Unit, unless otherwise stated)

Balance sheet

Particulars Option 1 Option 2 Option3
Share capital 100 100 100
Reserves 500 500 500
Equity 600 600 600
Loan liability 2,000 2,000 2,000
Liability to landowners
(to be paid by way of
transfer of constructed
property — long term) 2,000 1,500
Total liabilities 2,000 4,000 3,500
Total funds 2,600 4,600 4,100
Land (acquired thru JDA) 2,000 1,500
Other assets 2,600 2,600 2,600
Total assets 2,600 4,600 4,100
Debt/equity ratio 3.33 6.66 5.83
Particulars Option 1 Option 2 Option 3
Sale of flats to outsiders  8,000 8,000 8,000
Transfer of flat to
land owners 2,000 1,500
Total revenue 8,000 10,000 9,500
Land cost 2,000 1,500
Construction cost 7,500 7,500 7,500
Total cost 7,500 9,500 9,000
Profit 500 500 500
% profit on turnover 6.25% 5% 5.26%


Is the Guidance Note in conformity with the Companies (Accounting Standards) Rules?

AS-9, Revenue Recognition, applies to sale of goods and services. AS-7, Construction Contracts applies to construction contracts which are defined as “contracts specifically negotiated for the construction of an asset or a combination of assets that are closely interrelated or interdependent in terms of their design, technology and function or their ultimate purpose of use”. In respect of transactions of real estate which are in substance similar to delivery of goods, principles enunciated in Accounting Standard (AS) 9, Revenue Recognition, are applied. For example, sale of plots of land without any development would be covered by the principles of AS-9. These transactions are treated similar to delivery of goods and the revenues, costs and profits are recognised when the goods are delivered. In case of real estate sales, which are in substance construction-type contracts, a two-step approach is followed for accounting purposes.

Firstly, it is assessed whether significant risks and rewards are transferred to the buyer. The seller usually enters into an agreement for sale with the buyer at initial stages of construction. This agreement for sale is also considered to have the effect of transferring all significant risks and rewards of ownership to the buyer. After satisfaction of step one, the second step is applied, which involves the application of the POCM. Once the seller has transferred all the significant risks and rewards to the buyer, any acts on the real estate performed by the seller are, in substance, performed on behalf of the buyer in the manner similar to a contractor. Accordingly, revenue in such cases is recognised by applying the POCM. Once the revenue recognition conditions as per the Guidance Note are fulfilled, the POCM is to be applied mandatorily. In circumstances where the revenue recognition conditions are fulfilled, completed contract method is not permissible.

Accounting standards are notified under the Companies Accounting Standard Rules. The standards that deal with revenue recognition contract are AS-7 & AS-9. Accordingly the entire population of revenue contracts should either fall under AS -7 or AS-9. For example, a strict interpretation of a construction contract under AS-7 will lead one to the conclusion that a real estate sale is a product sale rather than a construction contract. By carving a new category in the Guidance Note, namely, in substance construction contract, for purposes of real estate development; some may argue that this Guidance Note falls in no -man’s-land and is not in accordance with the law. This line of thinking may be of particular interest to private companies that may find completed contract method more attractive for tax reasons.

Volatility in earnings

The Guidance Note imposes several conditions before a company can start applying the percentage of completion method on the real estate project. One of the conditions is that at least 25% of the construction and development costs should have been completed. One interesting aspect of the Guidance Note is that land cost is not included to determine if the 25% construction cost trigger is met. However, once the revenue recognition trigger is met, all costs including land cost is added to the project cost to determine percentage completion and the corresponding revenue and costs. This is likely to bring about a lot of volatility in the reported revenue and profit numbers. For example, let’s assume that land cost is 60% and development cost is 40%. As soon as 25% development cost is incurred, POCM commences. In this example, 70% of the costs (land cost of 60% and 25% of 40 on development), and corresponding revenue would be recognised at the point 25% development cost criterion is met. This would result in significant spike in the revenue and profit numbers. One of the main criticisms of the completed contract method is that it resulted in lumpy accounting. The manner in which POCM is applied as per the revised Guidance Note, it would fall into the same trap.

The examples below will explain more clearly how the revised Guidance Note results in volatility and how one could have avoided the volatility in the pre-revised Guidance Note.

RE Ltd. undertakes construction of a new real estate project having 20,000 square feet saleable area. The project will take 2 years to complete. Half the project is sold on day 1, and there are no further sales. All critical approvals are received upfront and all other POCM conditions are fulfilled at the end of Year 1. The construction and development cost is evenly spread in the two years at CU 150 million each. The total sale value of the units sold is Rs.400 million. Assume 50% amount is realised on all executed contracts and there are no defaults from customer side.

Particulars Year 1 Year 2
Area sold (sq.ft) 10,000 10,000
Estimated land cost (a) 300 300
Estimated construction cost (b) 300 300
Total estimated cost (a+b) 600 600
Actual cost incurred on land (c) 300 NIL
Actual additional construction cost (d) 150 150
Actual cost incurred on cumulative
basis (c+d) 450 600
Total sale consideration as per
executed agreements 400 400

Revenue as per POCM under revised GN

Particulars Year 1 Year 2
Total estimated project cost 600 600
Actual cost incurred 450 600
Stage of completion (% completion) 75 100
Cumulative revenue to be recognised
(400 x % completion) 300 400
Revenue for the period (a) 300 100
Land cost charged to P&L (b)
(300 x 10,000/20,000) 150
Construction cost charged to P&L (c)
(Actual construction cost incurred x
10,000/20,000) 75 75
Particulars Year 1 Year 2
Profit for the period (a-b-c) 75 25
Inventory — land cost 150 150
Inventory — construction cost of
unsold area 75 150
Total inventory 225 300

As stated earlier, consider that under the revised Guidance Note land cost is not included to determine the revenue trigger; but once the revenue trigger is achieved, land cost is included to determine percentage completion and the corresponding revenue and costs. As one can see in the above table this Guidance Note results in significant volatility in the revenue and profit recognised in Year 1 and Year 2, though the construction activity was evenly spread in the two years. This is because the land costs and the associated revenues get recognised in Year 1.

Revenue as per POCM under pre-revised GN

Particulars Year 1 Year 2
Total estimated project cost
(excluding land) 300 300
Actual cost incurred (excluding land) 150 300
Stage of completion (% completion) 50% 100%
Cumulative revenue to be recognised
(400 x % completion) 200 400
Revenue for the period (a) 200 200
Land cost charged to P&L (b)
(300 x 10,000/20,000 x % completion) 75 75
Construction cost charged to P&L (c)
(Actual construction cost incurred x
10,000/20,000) 75 75
Profit for the period (a-b-c) 50 50
Inventory — Land cost 225 150
Inventory — construction cost of
unsold area 75 150
Inventory 300 300

In the pre-revised Guidance Note the practice many companies followed was to allocate the land cost and revenue proportionately over the development activity. As one can see in the above table, one of the practices under the pre-revised Guidance Note results in a more stable recognition of revenues and profits. This is because the land cost and corresponding revenues are recognised in proportion to the development activity.

Revenue as per POCM if only 24% construction is completed under revised GN

Particulars Year 1 Year 2
Total estimated project cost 600 600
Actual cost incurred 372 600
Stage of completion for revenue
recognition threshold* 24% 100%
Stage of completion (% completion) NIL 100%
Cumulative revenue to be recognised
(400 x % completion) NIL 400
Revenue for the period (a) NIL 400
Land cost charged to P&L (b)
(300 x 10,000/20,000) NIL 150
Construction cost charged to P&L (c)
(Actual construction cost incurred x
10,000/20,000) NIL 150
Profit for the period (a-b-c) NIL 100
Inventory — land cost 300 150
Inventory — construction cost
(sold — no revenue recognised
+ unsold area) 72 150
Total inventory 372 300

Assumptions

  •    Same facts as POCM example except actual construction cost incurred
  •     Assume company has incurred CU72 million of construction cost in Year 1

*    First year POC = 72/300 = 24% (actual construction cost/total estimated construction cost)

In a slightly tweaked example (as seen in the above table), assume in Year 1 that construction cost of CU 72 million is incurred. This works out to 24% of the total construction costs. Hence revenue recognition trigger is not satisfied in Year 1. All of the revenue and costs get recognised in Year 2. This example demonstrates two things. One is that the Guidance Note would result in significant volatility in the revenue and profit numbers. Secondly, this example demonstrates how a rule-based standard can be abused. For example, by incurring a little more cost and crossing the 25% threshold, the developer could have recognised significant revenue and profits in Year 1.

What is a project?

The application of the POCM under the Guidance Note is done at the project level. The Guidance Note defines project as the smallest group of units/plots/ saleable spaces which are linked with a common set of amenities in such a manner that unless the common amenities are made available and functional, these units/plots/saleable spaces cannot be put to their intended effective use. The definition of a project is very critical under the Guidance Note, because that determines when the threshold for recognising revenue is achieved and also the manner in which the POCM is applied. The definition of the term ‘project’ in the Guidance Note is somewhat nebulous. Firstly, it is defined as a smallest group of dependant units. This is followed by the following sentence in the Guidance Note “A larger venture can be split into smaller projects if the basic conditions as set out above are fulfilled. For example, a project may comprise a cluster of towers or each tower can also be designated as a project. Similarly a complete township can be a project or it can be broken down into smaller projects.” Once the term ‘project’ is defined as the smallest group of dependant units, it is not clear why the word ‘can’ is used instead of ‘should’. Does it mean that there is a limitation on how small a project can be, but no limitation on how big a project could be?

The definition is nebulous. Consider an example where two buildings are being constructed adjacent to each other. Both these buildings would have a common underground water tank that will supply water to the two buildings. As either of the building cannot be put to effective use without the water tank, the project would be the two buildings together (including the water tank). Consider another example, where each of those two buildings have their own underground water tank and other facilities and are not dependant on any common facilities. In this example, the two buildings would be treated as two different projects. Consider a third variation to the example, where each of those two buildings have their own facilities, and the only common facility is a swimming pool. In this example, judgment would be required, as to how critical the swimming pool is, to make the buildings ready for their intended use. If it is concluded that the swimming pool is not critical to the occupancy of either of those two buildings, then each of those two buildings would be separate projects. Where it is concluded that the swimming pool is critical to put the two buildings to its intended effective use, the two buildings together would constitute a project. In the example, where two buildings are being constructed adjacently, and each have their own independent facilities and are not dependant on common facilities, one may argue that there is a choice to cut this as either a project comprising two buildings or two projects comprising one building each. If this is indeed the case, the manner in which this choice is exercised is not a matter of an accounting policy choice, but rather a choice that is exercised on a project-by-project basis. In the author’s view, a company should exercise such choice at the beginning of each project and not change it subsequently.

Recognition criteria — Some practical issues

Query
For the purposes of applying the POCM risks and rewards should be transferred to the buyer. Real estate construction involves various types of risks, such as the price risks, construction risks, environmental risks, ability of the real estate developer to complete the project, political risks, etc. There could be situations where the political or environmental risks may be very significant and put to doubt the developers ability to complete the project. Clearly both under the 2006 Guidance Note and the 2012 Guidance Note revenue should not be recognised. But in normal scenario’s how much weightage one would provide to price risks in determining the transfer of risks and rewards?

Response

As per the 2006 Guidance Note, the important criteria were the legal enforceability of the contract, the transfer of price risks to the buyer and the buyer’s legal right to sell or transfer his interest in the property. In contrast paragraph 3.3 of the 2012 Guidance Note states as follows: “The point of time at which all significant risks and rewards of ownership can be considered as transferred, is required to be determined on the basis of the terms and conditions of the agreement for sale. In the case of real estate sales, the seller usually enters into an agreement for sale with the buyer at initial stages of construction. This agreement for sale is also considered to have the effect of transferring all significant risks and rewards of ownership to the buyer, provided the agreement is legally enforceable and subject to the satisfaction of conditions which signify transferring of significant risks and rewards even though the legal title is not transferred or the possession of the real estate is not given to the buyer.” As can be seen the 2012 Guidance Note is nebulous, and is not explicit like the 2006 Guidance Note which clearly sets out the price risk as being most critical to the transfer of significant risks and rewards. At this stage it is not clear how this difference will impact accounting of the real estate sales. For example, a company may decide the construction, environment and regulatory risk as being more critical than the price risk. In those circumstances, would the company apply the completed contract method instead of the POCM? Therefore this will be a significant area of judgment, and could lead to diversity in practice if companies interpret this term differently. However, if a project has become highly uncertain because of political and environmental issues, revenue should not be recognised under either Guidance Note.

Query

Is payment of stamp duty and registration of the real estate agreement necessary to start applying POCM?

Response

In certain jurisdictions, one needs registered docu-ments for the purposes of obtaining a bank loan. In other cases, a customer may decide to register the documents later at the time of possession to save on the interest element on the stamp duty amount. It is important to understand this. POCM can be applied only when there is a legally enforceable contract. It is a matter of legal interpretation and the applicable legislation, whether an unregistered document is legally enforceable. If the agreement is legally enforceable, POCM can be applied. If the agreement is not legally enforceable, POCM cannot be applied. The same also holds true in the case of MOU or letter of allotment given by the builder to the customer instead of a complete legal agreement. The question to be answered invariably is whether the arrangement is legally enforceable.

Query

Very often real estate companies to protect the valuation of the property impose a lock-in restriction on a buyer for a reasonable period, which generally does not extend beyond the project completion period. Would lock-in restrictions preclude the application of the POCM till such time the lock-in rights exist?

Response
In the author’s view, such reasonable restrictive provision does not materially affect the buyer’s legal right. Accordingly, it can be argued that in such instances risks and rewards are transferred to the buyer. Hence POCM can be applied.

Query
In rare cases, real estate developers provide price guards to customers as an incentive to buy properties. For example, a guarantee is provided that should the real estate developer sell the property to subsequent buyers at a rate lower than the previous buyer, the real estate developer would reimburse the previous buyer for the fall in price. Would this preclude application of the POCM?

Response

If these restrictions are substantive, then it may be argued that price risks are not transferred and hence POCM should not be applied. In some situations the price guards may not be substantive, for example, a guarantee by the developer that subsequent sales would not be made at a price lower than 40% charged to the previous buyer may be irrelevant in a rising property market. In such cases POCM can be applied. In the author’s view if there are repurchase agreements or commitments, or put-and- call options, between the developer and the customer, which are substantive in nature, POCM cannot be applied in those circumstances.

Query

One of the conditions for POCM is environment clearance and clear land title. In few cases, this could be a highly judgmental area. Auditors may have difficulty in auditing the same.

Response

Past experience has been that some major projects were stalled mid-way in India, because of lack of environmental clearance, or the land title was questionable. The problem is further compounded because of myriads of clearances and complicated legislations. As an auditor, one would look at seeking clarity from the in-house legal department or an external law firm. Banks generally conduct due diligence on these projects before approving loan to the developer and the customer. Clearance of the project by various banks may provide additional evidence.

Query

One of the conditions for POCM is the 25% completion of construction and development costs. Whether borrowing cost capitalised would be included to determine if this 25% threshold is achieved?

Response

There is some confusion on this. In paragraph 2.2 of the Guidance Note borrowing cost is treated as a distinct category separate from construction and development costs. But paragraph 2.5 lists down borrowing cost as construction and development costs. Based on paragraph 2.2 borrowing costs will not be included to determine the trigger. Based on paragraph 2.5 borrowing costs will be included to determine the trigger. The best way to resolve this anomaly is to include borrowing costs relating to construction and development costs and exclude proportionate borrowing costs on land to determine the trigger.

The other issues around borrowing cost relate to allocation of borrowing cost and which borrowing cost qualify for capitalisation for the purposes of determining project cost and corresponding revenue. The EAC had earlier opined that borrowing cost relating to security deposit for the purposes of acquiring land or other assets is not eligible for capitalisation, because security deposit is not a project cost. Another question that arises when determining project cost for calculating POCM is whether proportionate borrowing cost on land should be included. One view is that land is ready for its intended use when acquired and hence borrowing cost should not be capitalised. Another view is that land and building should be seen as part of a project. If the project is considered as a unit of account, borrowing cost should be capitalised on the project which includes the land component till the project is ready for its intended use. The author believes that the latter is more appropriate given the emphasis on project as the unit of account in the Guidance Note.

Query

Real estate developers enter into innovative schemes with customers. A customer may pay the entire consideration upfront of CU 100 and receive the possession of the property after 2 years of construction. Alternatively the customer pays CU 121 after 2 years on receiving the possession of the property. Would the real estate developer consider time value of money and recognise an interest expense of CU 21 and revenue of CU 121 in the former case?

Response

Well, generally interest imputation is not done under Indian GAAP.

Query

Real estate developers usually pay selling commission to various brokers for getting real estate booking. Can a real estate company include such commission in project cost to apply POCM?

Response

The Guidance Note does not explicitly deal with selling commission paid to brokers. According to paragraph 2.4 of the Guidance Note, selling costs are generally not included in construction and development cost. This suggests a company cannot include selling commission in the project cost and it will need to expense the same to P&L immediately. However, some real estate companies may argue that this view is not in accordance with paragraph 20 of AS-7. Since the Guidance Note refers to AS-7 for application of POCM, implication of its paragraph 20 should also be considered. According to this paragraph “costs that relate directly to a contract and which are incurred in securing the contract are also included as part of the contract costs if they can be separately identified and measured reliably and it is probable that the contract will be obtained.” This is one more instance where the Guidance Note conflicts notified accounting standards. The ICAI should clarify this issue.

Query

With respect to onerous contract, at what level would the developer evaluate onerous contract – is it at the individual contract level or project level?

Response

At the project level, the overall project may be profitable, as the profitable contracts may outnumber the loss -making contracts. If the unit of account was the individual contract, then all contracts that are loss making, will require a provision for onerous contract. The Guidance Note requires such evaluation to be done at the project level rather than on each individual contract. Some may argue that this requirement of the Guidance Note is in contravention of the requirements of the notified accounting standard, namely, AS-29 which requires the provision to be set up at the individual contract level.

Query

How is warranty costs accounted for?

Response

Warranty costs are included in project cost. In practice there are different ways in which warranty costs are treated in the application of the POCM. Warranty costs are unique in the sense that they are incurred after the project is completed and can only be estimated. Firstly warranty is not a separate multiple element or service or sale of good or service. Rather it is part of the obligation of the developer to hand over the constructed property to the buyer. The author has seen mixed accounting practices for warranties. Some companies recognise warranty costs and the corresponding revenue when the project is completed, because that is the time, the warranty period effectively starts. Other companies recognise warranty costs and corresponding revenue throughout the construction period, on the basis that a percentage of the cost incurred would need reworking.

Assume the same facts as POCM example. Consider that RE also gives a 5-year warranty from water leakage and other structural defects. Based on past experience, RE estimates that it will incur warranty cost equal to 5% of total construction cost. Hence, additional warranty cost is CU 15 million (i.e., 5% of CU 300 million construction cost).

Option 1 — Consider warranty cost only when tower is handed over

Particulars Year 1 Year 2
Total estimated project cost
(excluding warranty) — (a) 600 600
Total estimated project cost
(including warranty) — (b) 615 615
Actual cost incurred
(excluding warranty provision) — (c) 450 600
Warranty provision — (d) NIL 15
Total cost including
warranty — (c + d) (e) 450 615
Stage of completion
(% completion) — (e)/(b) 73.17% 100%
Cumulative revenue to be
recognised (400 x % completion) 293 400
Revenue for the period 293 107

In this case, the company recognises warranty cost and related revenue only when tower is handed over. Warranty cost is factored in total estimated construction cost. Since no provision for warranty is made in Year 1, stage of completion is lower resulting in lower revenue being recognised in Year 1 (i.e., CU 293 million vis-à-vis CU 300 million in earlier scenario when there was no warranty cost). Lower revenue recognised in Year 1 gets recognised in Year 2 on completion of the project.

Option 2 — Consider warranty cost as and when revenue is recognised

Particulars Year 1 Year 2
Total estimated project cost
(excluding warranty) — (a) 600 600
Total estimated project cost
(including warranty) — (b) 615 615
Actual cost incurred (excluding
warranty provision) — (c) 450 600
Warranty provision (5% of actual
construction cost) — (d) 7.5 15
Total cost including warranty
(c + d) (e) 457.5 615
Stage of completion
(% completion) — (e)/(b) 74.39% 100%
Cumulative revenue to be recognised
(400 x % completion) 298 400
Revenue for the period 298 102

In this option, company follows a policy of recognising warranty as and when revenue is recognised. Hence company provides for warranty as and when work is carried out. In Year 1, company incurs actual construction cost of CU 150. Hence, it makes a warranty cost equal to 5% of actual construction cost incurred i.e., CU 7.5 in Year 1. Since warranty provision is made on an ongoing basis, stage of completion in Year 1 is higher vis -à-vis option 1. This results in higher revenue being recognised in Year 1.

Transfer of development rights

TDRs are recorded at the cost of acquisition; but interestingly in an exchange transaction, TDR is recorded either at fair market value or at the net book value of the portion of the asset given up, whichever is less. For this purpose, fair market value may be determined by reference either to the asset or portion thereof given up or to the fair market value of the rights acquired, whichever is more clearly evident. The principle of recording TDRs at lower of cost or fair value ensures that fair value gain on exchange of TDRs is not recognised in the financial statements but when fair value is lower than cost, it is recorded at fair value, so that impairment is captured upfront.

Typically under AS-26 and AS-10, recording of exchange transactions at fair market value is permitted. Under IFRS principles, exchanges that have substance are also recorded at fair market value. It is not clear why recording of exchanges with substance at fair market value is not permitted. By conjecture, the standard setters may be concerned about the possibility of abuse by recognising profits on exchanges that may not have substance.

Transactions with multiple elements

An enterprise may contract with a buyer to deliver goods or services in addition to the construction/ development of real estate. The Guidance Note gives example of property management services and rental in lieu of unoccupied premises as multiple elements. It further states that sale of decorative fittings is a separate element, but fittings which are an integral part of the unit to be delivered is not a separate element. Where there are multiple elements, the contract consideration should be split into separately identifiable components including one for the construction and delivery of real estate units. The consideration received or receivable for the contract should be allocated to each component on the basis of the fair market value of each component. For example, a real estate company in addition to the consideration on the flat, charges for property maintenance services for a period of two years, after occupancy. Such revenue is accounted for separately and over the two-year period of providing the maintenance services.

As already mentioned, the consideration received or receivable for the contract should be allocated to each component on the basis of the fair market value of each component. Such a split-up may or may not be available in the agreements, and even when available may or may not be at fair value. When the fair market value of all the components is greater than the total consideration on the contract, the Guidance Note does not specify how the discount is allocated to the various components. Under the proposed revenue recognition standard in IFRS, the allocation is done on a proportion of the relative market value. This in the author’s view is the preferred method. However, some may argue that the residual or reverse residual method may also be applied, in the absence of any prohibition in the Guidance Note. Under the residual method the entire discount is allocated on the first component and in the reverse residual method the entire discount is allocated to the last component.

Would one consider revenue on sale of parking slots as a multiple element? Unfortunately the Guidance Note does not elaborately define multiple elements. In the author’s view, parking slots are an extension of the construction and development of the real estate unit and hence should not be treated as a separate multiple element.

What about lifetime club membership fees? Will it be treated as a separate element? If the club is going to be transferred to the tenants or the housing society, then it should be treated as an extension of the real estate unit rather than a separate element. However, if the real estate developer will own and operate the club, it should be treated as a separate element.

Conclusion

As discussed at several places in this article, there are too many loose ends and too many matters of conflict between the notified accounting standards and this Guidance Note. Some may argue that the Guidance Note is ultra vires the law. These matters need to be appropriately addressed by the ICAI. In the author’s view, an appropriate response would have been to participate in the standard-setting process of the IASB; particularly with respect to the development of the new IFRS standard on revenue recognition, which requires the application of the POCM on real estate contracts.

GAP in GAAP – Accounting for Associates

fiogf49gjkf0d
Background: An entity is an investor in an associate in accordance with AS 23 Accounting for Investments in Associates in Consolidated Financial Statements. The investor accounts for its interest in the associate using the equity method in AS 23. The investor enters into a lease agreement with the associate, classified as a finance lease under AS 19 Leases. The gain on the lease transaction exceeds the carrying amount of the investor’s investment in the associate.

The author notes two views for the accounting for the gain elimination:

View A:
The gain from the transaction is eliminated only to the extent that it does not exceed the carrying amount of the investor’s interest in the associate. This view is by analogy to AS 23.18 where an entity’s share of losses of an associate ceases to be recognised when the investment carrying amount is reduced to zero. Paragraph 18 of AS 23 states “If, under the equity method, an investor’s share of losses of an associate equals or exceeds the carrying amount of the investment, the investor ordinarily discontinues recognising the share of further losses and the investment is reported at nil value.”

View B: All the investor’s share of the gain is eliminated. This view is supported by AS 23.13, which states that gains/losses from transactions are recognised only to the extent of the unrelated investors’ interests in the associate. Paragraph 13 states “In using equity method for accounting for investment in an associate, unrealised profits and losses resulting from transactions between the investor and the associate should be eliminated to the extent of the investor’s interest in the associate.”

Author supports View B. The second question therefore is – how should the gains to be eliminated, in excess of the carrying amount of the interest in the associate? Two methods are identified:

Method 1:
As deferred income

Method 2: As a deduction from the related asset recognised by the investor.

Author supports Method 1, because ‘deferred income’ shows the nature of the eliminated gains and it would enable users to readily obtain information about the amount of eliminated gains in excess of the investors interest in the associate.

Author’s Recommendation:
Author considers that AS 23 lacks guidance on the accounting for the elimination of any gain in excess of the carrying amount of the investment. The Institute of Chartered Accountants of India may consider amending AS 23 via a narrow-scope amendment to add specific guidance on how to account for the corresponding entry for the eliminated gain in excess of the carrying amount of the investor’s interest in the associate.

levitra

GAP in GAAP— Fair Value of Revenue

fiogf49gjkf0d
Background

Company A sells handsets—either for upfront cash or for payment in installments. Until recently, its pricing was:

• Rs. 810 for upfront cash; or
• 36 monthly installments of Rs. 25 (total Rs. 900), implying an interest rate of 7% pa on the cash price of Rs. 810.

New competitors that sell handsets for cash but not on credit have entered the market—this has led to a drop in the cash sale price to Rs. 621 but A still makes most of its sales on credit on the same terms as before (i.e. Rs. 25 a month for 36 months).

This gives an imputed interest rate of 29% pa on the installment contract relative to the new cash price of Rs. 621. A believes this implied interest rate is unreasonably high. It sells some receivables on a non-recourse basis at yields approximating 7-8% pa.

How should A measure its revenues from handsets?

Options under Indian GAAP

View 1-The fair value of the consideration is the cash sale price (i.e. Revenue Rs. 621)

Since the handsets sold have a cash alternative price that is clearly determinable, revenue should be recognised at this price. In addition, even if the fair value of the consideration were higher than the cash sale price, this premium represents a payment for services to be received (financing services) that should be recognised over the service period as part of finance income rather than immediately as part of revenue from selling the handset.

The support for this view can be found in AS-9 itself. As per the illustration in AS 9 Revenue Recognition, “When the consideration is receivable in installments, revenue attributable to the sales price exclusive of interest should be recognised at the date of sale. The interest element should be recognised as revenue, proportionately to the unpaid balance due to the seller.” Though this paragraph supports the discounting of the installments, it does not provide any guidance on how the interest is determined. Therefore it is possible to determine the cash sale price based on an observable market and to treat the residue as interest, though that interest amount is much higher than the market.

View 2-The fair value of the consideration is the price derived by discounting the installment payments using market-based interest rates (i.e. Revenue Rs. 810)

The support for this view can be found in AS-9 itself. As per the illustration in AS 9 Revenue Recognition, “When the consideration is receivable in installments, revenue attributable to the sales price exclusive of interest should be recognised at the date of sale. The interest element should be recognised as revenue, proportionately to the unpaid balance due to the seller.” Though this paragraph supports the discounting of the installments, it does not provide any guidance on how the interest is determined. Therefore, it is possible to determine the cash sale price by discounting the installments at the market yield of 7% p.a.

In addition, Paragraph 47 of AS 30 Financial Instruments Recognition and Measurement (not yet mandatory) states that the initial measurement of financial assets should be based on their fair value and the receivables are the consideration being valued. Therefore, under this view the fair value of the consideration should be derived by discounting the future cash flows using market-related interest rates.

View 3–No discounting (i.e. Revenue Rs. 900)
The illustration in AS-9 requires discounting in the case of installment sales. If the fact pattern was somewhat different, so that the payment was not based on installments, but the sales were on deferred payment terms, then discounting may not be required. For example, sale was made at Rs. 900 but entire payment of Rs. 900 is collected after six months. In such a case, it may be argued that the illustration in AS-9 which applies to installment sales does not apply in this case. This may be particularly true in schemes where a customer paying upfront or a customer paying over a short period, say 6 months, ends up paying the same amount. In other words, there is no interest amount to be imputed or the interest amount is immaterial. An interesting point to note is that under IAS 18 Revenue, revenue is always recognised at fair value of the consideration, and hence discounting is mandatory unless immaterial. Unlike IAS 18, under AS-9 there is no requirement to recognise revenue at fair value. The illustration in AS 9 to discount and separate revenue and finance income is only applicable when the sales are made purely on an installment payment scheme.

View 4-Accounting policy choice
In the absence of any detailed guidance, the author believes that either of the views above can be accepted. I suggest that the Institute should provide guidance as the object of an accounting standard is to eliminate diverse accounting practices.

levitra

SA 240 (Revised): A Practical Insight

fiogf49gjkf0d
In our professional practice, how often do we come across defences such as:

“Whatever I did was in the interest of the organisation without any intention of personal gratification whatsoever”.

“You need to pay bribes to get your work done, there is no other way”.

“If the senior executives can have their fat bonuses, then why can’t I have my piece of cake?”

“Cooking the books or creative accounting is not fraud; it is just bending the rules”.

These are the usual defences which one puts forth when faced with the prospect of being held answerable or responsible for fraud (or even potential fraud). But let us examine the auditor’s duty and responsibility relating to fraud in an audit of financial statements.

SA 240 (Revised) (which is effective for audits of financial statements for periods beginning on or after 1st April 2009) deals with “the auditor’s responsibility to consider fraud and error in an audit of financial statements” and defines fraud as “an intentional act by one or more individuals among management, those charged with governance, employees or third party, involving the use of deception to obtain an unjust or illegal advantage”. The distinction between ‘fraud’ and ‘error’ is whether the underlying action resulting in misstatements is intentional (i.e. fraud) or unintentional.

Let us understand the application of SA 240 (Revised) with the following two case studies. These cases represent ‘frauds’ as they were intentionally committed by the management/employees to gain an illegal advantage resulting in misstatement in financial statements resulting either from misappropriation of assets (cash in the first case) or fraudulent financial reporting (misstatement of inventories in the second case).

Case 1

Background
ABC Ltd. was engaged in the manufacturing of hot rolled steel plates. The manufacturing process involves melting iron ore and converting the molten ore into iron sheets of required size(s). During the course of production, a given proportion of ore had to be scrapped. The scrap generated was measurable in terms of standard yield and was also dependent on the quality of ore used. The scrap generated was sold to two scrap dealers at an agreed upon price. Scrap sales as a percentage of total income were insignificant. The entire process of scrap sales was handled by the CFO under the direct supervision of the Managing Director. The documentation maintained by the CFO for scrap sales included the quantity sold, the price charged and the quotations supporting the price charged as well payment of statutory levies such as excise and VAT. The realisation of scrap sales was never an issue as scrap was always sold on the basis of ‘advance payment by cheque’. From an audit standpoint, given that scrap sales (as recorded in the books) did not constitute a material amount, the auditors’ verification was restricted to ensuring compliance with excise and VAT rules and performing an overall analytical review.

The real situation was quite different. The actual quantity of scrap generated was much higher than that recorded in the books. The actual price realisation was also significantly higher with the difference between the amount disclosed in the books and actual price being received in cash. The cash was used to make facilitation payments (‘bribes’) to secure favours/approvals from various authorities in relation to day-to-day business operations. The actual scenario came to light when the business with the scrap dealer was discontinued on account of dispute and the scrap dealer informed the board of directors of the arrangement.

Analysis with respect to SA 240 (Revised)

Responsibility of management and those charged with governance

Per SA 240 (Revised), the primary responsibility to ensure prevention and detection of fraud and error rests with the management and those charged with governance. Since senior management was involved in the fraud, it was imperative that those charged with governance exercised much greater control and supervision over management function. They should have, using their authority of management oversight, ensured that this aspect of the company’s operation was reviewed independently and reported.

? Understanding the entity’s internal controls— The entire process of scrap sales was being managed by the CFO who had the authority to negotiate the rates with the scrap dealer, was responsible for dispatch of scrap and was also responsible for ultimate collection. There was no segregation of duties resulting in one individual being able to initiate and complete the entire transaction singlehandedly. There was an absence of an independent check of the overall reconciliation of materials consumed and goods produced. There was no independent verification of the quotes obtained to support the prices charged. This could have been mitigated by establishing a process of selection of scrap dealers such as tendering or by formulating a scrap negotiation committee comprising operational/functional heads responsible for negotiating terms with scrap dealers.

? Deterrents to improper conduct by management— The arrangement was being managed by the CFO with the knowledge of the Managing Director leading to management override of controls. Establishing a ‘code of conduct’ mandating compliance by one and all and stipulating disciplinary action (including termination and legal recourse) for non-compliance could have acted as a deterrent in fraud prevention/detection.

? Independent review by internal audit function reporting directly to those charged with governance could also have assisted in fraud detection/prevention. In situations where the entity has an internal audit function, the auditor can make enquiries of the internal auditor about any specific procedures performed to detect fraud and whether satisfactory responses were received from management to any findings resulting from those procedures.

? Whistle-blower mechanism—In terms of SA 315, responsibilities of those charged with governance include oversight of the design and effective operation of whistle blower procedures, establishment of these procedures could act as a ‘deterrent’.

Auditors’ Responsibilities

Per SA 240 (Revised), owing to the inherent limitations in an audit, the auditor cannot obtain absolute assurance that the material misstatements in the financial statements (either because of fraud or error) will be detected. The auditor has to, however, obtain reasonable assurance that the financial statements as a whole are free from material misstatement and should therefore ensure that they have followed the auditing procedures in accordance with the auditing standards generally accepted in India. However, the auditor could be held responsible where the misstatements due to fraud or error remained undetected due to nonapplication of the required audit procedures and professional scepticism.

In this regard it is important to note that the risk of not detecting a material misstatement due to fraud is greater than that arising from an error, since fraud may involve a sophisticated modus operandi, and could include collusion, forgery and intentional misrepresentation. This risk increases with management fraud since they are in a position to manipulate records and override controls.

In the given case, applying the guidance given in SA 240 (Revised) and SA 200 (Revised) Overall Objectives of the Independent Auditor and the Conduct of an Audit in accordance with Standards on Auditing, the auditors should have considered the following factors while auditing scrap sales:

Identify and assess fraud risk—the auditor should have designated scrap sales as an area susceptible to fraud in view of the fact that scrap sales were controlled entirely by the CFO and the Managing Director.

Understanding of the entity’s business and maintaining professional scepticism—the auditors should have considered obtaining deeper understanding of the manufacturing process, understood the relationship of scrap generated with quantity produced and enquired into reasons why the quantity of scrap generated as recorded in the books was low in relation to finished goods produced. The auditors could also have considered the usual quantum of scrap generated in similar/like industries and related this to the scrap quantity recorded in the company’s books. The auditors should have compared the rates charged to scrap dealers with independent sources such as market prices of steel scrap.

Understanding of internal control environment—There was no segregation of duties as the entire function was being performed by the CFO and MD. Further, as senior management was involved, there existed the risk of management override of controls. The auditor should have communicated these deficiencies in internal controls to those charged with governance and should also have formally enquired whether the governance body has any knowledge of actual, suspected or alleged fraud relating to scrap sales.

Respond appropriately to identified (or suspected) fraud—The auditors should have given due consideration to controls over scrap sales while reporting on internal controls in the Companies (Auditor’s Report)
Order, 2003 (‘CARO’) report. Post identification of the fraud, the auditor would have to appropriately modify the reporting relating to paragraph 4(xxi) of the CARO report.

As such, applying analytical procedures alone on the consideration that scrap income was insignificant to the overall financial statements was not appropriate and would not constitute sufficient appropriate audit evidence.

CASE 2

Background

XYZ Ltd. was engaged in the business of manufacturing gypsum boards, the primary raw material for which is natural gypsum. Gypsum was purchased in huge quantities in rock form in uneven size and shape. Given the quantity, size and shape, gypsum had to be stored in open spaces resulting in gypsum being exposed to the external environment. No physical verification was conducted during the year and at year-end, physical verification was not feasible given the huge quantum and uneven size/shape of the material in stock, the technical specifications (in terms of extent of exposure to light/air/water) as well as inability to draw inference based on test check. The quantity in stock was therefore certified by an independent surveyor and the auditors’ relied on the surveyor’s report. The quantity reported by the surveyor was used by the company to account for stocks in the books at the year-end.

The actual scenario was far different than that disclosed in the books. The quantity of gypsum in stock reported by the independent surveyor was as instructed by the factory manager. The factory manager reported the desired results given the arrangement with the valuer and the auditor’s reliance on the valuer’s work. The fraud came to light when during the course of interim audit for the subsequent financial year, the auditor insisted on physical verification of the stock by weighment at a point in time when the quantity of gypsum in the warehouse was at the lowest level. The quantity weighed physically was far less than that shown in the books at the time of physical verification.

Analysis with respect to SA 240 (Revised)

Responsibility of management and those charged with governance

In the present case, the perpetrator of the fraud was a functional manager (factory employee) as against a member of senior management in Case
1.    The responsibility for preventing and detecting fraud primarily rests with the management; however, the administration and monitoring of controls in Case 2 would be different. This could have been achieved by:
Management evaluation of the expertise of the independent valuer engaged by the factory manager including considering obtaining a separate valuation from another valuer (given the quantum of stocks involved). Management could also independently test the methodology applied and assumptions made by the valuer in arriving at the likely quantity of stocks lying in the open ware-house.

Mandating physical verification by physical weighment of stocks at least once in a year and reconciliation of physical balances with book records, and also considering increasing the frequency of verification (based on the significant value of such stocks).

Formulating a policy of rotation of valuers at appropriate intervals.

Employees performing functions having high susceptibility to fraud being made to compulsorily avail annual leave.

Monitoring control in the form of an over-all exercise reconciling quantity of gypsum purchased, expected gypsum consumption (relative to finished goods produced) and derived closing inventory of gypsum would have also revealed the overstatement of closing inventory as per books.

Establishing a ‘code of conduct’ mandating compliance by one and all and stipulating disciplinary action (including termination and legal recourse) for non-compliance could have acted as a deterrent in fraud prevention/detection.

Auditors’ Responsibilities

Per SA 240 (Revised), while performing risk assessment procedures to obtain an understanding of the entity and its environment, the auditor should perform procedures to identify material misstatements due to fraud which includes A 620—Using the Work of an Expert requires that an auditor ought to have satisfied himself as to the expert’s skills, competencies and objectivity. The auditor should have considered whether the source data used by the expert, the assumptions made and methodology used is reasonable having regard to the auditor’s knowledge of the client business.

incorporating an element of unpredictability in selecting the nature, timing and extent of audit procedures. Accordingly, the auditor could have mandated that management conduct actual physical verification of stocks at a time other than the year-end and the auditor being present at such count.

The auditor should have performed analytical procedures to deduce the expected quantity of gypsum that would be in closing inventory at the year-end considering the production and expected input-output yield.

The auditor would need to appropriately modify his opinion in relation to paragraph 4(ii) of the CARO report relating to physical verification of inventories. Consequent to the fraud being detected, the auditor would need to consider modifying the audit opinion as well as consider fraud reporting under paragraph 4(xxi) of CARO report.

As such, mere reliance on the expert’s work by the auditors could not be considered as sufficient audit evidence for the purpose of expressing an opinion.


Whom should the auditor communicate with when the fraud is detected?

On fraud being identified or where the auditor has obtained information that fraud exists, the auditor must inform the same to the appropriate level of management who are primarily responsible for the prevention and detection of fraud. If the auditor suspects the fraud involving management, the communication should be done to those charged with governance. In other cases it should be to the management, at least one level above the level at which the fraud is suspected.

Although the auditor’s professional duty to maintain the confidentiality of client information may preclude him from reporting to any outside entity, the auditor’s legal responsibilities may override his duty of confidentiality on certain occasions, for e.g., when an auditor is required to disclose information under any law or under a directive of a judicial body/court.

Management Representations

The auditor should obtain written representations from the management or those charged with governance which include acknowledging their responsibility for the design, implementation and maintaining internal controls to prevent and detect fraud, that they have disclosed to the auditor the results of management’s assessment of the risk that the financial statements may be misstated on account of fraud and their knowledge of actual, suspected or alleged fraud. However, the obtaining of mere representation does not absolve an auditor from the responsibilities cast upon him under SA 240.

Compatibility with the corresponding International Standards of Auditing-ISA 240

The application section of paragraph A6, A56 and A66 of ISA 240 specifically deals with the application of the requirement of ISA 240 to the audits of public sector entities. However, since SA 240 (Revised) applies to all entities irrespective of their form, nature and size, a specific reference to the applicability of the Standard to public sector entities has not been included.

However the spirit of the corresponding para-graphs in ISA 240 has been retained in SA 240 (Revised) as follows:

Para A6 has been retained such that in certain cases the auditor may be required by the legislature or the regulator to specifically report on the instances of the actual/ suspected fraud in the client entity.

Para A56 has been retained such that the auditors may not have an option to withdraw from the engagements in certain cases.

Para A66 has been retained such that the requirement for reporting fraud, whether or not discovered through the audit process, may be subject to the specific provisions of the audit mandate or related legislation or regulation.

Conclusion:

Considering the nature and characteristics of a fraudulent act and the responsibility cast upon the auditor, it is imperative that due professional scepticism is exercised throughout the audit and the requirements of SA 240 (Revised) are followed to assist the auditor in identifying and assessing the risk of material misstatement due to fraud and in designing procedures to detect such mis-statement.

GAP in GAAP— Accounting of Tax Effects on Dividends Received from Foreign Subsidiary

fiogf49gjkf0d
The Finance Act 2013 has amended section 115-O of the Income tax Act. As per this amendment, the dividend distribution tax (DDT) to be paid will be reduced, among other matters, by the amount of dividend, if any, received from its foreign subsidiary if the domestic/ recipient company has paid tax u/s. 115BBD on such dividend.

An illustration is provided below. A domestic company received dividend of Rs. 100 from its foreign subsidiary and paid tax u/s. 115BBD of the Act. Later, but within the same financial year, it is distributing dividend of Rs. 300 to its shareholders. For simplicity, it is assumed that tax rate applicable on both the distributions is 15%. Given below is an computation of DDT in pre and post Finance Act 2013 scenario:

Particulars

Pre-Finance

Post-Finance

 

Act 2013

Act 2013

 

 

 

Dividend received from for-

100

100

eign subsidiary

 

 

 

 

 

Tax u/s. 115BBD of the Act

15

15

@ 15%

 

 

 

 

 

Dividend distributed

300

300

 

 

 

Less: dividend received from

100

foreign subsidiary

 

 

 

 

 

Amount liable to DDT

300

200

 

 

 

DDT @15%

45

30

 

 

 

In the Pre-Finance Act 2013 scenario under Indian GAAP, companies charge tax paid u/s. 115BBD, being tax paid on dividend income, as current tax to the statement of profit and loss (P&L). DDT paid u/s. 115-O is charged to P&L Appropriation account.

Query

In the Post-Finance Act 2013 scenario, how should a company account for tax paid of Rs. 15 u/s. 115BBD of the Act? Is this a tax paid on foreign dividends received (and hence charged to P&L A/c as current tax) or it is a payment of DDT (and hence charged to P&L Appropriation A/c)?

Author’s Response
View 1

The first argument is that the company continues to pay tax u/s. 115BBD of the Act which is charged to P&L A/c. The offset allowed in the recent amendment results in lower DDT to be paid. Therefore, under this view, current tax charge would be Rs. 15 charged to P&L A/c and DDT to be adjusted against P&L Appropriation A/c would be Rs. 30.

View 2
The second argument is that through the offset mechanism, the company is entitled to claim refund of the tax paid u/s. 115BBD of the Act. Hence, if the company believes that it will be able to use the benefit of tax paid by reducing the DDT, it should not charge the same to P&L. Rather, it should recognise the same as a separate asset. The said asset will get realised at the time of dividend distribution to its shareholders. A company will be able to recognise such asset only if it can demonstrate that distribution of dividend is reasonably certain and it will be able to utilise the credit (under the Act the utilisation should happen within the same financial year). According to this view, the current tax charge would be Nil and DDT to be adjusted against P&L Appropriation A/c would be Rs. 45.

A strong argument in support of View 2 is that the intention of the law is to provide relief on the cascading effect of tax. The intention is to fix the income tax charge on the company based on the ultimate dividend outflow to the shareholders. Therefore per se there is no relief with regards to DDT, but the relief is with respect to dividend income earned by the company, provided they are in turn distributed to ultimate shareholders.

Conclusion

The author believes that the issue is debatable and that both views are possible, for the reasons mentioned above. When View 2 is applied, a note, drafted as follows, could be included in the financial statements: “Current tax charge excludes income-tax paid u/s. 115BBD of the Income-tax Act, since it has been used as a set-off against payment of DDT.”

To achieve the objective of comparability, the Institute should publish its’ view on AS 22 – Accounting to taxes on income.

The issuance of IFRS standards in India

Accounting Standards

The International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS)
roadmap issued by the Ministry of Corporate Affairs (MCA) stated that the IFRS
standards would be submitted to the MCA by 30 April 2010. It is widely believed
that The Institute of Chartered Accountants of India (ICAI) would facilitate the
notification of the IFRS standards in the Companies Accounting Standard Rules
through the National Advisory Committee on Accounting Standards (NACAS).

As per the roadmap issued by the MCA, there shall be two
separate sets of accounting standards u/s.211(3C) of the Companies Act, 1956.
The first set shall comprise the Indian Accounting Standards which are converged
with the IFRS and apply to the specified class of companies. The second set
shall comprise the existing Indian Accounting Standards and apply only to the
companies not covered in any of the phases of the roadmap or till the date of
applicability of IFRS for companies covered in
later phases.

Under IFRS, there are 29 International Accounting Standards (IAS)
and 9 IFRS, 11 Standing Interpretations Committee (SIC) interpretations and 16
International Financial Reporting Interpretations Committee (IFRIC)
interpretations, a total of 65. At the end of March, more than 40 of these
promulgations were not yet issued by the Institute of Chartered Accountants of
India.

Under the circumstances, corporate entities have raised
questions on how the commitment made in the roadmap can be achieved. More
importantly, entities do not know if they should start preparing for IFRS as
issued by the International Accounting Standards Board (IASB) or there will be
certain changes/exceptions to those standards. If there are changes, what will
those changes be ? Particularly, what is not clear is, whether Indian companies
will be able to use all the options allowed under IFRS or ICAI/MCA shall remove
certain options while adopting IFRS in India. For example, under IFRS, IAS-19
provides a number of alternatives to account for actuarial gains and losses,
such as the corridor approach, full recognition to income statement, full
recognition to reserves instead of the income statement. In India, it may be
possible that some of these alternatives may not be allowed.

The author is not in agreement that the alternative
accounting available under IFRS should be eliminated. This would not provide a
level playing field to Indian entities vis-à-vis international companies which
will have this benefit. It may be noted that Australia introduced IFRS
initially by eliminating multiple alternatives under IFRS. However, at a later
date they realised that this was not workable and reverted back to a full IFRS

providing all the options available under IFRS to Australian companies.

Considering the number of pending standards, there is a clear
need to significantly accelerate the process of issuing the IFRS standards. Any
time provided for public exposure will further delay the issuance of these
standards. Currently issuance and notification of standards happens on a
standard by standard basis. This process, if followed for IFRS, will take a long
time and there is no way that the 30 April deadline would be met. To smoothen
the process, the ICAI/NACAS should expose and notify all standards at one go.


For companies covered by the convergence roadmap, we may mention that it is
more of an operational issue and the ICAI/NACAS/MCA will resolve the  same
in due course. The Indian Government is committed to achieve convergence with
IFRS in  India. Thus, entities should not slow down their conversion
efforts.

levitra

Gaps in GAAP Amendment to AS-11

The Central Government, vide Notification dated 31 March 2009, has amended Accounting Standard (AS) 11 The Effects of Changes in Foreign Exchange Rates, notified under the Companies (Accounting Standard) Rules, 2006. Pursuant to the amendment, a new paragraph has been inserted in AS-11 to allow amortisation/capitalisation of foreign exchange differences arising on long-term monetary items. The amendment has far-reaching consequences, than is apparent on a plain reading.

The option permitted is not in accordance with IAS-21 Effect of Changes in Foreign Exchange Rates. The Institute of Chartered Accountants of India (ICAI) and The Ministry of Corporate Affairs (MCA) have committed to adopt IFRS with effect from April 1, 2011. Availability of the option only till March 31, 2011 clearly reinforces ICAI and MCA commitment towards adopting IFRS by 2011. Companies should take serious note of this, and start preparing for IFRS, given that the IFRS conversion process is a lengthy process.

In Annexure 1, through a simple example, the author has tried to explain the practical application of the amendment when a loan is taken for working capital purposes with regards to (a) retrospective application of the standard, (b) write-off of unamortised balance at 31 March 2011 and (c) the method of amortisation. In Annexure 2, the example remains the same, except that the loan is taken for acquiring fixed assets.

The key salient features are :

1. Exchange differences on monetary items under AS-11 are required to be recognised in the P&L Account. The amendment to AS-11 allows an alternative treatment of amortising/capitalising exchange differences on long-term monetary items.

2. If a company avails the option given in the Notification, it needs to be adopted for all long-term foreign currency monetary items. In other words, cherry picking of monetary items is not permitted.

3. The alternative treatment is optional and has to be exercised in the first reporting period after the date of the Notification. The option once exercised is irrevocable.

4. The alternative treatment applies to exchange differences, i.e., both exchange gains and losses.

5. The Notification is issued by The Ministry of Corporate Affairs (MCA) as per the authority granted under the Companies Act, 1956 which is applicable to companies. For non-corporate entities, such as partnership firms, trusts and HUFs, the ICAI has clarified that the AS-11 amendment would not apply.

6. The exchange differences to the extent falling within paragraph 4(e) of AS-16 would continue to be governed by the said requirements since these do not fall within the purview of AS-11. The option given in the Notification is available only in respect of exchange differences to the extent these are governed under AS-11.

7. If the long-term foreign currency monetary item relates to other than an acquisition of a depreciable capital asset, exchange differences should be accumulated in the ‘Foreign Currency Monetary Item Translation Difference Account’ and amortised over the life of the monetary item but not beyond 31 March 2011. If the monetary item is settled, then exchange differences cannot be carried forward and will need to be recognised immediately.

8. If the long-term foreign currency monetary item relates to acquisition of a depreciable capital asset, exchange differences arising on such monetary items should be added to or deducted from the cost of the asset.

9. Capitalisation of exchange differences as cost of depreciable asset and accumulation of exchange differences in the ‘Foreign Currency Monetary Item Translation Difference Account’ are not two separate options. Thus, if a company decides to capitalise exchange differences on foreign currency loan taken for acquisition of a depreciable capital asset, it would also need to defer the exchange differences to the ‘Foreign Currency Monetary Item Translation Difference Account’ on the foreign currency loan taken for working capital.

10. Schedule VI has been amended to remove the requirement with regard to capitalisation of exchange differences. Henceforth, the requirement with regard to capitalisation of exchange difference will be dealt with only under Accounting Standards notified in the Companies (Accounting Standards) Rules.

11. Unlike pre-revised Schedule VI, the amendment does not make any distinction in respect of fixed assets acquired from outside India or otherwise. Hence the optional treatment in the Notification would have to be applied in respect of all depreciable assets, whether acquired from within or outside India.

12. A company cannot apply this amendment with prospective effect or to accounting periods commencing before 7 December 2006. The Notification is applicable to all accounting periods commencing on or after 7 December 2006. If a company follows financial year, then the Notification would apply to all long-term monetary items that existed on 1 April, 2007 and thereafter. If a company follows calendar year, then the Notification would apply to all long-term monetary items that existed on 1 January, 2007 and thereafter.

13. To the extent the adjustment relates to earlier years (for example 1-4-2007 to 31-03-2008), the same has to be effected through the general reserve account.

14. Companies need to carefully evaluate the impact of current taxes, deferred taxes and impairment. With regards to the retrospective adjustment through the general reserve (effect of earlier years), deferred tax on that component will be adjusted to (a) in the case of a ‘Foreign Currency Monetary Item Translation Difference Account’ to a reserve account, (b) in the case of capitalisation to fixed asset it is less clear, whether the same should be adjusted to the P&L account, reserve account or ignore it as a permanent difference.

15. Networth of company will increase if exchange loss is capitalised in fixed assets and vice-versa. Exchange differences on long-term monetary assets and liabilities accumulated in ‘Foreign Currency Monetary Item Translation Difference Account’ will have no effect on networth of the company when compared to the existing AS-11 requirements.

It may be noted that AS-ll does not deal with derivatives in general, other than forward exchange contractswhich are entered into to hedge assets and liabilities on the balance sheet. AS-l1 also does not cover forward contracts that are entered into to hedge highly probable transactions and firm commitments. The AS-l1 amendment applies to monetary items.Derivatives are not monetary items within the definition of AS-l1. Therefore AS-11 amendment does not apply to derivative accounting; however, because the derivatives are entered into for hedging monetary items, the amendment has significant impact in the way such derivatives are accounted for.

The existing requirements relating to (a)A5-11with regards to forward exchange contracts, (b) Announcement of the ICAI with regards to derivatives in general, (c) AS-30 Financial Instruments: Recognition and Measurement (applicable from 1-4-2009 on recommendatory basis and 1-4-2011on mandatory basis), (d) the fact that AS-30 has not yet been notified in the Companies (Accounting Standards) Rules, and (e) the current amendment to AS-l1 creates a permutation and combination of numerous situations and complexities for which there may be no answer in current Indian GAAP literature other than by conjecture. It is possible that numerous practices would emerge. This was clearly visible in the implementation by companies of the Announcement on Derivatives issued by the ICAL This amendment will only further add to that confusion.

Consider the following situation. Company has entered into an option contract to hedge foreign currency loan liability of USD 100 taken for operations. As per the amendment, exchange difference on long-term loan liability for working capital purpose should be accumulated in Foreign Currency Monetary Item Difference Account. The following accounting treatments are theoretically possible for the option contract:

a) Account for mark-to-market losses on the option contract in the profit and loss account disregarding accounting for exchange differences on the underlying hedged item. Gains, if any, may be ignored.

b) Alternatively, gains on the option contracts may be recognised if the company can demonstrate that it is complying with AS-30 principles, to the extent possible.

c) If option is an effective hedge, adjust mark-to-market changes on option contract with exchange difference on underlying loan and account for net exchange difference on loans in Foreign Currency Monetary Item Difference Account. If there is net MTM gain, then it may be ignored.

d) The treatment in (c) above could also be used for an ineffective hedge, provided it is reasonably an economic hedge.

e) The same as scenario (c), but company may recognise net MTM gains on option contract in Reserve account if the company is following principles of AS-30 for derivative contracts.

Annexure  1

How are exchange differences accumulated in the ‘Foreign Currency Monetary Item Translation Difference Account’ amortised? Consider the following scenario:

i) FXLimited’s financial year ends on 31 March.

ii) On 1 April 2006,FXhas taken foreign currency loan amounting to Euro 300,000,for use in the working capital.

iii) The loan is repayable after 6 years, i.e., on 31 March 2012.

iv) Given in a table at the top of the next column, is the amount of exchange gain/ loss arising on the loan at each reporting date

v) FX has decided to amortise exchange differences as per the option given in the Notification.

Response

In respect of exchange differences arising on restatement of long-term monetary items not pertaining to acquisition of depreciable capital assets, the Notification provides that the same should be accumulated in the ‘Foreign Currency Monetary Item Translation DifferenceAccount’ and amortised over the remaining lifeof the loan but not beyond 31 March 2011.As per the Notification, the amendment is applicable retrospectively in respect of accounting periods commencing on or after 7 December 2006. Thus, the company would adopt the following treatment:

i) Exchange difference arising during the year ended 31 March 2007 continues to be recognised in the P&L. No retrospective adjustment is allowed for these differences.

ii) FXneeds to retrospectively adjust the amount of exchange loss recognised in the year ended 31 March 2008. The amount of retrospective’ adjustment is computed as below:

iii) FX would determine amount to be amortised in each of subsequent years as shown in the table appearing at top on the following page.

The amortisation is based on the remaining life of the loan and period to 31 March 2011, whichever is earlier. In this case,31March2011 is earlier; thus amortisation is one-third, one-half and one for years ending 31 March 2009, 31 March 2010 and 31 March 2011, respectively.

iv) No exchange differences can be carried beyond 31 March 2011 and exchange differences arising in the year ended 31 March 2012 need to be recognised immediately. In any case, FX should have adopted IFRS from 1 April 2011 and application of IAS-21 would also require exchange differences on monetary items to be recognised immediately.

An interesting observation is that since the amendment has a retrospective effect, previous exchange differences that were recognised in profit or loss would be transferred to the ‘Foreign Currency Monetary Item Translation Difference Account’ through general reserve. As this account is amortised to profit or loss of FX, there would be a double recording of the exchange difference in the profit or loss; once in previous years’ profit or loss and once going ahead by way of amortisation in future profit or loss.

Note 1

There can be various methods of determining amortisation. For example, one may argue on the following possible methods of amortisation:

i) The loan repayment is after 5 years from the date of retrospective application, i.e., 1 April 2007. Thus, amortisation for the year ended 31 March 200S is 1/ 5th of the exchange differences for the year. Since the Notification does not allow carry forward beyond 31 March 2011, any amount remaining at 31 March 2011 is written off at the said date.

ii) Year ended 31 March 200S is the 2nd year of the loan and the total period of the loan is 6 years. Thus, appropriate amortisation for the year is 2/ 6th of exchange differences for the year ended 31 March 200S.

iii) Year ended 31 March 200S is the 2nd year of the loan and the Notification allows carry forward only up to 31 March 2011. Thus, appropriate amortisation for the year is 2/5th of exchange differences for the year ended 31 March 200S.

iv) As per the Notification, FX can apply the amendment from 1 April 2007 and it is allowed to amortise exchange differences arising on the loan up to 31 March 2011. Thus, maximum deferral period for exchange differences arising and accumulated on the loan during the year ended 31 March 200S is 4 years. Accordingly, 1/4th of exchange differences is appropriate amortisation for the exchange differences.

The author is of the view that method (iv) is the most appropriate method for amortising exchange differences. Thus, the calculation is based on this method.

Annexure    2

Capitalisation of Exchange Difference

Consider the following scenario:

i) FX Limited’s  financial  year ends  on 31 March.

ii) On 1 April 2006, FX has taken foreign currency loan amounting to Euro 300,000, for acquiring plant. At the date of loan, exchange rate was Euro 1 = INR 60.

iii) FX purchased the plant amounting to INR lS,OOO,OOOusing loan amount.

iv) The useful life of the plant is 10 years and depreciation is based on the straight-line method. The loan is repayable after 6 years, i.e., on 31 March 2012.

v) Given at top on the next page in a table is the amount of exchange gain/ loss arising on the loan at each reporting date

vi) FX has decided to capitalise exchange differences as per the option given in the Notification.

Response
In respect of exchange differences arising on restatement of long-term monetary items pertaining to acquisition of depreciable capital assets, the Notification provides that the same should be adjusted to the cost of the asset and should be depreciated over the balance life of the asset (as against the life of the loan). As per the Notification, the amendment is applicable retrospectively in respect of accounting periods commencing on or after 7 December 2006. Thus, the company would adopt the following treatment:

(i) Exchange difference arising during the year ended 31 March 2007 continues to be recognised. No retrospective adjustment is required/ allowed for these differences.

(ii) FXneeds to retrospectively adjust the amount of exchange loss recognised in the year ended 31 March 2008. For exchange differences capitalised in a year, it is assumed that the same arises evenly during the year. Accordingly, the company charges 50% depreciation on such addition. On this basis, the amount to be capitalised for previous periods is determined as shown in the table alongside.

(iii) FX passes the following entry to apply the option retrospectively (at 1 April 2008)

Debit Plant INR…………….. 850,000
Credit General Reserve……………. INR 850,000

(iv) For subsequent years, FX determines capitalisation and depreciation as shown in the table below:

(v) Exchange differences arising in the year ended 31 March 2012 need to be recognised as income/ expense immediately and cannot be capitalised. In any case, FX should have adopted IFRS from 1 April 2011 and application of IAS-21 would also require exchange differences on monetary items to be recognised immediately. Also, carrying amount of plant would be determined based on IAS-16/ IFRS 1 principles.

Straight-lining of Lease

Business Combinations under IFRS

New Page 1As mergers and
acquisitions are fairly common nowadays and accounting implications significant,
there has been considerable focus and debate on how business combinations are
accounted for. Theoretically there are two methods, the pooling method and the
purchase method. The pooling method is applied when two business equals combine
into a new entity, with no acquirer being clearly identified. The purchase
method is applied when an acquirer is clearly identified in a business
combination. It may be noted that pooling is allowed only if certain conditions
indicating the merger of equals is fulfilled.

Under the pooling method the excess of consideration for
acquisition over the book value of the assets acquired is adjusted against
reserves, since the underlying transaction is a get-together of two enterprises
and consequently there is no goodwill to be recorded as an asset. Whereas under
the purchase method the consideration paid over and above the fair value of the
net assets acquired is captured as goodwill, which going forward is
tested for impairment. Under the purchase method, all identifiable assets
and liabilities are fair valued, irrespective of whether those
assets/liabilities were recorded or not in the books of the acquiree.

IFRS 3 — Business Combinations now prohibits pooling
method, since permitting two methods vitiated comparability and created
incentives for structuring business combinations to qualify for pooling, and
achieve the desired accounting objective, given that the two methods produced
quite different results. Besides in the real world it is improbable that there
would be combination of business equals with the acquirer not being
identifiable. Therefore, IFRS 3 now allows only the purchase method. With the
abolition of pooling method, there is no more incentive under IFRS to structure
deals, so as to qualify for the pooling method.


Fair value accounting under IFRS 3 reflects the true
value of an acquisition and the premium paid, i.e., goodwill. Going ahead
it would also result in an appropriate depreciation/amortisation of assets
acquired, since the fair value rather than book value of the assets would be
depreciated. It results in greater transparency and management responsibility
for the acquisition and the price paid to acquire the business. Any future
impairment of acquisition goodwill will put to question the appropriateness of
management’s decision to acquire the business.

Considerable judgment will be called for in applying IFRS 3,
including the identification and valuation of intangible assets and contingent
liabilities. Unfortunately, IFRS 3 provides limited guidance on determining fair
value of assets and liabilities acquired. There exists some guidance that
valuation report should be taken.

An interesting point to note is that IFRS 3
prohibits
amortisation of goodwill and requires goodwill to be
tested
only for impairment. Amortisation of goodwill results in an
even spread of charge to the income statement over several years; contrarily, a
huge one-off impairment charge on impairment of goodwill, as required by IFRS 3,
will bring in substantial volatility to the income statement.

Under Indian GAAP, there is no comprehensive standard dealing
with business combinations. In fact there are as many as six standards that deal
with various types of business combinations and accounting for goodwill. Many of
these requirements are disparate and inconsistent, for example, goodwill
resulting from an amalgamation has to be compulsorily amortised over not more
than 5 years, whereas there is no compulsion to amortise goodwill on acquisition
of a subsidiary. Another example is that acquisition accounting in the case of
acquisition of a subsidiary or an associate is based on book values, whereas
amalgamation other than which fulfil pooling conditions, can be accounted either
using book values or fair values of net assets acquired.

As stated above, acquisition accounting of sub-sidiaries,
associates and joint ventures under Indian GAAP is based on book values rather
than fair values. Unlike Indian GAAP, IFRS 3 requires assets and liabilities
acquired, including contingent liabilities, to be recorded at fair value.
Contingent liabilities are not recorded as liabilities under Indian GAAP.
Contingent
liabilities are fair valued and recorded under IFRS in an
acquisition, since the consideration paid for a business by an acquirer is also
influenced by the nature and quantum of contingent liabilities of the acquiree.
For reasons mentioned above, goodwill determined under Indian GAAP is a plug-in
number, unrealistic and of little use in analysing the business combination.

IFRS 3 requires all Business Combinations (excludes common
control transactions) within its scope to be accounted as per purchase method
and prohibits pooling method. Indian GAAP permits both purchase method and
pooling of interest method, in the case of amalgamations. Pooling of interest
method is allowed only if the amalgamation satisfies certain specified
conditions.

In IFRS 3, acquisition accounting is based on substance.
Reverse acquisition under IFRS is accounted assuming the legal acquirer is the
acquiree. For example, a big private limited company to seek quick listing may
be legally acquired by a small listed company. Under IFRS, the private company
would be treated as an acquirer though legally it was acquired by the listed
company. In Indian GAAP, acquisition accounting is based on legal
form and in the above example the listed company would be treated as an
acquirer.

Business combination accounting under Indian GAAP is outdated
and does not reflect the underlying substance and the true premium paid for an
acquisition. Because of the inconsistent and disparate requirements across
various standards, it provides incentives for deal structuring. It is high time
that IFRS 3 is adopted in India without waiting for 2011.

levitra

GAPs in GAAP – Are We Really Converging to IFRS ?

Accounting standards

On a perusal of Ind-ASs, the Indian IFRS equivalent, it is
clear that they are not the same as IFRS as issued by IASB in many respects. The
differences are so numerous that people are questioning the need to change from
existing Indian GAAP to another form of Indian GAAP. Is the change and hard work
justifiable, if Indian entities are unable to proclaim that their financial
statements are IFRS-compliant and use them for cross-border fund raising or
other purposes ?

Certainly each country should have its own endorsement
process to notify accounting standards. However, that process should not be used
for ‘carve-outs’ unless they are absolutely necessary in the rarest of rare
circumstances and on sound technical grounds. The main concerns on Ind-AS are as
follows.

    (a) IFRS as issued by IASB are accepted globally on all major stock exchanges. As Ind-AS contain significant deviations from IFRS, the same may not be accepted for the purpose of raising funds from capital markets outside India. Adopting IFRS without carve-outs will make capital flows in and out of India seamless.

    (b) Global and local investors and the analyst community may not find Ind-AS financial statements very useful, as they will not be comparable with peer group companies across the globe.

    (c) In India, there are many entities with a presence in more than one part of the world, for example, they may have foreign parents/subsidiaries. Such companies look at conversion to IFRS as an opportunity to have one accounting language across all their units and eliminate the need for preparing financial statements under multiple GAAPs. The only way this can be achieved is if the entity complies with IFRS as issued by the IASB in entirety.

    (d) There is a threat that IASB may publicly disown Ind-AS as being IFRS-compliant, in which case India’s G-20 and commitments made to European Union may be put to question.

    (e) Adopting IFRS without deviations would help India’s young accounting work force to seek global opportunities and also significantly enhance its BPO potential.

Many of the differences between Ind-AS and IFRS do not
represent the economic substance of the transaction and hence may be a
disservice to all investors and providers of risk capital (and not just global
investors), for whom these financial statements are predominantly prepared. For

example:

  • The option to defer
    exchange differences on long-term monetary items is given with an intention to
    provide relief to companies who want to smoothen the impact of exchange
    differences on its statement of profit and loss. Notwithstanding the
    intention, amortisation will not result in smoothening in all cases. If
    exchange rates show an increasing trend, then exchange difference impact of
    earlier years will cause a major dent in subsequent years close to repayment
    of those long-term monetary items — for example — A company has taken a loan
    of USD 100 in year 1999-2000 repayable after three years when the exchange
    rate was 1 USD = Rs. 43. Exchange rates at the end of year 1999-2000,
    2000-2001 and 2001-2002 were 1 USD 43.63, Rs. 46.46 and Rs. 48.89,
    respectively. If the company does not avail the option, it will charge off
    exchange loss of Rs. 63, Rs. 283, Rs. 243 in each of the year respectively.
    With the use of option, charge to P&L in each of the year will be Rs. 21, Rs.
    163 and Rs. 406, respectively. It is clear that the use of option will lead to
    backloading charge of earlier years in certain situations.

  • Whilst
    smoothening may be preferred by some preparers of financial statements, what
    is relevant to investors and analyst is a full recognition policy, as that
    depicts the position of the company as at a particular date, which an
    amortisation policy distorts. Assuming all things remain the same, a company
    would be preferred by an investor if it did not have a carry forward exchange
    loss.

    Further, there are other related issues which are not addressed in Ind-AS —
    for example — whether deferment of gains/losses as per the option will impact
    the calculation of adjustment to interest cost as per Ind-AS 23 or how hedge
    accounting will work if a company has taken fair value hedge against the
    underlying foreign currency monetary item ?

  • Unlike IFRS, Ind-AS
    40 does not permit the use of fair value model, for measurement of investment
    property. Ind-AS 40, however, mandates the fair value disclosure for
    investment property. A big accounting firm recently conducted a survey on IFRS
    financial statements of 30 global real estate companies. Out of these 30
    companies, 27 have used the fair value model. Considering the global practice,
    Indian real estate companies should also be allowed to reflect true value of
    their assets in their balance sheet as that is the only relevant yardstick
    from an investor ‘s perspective. Whilst under Ind-AS 40 information on fair
    value will be required in the notes to financial statements these would not be
    prepared with the same level of rigidity as it would if those were recorded in
    the financial statements.

  • As per IAS 19,
    the rate used to discount post-employment benefit obligations is determined by
    reference to market yields on high quality corporate bonds. IAS 19 allows the
    use of market yields on government bonds as a fall-back if there is no deep
    market in corporate bonds. In contrast, Ind-AS mandates the use of market
    yields on government bonds for discounting, in all cases. Many Indian
    companies have operations all across the globe including regions where there
    are deep and liquid markets for high-quality corporate bond rates only. Ind AS
    should permit the use of high-quality corporate bond rates in such instances
    to avoid practical difficulty in re-computing defined benefit obligation of
    foreign operation who were determining their defined benefit liability using
    IAS 19 or equivalent principles. This will also result in the saving of time
    and cost for preparers of financial statements.

  • Ind-AS 101 does
    not mandate comparative information to be given as per Ind-AS. The comparative
    information will be under the Indian GAAP. It is difficult to understand how
    investors or analysts can understand these financial statements that do not
    contain comparable numbers prepared under the same framework.

In addition, it is likely that practice related differences are likely to emerge between IFRS and Ind-AS. For example, globally under IFRS, rate regulated assets are not recognised as they do not fulfil the definition of an asset under the IFRS framework. Under the current Indian GAAP practice is to recognise rate-regulated adjustments as assets. It is most likely that this practice under the Indian GAAP may be carried forward under Ind-AS. Another example is that of agricultural accounting. Under IFRS biological assets are fair valued under IAS 41. However, Ind-AS will not contain any standard on agricultural accounting for the time being and consequently the practice of measuring biological assets at cost under the Indian GAAP most likely would be carried forward under Ind-AS.

Regulatory hurdles may also widen the gap between Ind-AS and IFRS — for example — depreciation rates under Schedule XIV of the Companies Act may de facto become the norm though those may not reflect the useful life of an asset for a company and hence may not comply with IFRS. The Companies Act needs to be amended to disable certain sections which are not aligned to IFRS accounting, for example, section 391 and section 394 permit departure from accounting standards in an amalgamation or restructuring exercise. Even if these sections are amended, those probably can only have a prospective effect. Therefore it is not clear what happens to the accounting prescribed in court sanctioned schemes prior to amendment of section 391 and section 394 which may be in conflict with IFRS.

Further, more changes may emerge in the future between the two frameworks, as IFRS standards undergo a change, which may not be incorporated in Ind-AS. Given the existing date uncertainty on IFRS implementation, and the substantial dilution of IFRS, the global community would question India’s ability to push through major reforms. By adopting IFRS as it were, India could have played a leading role in the global arena; unfortunately, this is a missed opportunity, for a nation that aims to become the third largest economy in the next few decades. People will continue to question the need to move from one set of Indian GAAP to another set of Indian GAAP.

GAPs in GAAP – Accounting for Agriculture

Accounting Standards

IAS-41 prescribes the accounting treatment for agriculture,
which includes biological transformation of living animals or plants for sale,
into agricultural produce, or into additional biological assets. IAS-41 requires
measurement at fair value less estimated point-of-sale costs from initial
recognition of biological assets up to the point of harvest, except in rare
cases.

IAS-41 requires that a change in fair value less estimated
point-of-sale costs of a biological asset be included in profit or loss for the
period in which it arises. Under a historical cost accounting model, a
plantation forestry enterprise might report no income until first harvest and
sale, perhaps 30 years after planting. On the other hand, IASB believes an
accounting model that recognises and measures biological growth using current
fair values reports changes in fair value throughout the period between planting
and harvest.

Where market-determined prices or values are not available
for a biological asset in its present condition, IAS-41 requires use of the
present value of expected net cash flows from the asset discounted at a current
market-determined pre-tax rate in determining fair value.

When IAS-41 was issued it met with severe criticism because
many agricultural assets are simply not subject to reliable estimates of fair
value. Take for instance, a pony which is kept as a potential breeding stock,
grows into a fine stallion. The stallion starts winning race events. The
stallion earns substantial amount for its owner from breeding services. The
stallion gets older, his utility decreases. Eventually the stallion dies of old
age and the carcass used as pet food. At each stage in the life of the horse,
the fair values would change significantly, but estimating the fair values could
be extremely subjective and difficult. In many ways, the stallion reminds one of
fixed assets. Changes in fair value of fixed assets are not recognised in the
income statement, then why should the treatment be different in the case of
agricultural non-financial assets ?

Vineyards and coffee and tea plantations have similar
measurement issues. The relationship between the vines and coffee or tea plants
and the land that they occupy is unique and integrated. The vine or plant itself
has relatively little value. However, in conjunction with the land, they do have
value. Determining the fair value for a vineyard, coffee or tea plantation
involves estimating the production along with sales prices and costs for a
number of years in the future, together with estimating a terminal value and the
application of a discount rate to calculate the net present value — an
enormously complex and subjective task. The value of the vines and plants would
then have to be determined as a residual because it would be calculated by
deducting the value of the unimproved land and the value of the infrastructure
from the aggregate value. It is clear that the valuation, as a result of the
estimates and subjectivity, is open to substantial variability.

Because biological assets are subject to droughts, floods and
diseases, the unrealised gains arising from changes in fair value can give a
distorted picture of the financial results of the agricultural enterprise. It
could be misunderstood and may lead to inappropriate decision-making, such as
dividend declaration from unrealised profits. Another question about the
reliability of measurements relates to the homogeneity of the assets. During the
transformation process, it could be very difficult to determine the likely
quality. Even if the quality is known, estimating the price and the market where
the produce would be ultimately sold could become a challenge.

Although the recognition of unrealised gains and losses on
financial assets is achieving wider acceptance, the IASB has not yet put forward
any convincing arguments in favour of a fair value model for non-financial
assets.

IAS-38, Intangible Assets, allows intangible assets to be
carried at revalued amounts. However, for intangible assets to be carried at
revalued amounts, IAS-38 imposes strict criteria — an active market is
necessary, which requires items traded to be homogeneous, with willing buyers
and sellers normally being found at any time and prices being available to the
public. However, IAS-41 does not impose the same hurdles for agricultural assets
and requires them to be fair valued except in rare cases. The IAS-41 approach
therefore is inconsistent with other international standards.

In India, there is no accounting standard on biological
assets and agricultural produce. Accounting standard on agriculture is the need
of the hour as many Indian companies are venturing in these businesses in big
way due to thrust on retail, dairy, horticulture, etc. Given the criticisms on
fair valuation and the fact that commercial farming enterprises in India operate
as private companies and surely don’t need the additional cost burden that may
not produce reliable results, the ICAI should develop a standard based on the
historical cost model.

levitra

Fair Value or Fear Value?

Accounting Standards

Fair value accounting is an integral aspect of International
Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS). In good times, everyone likes fair value
accounting, however, in bad times they are complaining. With the adoption of
IFRS from 2011 by India, the debate on fair value accounting has exacerbated.
Some argue that fair value accounting is procyclical and caused the recent
credit crisis. However subsequent research done by SEC indicates that financial
institutions collapsed because of credit losses on doubtful mortgages, caused by
sub-prime lending, and not fair value accounting.

Those criticising fair value accounting do not seem to
provide any credible alternatives. Do we take a step back to historical cost
accounting, wherein financial assets are stated at outdated values and hence not
relevant or reliable? Is there any better way of accounting for
derivatives
, other than using fair value accounting ? For example, in the
case of long-term foreign exchange forward contracts there may not be an active
market. For such contracts, entities obtain MTM quotes from banks. In practice,
significant differences have been observed between quotes from various banks.
Though fair value in this case is judgmental, is it still not a much better
alternative than not accounting or accounting at historical price ?

Some years ago an exercise was conducted by a global
accounting firm to determine employee stock option charge. By making changes to
the input variables, all within the allowable parameters of IFRS, option expense
as a percentage of reported income was found to vary as much as 40% to 155%.
However, since then the IASB has issued an Exposure Draft on fair value
measurement, and overtime subjectivity and valuation spread is expected to
reduce substantially.

The next question is what kind of assets and liabilities lend
themselves better to fair value accounting. Whilst many non-financial assets
under IFRS are accounted at historical cost, biological assets are accounted at
fair value. Unfortunately many biological assets are simply not subject to
reliable estimates of fair value. Take for instance, a colt which is kept as a
potential breeding stock, grows into a fine stallion. The stallion starts
winning race events and is also used in Bollywood films. The stallion earns
substantial amount for its owner from breeding and other services. The stallion
gets older, his utility decreases. Eventually the stallion dies of old age and
the carcass used as pet food. At each stage in the life of the horse, the fair
value would change significantly, but estimating the fair values could be
extremely subjective and difficult. In many ways, the stallion reminds one of
fixed assets. Changes in fair value of fixed assets are not recognised in the
income statement, then why should the treatment be different in the case of
biological non-financial assets ?

In India the debate on fair value has got confused because of
lack of understanding of IFRS. For example, a common misunderstanding is that
all assets and liabilities are stated at fair value. However, the truth is that
under IFRS many non-financial assets such as fixed assets or intangible
assets are stated at cost less depreciation.
In the case of investment
properties, a company is allowed to choose either the cost option or fair value
option for accounting. The apprehension of using fair value accounting for
investment properties is driven by tax considerations. However, one may note
that IFRS financial statements are driven towards the needs of the investor and
not of any regulator. Therefore, the income-tax authorities should ensure that
IFRS is tax neutral.

Being an emerging economy, without deep markets in many
areas, India would have specific challenges. Many of the challenges in
determining fair valuation applicable to emerging economies may also apply to
any other developed economy. However, lack of expertise and experience in
emerging economies may amplify the problem. Additional education might be needed
on how to make estimates and judgments and the disclosure of fair value in
financial statements.

Many emerging economies do not have a deep and active market
for long-term maturities, and in the case of corporate bond there may not be an
active market at all. Valuation of such bonds would be difficult as there would
be no market to mark, and estimating discount rate for longer-term maturities
could be challenging. A country may have only one risk premium that covers all
maturities but not broken up for specific duration or industry sector — this can
compound the problem.


Any valuation that involves tax and foreign exchange as a
variable will add another dimension of complication in the case of emerging
economies.
This is because tax rates and regulations are not stable and
change quite frequently. Also, experience indicates that foreign exchange
reference rates announced by the central bank or a regulatory body may be
significantly different from the market. In the case of foreign exchange forward
contract, there may not be an active market beyond one year. Significant
differences have been observed in the MTM quotes from various banks on long-term
forward contracts.

If one has to value a corporate bond that is not actively
traded, the discount rate would be the base rate plus a credit rating-based
credit spread. There are various discounting curves available such as the
zero-coupon interest rate, yield to maturity rate, MIBOR, Fixed Income Money
Market and Derivative Association (FIMMDA) rate, etc. FIMMDA issues credit
rating-based credit spread on a monthly basis. Reuters issues credit spread on a
daily basis but only for AAA rated instruments. The reliability of the valuation
of the bond would depend upon (a) the reliability of the base rate used (b) the
availability and reliability of the credit rating for the instrument, and (c)
the reliability of the credit spread. If a company uses a particular curve to
discount a corporate bond (say, YTM curve) which is different from the
acceptable practice in the market (say, FIMMDA), then the value would differ
from how the market determines it.

Similar issues would also arise in the case of valuation of
government bonds. Many of them may be very illiquid, particularly the state
government bonds. Quotes from different brokers often differ significantly. Also
it is difficult to know if the brokers are acting as principal or agents and
whether the broker will fulfil the deal at the committed price. Valuing them in
the absence of a market may yield different results, as risk premium for state
governments may not be available and would certainly not be the same as that of
the central government. As per RBI requirements state government securities are
valued applying the YTM method by marking it up by 25 basis point, above the
yields of the central government securities of equivalent maturity. However,
under
IFRS this approximation may not work, as it is clear that
different states have different risk profiles, which impacts their valuation.

Under IFRS a company may have to fair value its foreign currency convertible bond listed on a foreign securities exchange. However, in many instances at the reporting period there may be no trade as it may not be actively traded. This could lend itself to potential abuse as insignificant trades at the reporting date may inaccurately determine the fair value of the bonds. The appropriate thing to do in such situations is to make an adjustment to the quoted price based on a detailed analysis so as to measure the bond at its fair value.

It is also common in an emerging economy that an entity is required to estimate fair value of an unquoted instrument, without the benefit of detailed cash flow forecasts, management budgets, or robust multiples. An entity may own an insignificant amount, say, 10% of another entity, and therefore may not be legally entitled to obtain that information from the investee. In many cases, local benchmark companies or their financial information may simply not be available on which to base the valuation. It may be noted that RBI requires unquoted equity instruments to be valued at break-up value from the company’s latest available balance sheet, and in its absence, at Re.1 per company. Such valuations would not be acceptable under IFRS.

When estimating fair value in an emerging economy, modelling a non-financial variable could be extremely difficult. For example, under IFRS, acquisition accounting requires fair valuation of contingent liabilities of the acquiree. If the contingent liabilities were with regard to tax, in many developed economies there is a settlement system and past experience on which an estimate can be based. However, in emerging economies the litigations tend to be very long-drawn and uncertain, eventually resulting in a full liability or no liability at all. The tax authorities that influence the variable may change their behavior rapidly, thereby making the historical behaviour an inaccurate basis on which to predict future behaviour.

Sometimes market dynamics work in a very complicated manner in emerging economies. It may be difficult to determine the principal or most advantageous market due to regulatory or political circumstances. For example, a commodity market may have been cornered by a few selected players, and though in legal terms, all market participants can trade in the market, in actual terms it may be restrictive. Whether such a market should be considered in determining the fair value, if the market participant is not entirely clear whether it will be allowed entry and trade without any restriction ? Such questions would be more common in emerging economies.

Highest and best use is a concept that underscores fair valuation. As people are supposed to act rationally, a fair value measurement considers a market participant’s ability to generate economic benefit by using the asset in its highest and best use. However, highest and best use is subject to the restrictions of what is physically, legally and financially feasible. This could be a difficult area particularly in emerging economies, in the absence of clear laws or the manner in which they are implemented. For example, a builder that owns a piece of land, may not be clear, whether he will be allowed to construct 10 floors or 20 floors and whether the property development is restricted by laws in terms of its usage, for example, only for residential or commercial purposes, etc. This could make the valuation of the land a difficult task.

The above are issues that emerging economies may face more prominently than developed economies. In any system or methodology, fair valuation cannot be expected to provide, the same results if different valuers were valuing it. This is because it is not a science but an art and no guidance or methodology can ever make it a science. However, some additional guidance from the IASB on the above issues will certainly be helpful in bringing about clarity and consistency on how these issues are handled and in collapsing the range within which the fair value should fall. Issuance of guidance that specifically deals with fair valuation issues in emerging economies, will also reduce the resistance in these economies towards fair valuation.

To sum up, fair value accounting does not create good or bad news; rather it is an impartial messenger of the news. However, IASB should look at improvements in terms of providing guidance on a regular basis to reduce judgment and subjectivity as well as restricting the use of fair value accounting only to those assets and liabilities that lend themselves better to fair value accounting. IASB should also focus on providing specific guidance on the fair value challenges that emerging economies such as India would face.

GAPs in GAAP – Discount rate for employee benefits (Proposed amendments to IAS 19)

Accounting Standards

IAS 19 Employee Benefits have required pension obligations to
be discounted at rates based on high quality corporate bond rates. However, in
countries with no deep market in such bonds the rate on government debt is to be
used.

One of the effects of the current financial crisis has been a
significant widening of the spread between yields on government bonds and those
on high quality corporate bonds. In particular, the current market results in
otherwise identical obligations being measured at very different rates due
solely to the presence or absence of a deep corporate bond market. In light of
this, the IASB published an exposure draft aiming to remove this lack of
comparability. The proposal will require the use of corporate bond rates in all
circumstances. The intention of the amendment of IAS 19 seems to be to require
use of a consistent reference in choosing the rate for discounting employee
benefit obligations regardless of whether there is a deep market in high quality
corporate bonds in the country concerned. The Board envisages that there will be
improved comparability between reporting entities due to a reduction in the
range of rates used.

Should the Board eliminate the requirement to use government
bond rates to determine the discount rate for employee benefit obligations when
there is no deep market in high quality corporate bonds ?

Since market interest rates differ considerably from country
to country or from currency zone to currency zone, consistency in application is
primarily important among plans operated in the same country or currency zone.
The financial crisis has not only widened the spread between government bond
rate and the rate on high quality corporate bonds, it has also widened the range
of corporate bond rates generally considered to be of high quality. In
particular, now that we see evidence of the spread between government bond rate
and corporate bond rate narrowing again, the range of applied corporate bond
rates within a jurisdiction is a significantly bigger concern than the spread
between government bond rate and corporate bond rate.

Generally, government bond rates are more reliably
determinable and show a significantly narrower range than high quality corporate
bond rates. In countries or currency zones where there is no or no deep market
for high quality corporate bonds the range of applied discount rates may be even
wider. The proposed change may actually decrease comparability among entities
within a jurisdiction (such as India) that would have previously applied a
discount rate determined by reference to government bond rates, as the range of
available rates for high quality corporate bonds tends to be much wider than
that of government bond rates.

This is aggravated by the fact that the current IAS 19, as
well as the proposed amendment, do not contain any further guidance regarding
the meaning of the phrase ‘high quality corporate bond rate’. So even if the
Board proceeds with this ED despite the concerns, more detailed guidance is
needed on what constitutes ‘high quality’. This would avoid the risk of
continued significant variability in discount rates selected, even within those
jurisdictions having a deep market for high quality corporate bonds.

The Board reminds its constituencies that it intends to
review the accounting for employee benefits more broadly in due course and notes
that these proposals are not meant to pre-empt that. Perhaps more ominously, the
Board notes that “The Board has not yet considered whether the measurement of
employee benefit obligations could be improved more generally and, in
particular, the Board has not yet considered whether the yield on high quality
corporate bonds is the most appropriate discount rate for postemployment benefit
obligations.”

Rather than proceeding with this ‘quick fix’, it is
recommended that the Board works expeditiously on its comprehensive review of
IAS 19, including the choice of discount rate. This will avoid a disruption of
financial information for those entities operating in jurisdictions that
currently use government bond rates to discount defined benefit obligations. In
those jurisdictions where entities currently use government bond rates due to
the absence of a deep market for high quality corporate bonds, users are
accustomed to this practice, the discount rate can be determined reliably and is
applied consistently by entities in that jurisdiction. The ED would lead to a
considerable widening of the range of discount rates applied and a move from a
‘level 1 fair value’ discount rate to a ‘level 3 fair value’ discount rate.

One would generally support proposals to improve
comparability and consistency. However, it appears inappropriate to have
consistency without having considered whether corporate bond rate or government
bond rate is appropriate to use. This quick fix proposed change only for
purposes of consistency does not match well with numerous accounting options
under IFRS — particularly one that needs mention is the manner in which
actuarial gains and losses are recognised in IFRS. Besides, for reasons
mentioned above, it is highly questionable if consistency would be achieved by
the proposed amendments.

The author would therefore recommend status quo and no haphazard changes to
IAS 19 discount rate at this stage.

levitra

Business Combinations

ICAI’s announcement on accounting for derivatives – Practical issues and challenges

Accounting Standards

Application of AS-30, Financial Instruments: Recognition and
Measurement is recommendatory from 1-4-2009 and mandatory from 1-4-2011.
However, in the meanwhile various regulatory authorities were concerned about
the manner in which derivative losses were being accounted for. To ensure that
losses on account of exposure to derivatives are duly provided in financial
statements, the ICAI has recently issued an Announcement on accounting of
derivatives. The Announcement is applicable to all derivatives except for
forward exchange contracts covered under AS-11, The Effects of Changes in
Foreign Exchange Rates. The Announcement applies to financial statements for the
period ending on or after 31 March, 2008. The Announcement prescribes following
accounting guidance for derivatives :


• Entities should do accounting for all derivatives in
accordance with AS-30. In case AS-30 is followed by the entity, a disclosure
of the amounts recognised in the financial statements should be made.

• In case an entity does not follow AS-30, the entity
should mark-to-market all the outstanding derivative contracts on the balance
sheet date. The resulting mark-to-market losses should be provided for keeping
in view the principle of prudence as enunciated in AS-1, Disclosure of
Accounting Policies.

• The entity should disclose the policy followed with
regard to accounting for derivatives in its financial statements.

• In case AS-30 is not followed, the losses provided for
should be separately disclosed by the entity.

• In case of derivatives covered under AS-11, that standard
would apply.

• The auditors should consider making appropriate
disclosures in their reports if the aforesaid accounting treatment and
disclosures are not made.

The objective of ICAI in providing clarification on
accounting for derivative is to ensure that financial statements reflect a true
and fair picture of the financial position. The Announcement comes at the fag
end of the financial year and leaves very little time for corporates to
implement it. Derivative deals are complex and companies will require time to
ensure proper fair valuation of such contracts.

Accounting Standards are required to be notified under the
Companies (Accounting Standard) Rules, 2006. In the absence of the Announcement
being notified under the Act, the question of its legal validity arises.
Companies may argue that they are not bound to comply with accounting treatment
prescribed in the Announcements. However, auditors are required to qualify the
accounts, if an ICAI Announcement is not followed. Companies wanting to avoid a
qualification from the auditor are indirectly forced to comply. The Announcement
therefore creates a surrogate rather than a legal requirement for companies to
follow. The author believes that due process of law has been by-passed.

The Announcement prescribes that accounting for derivatives
can be done in accordance with AS-30. Should AS-30 be early adopted in its
entirety or is the early adoption limited to accounting principles relating to
derivatives and hedge accounting ? AS-30 is not yet notified in the Companies
(Accounting Standard) Rules, 2006. If AS-30 has to be adopted in its entirety,
it will conflict with some existing accounting standards notified in the
Companies (Accounting Standards) Rules, 2006, such as accounting for investments
under AS-13 and accounting for forward contracts under AS-11. On the other hand,
AS-30 cannot be applied selectively for derivative and hedges, since it
contradicts the requirement of the Indian GAAP framework which prohibits
selective application of standards. This dichotomy is insoluble.

The Announcement is based on the framework of ‘Prudence’. If
prudence is all that it takes to make financial statements true and fair, then
it begs the question, why does one need any other accounting standards ? AS-30
requires recognition of unrealised gains on derivatives as well. So also, under
AS-11, speculative contracts are marked to market and both gains and losses are
recognised. Therefore as can be seen ‘Prudence’ has been overtaken by the
framework of ‘fair valuation’. If fair value is the framework that is the
cornerstone of future accounting standards, it is illogical to issue an
Announcement based on the concept of ‘Prudence’.

The Announcement is not applicable to forward exchange
contracts covered under AS-11. To determine whether a particular derivative
contract is covered under scope of AS-11 or the announcement, it is crucial to
decide whether such derivative contract is in substance a forward exchange
contract. AS-11 defines forward exchange contract as ‘an agreement to exchange
different currencies at a forward rate’. Forward rate is defined as ‘the
specified exchange rate for exchange of two currencies at a forward rate’.
Paragraph 36 of AS-11 also states “An enterprise may enter into a forward
exchange contract or another financial instrument that is in substance a forward
contract, which is not intended for trading or speculation purposes, to
establish the amount of the reporting currency required or available at the
settlement date of a transaction”. Considering the definition of forward
contracts, it would be easy to conclude in case of derivative instruments like
plain vanilla USD-INR forward contract undertaken to hedge USD receivable is
covered under AS-11. However, whether a purchase option, written option or
option with exotic features such as knock-in-knock-out, range options, etc.
would be within the scope of AS-11 is a question mark.

The Announcement states “In case an entity does not follow
AS-30, keeping in view the principle of prudence as enunciated in AS-1 the
entity is required to provide for losses in respect of all outstanding
derivative contracts at the balance sheet date by marking them to market”. There
is no guidance given in the Announcement regarding how such losses should be
computed. Theoretically, following options are possible : (a) losses can be
computed on each contract basis (b) losses can be computed based on portfolio
basis — net loss is determined for each category of derivatives such as option
contracts or commodity contracts (c) losses can be computed on global-company
basis — net loss on entire portfolio of derivatives taken together. Guidance is
also needed on whether losses should be calculated considering fair value
changes in the derivatives only or whether offsetting gain on the hedged item
can be considered for determining net losses.

The Announcement does not clarify whether losses on embedded derivatives need to be provided or not. A corporate may incorporate a stand-alone derivative in another host contract and try to avoid recognition of losses on the derivatives.

The Announcement requires provision for mark-to-market losses. Many of the derivative instruments are proprietary products of banks, which do not have any ready market. Therefore such derivatives are rather marked to a model, which is usually bank-specific, rather than marked-to-market. Fair valuation of derivatives, particularly long-term derivatives, is likely to be highly subjective, since it would involve considerable extrapolation. In many  cases such long-term judgments do not match with the actual situation that emerges later. Hence fair valuation of illiquid instruments tends to be very unreliable. In a survey done by Ernst & Young, it was found that stock option expense as a percentage of reported results could vary as much as 40% to 155% by just tinkering with the assumptions, but within the boundaries of the Standard.

The whole issue of whether these contracts are wagering contracts is something that will be eventually settled in the court of law. It is probably too early to say if the liability will eventually devolve on the corp orates or on the bank. Neither does the Announcement cover these uncertainties, nor does it clearly state if what is being dealt with are only foreign exchange derivatives or all types of derivatives.

From the above it is evident that there are various complex issues in the implementation of the Announcement, which ICAI needs to clarify. Unless clarity is provided on the above issues, various companies will follow different accounting policies to compute losses on derivative contracts. This will hamper comparability and result in subjectivity and inconsistency in accounting for derivatives. The ICAI should defer the applicability of the Announcement till the time clarity on the above-mentioned issues is provided to the Industry. In the meanwhile, the requirement should be restricted to disclosure of derivative losses only. ICAI may also consider advancing the 2011 mandatory date for AS-30 to 2009.

GAPS in GAAP – Accounting Standards v. law of the land

Accounting Standards

As per our framework, Indian Accounting Standards can be
overridden by the laws of the land and court orders. SEBI was concerned that
companies were taking accounting and tax advantage of this by obtaining orders
u/s.391, u/s.394 and u/s.101 of the Companies Act that did not require
compliance with accounting standards. For example, companies used ‘securities
premium’ to write off current expenses such as doubtful debts, deferred tax
liability, impairment, etc. by filing a petition for capital reduction.

Consequently SEBI decided to put an end to this, by a
suitable amendment of the listing agreement as follows : “The company agrees
that, while filing for approval any draft scheme of
amalgamation/merger/reconstruction, etc. with the stock exchange, it shall also
file an auditor’s certificate to the effect that the accounting treatment
contained in the scheme is in compliance with all the Accounting Standards
u/s.211(3C) of the Companies Act, 1956.”

A question arose whether the amendment was also applicable to
the schemes of unlisted subsidiaries/associates/joint ventures of a listed
entity. It is clear that SEBI has jurisdiction only over listed entities and not
unlisted subsidiaries, associates and joint ventures of listed entities or
unlisted companies. For example, where the scheme involves an unlisted
subsidiary and a third party, the listed company is not required to file an
auditor’s certificate of compliance with accounting standards with the stock
exchange as it is not a party to the scheme. Thus, the unlisted subsidiary of
the listed entity can obtain the accounting arbitrage, which the listed entity
itself could not.

The other related question is what accounting treatment would
apply in the consolidated financial statements (CFS). Take for instance an
unlisted subsidiary of a listed entity which has got the court approval on a
scheme which is not in compliance with the accounting standards. Can the listed
entity use the treatment prescribed in the court scheme in its CFS ? The SEBI
Circular does not provide any specific guidance on the matter. The author
believes that the Circular is applicable only to a scheme filed by a listed
entity or where it is a party to the scheme. It does not apply to a scheme filed
by a non-listed subsidiary, associate or joint venture, even if it results in a
non-compliance with the accounting standards at CFS level of the listed entity.

This is because SEBI’s rights are more preemptive and apply
only to a listed entity. In other words, under the current listing agreement (as
modified by the amendment) SEBI can stop a listed company from filing a scheme
with the High Court that is not in compliance with the accounting standards.
However, it cannot stop a listed entity’s subsidiary from filing a scheme that
does not comply with accounting standards. Neither can it stop the listed entity
from applying the accounting treatment under the scheme sanctioned by the High
Court in the financial statements of the subsidiary or in its own CFS.

Consequently, there has been a raft of schemes filed by
subsidiaries of listed entities which are not in compliance with the accounting
standards. Let’s take a simple example. Listed entity (LCO) wants to amalgamate
another company into its own self. The amalgamation accounting results in
significant recognition of intangibles and goodwill. LCO is worried that in
subsequent years owing to impairment and amortisation, its future profits would
be adversely impacted. It therefore wants to use S. 391, S. 394 or S. 101 to
write off the intangibles and goodwill against securities premium or reserves.
Unfortunately, SEBI’s Circular preempts that, as LCO is not able to obtain a
certificate from the auditors that the accounting treatment is in compliance
with the accounting standards. To circumvent this problem, LCO floats a
subsidiary, and achieves the relevant objective in the financial statements of
the subsidiary and consequently in the CFS of LCO.

Whilst SEBI’s effort to prevent bad accounting practices is
laudable, because of jurisdictional issues, it may not have been able to achieve
its objective completely. The right medicine would be for the Ministry of
Corporate Affairs to amend S. 391, S. 394 and S. 101 of the Companies Act, to
prevent such accounting arbitrage. The author understands that these sections
will be amended along with the introduction of IFRS in India, since IFRS does
not allow a legal override of accounting standards.

levitra

Gaps in GAAP – Consolidation of Foreign Subsidiaries

Accounting Standards

Consider the following query and response.


Query :

Parent Limited (P), India, has a subsidiary S Limited,
Singapore. During the year, S Limited acquires a subsidiary — SS Limited, UK.
The GAAP followed by each of these companies are :

P Indian GAAP

S Singapore GAAP

SS UK GAAP

SS Limited uses the corridor approach for accounting pension
plans in its financial statements and the same is used by S Limited for
consolidation without any adjustments. S Ltd. computes goodwill on consolidation
as per Singapore GAAP based on fair value of net assets of SS on the date of
acquisition. For the CFS — consolidated financial statements — of P under Indian
GAAP — can net assets of SS be recorded at fair value ? Also, can the financial
statements of SS Limited be incorporated without any adjustments to pension
obligation ?

Response :

Paragraph 3 of AS-21 states that “In the preparation of CFS,
other accounting standards also apply in the same manner as they apply to the
separate financial statements.” Thus it may be noted that in the CFS, though
AS-21 permits different accounting policies they nevertheless have to be those
that are acceptable under Indian GAAP. Indian GAAP does not allow corridor
approach under AS-15 (Revised), nor can goodwill be determined using fair value.
Therefore CFS will have to be redrawn as per Indian GAAP policies. In CFS of P,
acquisition of SS will be recorded at book value and goodwill determined
accordingly. Further, all actuarial gains and losses will be accounted for and
deferral using corridor approach will not be permitted.

Moral of the story :

Wide disparities in accounting standards across borders
create unnecessary burden on preparer’s besides creating confusion in the minds
of users of financial statements. Some of us are familiar with conservative
accounting under German GAAP. Despite that, in 1993, under German GAAP
Daimler-Benz reported a profit of 168 million Deutsche Marks, but under US GAAP
for the same period, the company reported a loss of almost a billion Deutsche
Marks, largely caused by pension blues. To the user of financial statements, a
company that makes profit under Indian GAAP and loss under IFRS or vice versa
is clearly not a comprehensible situation.

It may be noted that IFRS are already adopted in the UK and
Singapore. Had India been on IFRS, Indian CFOs will not have to struggle with
multiple reports. Elimination of multiple reports is just one of the advantages
of converging to a global standard like IFRS. The ICAI’s announcement to
converge to IFRS by 2011 (actually 2010, since comparatives under IFRS would be
required) is a step in the right direction. However, lot of work to converge to
IFRS is still pending including obtaining regulatory amendments for the same and
providing clarity on income-tax issues. These milestones need to be achieved on
a war footing; otherwise the whole convergence exercise could get trapped in a
hopeless tangle.

levitra

GAPs in GAAP – Related-Party Transactions

Accounting Standards

Related-party transactions
occur in numerous areas, such as sales and purchases, loans, investments,
financial guarantees, cost sharing arrangements, share-based payments, etc.
When a related-party transaction takes place at arm’s length, the accounting is
the same as for a non-related party.
However, the challenge arises in
situations where the related-party transactions are not at arm’s length. Under
Indian GAAP (IGAAP), AS-18 requires disclosure of related-party transactions.
However, either there is no guidance on the accounting of related-party
transactions or the IGAAP practice does not reflect the substance. This is one
of the fundamental difference between International Financial Reporting
Standards (IFRS) and IGAAP. Let us consider some examples.

A parent company extends INR
1000 interest-free loan to a subsidiary, which is repaid after two years by the
subsidiary. The applicable interest rate for a similar loan is 10% p.a. The loan
will be recorded by the parent company at INR 826, which is the fair value (INR
1000 discounted by 10% for 2 years). The balance INR 174 represents an
investment by the parent in the subsidiary. In subsequent years, interest would
be imputed, and recognised as income by the parent company and as expense by the
subsidiary company.


INR


INR


In the books of the Parent Company


Year 0


Loan to Subsidiary Dr


826


Investment in Subsidiary Dr


174


Cash Cr


1000


Year 1


Loan to Subsidiary Dr


83


Interest Income Cr


83


Year 2


Loan to Subsidiary Dr


91


Interest Income Cr


91


Cash Dr


1000


Loan to Subsidiary Cr


1000

In the subsidiary, the
accounting would be exactly the reverse. Investment would be replaced by equity
contribution from the parent, and instead of interest income there would be
interest expense. At the consolidated level, the entries would cross out, and
there would be no impact.

Similar accounting may apply in the case of financial guarantees (a financially strong company in the group provides a financial guarantee to a bank for loans extended to another group member) or cost sharing arrangements or purchases and sales between related parties. In the case of group settled share-based payments, the company whose employees receive stock options will have to bear the charge in accordance with the requirements of IFRS 2. In IGAAP the accounting practice with regards to group settled share-based payments is quite disparate. In many cases, the practice is not to account for such arrangements under IGAAP.

Under IGAAP, the accounting for related-party transactions is developed by conjecture and practice than any robust standard/guidance. Whilst some of these issues will be addressed in IFRS, IGAAP will continue to apply for some companies. Therefore there is a need to make suitable amendments to IGAAP and to keep it dynamic.

IFRS Conversion in India on Fast Track

Accounting Standards

Understanding the need for a well-coordinated approach, the
Ministry of Corporate Affairs (MCA) recently set up a high-powered group
comprising various stakeholders such as National Advisory Committee on
Accounting Standards (NACAS), SEBI, RBI, IRDA, ICAI, IBA and CFOs of industries.
The Core Group is supported by two sub-groups. The first sub-group would assist
the Core Group in identification of changes required in various laws,
regulations and accounting standards for convergence with IFRS. The second
sub-group would interact with various stakeholders in order to understand their
concerns on the issue of convergence with IFRS, identify problem areas and
ascertain the preparedness of the stakeholders for such convergence.

A joint meeting of the Core Group and the two sub-groups was
held on 6 August 2009. At the meeting, the ICAI presented the details of a
comprehensive capacity building programme which it is carrying on to prepare the
Chartered Accountancy (CA) profession for this transition and stated that a
large number of professionals have undergone training and the process is being
accelerated. The Chairman of the Accounting Standards Board of ICAI informed
that the convergence project is at an advanced stage of completion. CFOs present
in the meeting stated that industry was getting prepared. They also requested
amendments to the Companies Act and other Regulations and also the early
exposure of accounting standards which are IFRS compliant, to enable them to
prepare for meeting the deadline.

The main purpose of the Core Group is to issue a road map in
the near term for convergence to enable adherence to the targeted date of 2011.

The author strongly supports the formation of the Core Group
and the issuance of the proposed road map. We congratulate the Ministry of
Company Affairs for its unprecedented and historic action of bringing all the
concerned regulators on a common platform to achieve smooth convergence to IFRS
in India.

We believe that the proposed road map as a minimum should
contain the following :

(i) The date of transition to IFRS and the requirement of
comparable numbers

(ii) Whether IFRS would be applied as they are or there
would be certain carve-in or carve-out to those standards. This is important
so that the entities, which start preparing for conversion, are clear about
the standards that are applicable to them

(iii) Whether the first-time adoption rules under IFRS 1
First-time Adoption of IFRS would be applicable

(iv) The direct and indirect tax implications of transition
to IFRS, including implications under the new direct tax code

(v) Legal amendments needed to the key statutes to achieve
convergence. For example, Companies Act, 1956, Banking Regulation Act
(including its Third Schedule), SEBI Regulations/Guidelines and the Listing
Agreement, RBI Guidelines to Banks/NBFCs, IRDA Regulations, Electricity Act
tax laws especially Income-tax Act, etc. The road map should also cover
whether and how these amendments can be carried out prior to the transition
date

(vi) The ICAI has taken more than seven years to issue the
financial instruments standards from the date of the first issuance of IAS 39
Financial Instruments : Recognition and Measurement. These standards are still
to be notified under the Companies Accounting Standard Rules. If all the IFRS
are to be notified under the Companies Accounting Standard Rules, whether and
how it can be done at least one year prior to the transition date — for
example, would there be a fast tracking process.

Conversion to IFRS is a tedious task involving significant
time, cost and efforts. The experience indicates that for large groups,
convergence to IFRS may take even more than one year. Thus, entities need to
start preparing for transition to IFRS well in advance. To facilitate the same,
the road map should be absolutely clear on the above aspects.

We recommend the MCA should avoid any changes to IFRS. This
will enable Indian entities to be fully IFRS compliant and give an ‘unreserved
and explicit statement of compliance with IFRS’ in their financial statements.
Generally, the financial statements which are fully IFRS compliant have a higher
brand value globally as compared to the financial statements that are not fully
IFRS compliant. Also, most developed stock exchanges require financial
statements to be fully compliant with IFRS for listing purposes. If IFRS are not
adopted as they are, significant efforts involved in the conversion process may
not yield the desired benefits to converting companies and to the nation.

This article is dedicated to the loving memory of my friend
Rahul Roy, who became the President of the Institute of Chartered Accountants of
India at a young age of 33, a record impossible to break. Rahul was a great
professional, a great author and orator but more importantly a good human being.
I have penned 4 small lines in his memory . . . .

Tomorrow may or may not be

The next moment we may or may not see

But no time can wither your loving memories

Those I’ll cherish till the end of time.

levitra

Revised Schedule VI – Is it a step in the right direction ?

Accounting Standards

Schedule VI of the Companies Act, 1956, prescribes the format
of financial statements and disclosure requirements for corporate entities in
India. Considering the economic and regulatory changes that have taken place
globally, and being as old as the Act itself (1956), Schedule VI had completely
outlived its utility. The Ministry of Corporate Affairs (MCA) has issued two
drafts of revised Schedule VI for comments, namely, Saral Schedule VI for Small
and Medium Companies (SMCs) and the other for Non-Small and Medium Companies
(Non-SMCs). The revised draft aims at eliminating numerous statistical and
statutory disclosure requirements which are not relevant from an investor
perspective. Accordingly, capacity details, expenditure/income in foreign
currency, details of debts/advances due from companies under the same
management, quantitative information on inventories are done away with.

In May 2008, MCA issued a press release in which it has
committed to convergence with International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS)
by April 1, 2011. Recently, at the G20 Summit on Financial Markets and the World
Economy, the then Finance Minister also committed to have convergence with IFRS in India. One aim of revising Schedule VI was to
attain compatibility and convergence with IFRS as well as Indian Accounting
Standards. Accordingly, the draft does not require capitalisation of exchange
gain or loss relating to fixed assets acquired from outside India. More
importantly, assets and liabilities are required to be classified as current and
non-current, which would help stakeholders in analysing the liquidity and
solvency status of a company.

Though the revision of Schedule VI aims at convergence with
IFRS, it would be far better to notify IAS 1, Presentation of Financial
Statements
(or an Indian equivalent that will be issued in the near term),
in the Companies Accounting Standards Rules, rather than rewriting Schedule VI.
This is because accounting standards and disclosure requirements are dynamic in
nature and need to be updated frequently to keep pace with changes in economic
and regulatory environment. If these formats are contained in
an accounting standard, it would be easier to amend, add or delete the
requirements. However, if it is con-tained
in an Act, the process of amending will become very excruciating and difficult,
if not impossible.

Draft revised Schedule has suggested specific format
for profit and loss account. For Non-SMCs functional classification is required
and for SMCs, classification based on nature of expense is required. Considering
industry-specific requirements, IAS 1 provides entities with a choice to either
adopt the function of expense method or the nature of expense method. The
functional classification required in the draft Schedule VI would involve a
tedious process of allocating various expenses to functional heads like cost of
sales, selling and marketing expenses and administrative expenses, which is not
hitherto required. As regards Cash Flow Statement, draft Schedule VI has
mandated the use of indirect method only. This is a deviation from IAS 7
Statement of Cash Flows
as well as AS-3 Cash Flow Statements which
permit both the direct and indirect method. It is rather unfortunate that
choices available to global companies are not being provided to Indian
companies.

IAS 1 is very prescriptive and sets out elaborate
requirements on presentation of financial statements. Draft Schedule VI, even
though modelled on lines of IAS 1, does not set out such important
requirements. For example, disclosures required under IAS 1, such as critical
judgements made in application of accounting policies; assumptions made about
the future and other major sources of estimation uncertainty that have a
significant risk of resulting in a material adjustment to the carrying amounts
of assets and liabilities within the next financial year are not required under
draft Schedule VI.

As per IAS 1, Statement of Changes in Equity (SOCIE) and
Statement of Comprehensive Income (SOCI) also form part of complete set of
financial statements. SOCIE includes all changes in equity arising from
transactions with owners in their capacity as owners, whereas SOCI includes
profit or loss for the period and other non-owner changes in equity. Draft
revised Schedule VI does not incorporate the concept of SOCIE and SOCI in the
financial statements. This would make revised Schedule VI out of sync with IFRS
(or an Indian equivalent that will be issued in the near term) even before it is
issued. Interestingly, in the general instructions contained in the draft
Schedule VI, an override clause allows accounting standards to override any
conflicting requirement of Schedule VI. If that be so, the point really is, do
we really need Schedule VI ?

Globally, the task of drafting accounting standards including
the format of financial statements and the disclosure requirements is carried
out by a specialised professional body, for example, in the United States the
task is carried out by FASB (Financial Accounting Standard Board). Accounting
standards and disclosure requirements is a specialised job, and the role of
regulators in this area is very limited. In light of various arguments, the
author believes that abandoning rather than revising Schedule VI is a step in
the right direction. This will also bring us in line with the global trend.

levitra

GAPS in GAAP – ED of Ind-AS 41 First-time Adoption of Indian Accounting Standards

Accounting standards

On 31 May 2010, the Institute of Chartered Accountants of
India (ICAI) issued Ind-AS 41, an exposure draft (ED) on the Indian equivalent
of IFRS 1 First-time Adoption of IFRS. There are some differences, which
apparently appear minor but have some significant consequences. Going ahead
there will be two sets of accounting standards in India, one is the Indian GAAP
and the other IFRS converged Standards which are likely to be known as ‘Indian
Accounting Standards (Ind-AS).’

Ind-AS will be issued by the ICAI and will have to be
notified in the Companies (Accounting Standards) Rules through NACAS. It will be
a separate body of accounting standards which may not always be the same as IFRS
issued by the International Accounting Standards Board (IASB) (hereinafter
referred to as ‘IFRS’). In other words there may be differences between the
converged standards notified in India and IFRS. This is clear from the EDs on
the converged standards issued by the ICAI so far. Other than Ind-AS 41, we see
differences in other standards, for example, the discount rate used for
long-term employee benefits and the recognition of actuarial gains/losses. Ind-AS
is likely to force a government bond rate for discounting and would require full
recognition of actuarial gains/losses. IFRS requires the use of a high-quality
corporate bond rate and the government bond rate is permitted as a fallback only
where there is no deep market for corporate bond. IFRS allows the corridor
approach, which permits not to recognise the actuarial gains/losses within the
corridor, and the deferral of actuarial gains/losses beyond the corridor amount.
Also under IFRS, full recognition in other comprehensive income or P&L is
permitted as other alternatives.

Many entities around the world are able to make a dual
statement of compliance on their financial statements, which is an unreserved
statement that the financial statements are in accordance with IFRS and the
standards notified in their local jurisdiction. This is only possible where
there are no differences between IFRS and the standards notified or else those
differences may be minimal and have either no impact on the entity or the impact
is immaterial. The advantage of making a dual statement of compliance is that
the financial statements can be used within India as well as in almost all major
capital markets in the world which accept IFRS financial statements. If Indian
companies fail to make dual statement of compliance, they may need to reconvert
again in accordance with IFRS, at the time of foreign listing.

Any Government would be challenged in making a decision as to
whether to adopt full IFRS or to make certain deviations which are deemed
necessary. As already stated, the advantage of adopting full IFRS is that it
would certainly help entities that are having or seeking foreign listing. Also
Indian entities that have several foreign subsidiaries which use IFRS, would
prefer to have the entire group on IFRS, rather than for different companies of
the group to be on different national versions of IFRS. However, such companies
as a percentage of total companies in India may be small and hence the
Government may not deem fit to impose full IFRS on all the companies in India.
This then brings us to the next point, what kind of changes from IFRS should the
Government consider when notifying Ind-AS. Certainly not the changes that are
being contemplated, with regards to the discount rate and the accounting for
actuarial gains and losses. Some countries have only a corporate bond market and
virtually no government bond market. An Indian entity that has a subsidiary in
such a country will not be able to use a government bond rate, as none exists.
In which case, a question on how to comply with Ind-AS may arise. With regards
to accounting for actuarial gains/losses, the author believes that if the
multiple options are available to entities in other countries, Indian entities
should not be deprived of that benefit. It is interesting to note that Australia
started off eliminating multiple options when it first notified the IFRS
standards. However, it later fell back to allowing the full range of options
under IFRS.

Other challenges under Ind-AS to making a dual statement of
compliance are :

  1. There are
    numerous differences between IFRS 1 and Ind-AS 41, which have been described
    elsewhere in this article. If these differences are relevant to a company,
    then dual statement of compliance may not be possible.

  2. Ind-AS 41 allows
    a company not to provide comparative numbers in accordance with Ind-AS. The
    companies that use this option will not be able to provide a dual statement of
    compliance as this will not be in accordance with IFRS.

  3. Another option
    for Indian companies is to present Ind-AS comparatives for 2010–11 in addition
    to the Indian GAAP comparatives. A company which intends to comply with both
    Ind-AS and IFRS in its first Ind-AS financial statements may consider this
    option to be more suitable. This option is, however, not without challenges.
    IFRS 1.22 covers the scenario where a company presents comparative information
    or a historical summary in accordance with both IFRS and Indian GAAP. It
    requires a company to label such comparative information prominently as the
    Indian GAAP information, as not being prepared in accordance with IFRS, and to
    disclose the nature of the main adjustments that would make the Indian GAAP
    comparatives comply with IFRS, although quantification is not required. If all
    the notes (including narratives) contain Indian GAAP comparative information,
    labelling of such information may be very challenging. Besides presentation of
    Indian GAAP comparative in the first Ind-AS financial statements is a huge
    challenge as the Ind-AS format for the income statement and balance sheet are
    significantly different from the Schedule VI formats. Furthermore, the Ind-AS
    disclosure requirements are more extensive than those of the Companies Act and
    Indian GAAP. It is therefore difficult to see how the Indian GAAP and Ind-AS
    financial statements could be presented in the same document, without amending
    the presentation/disclosure of Indian GAAP numbers significantly.

(4)        It
is a well-accepted position in India that if the requirement of an accounting
standard are not in conformity with law, the law will prevail over accounting
standards. This aspect is recognised in paragraph 4.1 of the Preface to the
Statements of Accounting Standards. The ED of Ind-AS 41 and other exposure
drafts issued by the ICAI contain a reference to the Preface. We understand
that as part of IFRS conversion exercise, the MCA will also modify the
Companies Act, 1956, to remove existing inconsistencies with Ind-AS. However,
there may be other laws prescribing treatments contrary to Ind-AS or such
inconsistencies may arise in future. We believe that any such inconsistency
with law if any will not allow Indian companies to make a dual statement of
compliance with IFRS.

 

(5)        The
Expert Advisory Committee (EAC) of the ICAI has been issuing opinions on
matters relating to application of accounting standards. If the
opinions/interpretations on Ind-AS are not in accordance with global
interpretations/ practice or the views of the IASB, then differences would
arise though the basic standards themselves may be the same or similar.

 

(6)        A
final set of converged standards have not yet been notified. It is expected
that there may be some differences between the notified standards and IFRS, as
discussed elsewhere in this article. We also understand that many corporate
entities are making strong representations on issues that are very significant
to them, such as the accounting of foreign exchange gains/losses on long-term
loans, or the prohibition on the percentage of completion method in the case of
real estate companies. At this point in time, it is a matter of conjecture as
to how these issues would be resolved.

 

(7)        There
is no clarity on the application of Schedule VI and Schedule XIV and what their
role would be under Ind-AS.

 

(8)        In
future, differences between notified standards and IFRS may arise, if the
Ind-AS do not keep pace with the changes in IFRS or where there are
disagreements. This feature is clearly visible in many jurisdictions that have
converged to IFRS in the past.

 

Differences with IFRS 1 :

 

Most of the first-time
exemptions/exceptions in Ind-AS 41 are in line with IFRS 1. However, the ICAI
has made few changes while adopting IFRS 1 in India. The changes broadly are :

 

(i)         IFRS
1 provides for various dates from which a standard could have been implemented.
For example, a company would have had to adopt the de-recognition requirements
for transactions entered after 1 January 2004. However, for Ind-AS 41 purposes,
all these dates have been changed to coincide with the transition date elected
by the company adopting Ind-AS;

 

(ii)        Deletion
of certain exemptions not relevant for India. For example, IFRS 1 provides an
exemption to a company that adopted the corridor approach for recording
actuarial gain and losses arising from accounting for employee obligations. In
India, since corridor approach is not elected, the resultant first-time
transition provision has been deleted;

 

(iii)       Adding
new exemptions in Ind-AS 41. For example, paragraph D 26 has been added to
provide for transitional relief while applying AS 24 (Revised 20XX) —
Non-current Assets Held for Sale and Discontinued Operations. Paragraph D 26
allows a company to use the transitional date circumstances to measure such
assets or operations at the lower of carrying value and fair value less cost to
sell; and

 

(iv)       Under
IFRS 1, equity and comprehensive income reconciliation to the previous GAAP is
required for the comparative year only. Under Ind-AS, such reconciliation is
required for the comparative (if presented) as well as the current year.

 

There are other interesting differences as
well. If a company becomes a first-time adopter later than its subsidiary,
associate or joint venture, it compulsorily needs to measure, in its
consolidated financial statements, the assets and liabilities of the subsidiary
(or associate or joint venture) at the same carrying amounts as in the
financial statements of the subsidiary (or associate or joint venture). The ED
of Ind-AS 41 also contains the same exemptions/ requirements. However, these
exemptions/requirements are based on Ind-AS financial statements; without any
reference/fallback to IFRS. This indicates that if a parent, subsidiary,
associate or joint venture of an Indian company is already using IFRS in its
separate/consolidated financial statements, the company will not be able to use
those financial statements in its transition to Ind-AS. This will create
considerable workload for Indian companies that have global operations.

 

Ind-AS 41 will be applicable to the first
set of annual Ind-AS financial statements prepared by a company. The first
Ind-AS financial statements are defined as the first annual financial
statements in which a company adopts Ind-AS by an ‘explicit and unreserved
statement of compliance with Ind-AS.’ The ED does not recognise or allow any
fallback on IFRS for this purpose. This indicates that companies, which are
already IFRS compliant, e.g., in accordance with the option given by the SEBI
or to comply with foreign listing requirements, will not be allowed to use
these financial statements to claim compliance with Ind-AS for the first time
and on an ongoing basis. Rather, they will need to prepare their opening
balance sheet in accordance with Ind-AS again. This will create additional
work-load for Indian companies listed on US and other foreign stock exchanges
or have used the voluntary option of SEBI and have already transitioned to
IFRS.

 

Conclusion :

 

Overall the author believes that Ind-AS
should not make any departures from the full IFRS standards unless they are
required in the rarest of rare cases. This will ensure that we receive the full
benefit of adopting full IFRS standards. So far it appears that the departures
that are expected to be made (discount rate on long-term employee benefits or
accounting of actuarial gains/losses) are unwarranted. As the standards are not
yet notified, and as companies make strong representations, it is not clear at
this stage, what exceptions would be made to the full IFRS standards. The
Government will have to exercise judgment on what departures to make; this
could be in the area of foreign exchange accounting, loan loss provisioning in
the case of banks, completed contract accounting in the case of real estate
companies, etc. There has to be a solid technical argument for making these
exceptions, and a balance achieved between interest of various stakeholders,
such as the company, investors, national interest, etc.

GAPs in GAAP – Accounting for rate-regulated entities

Many governments regulate the pricing of essential services such as natural gas, water and electricity. The objective is to provide price protection to consumers while providing a fair return to the supplier. These regulatory mechanisms have created significant accounting issues under IFRS, which does not have any elaborate guidance on the subject. The accounting for rate-regulated entities is now on the agenda of the International Accounting Standards Board (IASB) and a separate project has been set up to deal with it.

Accounting practices :

    Regulators often set prices in advance, based on estimated volumes, cost and a target rate of return. At the end of the period, the regulator and the entity determine the actual volumes, cost and return. This will give rise either to a surplus that needs to be refunded to the customer or a deficit that needs to be recovered from the customer. This is done by way of future price adjustments. The question to be addressed is whether these assets and liabilities can be recognised within the IFRS framework.

    In India, for example a power supply company recognised these assets/liabilities with the corresponding impact being adjusted against revenue. The following disclosure was made : “The Company determines surplus/deficit (i.e., excess/shortfall of/in aggregate gain over Return on Equity entitlement) for the year in respect of its licence area operations (i.e., generation, transmission and distribution) based on the principles laid down under the (Terms and Conditions of Tariff) Regulation, 2005 notified by MERC (Maharashtra Electricity Regulatory Commission) and the tariff order issued by it. In respect of such surplus/deficit, appropriate adjustments as stipulated under the regulations are made during the year. Further, any adjustments that may arise on annual performance review by MERC under the aforesaid tariff regulations are made after the completion of such review.” In the absence of similar disclosures by other companies, it is difficult to know the extent to which regulatory assets and liabilities are recognised on Indian balance sheet.

Are these assets and liabilities ?

    This will be addressed by the IASB in the ED. In 2005, the International Financial Reporting Interpretations Committee (IFRIC) was asked to provide guidance on the subject. The IFRIC concluded that regulatory assets and liabilities can only be recognised if they qualify under the IASB’s Framework.

    The main argument against recognising these rights and obligations as assets and liabilities under IFRS is that their recovery or payment is based only on future sales, over which the entity has no control or present obligation. Only in situations where there is a guarantee given to the entity by the regulator would an asset exist; however, that may not be the case in India.

    The IASB staff have put forward many arguments supporting the recognition of certain rate regulated assets and liabilities. The IASB and the FASB (US Financial Accounting Standards Board) have agreed to remove the misunderstood notion of control and to focus the definition of an asset on whether the entity has some rights or privileged access to the economic resource.

    With respect to liability recognition, the IASB and the FASB agreed, that their current respective definitions overemphasise the need to identify both the specific past events and the future outflow of economic benefits. Instead, the definition should focus on the economic obligation that presently exists.

    When considering recognition issues, the Board will also need to consider whether an asset or liability can be recognised where the regulatory approval for the specific matter is anticipated but has not been formally received, as formal approval is obtained after recognition of the asset or liability, and can sometimes take years.

    Whatever standard is finally issued, an assessment of the facts and circumstances of each regulatory mechanism will be required, as each jurisdiction is unique. As a result, regulators should pay close attention to this project to understand how their mechanisms affect the results of the rate-regulated enterprises in their jurisdiction.

    It has been estimated that the US electricity industry alone has reported regulatory assets and liabilities of $ 675 billion and $ 450 billion, respectively in 2007. In India, the corresponding numbers could be a fraction, but would nevertheless be staggering, to make accounting of rate-regulated entities a high-priority accounting issue. Also, in India, there is no guidance on rate-regulated entities. With India adopting IFRS in 2011, the accounting for rate-regulated entities in the country would be dictated by the final outcome of the IASB project. As an interim measure the ICAI should provide some guidance.

Gaps in GAAP – Accounting for MAT Credit

Accounting Standards

The Finance Act, 2000, w.e.f. 1-4-2001, introduced S. 115JB
according to which a company is liable to pay MAT under the provisions of the
said section in respect of any previous year relevant to the assessment year
commencing on or after the 1st day of April, 2001. The MAT under this Section is
payable where the normal income-tax payable by such company in the previous year
is less than 10% of its book profit which is deemed to be the total income of
the company. Such company is liable to pay income-tax at the rate of 10% of its
book profit. The Finance Act, 2005, inserted Ss.(1A) to S. 115JAA, to grant tax
credit in respect of MAT paid u/s.115JB of the Act with effect from A.Y.
2006-07.


The salient features of MAT credit u/s.115JAA as applicable,
in respect of tax paid u/s.115JB, are as below :

(a) A company, which has paid MAT, would be allowed credit
in respect thereof.

(b) The amount of MAT credit would be equal to the excess
of MAT over normal income-tax for the assessment year for which MAT is paid.

(c) No interest is allowable on such credit.

(d) The MAT credit so determined u/s.115JB can be carried
forward up to seven succeeding assessment years.

(e) The amount of MAT credit can be set off only in the
year in which the company is liable to pay tax as per the normal provisions of
the Act and such tax is in excess of MAT for that year.

(f) The amount of set-off would be to the extent of excess
of normal income-tax over the amount of MAT calculated as if S. 115JB had been
applied for that assessment year for which the set-off is being allowed.


Whether MAT credit can be considered as an asset ?

As per the “Guidance Note on Accounting for Credit
Available in Respect of Minimum Alternative Tax Under the Income-tax Act, 1961″,
issued by the Council of the Institute of Chartered Accountants of India
,
although MAT credit is not a deferred tax asset under AS-22, yet it gives rise
to expected future economic benefit in the form of adjustment of future
income-tax liability arising within the specified period. A question, therefore,
arises whether the MAT credit can be considered as an ‘asset’ and in case it can
be considered as an asset, whether it should be so recognised in the financial
statements.

MAT paid in a year in respect of which credit is allowed
during the specified period under the Act is a resource controlled by the
company as a result of past event, namely, the payment of MAT. MAT credit has
expected future economic benefits in the form of its adjustment against the
discharge of the normal tax liability if the same arises during the specified
period. Accordingly, the Guidance Note concluded that MAT credit is an ‘asset’.
However, it is recognised in the balance sheet when it is probable that the
future economic benefits associated with it will flow to the enterprise and the
asset has a cost or value that can be measured reliably.

MAT credit should be recognised as an asset only when and to
the extent there is convincing evidence that the company will pay normal
income-tax during the specified period. Such evidence may exist, for example,
where a company has, in the current year, a deferred tax liability because its
depreciation for the income-tax purposes is higher than the depreciation for
accounting purposes, but from the next year onwards, the depreciation for
accounting purposes would be higher than the depreciation for income-tax
purposes, thereby resulting in the reversal of the deferred tax liability to an
extent that the company becomes liable to pay normal income-tax.

EAC Opinion :

The Expert Advisory Committee has addressed the MAT issue in
the Compendium of Opinions, Volume XXV, Query No. 24, titled ‘Creation of
deferred tax asset in respect of MAT credit under Ss.(1A) of S. 115JAA of the
Income-tax Act, 1961.’ The EAC noted that payment of MAT does not result in any
timing differences, since it does not give any rise to any difference between
accounting income and taxable income which are arrived at before adjusting the
tax expense; viz., MAT in this case. Accordingly, it would not be correct
to recognise any deferred tax asset in respect of MAT under AS-22. The author
agrees with this view.

However, unfortunately the EAC has remained silent on whether
MAT credit can be recognised as other asset if not as deferred tax asset. In the
opinion of the author, the answer is in the affirmative in light of the
recommendations of the Guidance Note discussed above. The author recommends that
in future in order to remove any scope for doubt or confusion, the EAC should
respond to queries comprehensively.

levitra

Gaps in GAAP – Compensated absences (such as annual leave) – Whether long-term or short-term under IAS 19s?

Accounting Standards

Fact pattern :


In India, employees are entitled to fixed annual leave, say
20 days, per completed year of service. The employees have a right to utilise
the leave at any time after entitlement or alternatively seek cash compensation
on resignation/retirement. Based on past experience, employees generally do not
utilise their leave entitlement immediately. Rather they carry forward a
substantial portion of the unutilised leaves (usually representing the maximum
ceiling imposed by the company — this could range from 180-300 days) up to
retirement/resignation. The carry forward leave is then encashed at the time of
retirement/resignation.

The value of leave liability if determined based on
short-term or long-term classification under IAS 19, may provide materially
different provision amounts. This is because long-term classification involves
discounting and use of the PUC actuarial valuation method.


Question:





  •  From IAS 19 perspective, whether compen sated absences
    are short-term or other long-term employee benefits ?


  •  How is the presentation of the liability done under IAS
    1 — whether current or non-current ?



Term


Definition pre-2007 amendment


Definition post-2007 amendment


Short-term
employee benefits


Short-term employee benefits are
employee benefits (other than termination benefits) which fall due
wholly
within twelve months after the end of the period in which the
employees render the related service.


Short-term employee benefits are
employee benefits (other than termination benefits) that are due to be
settled
within twelve months after the end of the period in which
the employees render the related service.


Other long-term employee benefits


Other long-term employee benefits
are employee benefits (other than post-employment benefits and termination
benefits) which do not fall due wholly within twelve months
after the end of the period in which the employees render the related
service.


Other long-term employee benefits
are employee benefits (other than post-employment benefits and termination
benefits) that are not due to be settled within twelve months
after the end of the period in which the employees render the related
service.

Paragraph 8

extracts


Short-term employee benefits include
items such as : short-term compensated absences (such as paid annual leave
and paid sick leave) where the absences are expected to occur within
twelve months after the end of the period in which the employees render the
related employee service.


Short-term employee benefits include
items such as : short-term compensated absences (such as paid annual leave
and paid sick leave) where the compensation for the
absences is due to be settled
within twelve months after the end of
the period in which the employees render the related employee service.

Discussion:

Requirements of IAS 19:

Position before amendment of IAS 19 in 2007:

Before the 2007 annual improvements project, paragraph 7 of
IAS 19 stated that short-term benefits (which include compensated absences) fall
due within twelve months from the end of the reporting period when the employee
has rendered the service. Short-term compensated absences were described in
paragraph 8 as benefits ‘expected to occur’ within twelve months after the end
of the period. Other long-term employee benefits were defined as employee
benefits which are expected to ‘fall due’ more than twelve months from the end
of the period. Therefore, a compensated absence which is due to the employee but
is not expected to occur for more than twelve months, was not an ‘other
long-term employee benefit’ as defined in paragraph 7 of IAS 19, nor was it a
short-term compensated absence as described in paragraph 8 of IAS 19.

Amendment in annual improvement project 2007:

The IASB’s intention was to require measurement based on
expected time of settlement. With a view to resolve the above conflict, the IASB
amended the definition of short-term employee benefits and other long-term
employee benefits to replace the terms ‘fall due’ and ‘expected to occur’ with
‘due to be settled.’ It has made a similar amendment in paragraph 8 as well.

Basis for conclusion paragraphs BC4B and BC4C to the amendment provide as below?:

“BC4B?.?.?.?.?the IASB concluded that the critical factor in distinguishing between long-term and short-term benefits is the timing of the expected settlement. Therefore, the IASB clarified that other long-term benefits are those that are not due to be settled within twelve months after the end of the period in which the employees rendered the service.

BC4C?.?.?.?.?The IASB noted that this distinction between short-term and long-term benefits is consistent with the current/ non-current liability distinction in IAS 1 Presentation of Financial Statements. However, the fact that for presentation purposes a long-term benefit may be split into current and non-current portions does not change how the entire long-term benefit would be measured.”

While paragraph BC4B indicates that short-term/ long-term classification should be based on expected settlement, reference to IAS 1 in paragraph BC4C means that a leave may be treated as long-term only if the entity has an unconditional right to defer settlement of liability for at least twelve months after the reporting period.

In other words, whilst the IASB’s intention was to measure such liability based on expected time of settlement, the confusing wordings in IAS 19, both pre and post revision, lend itself to two views.

Position in India?:

In Indian GAAP, the requirements of accounting standard are in line with pre-revised IAS 19. The ICAI has taken a view to treat compensated absences as other long-term employee benefits. Consequently, the practice under Indian GAAP is to treat the leave liability as long-term. In the few IFRS accounts published by Indian companies, it appears that leave liability has been provided based on long-term classification. However, that may not necessarily be what other companies would do, as they start adopting IFRS in 2011.

Further points to consider?:

   i) The IASB has also recognised this issue and has tentatively approved a proposal to amend paragraph BC4C in the basis for conclusion to delete the reference to consistency with IAS 1 and add a sentence to paragraph BC4B to clarify that the definitions of short-term employee benefits and other long-term employee benefits are based on the timing of when the entity expects the benefit to become due to be settled. This indicates that IASB preference is to treat accumulated absences as long-term.

    ii) Globally there appears to be a mixed practice and a mixed view on this issue.

Authors view?:

Under IAS 19?:

The long-term classification for measurement of liability under IAS 19 seems more relevant to India given that this is how it has been accounted for so far, this is the intent of the IASB as well as this is based on ICAI guidance. However, given the confus-ing drafting and reference to IAS 1 in the BC, and the use of the words ‘due to be settled’, the short-term view is also sustainable.

Under IAS 1?:

With regards to presentation under IAS 1 as current or non-current, the same would be current liability because the entity does not have an unconditional right to defer settlement of the liability for at least twelve months after the reporting period.

GAPs in GAAP – AS-7 – Percentage of completion accounting based on an output measure

In applying percentage of completion accounting based on an output measure (e.g., completion of physical proportion of contract work), how should incurred costs be accounted for ? The following example is used to illustrate the issue. Assume that all contract costs incurred in each period can be attributed to the output in that period.

View 1: Allocate costs in the same proportion as revenue

AS-7, paragraph 21 requires both contract revenue and contract costs to be recognised as revenue and expenses by reference to the stage of completion. Paragraph 24 also states that contract revenue is matched with the contract costs incurred in reaching the stage of completion, resulting in the reporting of revenue, expenses and profit that can be attributed to the proportion of work completed. Therefore when revenue is recognised based on an output measure, the actual incurred contract cost should be allocated pro rata between expenses and inventory. This view results in the same gross margin percentage throughout the contract period as can be seen below.


View 2:

Recognise  costs as incurred

Paragraph 25 indicates that contract costs usually are recognised as an expense in the accounting periods in which the work to which they relate is performed. Paragraph 26 requires incurred costs that related to future activity to be recognised as assets. Therefore incurred costs that can be attributed to activity in the current period should be expensed. This view results in a changing gross margin percentage throughout the contract period.


Conclusion:

As can be seen from a plain reading of the standard, two views are possible. The standard-setters should clarify this issue, so that there can be uniformity  in practice  on this issue.

GAPS in GAAP – Amalgamation after the Balance Sheet Date

Accounting Standards

Paragraph 27 of AS-14
‘Accounting for Amalgamations’ states as follows :

When an amalgamation is effected
after the balance sheet date but before the issuance of the financial statements
of either party to the amalgamation, disclosure is made in accordance with AS-4,
‘Contingencies and Events Occurring After the Balance Sheet Date’, but the
amalgamation is not incorporated in the financial statements. In certain
circumstances, the amalgamation may also provide additional information
affecting the financial statements themselves, for instance, by allowing the
going concern assumption to be maintained.

It has been noticed that there
is a mixed accounting practice with regards to High Court orders for
amalgamation received after the balance sheet date but before the issuance of
the financial statements. Many companies incorporate them in the financial
statements, a few have not. The mixed practice has arisen because the term
effected after the balance sheet date can be interpreted in more than
one way. This can be explained with the help of a simple example.

Query :

Big Ltd. has a year end 31
December 2007. It had earlier filed an application with the High Court for
merging Small Ltd. with itself with an appointed date of 1 January 2006. The
High Court passed the merger order on 4 January 2008, and the same was
filed on the same day with the ROC at which point in time it became
effective.
Accounts for the year ended 31 December 2007 were signed on 15
January 2008. Should Big Ltd. consider the merger in its financial statements
for the year ended 31 December 2007 ?

Response :

View 1 :

No. The effective date of
amalgamation is the date when the amalgamation order is filed with ROC, which in
this case is, 4 January 2008. Therefore, the amalgamation has become effective
after the balance sheet date. Hence, in the 31 December, 2007 financial
statements, appropriate disclosures are made but the amalgamation is not
incorporated in the financial statements.

View 2 :


Yes.
The reference to effective date in AS-14 could be interpreted to mean the
appointed date. In this case the High Court has passed an order for merger with
an effective date of 1 January 2006.

From a plain reading of AS-14 it
appears that View 1 is a more appropriate answer. AS-14, paragraph 27 when
applied in this case, seems to suggest that the merger event is an event after
the balance sheet date and hence should be recorded after the balance sheet
date. The actual merger takes place only when the order is passed by the High
Court and filed with the ROC. Those significant events (High Court order
and filing with the ROC) had not happened before or at the balance sheet date.

However practice seems to
suggest that View 2 is more prevalent. This is probably for the reason that the
effective date is interpreted to be the appointed date. Moreover, as the event
(High Court order and filing with ROC) has already happened prior to issuance of
financial statements, it would not be prudent not to incorporate them in the
financial statements
merely because the order was passed and filed with ROC
after the balance sheet date. The disadvantage with View 2 is companies may
arbitrarily choose to time the issuance of the financial statements to either
account or ignore the amalgamation transaction in the financial statements.

The author believes that whilst the technically
right answer is View 1, at the present moment and in the absence of any contrary
opinion from the ICAI, both views may be sustainable.

levitra

GAPs in GAAP – Accounting for carbon credits

Accounting Standards

A number of Indian companies generate carbon credit under the
Clean Development Mechanisms (CDM). The amount involved is material enough to
the overall viability of a project.

Under IFRS, the International Accounting Standards Board (IASB)
had issued an interpretation IFRIC 3 Emission Rights, which was withdrawn
in June 2005. Thus, the IASB is still debating on an appropriate treatment for
CERs (Carbon Emission Reduction). Under IFRS most entities generating CERs
treat
the same as government grant covered under IAS 20 Accounting
for Government Grants and Disclosure of Government Assistance
. This is
because an international agency grants the same. Accordingly, based on IAS 20
requirements, a generating entity recognises CERs as asset once there is a
reasonable assurance that it will comply with conditions attached and CERs will
be received.

IAS 20 gives an option to measure such grant either at
fair value or nominal value. Most entities will measure the CERs at fair
value
to ensure appropriate matching with the costs incurred. They will
recognise the same in the income statement in the same period as the related
cost which the grant is intended to compensate.
The corresponding debit will
be to intangible assets in accordance with IAS 38 Intangible Assets.


No guidance is currently available under Indian GAAP;
consequently various practices exist (a) income from sale of CERs is recognised
upon execution of a firm sale contract for the eligible credits, since prior to
that there is no certainty of the amount to be realised (b) income from CERs is
recognised at estimated realisable value on their confirmation by the concerned
authorities (c) income from CER is recognised on an entitlement basis based on
reasonable certainty after making adjustments for expected deductions.

The Accounting Standards Board (ASB) of the Institute of
Chartered Accountants of India (ICAI) has issued an Exposure Draft (ED) of the
Guidance Note on Accounting for Self-generated Certified Emission Reductions.
The ED proposes to lay down the manner of applying accounting principles to CERs
generated by an entity.

As per the ED the generating entity should recognise CERs as
asset only after receipt of communication for credit from UNFCCC and provided it
is probable that future benefits associated with CERs will flow to the entity
and costs to generate CERs can be measured reliably. Further, such assets meet
the definition of the term ‘inventory’ given under AS-2 Valuation of
Inventories
and hence are valued at lower of cost and net realisable value.
Only the costs incurred for the certification of CERs bring the CERs into
existence and, therefore, only those costs should be included in the cost of
inventory. All other costs are either not directly relevant in bringing the
inventory to its present location and condition or they are incurred before CERs
come into existence as per the prescribed criteria. Thus, those costs cannot be
inventorised.

The ED will result in significant cost and revenue
mismatch
in the financial statements. This is because entities would need to
expense most of their costs as soon as incurred (with an insignificant amount
being capitalised as inventory), but will recognise revenue arising from CERs
only when these are actually sold. Clearly the accounting recommended by the
ICAI is very different from existing practices under Indian GAAP, and hence
every company that has significant revenue from carbon credits will have to
consider the impact of the ED very carefully.

The treatment prescribed in the ED appears to be inconsistent
with the existing Indian GAAP literature in more than one regard. The ED
requirement to recognise CERs as asset only when these are credited by UNFCCC in
a manner to be unconditionally available is contrary to the principles currently
followed for recognition of an asset. In most cases, recognition of an asset is
based on criteria of probability/reasonable assurance as against absolute
certainty prescribed in ED. For example, both under AS-9 Revenue Recognition
and AS-12 Accounting for Government Grants, recognition of income is
based on the criteria of reasonable assurance.

The ED is also inconsistent with an Expert Advisory
Committee’s (EAC) opinion on export incentives. As per the EAC opinion DEPB
credit should be recognised in the year in which the export was made, without
waiting for its actual credit in the subsequent year, provided there are no
insignificant uncertainties of ultimate collection. The EAC opinion is based on
the application of the existing accounting principles, including definition of
the term ‘asset’ given in the Framework, which is based on the
probability theory.

In the authors view, the ED should not have been issued since
it clearly conflicts with the existing requirement and practices under both
Indian GAAP and IFRS and is contrary to the definition of an asset in the
Framework.
As India is adopting IFRS and the guidance in these areas is
being developed under IFRS, issuing India-specific guidance is duplicating the
effort and creating more differences in how the 2 GAAPs are applied, which will
have to be then taken care of in 2011, which is the transition date for adopting
IFRS.

levitra

Gaps in GAAP – Guidance Note on Accounting for Employee Share-based Payments

Accounting Standards

The Guidance Note allows either the fair value method or the
intrinsic method to account for employee share-based payments. The manner in
which the Guidance Note is drafted is based on the fair valuation principle
(more or less on the basis of IFRS). The intrinsic method is inadequately
covered by a sweeping paragraph (see below), without thought to the unintended
consequences that it may cause.

“Accounting for employee share-based payment plans dealt with
heretobefore is based on the fair value method. There is another method known as
the ‘Intrinsic Value Method’ for valuation of employee share-based payment
plans. Intrinsic value, in the case of a listed company, is the amount by which
the quoted market price of the underlying share exceeds the exercise price of an
option. For example, an option with an exercise price of Rs.100 on an equity
share whose current quoted market price is Rs.125, has an intrinsic value of
Rs.25 per share on the date of its valuation. If the quoted market price is not
available on the grant date, then the share price nearest to that date is taken.
In the case of a non-listed company, since the shares are not quoted on a stock
exchange, value of its shares is determined on the basis of a valuation report
from an independent valuer. For accounting for employee share-based payment
plans, the intrinsic value may be used, mutatis mutandis, in place of the
fair value.” (paragraph 40 of the Guidance Note)

When the above oversimplified paragraph is applied in the
context of some aspects of ESOP, it could result in certain unexpected results.
Let’s explain this with the help of a small example where a share settlement is
changed to cash settlement on vesting.

Now, let’s say one ESOP is granted that will vest at the end
of 3 years at an exercise price of Rs.90. At the date of grant the fair value of
the share is also Rs.90. The value of the option is estimated to be Rs.30. In
this example, if the fair value model is applied, Rs.10 will be charged in each
of the next three years. If the intrinsic model is applied, there will be no
charge.

So far so good, but now things will get a little complicated
as we move from a share-settled ESOP scheme to a cash-settled ESOP scheme. As
per the Guidance Note, “if an enterprise settles in cash, vested shares or stock
options, the payment made to the employee should be accounted for as a deduction
from the relevant equity account (e.g., Stock Options Outstanding
Account) except to the extent that the payment exceeds the fair value of the
shares or stock options, measured at the settlement date. Any such excess
should be recognised as an expense.” (paragraph 28 of the Guidance Note)

Assume in the above example, the share price is Rs.150 at
vesting date (end of the third year). The Company collects exercise price Rs.90
from the employee and pays Rs.150 (cash settlement). As already discussed above,
for accounting of employee share-based payment plans, the intrinsic value may be
used, mutatis mutandis, in place of the fair value. The requirement of
the Guidance Note will be changed as follows (if intrinsic rather than fair
value method is used) : “if an enterprise settles in cash, vested shares or
stock options, the payment made to the employee should be accounted for as a
deduction from the relevant equity account (e.g., Stock Options
Outstanding Account) except to the extent that the payment exceeds the intrinsic
value of the shares or stock options, measured at the settlement date.
Any such excess should be recognised as an expense.”

The payment of Rs.150 does not exceed the intrinsic value of
the shares at the settlement date, i.e. Rs.150. Hence the strange
conclusion is that there is no excess which needs to be recognised as an
expense.

This is strange because had the ESOP been a cash-settled
employee share-based payment plan from inception, the Company would have
charged Rs.60 as per the Guidance Note over 3 years of the scheme (see Appendix
IV of the Guidance Note). However, it appears that if a company has a
share-based plan to start with, but is then eventually settled in cash, no
charge is required in the profit and loss account.

The above dichotomy has arisen primarily because of an
unintended interplay between paragraph 28 and paragraph 40 of the Guidance Note,
which was predominantly written to provide guidance on fair value accounting of
ESOP, with the intrinsic method being inadequately addressed by a sweeping
paragraph (paragraph 40), which has caused a GAP in GAAP.


This issue needs to be immediately addressed by the Institute of Chartered
Accountants of India.

 

levitra

GAPs in GAAP – Accounting for amalgamation

Accounting Standards

AS-14 — ‘Accounting for
Amalgamations’ defines amalgamations in the nature of merger and in the nature
of purchase (acquisition). The classification is important because in the case
of amalgamation in the nature of merger, the difference between the equity of
the transferor company and the equity issued to the shareholders of the
transferor company is adjusted against reserves of the amalgamated (transferee)
company. This accounting is usually known as the pooling method. In the case of
amalgamation in the nature of acquisition, the difference is reflected as
goodwill, which is then amortised in the income statement of the amalgamated
company over a period of 3-5 years. This method is usually known as acquisition
accounting.

Under AS-14 for an
amalgamation to qualify as being in the nature of merger it should satisfy all
the following conditions :


(a) All the assets and
liabilities of the transferor company become, after amalgamation, the assets
and liabilities of the transferee company.

(b) Shareholders holding
not less than 90% of the face value of the equity shares of the transferor
company (other than the equity shares already held therein, immediately
before the amalgamation, by the transferee company or its subsidiaries or
their nominees) become equity shareholders of the transferee company by
virtue of the amalgamation.

(c) The consideration
for the amalgamation receivable by those equity shareholders of the
transferor company who agree to become equity shareholders of the transferee
company is discharged by the transferee company wholly by the issue of
equity shares in the transferee company, except that cash may be paid in
respect of any fractional shares.

(d) The business of the
transferor company is intended to be carried on, after the amalgamation, by
the transferee company.

(e) No adjustment is
intended to be made to the book values of the assets and liabilities of the
transferor company when they are incorporated in the financial statements of
the transferee company, except to ensure uniformity of accounting policies.


Amalgamation in the nature
of purchase is an amalgamation which does not satisfy any one or more of the
conditions specified above.

Assuming conditions (a), (d)
and (e) are fulfilled, a question arises that in the case of an amalgamation of
a wholly-owned subsidiary into the parent company, whether the same would
qualify as being in the nature of merger and would require to apply pooling
method or in the nature of purchase and hence would need to apply acquisition
accounting.

The question arises because
it is not clear whether conditions (b) and (c) are fulfilled. For example,
condition (c) requires the parent company to discharge its obligation by issuing
shares to the shareholders of the wholly-owned subsidiary. In the given case,
that is not possible since the amalgamation would involve cancellation of the
existing shares (100%) of the parent company in the subsidiary, rather than the
parent issuing new shares to the shareholders (own self) of the subsidiary.

In the author’s view, in the
case of an amalgamation with a 100% subsidiary, conditions (b) and (c) are not
applicable at all, rather than unfulfilled. Therefore it is possible to apply
pooling method in the case of an amalgamation with a 100% subsidiary. This is
also in line with IFRS which requires the pooling method to be applied in the
case of common control transactions, i.e., restructuring or amalgamation
transactions within the group.

levitra

GAPs in GAAP – Accounting for SMEs

Accounting Standards

The publication of a simplified form of IFRS for private
entities has been long awaited by national standard setters and small and
medium-sized entities, which have been required to apply full IFRS in the past.
The International Accounting Standards Board (IASB) has issued its International
Financial Reporting Standard for Small and Medium-sized Entities (IFRS for SMEs).

The standard consists of 230 pages of text, arranged into 35
chapters that cover all of the recognition, measurement, presentation and
disclosure requirements for SMEs. There is no cross reference to other IFRS
(with one exception relating to financial instruments discussed below). This
underscores the fact that IFRS for SMEs is viewed by the standard setter as
independent from the full IFRS.

The standard is intended for use by SMEs. SMEs are defined in
the standard as small and medium-sized entities that do not have public
accountability and which also publish general-purpose financial statements for
external users. An entity has public accountability if its debt or equity
instruments are traded in a public market, or it holds assets in a fiduciary
capacity for a broad group of outsiders.

While this definition is necessary for an understanding of
the entities to which IFRS for SMEs is applicable, the preface to the standard
indicates that the decision as to which entities are required or permitted to
apply the standard will lie with the regulatory and legislative authorities in
each jurisdiction. However, if a publicly accountable entity uses the standard,
it may not claim that the financial statements conform to IFRS for SMEs even if
its application is permitted or required in that jurisdiction, as the entity
would not meet the definition of an SME.

In India, various regulatory authorities such as the Ministry
of Corporate Affairs, RBI, IRDA, SEBI, etc will have to define the term SME.
Considering the manner in which the term SME is defined in the standard, these
would include entities other than listed companies, banks, financial
institutions, insurance companies, etc.

IFRS for SMEs is based on the fundamental principles of full
IFRS, but in many cases, it has been simplified to make the accounting
requirements less complex and to reduce the cost and effort required to produce
the financial statements. To achieve this, IASB has removed a number of
accounting options available under full IFRS and attempted to simplify
accounting for SMEs in certain areas.

For example in the case of share based payments, the fair
value of shares in equity-settled share-based payment transactions can be
measured using the directors’ best estimate of fair value if observable market
prices are not available. Another example of simplification is investment
property which can be accounted as fixed assets, if fair valuing them involves
undue cost or effort or does not provide a reliable measure.

The IFRS for SMEs includes a set of illustrative financial
statements and a presentation and disclosure checklist to assist entities with
preparing their financial statements. The application of this standard is
expected to reduce the compliance costs for many smaller entities and help make
the financial statements of such entities less complex.

As the standard is very much principles-based, interpretation
issues are likely to arise, which will require a globally consistent resolution.
In order to ensure this standard achieves international consistency and
comparability of financial reporting, it is important that interpretations are
not developed by each jurisdiction. It would appear logical that the
International Financial Reporting Interpretations Committee (IFRIC) could be
approached to provide any interpretative guidance that users may require.

In India, one major criticism against the full implementation
of IFRS was that they would impose an unnecessary burden and hardship on SMEs.
With the issuance of the SME standard, one of the major hurdles for the
implementation of IFRS in India has been removed. The ICAI and the Ministry of
Corporate Affairs (MCA) should now take appropriate and swift measures to
legalize the adoption of full IFRS by public interest entities and IFRS for SMEs
by SMEs from 2011. As a first step, the ICAI and other regulatory bodies should
define an SME. Also, it is desirable that all regulatory agencies define SME in
a consistent manner to the extent practicable.

levitra

Gaps in GAAP – Reverse acquisitions

Accounting Standards

In some business combinations, commonly referred to as
reverse acquisitions, the acquirer is the entity whose equity interests have
been acquired and the issuing entity is the acquiree. This might be the case
when, for example, a private entity arranges to have itself ‘acquired’ by a
smaller public entity as a means of obtaining a stock exchange listing. Although
legally the issuing public entity is regarded as the parent and the private
entity is regarded as the subsidiary, the legal subsidiary is the acquirer if it
has the power to govern the financial and operating policies of the legal parent
so as to obtain benefits from its activities. Commonly the acquirer is the
larger entity.


Example :

A Ltd. a big private company wants to become a public entity,
but does not want to register its equity shares. In order to accomplish that, A
Ltd. gets itself acquired by B Ltd., a smaller public entity.

A
Ltd.  

B
Ltd.

Private company Legal
subsidiary Accounting acquirer
Public company Legal
holding Accounting acquiree

Under International Financial Reporting Standard-3, in a
reverse acquisition, the cost of the business combination is deemed to have been
incurred by the legal subsidiary (i.e., the acquirer for accounting
purposes) in the form of equity instruments issued to the owners of the legal
parent (i.e., the acquiree for accounting purposes). If the published
price of the equity instruments of the legal subsidiary is used to determine the
cost of the combination, a calculation shall be made to determine the number of
equity instruments the legal subsidiary would have had to issue to provide the
same percentage ownership interest of the combined entity to the owners of the
legal parent as they have in the combined entity as a result of the reverse
acquisition. The fair value of the number of equity instruments so calculated
shall be used as the cost of the combination.

Example


Balance sheet before business combination

  C (CU) D (CU)
Net
Assets
1,100 2,000

Total
1,100 2,000

Equity
100 shares 300
  60 Shares 600

Retained Earning
800 1,400

Total
1,100 2,000

C issues 2.5 shares in exchange for each ordinary share of D.
Therefore C issues 150 shares in exchange of all 60 shares of D. Therefore,
legally C is the acquirer. However, C is in substance an accounting acquiree
(assume). Fair value of one equity share of D at date of acquisition is Currency
Units (CU) 50. Fair value of C’s identifiable net assets as at date of
acquisition is CU1,300.

Response :



  •  In the exchange, D’s shareholders own 60% of the combined entity (150/250).
  • If the business combination would have taken place in the form of D issuing equity to shareholders of C, in the same exchange ratio, it would have issued 40 shares (i.e., 100/2.5).
  • Thus, cost of business combination would be CU2000 (40 X CU50).
  • Goodwill = CU2000 — CU1300, i.e., CU700.
  • Consolidated Balance sheet of C Limited & Group after the acquisition:
Consolidated financial statements prepared following a reverse acquisition shall be issued under the name of the legal parent, but described in the notes as a continuation of the financial statements of the legal subsidiary (i.e., the acquirer for accounting purposes). Because such consolidated financial statements represent a continuation of the financial statements of the legal subsidiary:

(a)    the assets and liabilities of the legal subsidiary shall be recognised and measured in those consolidated financial statements at their pre-combination carrying amounts.

(b)    the retained earnings and other equity balances recognised in those consolidated financial statements shall be the retained earnings and other equity balances of the legal subsidiary immediately before the business combination.

(c)    the amount recognised as issued equity instruments in those consolidated financial statements shall be determined by adding to the issued equity of the legal subsidiary immediately before the business combination the cost of the combination. However, the equity structure appearing in those consolidated financial statements (i.e., the number and type of equity instruments issued) shall reflect the equity structure of the legal parent, including the equity instruments issued by the legal parent to effect the combination.

(d)    comparative information presented in those consolidated financial statements shall be that of the legal subsidiary.

As can be seen from the above, the accounting for reverse acquisition under IFRS is based on identifying the true acquirer. Goodwill is determined on the basis that the accounting acquiree is fair valued, considering the accounting acquirer has paid the consideration. Indian GAAP does not recognise the concept of reverse acquisition at all, and hence it is high time that Indian GAAP adopts IFRS-3 standard on business combination.

Finding the Sweet Spot

Accounting Standards

Accounting standards are becoming increasingly complicated.
Though the standard-setters have their heart in the right place, and would want
to simplify the standards, the end result is that accounting standards are
becoming incomprehensible. The more the standard-setters try to simplify, the
worse it gets. One reason may very well be that businesses are getting
complicated, and transactions are not as simple as they used to be. A few years
ago, Indian GAAP had only 15 accounting standards; now that number has more than
doubled. Even International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRSs) would soon
cross 3000 plus pages.


Indian standards are inspired by IFRS. Therefore it would be
more appropriate to look at the development of IFRSs. These standards were
written over several years and with the assistance of different national
standard-setters. Consequently the lay out of the standards, the manner of
drafting and the use of English differ substantially. Recent IFRSs are drafted
more methodically, with a clear segregation of scope, definitions, recognition
and measurement, measurement after recognition, retirement and disposal,
disclosures, basis of conclusion, implementation guidance, etc. Therefore it is
of utmost importance that all old IFRS be drafted afresh, to make them
consistent with the recently issued standards.

There are a number of terms (see box) that have been used
frequently throughout the standards, which could mean different things to
different people; particularly given the fact that IFRSs would be used worldwide
and English in different countries is influenced by local culture. Therefore, a
term such as ‘may be accounted for in the following manner’ may be
interpreted in India as providing an alternative, though that may not be the
intention of the standard-setters. So also terms such as near term, current
period, short term, foreseeable future, long term, etc. or probable terms such
as probable of recovery, possible that it would be recovered, likely that it
would be recovered, highly unlikely that it would not be recovered, certain that
it would be recovered, etc. can create confusion. Firstly, these terms should be
reduced to a few standard terms and they should be used consistently across the
standards. Also, it would be more preferable to put some mathematical threshold
to these terms so that when it is being said that it is probable of recovery, it
should be known whether a 51%, 75% or 95% chance of recovery is applicable. In
India, we have already struggled with these terms, a prime example being the
requirement of virtual certainty with regards to recognition of deferred tax
assets in situations of unabsorbed losses and unabsorbed depreciation. Quite
clearly there is a lot that can be done in this area to clear the clutter.

Another debate is whether standards should be principle-based
or rule-based. It may be noted that though US GAAP is called rule-based
standards, it has a number of principles which are not translated
into detailed rules. So also though IFRS are principle-based, standards on
financial instruments almost read like a detailed rule book. In my view, the
whole argument of whether standards should be rule-based or principle-based is
futile. What we need is to hit that sweet spot where standards can be understood
easily and consistently.

Easier said than done, but with some hard work this can be achieved. Take for example, the accounting of multiple element contracts. Consider an example, where along with sale of software licence, post-contract customer support (PCS) will be provided over the next 6 months to a customer under a single contract. There are many accounting possibilities in this case. If there is price evidence for PCS, the price for software licence could be derived. This is known as the residual method. Alternatively, if there is price evidence for the software licence, the price for the PCS could be derived. This is known as the reverse residual method. Alternatively, the price for both elements may be known, and consequently the over-all discount on the contract may be allocated to the two elements, based on their relative fair values. A fourth possibility is the determination of revenue for the two elements by adding a uniform margin on their respective cost. The fifth possibility would be to keep the margin on the two elements different, to reflect their relative value and pricing in the market place. As can be seen, IFRS lends itself to multiple interpretations. Under US CAAP, the only method that is permitted is the residual method. Therefore under US CAAP, if there is no vendor-specific objective evidence (VSOE) of the undelivered element (in this case the PCS), no revenue can be recognised on the sale of licence. In such circumstances, the entire licence fee revenue is recognised ratably over the period during which the PCS is to be provided, rather than on delivery of the licence. As can be seen from the above example, US CAAP is very harsh and extensively rules-driven in this area. IFRS, takes the other extreme, is nebulous and lends itself to multiple interpretations. Quite clearly, this is an example where the sweet spot can be found and a common ground found between the two extreme approaches. US CAAP’s rule-based approach is founded by the fear that there would be abuse of standards if they are not fairly detailed. However, experience suggests otherwise – those who want to abuse the standards, would abuse them irrespective of whether those are based on principles or rules. Besides in many cases it is easier to abuse rules, by structuring the transaction in a desired manner. This is clearly seen in the area of leases, where lessees structure deals to escape finance lease classification. Another area which needs serious attention is the availability of too many accounting choices under IFRS. For example, fixed assets, intangibles, investment properties can be accounted using either the fair value model or cost model, actuarial differences in the case of employee benefits can be accounted for in a number of ways. Similarly choices are available in the case of government grants, impairment, financial instruments, etc. Too many choices result in inconsistency, lack of comparability and put to question the ability of standard-setters to make up their mind on the appropriate basis of accounting. Accounting is an art, not a pure science, and it should remain that way. Therefore, what is being suggested is not the elimination of judgment in the application of the standards. Nor is it being suggested that standards should be reading like rule books with too many bright line tests. What is being suggested is the use of appropriate and standard terminologies that should be used consistently, the removal of too many accounting choices, and principles that are not only easily understood, but tell you how the accounting should be done.

Adios to the Abyss.

GAPs in GAAP — IFRS Convergence Roadmap

Accounting standards

There are numerous matters
on the IFRS convergence roadmap that still remain to be effected upon or need
clarification. More importantly, the standards are not yet notified under the
Companies Act. So no one knows what the final standards will actually look like.
Nor has the requisite amendment to the Companies Act been made, to amend the
relevant provisions that are in conflict with IFRS, such as S. 78, S. 391, S.
394, Schedule VI, Schedule XIV, etc. In this article, we take a look at some of
the issues relating to applicability of the roadmap itself.

The Ministry of Corporate
Affairs (MCA) roadmap set out is as follows.

The first set of Accounting
Standards (i.e., converged accounting standards) will be applied to specified
class of companies in phases :

(a) Phase-I :

The following categories of
companies will convert their opening balance sheets as at 1st April, 2011, if
the financial year commences on or after 1st April, 2011 in compliance with the
notified accounting standards which are convergent with IFRS. These companies
are :

(a) Companies which are
part of NSE — Nifty 50

(b) Companies which are
part of BSE — Sensex 30

(c) Companies whose shares
or other securities are listed on stock exchanges outside India

(d) Companies, whether
listed or not, which have a net worth in excess of Rs.1,000 crores.

(b) Phase-II :

The companies, whether
listed or not, having a net worth exceeding Rs.500 crores, but not exceeding
Rs.1,000 crores will convert their opening balance sheet as at 1st April, 2013,
if the financial year commences on or after 1st April, 2013 in compliance with
the notified accounting standards which are convergent with IFRS.

(c) Phase-III :

Listed companies which have
a net worth of Rs.500 crores or less will convert their opening balance sheet as
at 1st April, 2014, if the financial year commences on or after 1st April, 2014,
whichever is later, in compliance with the notified accounting standards which
are convergent with IFRS.

In a subsequent
clarification from the MCA it was clarified that the date for determination of
the criteria is the balance sheet at 31st March, 2009 or the first balance sheet
prepared thereafter when the accounting year ends on another date. The
clarification has resolved some questions, but unfortunately has raised many
other questions.

We take a look at some
unanswered questions.

A company gets listed at 1st
April, 2009. 31st March, 2009 it had a networth of Rs.450 crores. At 31st March,
2010 it has a networth of Rs.550 crores which is likely to grow substantially in
following years. How would such a company comply with IFRS ?

Technically, based on MCA
clarification, such a company never applies IFRS since at 31st March, 2009 it
was unlisted and had a networth of less than Rs.500 crores. However this
conclusion seems counterintuitive. In the author’s view, the 31st March, 2009
date should be seen as a dynamic date rather than a static one. Since at 31st
March, 2010, the company was listed and had a networth of greater than Rs.500
crores, in the author’s view, it should be included in phase II of IFRS
implementation.

A listed company has a
networth of Rs.990 crores and Rs.1020 crores at 31st March, 2009 and 31st March,
2010, respectively. Should such a company be included in phase I or II of IFRS
implementation ?

For reasons mentioned above,
the 31st March, 2009 should not be seen as a static, but as a dynamic date. On
that basis the company should be included in phase I of IFRS implementation, as
it has a networth of greater than Rs.1000 crores at 31st March, 2010.

A company with a small
networth of Rs.200 crores, has listed its FCCB on a foreign exchange. Other than
that, the company’s securities are neither listed in India nor abroad. On 1st
April, 2009 the company delists its FCCB. Assume that the company’s networth
will not grow significantly in the future. Should such a company be included in
phase I of IFRS implementation ?

If the testing date of 31st
March, 2009 is seen as static, then the company is included in phase I of IFRS
implementation. However, if the testing date of 31st March, 2009 is seen as
dynamic, then the company is not covered in any of the phases of IFRS
implementation. More importantly it would be counterintuitive to include such
companies for IFRS implementation, as they are neither significant, nor listed
in India or abroad subsequent to the testing date of 31st March, 2009.

It is important that the MCA
provides answers to the above questions to facilitate smooth transition to IFRS.
In the absence of any clarification forthcoming from the MCA, companies are
advised to apply a ‘better safe than sorry’ policy and interpret the
requirements of the roadmap conservatively. A point to be noted is that the
roadmap allows earlier adoption of IFRS voluntarily. Where companies are
reluctant to do so, they should seek a conclusive response from MCA in all
borderline cases discussed above before taking any position on this matter.

levitra

GAPs in GAAP – Accounting for joint ventures Proportionate consolidation v. equity method

Accounting Standards

Under Indian GAAP (AS-27 Financial Reporting of Interests
in Joint Ventures
), an interest in a joint venture (jointly controlled
entity — JCE) is accounted for using the proportionate consolidation method.
Under this method the venturers report their respective proportion of the JCE’s
assets, liabilities, income and expenses in its consolidated financial
statements.


Under IFRS, IAS-31 requires the application of proportionate
consolidation method for joint ventures but also allows the application of
equity method as an alternative method. Under the equity method an interest in a
JCE is initially recorded at cost and adjusted thereafter for the
post-acquisition change in the venturer’s share of net assets of the JCE. The
profit or loss of the venturer includes the venturer’s share of the profit or
loss of the JCE.

The International Accounting Standards Board (IASB) issued an
Exposure Draft (ED) 9 Joint Arrangements which is intended to replace
current IAS-31. Unlike IAS-31, the ED proposes that a joint venture shall be
accounted using the equity method only. In other words, proportionate
consolidation method which is the preferred method under current IAS-31 will no
longer be available and the alternative method, i.e., equity method in
current IAS-31 becomes the only method to be followed.

The IASB is of the view that the removal of options from IFRS
will reduce the possibility of similar transactions being accounted for in
different ways. Further, the IASB believes that the proportionate consolidation
method has certain technical flaws and is not consistent with the Framework
for the Preparation and Presentation of Financial Statements
. When a party
to an arrangement has joint control of an entity, it shares control of the
activities of the entity. It does not, however, control each asset, nor does it
have a present obligation for each liability of the JCE. Rather, each party has
control over its investment in the entity. If the party uses proportionate
consolidation to account for its interest in a JCE, it recognises as assets and
liabilities a proportion of items that it does not control or for which it has
no obligation. These supposed assets and liabilities do not meet the definition
of assets and liabilities in the Framework.

A number of respondents to the ED have questioned the IASB’s
decision to require only equity method for joint ventures. At the time of
issuance of current IAS-31, the same Framework was applicable. At that
time, the IASB has clearly recognised that proportionate consolidation better
reflects the substance and economic reality of a venturer’s interest in a JCE.
Against this background, the ED does not offer any compelling arguments for
removal of proportionate consolidation method.

While the IASB has indicated that proportionate consolidation
has technical flaws and is not consistent with the Framework, it does not
explain as to why the equity method is considered more appropriate to account
for interests in a JCE ? How does the application of the equity method enhance
the faithful representation of joint ventures in the financial statements of the
venturer ? Further, the removal of proportionate consolidation will lead to the
same accounting treatment for ‘joint control’ and ‘significant influence,’ which
is inappropriate.

Significant impact on Indian entities :

In India, a number of entities in sectors such as real
estate, infrastructure development, oil and gas, etc. carry out significant
activities through joint ventures. For example, KSK Power or GMR Infrastructure
carry out significant activities through joint ventures. If such entities need
to apply equity method to their interests in joint ventures, it is possible that
their financial statements will not reflect any significant economic activity.
If equity accounting is to be used, the infrastructure holding company will not
be able to present proportionately the activities and revenues of its various
joint ventures. This may have several consequential implications on matters such
as borrowing capacity, satisfaction of debt covenants, performance evaluation of
key executives, key ratios, explaining performance to investors and analysts,
etc. In certain cases, these entities may even have to reconsider their overall
business strategy and significant contracts.

IASB’s view is that the enhanced disclosure requirements of
the proposed IFRS would provide better information about the assets and
liabilities of a joint venture than is provided by using proportionate
consolidation. The exposure draft proposes the disclosure of summarised
financial information for all individually material joint ventures to help meet
the needs of users of financial statements. In the author’s view, this line of
argument is inappropriate and disclosures cannot justify equity accounting of
joint venture. Besides in many cases, disclosures on their own may not provide
any solution, for example, in the case of project bidding where qualification
requirements are linked to the revenues recorded in the financial statements of
the bidding entity.

As IFRS would eventually apply to Indian entities, it is high
time that Indian companies and local standard-setters started paying more
attention to IFRS exposure drafts. Companies that would be significantly
impacted should make suitable representations to the IASB along with the local
standard-setters.

levitra

Gaps in GAAP – Multiple Element Contract

Accounting Standards

Recently the ICAI issued an Exposure Draft of Monograph on
‘Revenue Recognition for Arrangements with Multiple Deliverables’ inviting
comments. The author is pleased to respond to the Exposure Draft.


Overall, the author does not agree with the issuance of the
proposed Monograph for the following summary reasons :

    1. After having made a public announcement of convergence with International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS) effective April 1, 2011, the Institute of Chartered Accountants of India (ICAI) or any of its committees should not take any action which may go against the spirit of the said announcement.

    2. As hereinafter discussed, certain requirements of the Monograph may not be in compliance with IFRS.



IAS 18 contains guidance with regard to multiple element
contracts, which provides that ‘Recognition criteria are usually applied
separately to each transaction. However, in certain circumstances, it is
necessary to apply the recognition criteria to the separately identifiable
components of a single transaction in order to reflect the substance of the
transaction. For example, when the selling price of a product includes an
identifiable amount for subsequent servicing, that amount is deferred and
recognised as revenue over the period during which the service is performed.’
International Financial Reporting Interpretations Committee (IFRIC), at its
November 2006 meeting, has considered that the multiple element issue was wide
and complicated, needing a full scope debate and amendment of IAS 18, rather
than an interpretation, and therefore decided not to take this item onto its
agenda. Therefore, issuance of the proposed Monograph in India is not
recommended since it may conflict with the outcome of the said project.

The Monograph is an adaptation of ‘EITF 00-21 : Revenue
Arrangements with Multiple Deliverables’
under US GAAP. Since US GAAP
follows rule-based approach as compared to principle-based approach under IFRS,
application of the Monograph based on US GAAP requirements will significantly
reduce scope of judgment by the preparers and limit flexibility available under
IFRS. In addition, some of these requirements may be contrary to IFRS. The
following are a few examples in this regard :


(i) As per the Monograph, if there is objective and reliable evidence of fair value, i.e., Specific Objective Evidence (SOE) for all units of accounting in an arrangement, the arrangement consideration should be allocated to the separate units of accounting based on their relative fair values (the relative fair value method). In cases, where there is objective reliable evidence for undelivered elements only, then the residual method is used to allocate the arrangement consideration.

This implies that if there is no objective evidence of fair value, for either delivered or undelivered element, then no revenue can be recognised until all elements are delivered. Take for instance, a company selling version V1 of a product, plus an entitlement to receive updated version V2, due to be released in the next one year. As there is no SOE of fair value of V2, since it has not been sold separately, as it has not yet been released, under the Monograph, sales cannot be recognised on despatch of V1.

Paragraph 13 of IAS 18 and paragraph 11 of the Appendix to IAS 18 provide guidance on the accounting treatment of multiple elements under IFRS. Paragraph 13 states that “in certain circumstances, it is necessary to apply the recognition criteria to the separately identifiable components of a single transaction in order to reflect the substance of the transaction”. As per paragraph 11 of the Appendix to IAS 18, “when the selling price includes an identifiable amount for subsequent servicing, that amount is deferred and recognised as revenue over the period during which the service is performed. The amount deferred is that which will cover the expected costs of the services under the agreement, together with a reasonable profit on those services”.

While IAS 18 does not provide any specific guidance on how that allocation should be determined, it does not require SOE of fair values; rather, cost of services plus reasonable profit may be an indicator of fair value. An entity may also estimate fair value based on a statistical approach or market practice. We believe that in cases where revenue recognition has been deferred under the Monograph due to a lack of SOE of fair value, it would be unreasonable to conclude that no fair value can be established under IFRS, just because SOE of fair value is not available.

(ii) As it is evident from (i) above, the Monograph gives precedence to the relative fair value method over the residual method; whereas there is no such preference under IFRS. As part of issuance of IFRIC 13, IFRIC has examined this issue and noted that IAS 18 does not specify which of these methods should be applied, or in what circumstances. The IFRIC decided that the interpretation should not be more prescriptive than IAS 18(refer Basis for Conclusions paragraph BC 14 to IFRIC 13). Under IFRS, therefore either method or other methods such as cost methods or management estimates would be acceptable.

(iii) The Monograph requires that under the residual method, the amount of consideration allocated to the delivered item(s) equals the total arrangement consideration less the aggregate fair value of the undelivered item(s). The residual method therefore has the effect of allocating all discounts to the delivered element, rather than apportioning the discount among all elements. For example, a company sells one product for INR 10 million with one year’s post-sale services (PSS) and a renewal rate of PSS has been fixed at INR 2 million (20%) at the end of the first year (giving a fair value of INR 2 million for the PSS element). Under the residual method, the company will be able to recognise INR 8 million when the licence is delivered (total contract price of 10 million less 2 million being fair value of the undelivered element).

Under IFRS,while the above may be an acceptable method of recognising revenue on delivered element; one could question the allocation of entire discount to the delivered element. Under IFRS one may allocate the discount to both the delivered and undelivered element, for example, in proportion of the fair value of the undelivered elements and of the residual amount determined for the delivered element. In the example above, this would have the consequence of allocating the discount both on the delivered licence element and on the undelivered PSS element, for example, 84% of it allocated to the delivered licence element and 16% allocated to the PSS. Thus, applying the residual method and then apportioning the discount among delivered and undelivered elements would result in recognition of INR 8.4 million of revenue on delivery of the product software, whereas the residual method alone would restrict the amount of revenue recognised upon delivery of the licence to INR 8 million.

For the above reasons, the author does not believe that the Research Committee should pursue this Monograph till the time further guidance is provided by the IASB. Any such action by the Committee may put a question mark over ICAI’s commitment to converge with IFRS.

GAPs in GAAP – Accounting of Treasury Shares

Accounting standards

Companies may have invested
in their own shares for a number of reasons, for example, treasury shares are
created at the time of mergers and acquisitions of a group company or any other
company. When a company sells its own shares, the shares are transferred from
one set of owners to another set of owners. Under International Financial
Reporting Standards (IFRS), no gain or loss is recognised on the acquisition or
sale of treasury shares, because they are considered as fresh capital issuances
leading to an increase or decrease in share capital rather than an income or an
expense. The acquisition or subsequent resale by an entity of its own equity
instruments represents a transfer between those holders of equity instruments
who have given up their equity interest and those who continue to hold an equity
instrument and hence no gain or loss is recognised.

IAS 32, Financial
Instruments
: Presentation sets out the requirements very clearly in paragraphs 33 and 34.


33 If an entity
reacquires its own equity instruments, those instruments (‘treasury shares’)
shall be deducted from equity. No gain or loss shall be recognised in profit
or loss on the purchase, sale, issue or cancellation of an entity’s own
equity instruments. Such treasury shares may be acquired and held by the
entity or by other members of the consolidated group. Consideration paid or
received shall be recognised directly in equity.

34 The amount of
treasury shares held is disclosed separately either in the statement of
financial position or in the notes, in accordance with IAS 1 Presentation
of Financial Statements
. An entity provides disclosure in accordance
with IAS 24 Related Party Disclosures if the entity reacquires its
own equity instruments from related parties.


However, under current
Indian accounting standards, in the absence of any specific guidance, there are
disparate practices, though it is common to find companies recognising profit on
sale of treasury shares. This is acceptable under current Indian accounting
standards. However, as already mentioned, the same would not be acceptable under
IFRS. This would provide companies with an accounting arbitrage prior to their
IFRS transition date. For example, a company may sell the treasury shares prior
to the IFRS transition date and thereby recognise gains under Indian GAAP. If
the company sells these shares after adoption of IFRS, it cannot recognise any
gain/loss. As IFRS is being adopted in phases, the accounting arbitrage will
continue for entities that adopt IFRS in later phases or are not required to
apply IFRS.

It may be noted that in
accordance with the directives of SEBI, the stock exchange listing agreements
were amended to require all listed companies to comply with accounting standards
in the case of any merger, amalgamation or restructuring u/s.391 and u/s.394,
and that this would be evidenced by a certificate from the auditors of the
company. Consequently, this had the effect of pre-empting the rights of the High
Court in determining the accounting treatment u/s.391 and u/s. 394. If such a
scheme requires gain/loss to be recognised on sale of treasury shares, then the
auditors will not be able to qualify the certificate with regards to compliance
with accounting standards.

The absence of a standard in India with
regards to accounting of treasury shares is a gap that will be filled
when IFRS kicks in.

levitra